Hewlett-Packard 8530A Receiver Operating and Programming Manual

ns
o
i
t
Us
a
t
c
g
i
t
a
t
s
on
ve
n
C
I
n
n
o
and
Programming
Manual
tio
a
SilicOperating
m
r
o
f
In8530A
r
i
a
HP
Receiver
m
p
o
c
3
Re
.
s
9
n
6
tio
5-3
a
5
g
i
9
t
s
0
ve
92
n
i
n
o
c
i
sil
.
w
w
w
ABCDE
HP Part No. 8530-90010
Printed in USA February 1994
Edition 2
Errata
Title & Document Type: 8530A Receiver Operating and Programming Manual
Manual Part Number: 08530-90010
Revision Date: February 1, 1994
HP References in this Manual
This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that HewlettPackard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis
businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this
manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX.
For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
About this Manual
We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your
product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete
or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better
copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.
Support for Your Product
Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available
product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website:
www.tm.agilent.com
Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide
you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration
if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.
Legal Information
Legal notices are posted in the beginning of the HP 8530A User's Guide.
c Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company. All rights reserved.
Printing History
New editions of this manual will incorporate all material updated since the previous editions.
The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The printing date
changes when a new edition is printed. (Minor corrections and updates which are incorporated
at reprint do not cause the date to change.) The manual part number changes when extensive
technical changes are incorporated.
The following versions of this manual have been produced:
Edition
Date
Firmware
Revision
Edition 1 June 1992 A.01.40
Edition 2 October 1993 A.01.60
Manual Applicability
This manual applies to HP 8530A Receivers having an HP 85102R IF detector with serial
number prex 3237A or higher, running rmware revision A.01.60.
iii
Safety Considerations
General
This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety
markings and instructions before operation. This product has been designed and tested in
accordance with international standards.
L
MK
Safety Symbols
Instruction manual symbol: the product will be marked with this symbol when
it is necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual for warnings or
cautions.
Indicates hazardous voltages.
Indicates earth (ground) terminal.
Warning
The WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure,
practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
could result in personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution
The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to an operating
procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered
to, could result in damage to the product or loss of important data. Do not
proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.
Safety Earth Ground
This is a Safety Class I product (provided with a protective earthing terminal). An
uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the
product input wiring terminals, power, cord, or supplied power cord set. Whenever it is likely
that the protection has been impaired, the product must be made inoperative and secured
against any unintended operation.
Before Applying Power
Verify that the product is congured to match the available main power source as described in
the input power conguration instructions provided in this manual.
If this product is to be powered by an autotransformer, make sure the common terminal is
connected to the neutral (grounded) side of the AC power supply.
iv
Servicing
Any servicing, adjustment, maintenance, or repair of this product must be performed by
qualied personnel.
Capacitors inside this product could still be charged even when disconnected from their power
source.
To avoid a re hazard, only fuses with the required current rating and of the specied type
(normal blow, time delay, etc.) are to be used for replacement.
v
Typeface Conventions
Bold
Italics
Computer
Front Panel Keys5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Soft Keys
vi
Bold type is used to introduce a new term. Terms that are highlighted
in this way are dened in the glossary.
Italic type is used for emphasis, and for the titles of manuals and other
publications. It is also used when describing a computer variable. For
example: \Type: LOAD BIN lename 4Return5"
Computer type is used to depict on-screen prompts and messages.
Front panel keys are shown in enclosed boxes. Numbers you must
enter into the data keypad are shown in normal print, they are not
enclosed in boxes.
Softkeys are the keys on the right-hand side of the display. The
function of these keys changes depending on the displayed menu.
Warranty
Certication
Hewlett-Packard Company certies that this product met its published specications at the
time of shipment from the factory. Hewlett-Packard further certies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST, formerly NBS), to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility,
and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of one year from date of delivery. During the warranty period,
Hewlett-Packard Company will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to
be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by
HP. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the
product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products
returned to HP from another country.
HP warrants that its software and rmware designated by HP for use with an instrument will
execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument. HP does not
warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or rmware will be uninterrupted or
error free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate
maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modication or
misuse, operation outside of the environmental specications for the product, or improper site
preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER
LEGAL THEORY.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for
Hewlett-Packard products. For any assistance, contact your nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and
Service Oce.
vii
Contents
1. General Information
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating and Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design Background of the HP 8530A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Measurement Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Input Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure Parameter 1, 2, 3 or 4 in Any Combination . . . . . . .
Save/Recall Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure Performance Relative to the Peak of the Main Lobe . . .
Remote Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Presentation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Measurements Can be Shown Simultaneously . . . . .
Trace Memory and Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markers Display Precise Values for Any Point on Display Traces
External Video Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Network Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/Output Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing and Plotting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built In Disc Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How the HP 8530A Receiver Diers from Similar Products . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 005 - Positioner Encoder Compatibility . . . . . . . . . .
Option 010 - Time Domain Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 011 - Add HP 8510C Firmware Operating System . . . . .
Option 908 - Rack Mount Kit (for instruments without handles) . .
Option 913 - Rack Mount Kit (for instruments with handles) . . .
Option 910 - Additional Manual Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option W31 - Extended Service (On-Site, where Available) . . . .
Equipment Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Extenders (HP 37204A) and Related Cables . . . . . . . .
Standard Coax HP-IB Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 013 Optical Fiber HP-IB Extender . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85043A System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-12
Contents-1
Connector Savers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Cleaning Supplies . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Up Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature, Humidity, Altitude, RFI . . . . . .
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . .
Size and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowable HP-IB Cable Lengths . . . . . . . . .
Allowable System Bus Cable Lengths . . . . .
Compatible Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible LO Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8350 Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8360 Family Sources . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast measurement speed and Quick Step mode
Compatible RF Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast Measurement Speeds and Quick Step Mode .
Compatible Frequency Converters . . . . . . . .
HP 85310A Distributed Frequency Converter. . .
HP x85325A Millimeter Wave Subsystem . . . .
HP 8511A/B Frequency Converter (Test Set) . . .
Compatible Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible External Monitors . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-12
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-19
2. System Overview
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of HP 8530A Internal Processes . . .
Analog Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Signal Process Stages . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Data Process Stages . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Main Microprocessor . . . . . . . .
Internal Data Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raw Data Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Operations . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrected Data Array . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format and Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatted Data Array . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings . . . . . .
The Added Benet of the SAVE/RECALL feature
Factory Preset State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDWARE STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
Contents-2
3. Front and Rear Panel
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Display Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Annotation Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel/Parameter Identication Area . . . . . .
Stimulus Values Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Messages Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Character Special Display Annotations . . . .
Softkey Menu and Marker List Display Area . . . .
Using Softkey Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Tell when a Function is Selected . . . . .
Mutually-Exclusive functions . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Softkey Protocol and Details . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . .
ENTRY Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Values Using the Numeric Keypad . . . .
Other Keys in the Entry Block . . . . . . . . . .
MENUS Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTRUMENT STATE Block . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUXILIARY MENUS Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUREMENT RESTART Key . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Mode/Diagnostic Indicator . . . . . . . . . .
Built-In Disc Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recessed TEST button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Box Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-232 #1 and RS-232 #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXTERNAL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM INTERCONNECT (System Bus Connector) .
HP-IB Connector (HP-IB Bus) . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Voltage Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Voltage Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom Box Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX1, AUX2, RECEIVER READY BNCs . . . . . .
ENCODER INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . .
EVENT TRIGGER BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST SET INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . .
SWEEP IN 0-10V BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L.O. PHASELOCK OUT BNC . . . . . . . . . . .
STOP SWP BNC (Stop Sweep) . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGGER IN BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 MHz IN BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 MHz OUT BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PULSE OUT (OPT 008) BNC . . . . . . . . . . .
ANALOG 610V BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Voltage Selector (Bottom Box) . . . . . . . .
Line Voltage Fuse (Bottom Box) . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
Contents-3
4. Active Channel Block
Introduction . . . . . . . . . .
The Two Channels . . . . . . .
Independent Channel Settings
Internal Data Flow . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
5. Menus Block
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Pertaining to All Calibration Types . . . . . . .
What is Calibration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Same Equipment Setup in the Measurement . . . .
Settings You Can Change after Performing a Calibration . .
Setting Changes that Require Special Consideration . . . .
Changing Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Stimulus Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings that should not be changed . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Dierent Frequency Range . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Greater Number of Points . . . . . . . . . .
Using Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you are using averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specic Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain and Frequency Domain Calibrations . . . . .
Using a Frequency Domain Calibration in Angle Domain. .
Standard Gain Antenna Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing an Antenna Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Note On Antenna Measurements . . . . . . . .
Things to Try . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Calibration Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Information about Gating During the Calibration .
RCS Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Analyzer Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is Network Analyzer Calibration? . . . . . . . . . .
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a Cal Kit Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Network Analyzer Calibration . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Correction Now Goes ON . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response and Isolation Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response & Isolation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Correction Now Goes ON . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-1
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-11
5-11
5-11
5-15
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-24
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
Contents-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Standards Required for a 1-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a 1-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Correction Now Goes ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary Calibration Subjects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing and Loading Calibration Data (to/from disc) . . . . . . . . . .
Storing the Cal Set to Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Single Cal Set to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing an Existing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Multiple Cal Sets to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Cal Sets from Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a File Containing a Single Cal Set . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a File Containing Multiple Cal Sets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning ON an Existing Cal Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting and Resuming a Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper Connector Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles and Care of Calibration Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Standards Require Careful Handling . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper Inspection, Cleaning, and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quality of the Standards Aects Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Models Dier Depending on Connector Type . . . . . . .
Specications, Modifying a Cal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying Network Analyzer Calibration Kit Denitions . . . . . . . .
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduce Number of Points After Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects in Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects in Ramp Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dening a Frequency Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create and Save the Frequency Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects in Ramp Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Trim Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Sweep Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Supplied Cal Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Antenna Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the Number of Frequency Points to Dene . . . . . . . . .
Covering a Wide Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determine Required Stimulus Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Choosing the Number of Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Frequency Increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining Gain Values at Each Frequency Increment (Graph Format)
If Using Data in Table Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Even Frequency Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required ASCII File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In-Depth Description of a Cal Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Cal Denition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Cal Denition into the HP 8530A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Cal Denition with Multiple Antenna Denitions . . . . .
Details on the Supplied Antenna Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-36
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-39
5-39
5-40
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-46
5-46
5-46
5-46
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-52
5-53
5-54
Contents-5
Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain (Time Band Pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Time and Specify Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4DISPLAY5 Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying More than One Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing CRT Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Background Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Display Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Modify Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Tell if a Monitor will be Compatible . . . . . . . . . .
Installing an External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors that Use Separate Horizontal and Vertical Sync . . . .
HP 8530A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors that Use One Sync Connector . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors with No Sync Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitors that Support All Sync Types . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When external video conguration settings change . . . . . .
Using Trace Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Trace in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Memory Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings that can, and cannot be changed . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Data and Memory at the Same Time . . . . . . .
Settings that can, and cannot be changed . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Default Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volatile and non-volatile trace memories . . . . . . . . .
Operational life of non-volatile memory . . . . . . . . . .
Using Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Default Trace Math Function . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Trace Math Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparing Channel 1 Data with Channel 2 Data . . . . . . . .
Measurement Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Standard Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select the Active Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuous and Discrete Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker List Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of the Default Mode (\Four Param 1 Marker" mode) .
Four Param 1 Marker Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Param 5 Marker Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker List On/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-57
5-57
5-58
5-58
5-58
5-58
5-59
5-60
5-61
5-61
5-62
5-63
5-63
5-63
5-64
5-64
5-64
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-66
5-66
5-66
5-67
5-67
5-67
5-67
5-68
5-68
5-68
5-68
5-69
5-69
5-70
5-70
5-71
5-71
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-74
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-76
5-76
5-77
5-77
Delta Mode Markers . . . . . . . .
Marker Search Modes . . . . . . .
Search Right and Search Left . . .
1 Mode Operation . . . . . . . .
Example of Delta Marker Use . . . .
Beamwidth and Bandwidth Functions
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
5-81
5-83
6. Stimulus Functions
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to Stimulus Functions . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Measurement Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Measurement Frequency . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Increment Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Sweep Mode (single or swept angle) . . . . .
HP 85370A Position Encoder Operation . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Encoder Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single and Dual Synchro . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting single and dual synchro mode for any axis
Angle Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axis Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boresight Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oset Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details about Save Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Osets are axis independent . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding incremental osets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder Settings and Save/Recall Registers . . . . .
Details about Save Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Osets are axis-independent . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding incremental osets . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using oset functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Control . . . . . . . .
Setting Frequency Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When to Use START/STOP versus CENTER/SPAN . .
Selecting Frequencies Using Markers . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Number of Points to Measure . . . . . .
Source Sweep Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Ramp, Step, and Single Point Stimulus Values
Speed of Ramp, and Step Modes (in HP 8511 systems)
Frequency List Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the First Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicate Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency List Save and Recall . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting All Segments or a Single Segment . . . . .
Exit Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-12
6-13
6-13
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-15
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-16
6-17
6-17
6-17
6-18
Contents-7
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distortion Caused by Excessively-Fast Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example: Eects of Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sweep Execution, Hold/Single/Number of Groups/Continual . . . . . . . . .
Why use Number of Groups? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupled/Uncoupled Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to tell if a function is coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Stimulus Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Source Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Power Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Three Triggering Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External and HP-IB Triggering Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How these Functions Work when One Parameter is Being Measured . . . .
How these Functions Work when Multiple Parameters are Being Measured
EXAMPLE 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Parameter Functions
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Accuracy of Service Parameter Measurements .
Redening Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Descriptions of Each Denition Type . . . . . . . . .
Redene Basic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Display Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-18
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-21
6-22
6-22
6-23
6-23
6-24
6-24
6-25
6-25
6-25
6-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-5
8. Format Functions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Format Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Menu Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Information Regarding Polar Format . . . . .
Polar in the Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polar in Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartesian Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polar Log Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartesian Log Format, Two Parameter Overlay . . . . . .
Log Format, Dual Channel Split . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency and Time Domain Data Shown Simultaneously
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
9. Response Functions
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Display Scale and Reference . . . . . . . .
Setting Scale and Reference Values Automatically . .
Changing Display Scale Manually . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Position of the Reference Line Manually
Changing the Value of the Reference Line Manually .
The Eect of Factory Preset on Display Settings . . .
Response Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normalizing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnitude Slope and Magnitude Oset . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-4
Contents-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Phase Oset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 dB and 60 dB Pattern . . . . . . . . .
Trace Averaging and Smoothing . . . . .
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Averaging details . . . . . . . . . .
Notication when averaging is nished
Averaging factor recommendations . .
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Delay . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Electrical Delay . . . . . . . . .
Delay Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coaxial Delay . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveguide Delay . . . . . . . . . .
Table Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Velocity Factor . . . . . . . . .
Auto Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-8
10. Entry Block Controls
Changing Values Using the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Keys in the Entry Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10-2
11. Instrument State Block
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . .
LOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCAL Softkey Menus . . . . .
SAVE and RECALL . . . . . . .
Storing Instrument States to Disc
USER PRESET . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-1
11-2
11-2
11-4
11-4
11-4
12. Viewing Data
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Multiple Parameters and Channels . . . . . . . . .
How Many Parameters does the Receiver Measure? . . . .
Selecting the Number of Parameters or Channels to Display
Viewing Data from Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-1
12-2
13. Introduction to Time Domain RCS and Antenna Measurements
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Front Panel Controls in Time Domain Mode . . . . . . .
Time Domain General Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Radar Cross Section Measurements . . . . . . . .
Viewing a Time Domain RCS Measurement . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting The Time Domain RCS Response . . . . . . . . .
RCS Down-Range Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-Dened Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Digital Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Alias-Free Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Increase Alias-Free Range . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Distinguish an Aliased Response from a Real Response
Measurement Errors and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Noise Floor Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-1
13-1
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-9
13-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents-9
Eects of RCS Calibration on Time Domain Responses . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation Error Term (Range Clutter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Response Error Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Axis: Target Zone Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Axis: Clutter Removal and Reference Level Shift . . . . . . .
Target Shadowing and Target Scattering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Measurement Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverberations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Gate Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating During RCS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Gate for a Gated RCS Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Use Gating When . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Gating During Subsequent Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects of Gating on Background Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting the Time Band Pass Reection Response Horizontal Axis. . . .
Interpreting the Time Band Pass Reection Response Vertical Axis. . . . .
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Impedance Alias-Free Range and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects of 1-Port Calibration on Antenna Impedance Time Domain Responses
Eects of 1-Port Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Impedance Time Domain Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Masking in Impedance Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating in Impedance Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Antenna Transmission Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Characterization of Antenna Range Multipath . . . . . . . .
Antenna Impulse Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Transmission Alias-Free Range and Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects of Antenna Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Errors Caused by the Gating Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14. SAVE and RECALL
Saving and Recalling Instrument States
Storing Instrument States to Disc . .
USER PRESET . . . . . . . . . . .
FACTORY PRESET . . . . . . . . .
Factory Preset State . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
13-9
13-9
13-9
13-10
13-10
13-11
13-11
13-11
13-11
13-12
13-12
13-13
13-15
13-15
13-15
13-16
13-16
13-17
13-17
13-18
13-18
13-19
13-19
13-19
13-20
13-20
13-20
13-20
13-21
13-21
13-21
13-22
13-22
13-23
13-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-1
14-1
15. Disc Drive Operation
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Disc Types, Disc Storage Capacity
DOS Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII and Binary File Types . . . . . . . .
Changing between DOS and LIF Discs . . . .
Initializing Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Disc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Disc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-1
15-1
15-2
15-2
15-2
15-3
15-3
15-3
15-4
15-6
15-7
Contents-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Viewing a Directory of Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Disc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Un-deleting Disc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an External Disc Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Disc Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Unit Number and Disc Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections and Conguration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing a Hard Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide to Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sharing a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Everything . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing or Plotting Old Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CITIle Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is in a CITIle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CITIle Title Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device-Specic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Domain Information (independent variable declaration) . . . .
Type of Measurement Data (dependent variable declaration) . .
Stimulus Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CW Frequency (Angle Domain Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Type of Measurement that Created the Data . .
CITIle Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Data Lists in a Single Package . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CITIle Keyword Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530-Specic (#NA) Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530 Receiver Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Array Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CITIle Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Display Memory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data File Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data File Example 1: Frequency Domain, Step or Ramp Mode .
Data File Example 2: Frequency Domain, Frequency List Mode
Data File Example 3: Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Three-Term Cal Set File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A \DATA" Measurement Data File with Four Parameter Display On
16. Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Printers and Plotters . . . . . . . . .
Installation Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an HP-IB Printer or Plotter . . . . .
Connecting an RS-232 Printer or Plotter . . . . .
Selecting the HP-IB (System Bus) or RS-232 Ports
RS-232 Print/Plot Buers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Your Own Annotations to the Screen . . . .
Using a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-7
15-8
15-8
15-8
15-8
15-8
15-8
15-9
15-10
15-11
15-11
15-11
15-12
15-13
15-14
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-15
15-16
15-16
15-16
15-16
15-16
15-17
15-17
15-18
15-20
15-20
15-20
15-23
15-24
15-24
15-25
15-25
15-26
15-27
15-28
15-29
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-1
16-1
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-4
Contents-11
What is Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer and HP 8530A Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Laser Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Laser Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Laser Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Printer Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why it is Faster? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My printer has Built-In HP-GL, Do I still Need the Cartridge? . . . . . .
Ordering the Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer memory required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Laser Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Between a Real Plotter and an HP-GL-emulating Laser Printer
Using an HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus, or DeskJet 500 Printer . . . . . . . . .
Serial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare the Printer for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Printer Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Steps Required for the HP DeskJet 500C . . . . . . . . . .
Using an HP QuietJet, QuietJet Plus, PaintJet, or PaintJet XL Printer . . . .
Serial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB address DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare the Printer for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Printer Resolution (HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus printers) . .
Selecting Printer Resolution (HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL printers) . . .
Printing In Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an HP ThinkJet Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB address DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepare the Printer for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conguring the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Printer Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Non-HP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB address DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape and Portrait Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing One Snapshot per Page (Portrait or Landscape) . . . . . . . . .
Printing Two Snapshots per Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Tabular Measurement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-4
16-4
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-7
16-7
16-7
16-7
16-8
16-8
16-8
16-8
16-9
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-10
16-11
16-11
16-11
16-11
16-11
16-12
16-12
16-12
16-12
16-12
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-13
16-14
16-14
16-14
16-14
16-14
16-14
16-15
16-15
16-16
16-16
16-17
Changing the format of the tabular data . . . . . .
Printing Instrument Settings and System Conguration .
Using a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is Plotted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Output Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special instructions for connecting the HP 7550 . . . .
HP 7550B and 7550 Plus Plotters . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Pen Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting One Snapshot per Page . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Individual Display Components . . . . . . . .
Plotting a Selected Quadrant (four snapshots per page) .
17. Using System Functions
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls that Aect the Receiver . . . . . . . . .
Phaselock Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Step Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Calibration and Correction . . . . . . . . . .
IF Calibration Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Date/Time Clock . . . . . . . .
Security Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls that Aect I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Congure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Multiple Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Switch Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Converter Type . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Multiple Sources . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Multiple Source Menu . . . . . . . .
How to Enter the Example Conguration . . .
Now save the conguration . . . . . . . .
Millimeter Wave Mixers . . . . . . . . . . .
Uses for the SOURCE 1 and RECEIVER Formulas
SOURCE 1 Formula Use . . . . . . . . . . .
RECEIVER Formula Use . . . . . . . . . . .
Why these settings are used . . . . . . . .
Service Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Bus Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-17
16-19
16-22
16-22
16-22
16-22
16-22
16-22
16-23
16-23
16-23
16-23
16-25
16-25
16-25
16-26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-1
17-2
17-3
17-3
17-3
17-3
17-4
17-4
17-4
17-5
17-5
17-5
17-6
17-6
17-6
17-6
17-7
17-8
17-8
17-9
17-9
17-9
17-9
17-10
17-11
17-12
17-13
17-14
17-14
17-14
17-15
17-15
17-16
17-17
17-17
17-18
17-18
Contents-13
IF Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why Use Manual control . . . . . . . . . .
Why the problem occurs . . . . . . . . .
How to Use Manual IF Gain Controls Properly
Automated Measurement Issues . . . . . . .
Peek and Poke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of Peek and Poke . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-19
17-19
17-19
17-21
17-22
17-22
17-22
18. HP-IB Programming
What is in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You Can Do with Remote Programming . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Command Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Order of Programming Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric entries and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\Next Menu" commands are unnecessary . . . . . . . . .
Timing Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Computer-Controlled Measurements . . . . . . .
Setting up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connect the External Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the Measurement Using HP-IB Commands . . . . . .
Transferring Data Out of the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Data to the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Types of Data Are Available from the HP 8530A? . . .
Raw Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrected Data Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatted Data Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If in Frequency or Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . .
If in Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Always Comes from the Active Channel . . . . . . . .
Available Data Transfer Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Much Data Is Transferred? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the Computer to Transmit or Receive Data . . . .
Setting up the I/O Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The size of the preamble, size block, and data blocks . . . .
Setting Up Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Array Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the Actual Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preprocessing Form 1 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Real,Imaginary Format for Vector Math . . . . . . . .
Converting Real,Imaginary Data to Magnitude and Phase Data
Transferring Data Into the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raw, Corrected, Formatted Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form 4 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commonly-Used Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Function Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Query System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Where to Find Other Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-1
18-1
18-2
18-2
18-2
18-2
18-2
18-3
18-3
18-4
18-4
18-4
18-4
18-4
18-5
18-5
18-5
18-6
18-6
18-7
18-7
18-7
18-8
18-8
18-9
18-9
18-9
18-9
18-10
18-10
18-10
18-12
18-12
18-12
18-12
18-13
18-13
18-14
18-14
18-15
18-15
18-15
18-15
18-15
18-15
18-16
Contents-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Program Debugging Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 1: Input Syntax Familiarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 2: Active Function Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 3: Marker Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 4: Marker Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 5: Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 6: Using =MARKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 7: Trace Data Output and Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 8: FORM 1 Data Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 9: Using the Disc Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Name Prexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Your Own Messages on the Receiver Display . . . . . . . . .
Example 10: Plots Using Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 11: Trace List to Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 12: Print/Plot to Receiver System Bus (using . . . . . . . .
General Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Commands Through the Receiver Devices on the System Bus
How to send pass through commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How pass through works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass-Thru of Text to a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output to Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Display Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 13: Plot User Graphics HP-GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 14: Plot to User Display Using BASIC HP-GL . . . . . . .
Vector Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Pen Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Disc to Store the User Display . . . . . . . . .
Summary of User Graphics Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of User Display Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 15: Redene Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 16: Read and Output Caution/Tell Message . . . . . . . . .
Example 17: Read and Output Status Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Read Status Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Service Request Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 18: Output Key Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 19: HP-IB Triggered Data Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 20: Wait Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 21: Wait Not Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 22: Frequency List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 23: Using the Receiver's Learn String . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 24: Input Floating Point or ASCII Trace Data . . . . . . . .
Example 25: Table Delay Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 26: FAST (CW,AD,D) Data Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . .
Example 27: Fast IF Multiplexing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General HP-IB Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to HP-IB Universal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response to HP-IB Addressed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-16
18-17
18-17
18-18
18-18
18-20
18-20
18-21
18-21
18-21
18-21
18-21
18-22
18-22
18-22
18-23
18-23
18-23
18-23
18-23
18-24
18-25
18-25
18-25
18-25
18-26
18-26
18-27
18-27
18-27
18-27
18-28
18-28
18-28
18-29
18-29
18-30
18-30
18-30
18-30
18-30
18-31
18-31
18-32
18-32
18-32
18-32
18-32
18-33
18-33
18-33
18-35
Contents-15
19. Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance
Operator's Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintain Proper Air Flow . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Practices . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Inspect Connectors for Wear . . . . .
How to Clean Connectors . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Cleaning Supplies . . . . . . . . .
Clean the Glass Filter (and display as Required)
Cleaning the display . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degauss (Demagnetize) the Display . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-1
19-3
19-3
19-3
19-3
19-4
19-4
19-4
19-4
19-5
19-6
20. In Case of Diculty
Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Operation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver will not Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the Selected Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the System Phase Lock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IF Signal Level Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Systems Using the HP 85309A Frequency Converter . . . . . . . . .
On Systems Using the HP 8511A/B Frequency Converter . . . . . . . . .
Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO Signal Level Problems (applies to the HP 85309A only) . . . . . . . . .
LO Signal Is Too Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 85309A \LO POWER OUT OF RANGE" light is ON During Measurement
Rotary Joint Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\ABORTED ENCODER TRIGGERED SWEEP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Antenna Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Network Analyzer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\CALIBRATION RESET" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\CORRECTION MAY BE INVALID" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\ENCODER NOT FOUND" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\ENCODER OFFSET ANGLE ALREADY SAVED" . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\FREQUENCY CONVERTER IS TOO HOT!" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\IF OVERLOAD" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\NO IF FOUND" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\OPTION #005 NOT INSTALLED" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\OVERSPEED ERROR - BACKUP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\PHASE-LOCK LOST" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Problems when using Hardware Gating . . . . . . . . . . .
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\SOURCE (1 or 2) FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\SWEEP SYNC ERROR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-1
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-2
20-3
20-3
20-3
20-3
20-4
20-4
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-7
20-7
20-7
20-7
20-7
20-7
20-7
20-8
20-8
20-8
20-8
20-8
20-9
20-9
20-9
20-9
20-9
20-9
20-9
Contents-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\TEST SET IS TOO HOT!" . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\UNABLE TO RAMP THIS DUAL SOURCE SETUP" .
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\VTO FAILURE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Using the HP 8511A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Using the HP 85309A . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Locks Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Your System Uses the HP 8511A/B . . . . . . .
If Your System Uses the HP 85309A . . . . . . . .
An Instrument will not Respond to Computer Control
If the instrument operates manually . . . . . . .
If the instrument does not operate manually . . .
A System Bus Instrument will not Respond . . . . .
If the instrument operates manually . . . . . . .
If the instrument does not operate manually . . .
HP 85309A (LO/IF Unit) Problems . . . . . . . . . .
LO/IF Unit Does Not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . .
The LO POWER OUT OF RANGE Light is ON . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-11
20-12
20-12
20-12
20-12
20-12
20-12
20-13
20-13
20-13
20-14
20-14
20-14
20-14
Glossary
Index
Contents-17
Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
4-1.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
5-20.
5-21.
5-22.
5-23.
5-24.
5-25.
5-26.
5-27.
5-28.
5-29.
5-30.
5-31.
5-32.
Antenna Measurement Setup Using an HP 8511A . . . . .
Antenna Measurement Setup Using an HP 85310A . . . . .
Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplied System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 8530A Measurement Data Flow Diagram . . . . . . . .
Phase Lock Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Data Processing in Each Channel . . . . . . .
Annotation Areas for Single Parameter display mode . . . .
HP 8530A Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cal and Cal Type Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menus Associated with RCS Calibration . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions Required by Dierent Target Types . . . . . .
Calibration Setup for Response Cal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission and Reection Response Error Models . . . .
Calibration Setup for Isolation Cal . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission/Reection Response and Isolation Error Model
Calibration Setup for 1 Port Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-Port Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-Port Cal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOADS Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reduced Number of Points After Calibration . . . . . . .
Modify Cal Set, Frequency Subset Menu . . . . . . . . . .
Dening a Frequency Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Standard Gain Antenna Performance Graph . . . .
Typical Standard Gain Antenna Performance Graph . . . .
Domain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angle Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display and Display Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor with Two Sync Connectors (Separate H,V Sync) . .
Monitor with one Sync Connector (Composite Sync) . . . .
Monitor with No Sync Connectors (Sync on Green) . . . . .
Monitor Supporting All Sync Types . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Memory, Data and Memory . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Default Trace Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Default Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MARKER Key and Marker Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Markers on Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
3-2
3-5
3-5
3-12
4-1
5-7
5-19
5-22
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-32
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-42
5-43
5-44
5-48
5-50
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-56
5-57
5-59
5-62
5-63
5-64
5-65
5-66
5-68
5-69
5-71
5-73
5-74
5-33.
5-34.
5-35.
5-36.
5-37.
5-38.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
6-7.
6-8.
6-9.
6-10.
6-11.
6-12.
6-13.
6-14.
6-15.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
9-1.
9-2.
9-3.
9-4.
9-5.
11-1.
11-2.
13-1.
13-2.
13-3.
13-4.
13-5.
13-6.
13-7.
13-8.
13-9.
13-10.
13-11.
13-12.
13-13.
15-1.
16-1.
16-2.
Default Marker Data Display (Four Param 1 Marker mode) . . . . . . . . . .
Four Param 5 Marker mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker and 1 Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Mode Markers on Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Search Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Mode Marker to Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STIMULUS Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stimulus Menu (in Angle Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Encoder (option 005) Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stimulus Menu (in Frequency or Time Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of Points Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Narrow Band Responses Shown with 51 Points (left) and 401 Points (right) . .
Frequency List Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter the First Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency List, Display of Single Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eects of Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stimulus More Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom External Triggering Flowchart (one parameter) . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom External Triggering Flowchart (four parameters) . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical SERVICE 1, a1 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redene Parameter menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Function Block and Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dierences in Angle and Frequency Domain Polar Formats . . . . . . . . . .
Cartesian Log Format for a Single Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polar Log Format for a Single Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Channel Overlay Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Channel Split Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency and Time Domain Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Response Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smoothing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results of Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument State Block Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCAL Key Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical RCS Measurement Conguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Domain Response versus Time Domain Response . . . . . . . . .
Typical RCS Time Domain Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Aliased Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCS Isolation and Response Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain RCS Response Before and After Calibration . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Gate Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Eects of Gating in Time and Frequency Domains . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gate Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Frequency and Time Domain Response of an Antenna . . . . . . . .
Antenna Impedance 1-Port Error Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responses in a Typical RCS Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Menu, Data Type Select Menu, Setup Disc Menu, and Initialize Disc Menu
Dene Print Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP QuietJet and PaintJet (Family) Printer Serial Switch Settings . . . . . . .
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-79
5-80
5-81
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-9
6-11
6-11
6-14
6-15
6-17
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-23
6-25
6-27
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-5
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
9-1
9-3
9-6
9-6
9-7
11-1
11-1
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-7
13-9
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-17
13-18
13-19
13-22
15-2
16-5
16-11
Contents-19
16-3.
16-4.
16-5.
16-6.
16-7.
16-8.
16-9.
17-1.
17-2.
17-3.
17-4.
17-5.
17-6.
17-7.
17-8.
17-9.
17-10.
17-11.
17-12.
17-13.
18-1.
18-2.
18-3.
18-4.
19-1.
19-2.
19-3.
19-4.
HP QuietJet and PaintJet (Family) Printer HP-IB Switch Settings . . . . . . .
HP ThinkJet printer HP-IB Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landscape Printer Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portrait Printer Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dene List Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System/Operating Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dene Plot and Plot to Plotter Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main System Menu and Part of the Display Functions Menu . . . . . . . . .
System Phaselock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Date/Time Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Leveling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actual LO Frequency Required by a Harmonic Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Multiple Source Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source 2 Modied for 3rd Harmonic Mixer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finished Multiple Source Conguration for LO Source and 3rd Harmonic Mixers
Module Testing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finished Multiple Source Conguration for Hypothetical Module . . . . . . .
Service Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simplied Block Diagram of the HP 8530A Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gain Stages in the IF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Processing Stages in the Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pass Through Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PA Vector Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Character Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Preset State Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Preset State Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Glass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motion for Degaussing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-20
16-12
16-13
16-15
16-16
16-18
16-19
16-26
17-2
17-3
17-6
17-10
17-11
17-12
17-12
17-14
17-15
17-16
17-17
17-20
17-21
18-6
18-24
18-26
18-27
19-1
19-2
19-5
19-6
Tables
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
2-1.
2-2.
3-1.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
7-1.
10-1.
13-1.
13-2.
13-3.
13-4.
14-1.
15-1.
15-2.
15-3.
15-4.
15-5.
15-6.
15-7.
16-1.
16-2.
16-3.
16-4.
16-5.
17-1.
18-1.
HP 8530A Equipment Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Up Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required options for HP 85360 LO sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatible Sources for Fast Measurement Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Numbers for Each Parameter on Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Factory Preset Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Value Terminator Key Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper Connector Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper Connector Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper Connector Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Standard Gain Antenna Performance Table . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Denitions in the Supplied Cal Denition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Settings for Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Numbers for Each Parameter on Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard PARAMETER Denitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric Value Terminator Key Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approximate Impulse Width Formulas for Dierent Window Types (Time Domain
Waveforms). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gate Shape Characteristics Using Dierent Window Settings . . . . . . . . .
Useful Time Band Pass Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Factory Preset Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc Storage Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information You Can Store To Disc, and How it is Saved . . . . . . . . . . .
File Types and Prexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Name Prexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CITIle Keyword Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Analyzer/Receiver Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Names of Error Coecient Arrays for Dierent Calibration Types . . . . . .
Serial Printer Settings for Other Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Initialized System Parameters Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Operating Parameters Displays (rst page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Operating Parameters Displays (second page) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Pen Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1-13
1-14
1-16
1-17
1-19
2-7
2-11
3-8
5-14
5-16
5-37
5-49
5-54
5-60
5-67
5-75
7-3
10-2
13-6
13-14
13-18
13-23
14-2
15-2
15-3
15-7
15-13
15-18
15-21
15-23
16-14
16-20
16-21
16-21
16-24
17-18
18-19
Contents-21
1
General Information
Chapter Contents
This chapter describes the following:
Operating and Safety Precautions
HP 8530A Description
Design Intent of the HP 8530A
Measurement Features
Angle Domain
Frequency Domain
Time Domain
Calibration
Other Features
Input/Output Features
Printing and Plotting Features
Peripheral Instruments
Built-In Disc Drive
How the HP 8530A Diers from Similar Products
Options
Equipment Supplied
Accessories and Supplies
Specications
Environmental Characteristics
Compatible Instruments
Compatible Printers and Plotters
Compatible External Monitors
Operating and Safety Precautions
Operating
ESD (electrostatic discharge) can damage the microcircuits in the HP 8530A. Such damage
is most likely to occur as cables are connected or disconnected. To avoid ESD damage, wear
a grounding strap or ground yourself by touching any grounded instrument chassis before
touching input connectors. Do not touch the center contacts of the connectors.
Service
There are no user-serviceable parts in the HP 8530A. Service should be performed by qualied
personnel only.
General Information 1-1
General Information
HP 8530A Description
The HP 8530A is a high-performance receiver that has been designed specically for antenna
and radar cross section (RCS) measurements. The HP 8530A allows you to make angle-scan and
frequency-scan measurements of antennas, or make RCS measurements using the optional Time
Domain feature.
Very fast measurement speeds are possible with the HP 8530A. By using a computer controller,
the receiver can measure up to 5,000 data points per second. The receiver has very high
sensitivity and dynamic range. The HP 8530A provides a large amount of measurement
exibility, providing the features you need for many dierent types of measurements.
The HP 8530A must be used with a frequency down converter. The following HP down
converters are supported:
HP 8511A/B frequency converter
HP 85310A distributed frequency converter
HP 85325 millimeter wave subsystems (the HP 85325A and HP 85309A, used together, make
a complete frequency converter system).
Note
The HP 85309A is a four channel frequency converter, and is part of the
HP 85310A Distributed Frequency Converter system.
These products down-convert microwave (or millimeter-wave) signals to 20 MHz test and
reference signals that are measured by the HP 8530A. Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the basic
block diagram of typical antenna measurement systems.
Figure 1-1. Antenna Measurement Setup Using an HP 8511A
1-2 General Information
General Information
Figure 1-2. Antenna Measurement Setup Using an HP 85310A
General Information 1-3
HP 8530A Features
Measurement Features
This section discusses the capabilities of the HP 8530A.
Design Background of the HP 8530A
The HP 8530A was designed to be a dedicated antenna/RCS receiver, and its hardware and
rmware have been optimized for that use. Before the advent of the HP 8530A, many
Antenna/RCS customers had been using the receiver portion of an HP 8510 system for their
measurements. The HP 8510 had originally been designed for metrology-quality testing of
microwave components, and consisted of the \HP 8510" receiver, and a network analyzer test
set. In the network analysis market, the HP 8510 receiver provided benchmark sensitivity,
dynamic range, accuracy, and speed. Antenna/RCS customers found that these qualities made
the HP 8510 an excellent receiver for automated (computer controlled) testing of antennas and
for RCS applications.
To provide more performance for antenna and RCS users, Hewlett Packard designed the HP
8530A. This dedicated receiver is optimized for faster speeds, contains special antenna and
optional RCS features, and provides manual measurement capabilities using \Angle Domain."
Hewlett-Packard also created upgrade kits so owners of existing HP 8510A/B/C receivers could
easily upgrade to the HP 8530A.
Major Features
The major operational features of the HP 8530A are listed below:
Angle Domain
Allows you to make angle scan measurements at a single frequency. In Angle Domain mode,
the x-axis of the display is angular degrees. External triggering is used (HP-IB or TTL) in this
mode. You can measure a single angle, or a range of angles.
Figure 1-3. Angle Domain
1-4 General Information
HP 8530A Features
Frequency Domain
Allows you to measure antenna magnitude and phase performance across a band of
frequencies. Frequency Domain measurements must be made at a single angle. In Frequency
Domain mode, the x-axis of the display is frequency. Internal triggering (free run trigger mode)
is commonly used when measuring frequency, but external triggering can be used as well. You
can measure a single frequency, or choose from Ramp, Step, or Frequency List sweep modes.
Figure 1-4. Frequency Domain
Time Domain
This optional feature allows you to make RCS measurements or see the time domain response
of an antenna (time is shown on the display x-axis). One use of time domain is when measuring
multi-path range reections. Internal triggering is usually used in this mode.
Time domain data is mathematically calculated from Frequency Domain data. This is done
using the \chirp-Z" inverse Fourier transform. Therefore, the rst step in time domain
measurements is to make a measurement in the Frequency Domain.
Figure 1-5. Time Domain
General Information 1-5
HP 8530A Features
Calibration
Antenna calibration provides accurate gain and frequency response measurements by
calibrating your range against a standard gain antenna. Also, the isolation calibration feature
reduces measurement errors caused by signal crosstalk.
RCS Response and Isolation calibration is also supplied. This calibration reduces range errors
using a calibration sphere of known radar cross section. The response portion of the calibration
measures the reections of the calibration sphere. The isolation portion measures the empty
antenna chamber to characterize and compensate for clutter. Four reection standards are
supported.
A \network analyzer" calibration is also provided. This calibration is used if you want to
make network analyzer-type measurements. For example, assume you want to measure
the impedance of an antenna input (or output). You would perform the network analyzer
calibration so you could make very accurate measurements. In this example a directional
coupler is required to measure the reected signals.
Four Measurement Inputs
The receiver has four inputs for receiving signals (a1, a2, b1 and b2). You must connect a
reference signal to a1 or a2. Then, any other inputs can be used as test signal inputs. For
example, assume you connect the reference signal into a1. You could then use a2, b1, and b2 to
measure test signals. The \PARAM" keys, described below, select which inputs to ratio for your
measurement.
Selectable Input Ratios
PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, and 4PARAM 45, select a specic pair of inputs to ratio and
measure. (\PARAM" is short for \parameter.") For example, 4PARAM 15 mathematically divides
(ratios) input b1 data by a1 data. You can redene the PARAM keys so they ratio any two
inputs you desire. You can also measure a single input without ratioing. By default, the four
parameters ratio the following inputs:
b1/a1
4PARAM 15
b2/a1
4PARAM 25
4PARAM 35
a2/a1
4PARAM 45
b1/a1
Notice that the default ratio for Param 1 and Param 4 are the same. You can redene the ratios
for Param 1, 2, 3 or 4 using the softkeys under PARAMETER 4MENU5 REDEFINE PARAMETER .
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Flexible Triggering
The HP 8530A provides three ways of triggering measurements:
When you select \Free Run" the receiver does not require any triggering.
Free Run
This is useful when making frequency measurements.
External Triggering Allows you to trigger measurements using a TTL increment signal
produced by a positioner controller. This allows the receiver to take data
when the positioner is aligned with each measurement angle.
Allows a computer to trigger a measurement by issuing a GET command
HP-IB Triggering
over the HP-IB bus.
1-6 General Information
HP 8530A Features
Measure Parameter 1, 2, 3 or 4 in Any Combination
You can measure from 1 to 4 ratioed or non-ratioed parameters on any given trigger (HP-IB or
External).
Save/Recall Registers
The receiver has eight Save/Recall registers. Each can save current measurement settings for
instant recall at a later time. Register-8 is the \User Preset" register. Settings saved under
register-8 become active whenever you turn the receiver ON, or when you press 4USER PRESET5.
Measure Performance Relative to the Peak of the Main Lobe
The Normalize Trace function sets the peak of the main lobe (the data point of highest
amplitude) to 0 dB. You can then use markers to view trace magnitude values relative to this
reference point. When data is saved, printed, plotted, or transferred to a computer, magnitude
values will be relative to the peak. This feature is under the RESPONSE 4MENU5 key.
Remote Programming
The HP 8530A can be controlled remotely from any computer that can communicate using
HP-IB. All front panel features are supported, plus many functions which are only available
via HP-IB. You can query the analyzer to determine current modes of operation and current
instrument or system status.
Data Presentation Features
The HP 8530A can show measurement results on its display. It can display:
Antenna patterns
Frequency response measurements
Time domain
Radar Cross Section (RCS) frequency and time domain measurements
Return Loss or SWR
The HP 8530A allows you to print or plot measurement results.
Display Formats
You can select logarithmic or linear magnitude display formats (Cartesian or polar), or
phase display format (Cartesian only). You can display one, two, three, or four parameters
simultaneously on the screen.
Multiple Measurements Can be Shown Simultaneously
The HP 8530A allows you to view up to four parameters at once, in split or overlay
presentation. Alternatively, you can display one parameter from each of the independent
measurement channels (more on channels is explained later).
Trace Memory and Trace Math
The trace memory feature is similar to the storage feature in a storage oscilloscope. You can
store the current data trace to memory, then compare it to subsequent measurement traces.
Trace math features allow you to perform vector addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division. These operations are performed using the current data trace and the memory trace.
Each parameter has independent trace memory/math operation. In addition, trace math in
Channel 1 is independent from trace math in Channel 2.
General Information 1-7
HP 8530A Features
Markers Display Precise Values for Any Point on Display Traces
Five measurement markers give detailed information about any point on the measurement
trace. Delta markers allow you to show the dierence in amplitude, phase, angle, or time
between any two points on the trace.
External Video Monitor
The HP 8530A can display results on an external multisync monitor. Refer to \Compatible
Instruments" for details.
Optional Network Analysis
Option 011 adds high-performance vector network analysis features (HP 8510C operation).
This allows you to measure the transmission and reection properties of microwave devices in
frequency or optional time domains. Advanced calibration features provide optimum accuracy
in S-Parameter network measurements.
Input/Output Features
The HP 8530A can control other instruments, and has many input/output capabilities using
HP-IB, System Bus, RS-232, external monitor interface, and TTL rear panel connectors.
Printing and Plotting Features
The HP 8530A can output data to a wide range of HP-IB or RS-232 printers or plotters. Laser
printers are also supported.
Peripheral Instruments
The HP 8530A can control RF and LO signal sources, frequency converters, and RF switches.
Refer to \Compatible Instruments" for details.
Built In Disc Drive
The built in high-capacity disc drive allows you to save measurement data, data from memory,
instrument conguration setups, save/recall registers, calibration data, or user-created
graphics. Both DOS and LIF disc formats are supported, and both disc types are automatically
R based computers, such as IBM PCs and
recognized. DOS format is compatible with MS-DOS
compatibles. LIF format is compatible with Hewlett-Packard computers, such as the HP 9000
Series 300 workstation family. The drive accepts high-capacity 1.44 MB discs. (Disc capacity is
dierent when using LIF format.)
1-8 General Information
HP 8530A Features
How the HP 8530A Receiver Diers from Similar Products
The HP 8530A receiver is similar to the HP 8510C network analyzer. The main dierences are
these:
The HP 8530A can measure up to 5,000 points per second using a new 100,000-point data
buer.
The HP 8530A has a new domain called ANGLE DOMAIN. This is a new measurement type
that measures antenna performance with respect to angle. Actual antenna patterns are
shown on the screen, and markers read out in angular values. You can display results in
Cartesian format or show polar antenna patterns on the screen.
External triggering is very exible, allowing you to trigger on an external TTL signal, or
by HP-IB command. In addition, you can choose which parameters (input ratios) will be
measured on successive triggers. The HP 8530A has a data acquisition handshake line that
tells external hardware when the HP 8530A is ready for another trigger.
The HP 8530A can track increment triggers from the positioner controller, and take data at
exactly the right time.
The HP 8530A provides antenna (gain) and RCS calibration types.
The HP 8530A has (optional) time domain band pass mode, but not time domain low pass.
(The low pass mode requires that the measured device be able to pass signals down to DC.
This is not possible with antennas, so low pass mode is not appropriate.)
A calibration created for a specic parameter (4PARAM 15 for example) can be recalled for any
of the other parameter keys (4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or 4PARAM 45). Refer to the calibration
chapter for details.
General Information 1-9
Options, Equipment Supplied, Accessories
Options
Option 005 - Positioner Encoder Compatibility
Option 005 adds the necessary hardware so the HP 8530A will operate with the
HP 85370A Position Encoder. If the receiver does not already have a rear panel ENCODER
INTERCONNECT connector, it must be returned to the factory so the rear panel can be
changed.
Option 010 - Time Domain Operation
Adds Time Domain operation. The receiver converts data from the frequency domain to the
time domain (using inverse Fourier transform). The time domain response shows the measured
parameter value versus time. The windowing feature can modify the frequency domain data
to reduce side-lobe levels in the time domain response. You can isolate individual time domain
responses using the gating functions.
Option 011 - Add HP 8510C Firmware Operating System
Option 011 receivers can run HP 8510C rmware, and a copy of this rmware is supplied. You
can only run one operating system (OS) at a time, either HP 8530A or HP 8510C. To change
between HP 8530A and 8510C operation, you must load the appropriate operating system from
disc.
When using the receiver as an HP 8510C, refer to the supplied HP 8510C manuals for operating
information.
Option 908 - Rack Mount Kit (for instruments without handles)
This HP 8530A rack mount kit allows you to mount the receiver to a standard 19 inch rack.
The rack anges in this kit are not compatible with front handles. To obtain this item after
receiving the HP 8530A, order part number 5062-3977 and 5062-3978.
Option 913 - Rack Mount Kit (for instruments with handles)
This HP 8530A rack mount kit allows you to mount the receiver to a standard 19 inch rack.
The rack anges in this kit are compatible with front handles. To obtain this item after
receiving the HP 8530A, order part number 5062-4071 and 5062-4072.
Option 910 - Additional Manual Set
This provides an additional manual Set. To obtain this item after receiving the HP 8530A, order
part number 08530-90001.
Option W31 - Extended Service (On-Site, where Available)
Converts the standard warranty to three years of on-site repair service (where available). The
warranty period begins at the time of product delivery. This warranty option does not include
annual calibration.
1-10 General Information
Options, Equipment Supplied, Accessories
Equipment Supplied
The following equipment is included in the HP 8530A system:
Table 1-1. HP 8530A Equipment Supplied
Description
Cables
IF Display Interconnect
RS-232 Cables
External Video Cable
BNC Cables (1 meter)
HP-IB Cable (1 meter)
Software
HP 8530 Operating System Disc
Antenna/RCS Calibration Disc
HP 8510 Operating System Disc1
HP 8510 Specs and Performance ver. Disc2
HP 8510C Software Toolkit Disc1
HP 8530A Software Toolkit Disc
HP 85102 Adjustments Disc1
Calibration Data Disc1
CMP program kit3
Documentation
HP 8530A manual set
HP 8510C manual set1
Other Items
Alcohol Cleaning Fluid, bottle
Swabs, package
Qty Part Number
1
2
1
2
1
08510-60101
HP 24542G
HP D1191A
8120-2582
8120-3445
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
08530-80005
08530-10001
85101-80098
08510-10033
85103-10002
08530-10002
08510-10024
08510-10034
85101-60040
1
1
08530-90001
08510-90275
1
1
8500-5344
08530-90001
1 Only included with option 011.
2 Runs on HP 9000 Series 200/300 workstations (calculates and
veries specications). Only supplied with option 011.
3 The CMP (circuit modeling program) is only useful if your
instrument is equipped with option 010, time domain. This
disc is only supplied with option 011.
General Information 1-11
Options, Equipment Supplied, Accessories
Accessories and Supplies
HP-IB Extenders (HP 37204A) and Related Cables
One extender is required at the receiver, plus one additional extender at each remote location.
More than one instrument can be connected to a single HP-IB extender. Do determine if you
need an HP-IB extender, refer to \Allowable HP-IB Cable Lengths".
Standard Coax HP-IB Extender
The standard extender can control devices up to 250 meters away using 75 ohm coaxial cable.
You must order two coaxial connecters (HP 92226A), and shielded 75 ohm coaxial cable (HP
92179G). When ordering cable specify the desired length in meters (minimum length is 100
meters).
Option 013 Optical Fiber HP-IB Extender
The 013 extender can control devices up to 1000 meters away using optical ber cable. Order
cable using the part number HFBR-AXDxxx where xxx represents the desired length of cable
(in meters).
HP 85043A System Cabinet
The HP 85043A System Cabinet stands 128 cm (50.5 in) high, 60 cm (23.6 in) wide, and 80
cm (31.5 in) deep. It comes with support rails, AC power distribution, and rack mounting
hardware.
Connector Savers
A \connector saver" is an adapter or short cable that saves wear-and-tear on the mixer input
connectors. Hewlett-Packard recommends that you use connector savers on the RF inputs of
the mixers. This is especially important on the input of the test mixer, because the test antenna
is often changed. Use an appropriate connector saver from the following list:
HP Part Number
Type
3.5-mm male to 3.5-mm female
85027-60006
3.5-mm female to 3.5-mm female 85027-60005 (supplied with HP 85320A/B)
Type-N male to 3.5-mm female
1250-1744
Type-N female to 3.5-mm female 1250-1745
If you need a short cable, order a 0.5 meter cable such as the HP 85381C with 3.5-mm
connector on one end. Choose a connector for the other end that will mate with the antennas
you test.
A cable has an additional benet: It allows you to mount the mixer a short distance away from
the test antenna. This provides more exibility and strain relief when mounting the modules.
1-12 General Information
Options, Equipment Supplied, Accessories
Connector Cleaning Supplies
Ultrajet: 9310-6395
Alcohol wipes: 92193N
Lint-Free cloths: 9310-4242
Small foam swabs: 9300-1270
Large foam swabs: 9300-0468
Touch Up Paint
Touch up paint is shipped in spray cans. Spray a cotton swab with paint and apply it to the
damaged area.
Table 1-2. Touch Up Paint
Color
Dove Gray
French Gray
Parchment Gray
Where the Color is Used
Front panel frames, portions
of front handles,
mixer modules
Side, top, and bottom covers
Rack mount anges, front panels
Part Number
6010-1146
6010-1147
6010-1148
General Information 1-13
Specications and Environmental Characteristics
Specications
The performance of the HP 8530A is not specied by itself. This is because performance
is interdependent on the frequency converter used. If you purchased the HP 8530A with
a system, look at the system manual for specications. Otherwise, look in the frequency
converter's manual.
Environmental Characteristics
Temperature, Humidity, Altitude, RFI
Table 1-3. Environmental Conditions
Temperature
For Operation:
For Storage:
Humidity
For Operation:
For Storage:
Pressure Altitude
Operation or Storage:
Radio Frequency Interference
For Operation:
+5 to +40 C (+41 to +104 F)
040 to +65 C; (040 to +158 F)
5% to 95% at +40 C or less (non condensing)
5% to 95% at +65 C or less (non condensing)
Less than 4,600 meters (15,000 feet)
Any radiated elds at 20 MHz 610 kHz must be 1 volt/meter.
Electrical Requirements
Voltage: 90 to 127, 195 to 253 Vac
Power: 460 VA maximum
Frequency: 47.5 to 66 Hz
Size and Weight
46.0 cm (18.1 in) wide (with handles)
42.6 cm (16.75 in) wide (without handles)
32.4 cm (12.75 in) high (with feet)
31.3 cm (12.3 in) high (without feet)
56.9 cm (22.4 in) deep (with handles)
52.2 cm (20.55 in) deep (without handles)
Net Weight: 40.5 kg (89 lbs)
Shipping Weight: 65 kg (143 pounds)
1-14 General Information
Compatible Instruments, Printers, Plotters, and External Monitors
Allowable HP-IB Cable Lengths
You are allowed two meters of cable length for each instrument that is connected to
the main HP-IB bus. A typical system has a computer, printer (or plotter), receiver, and
positioner-controller connected to the main HP-IB bus (four devices). The total HP-IB cable
length allowed in this example system is 2 2 4 = 8 meters. Under no circumstances can the
total cable length ever exceed 20 meters, no matter how many devices are in the system.
If your system exceeds the allowed HP-IB cable length, you must use HP-IB extenders for one
of the devices.
Allowable System Bus Cable Lengths
Calculate the system bus limitation separately, using the same formula. There is usually one
instrument connected to this bus (the RF source).
2 (meters/device) 2 1 (device) = 2 meters allowable length
Because the RF source is often far away from the receiver, HP-IB extenders are commonly
used.
Compatible Instruments
The following instruments are compatible with the HP 8530A.
Compatible LO Sources
The LO source rmware revision must be compatible with the receiver.
HP 8350 Plug-Ins
HP 83525A
HP 83592B
HP 83592A
HP 83590A
HP 83540A
General Information 1-15
Compatible Instruments, Printers, Plotters, and External Monitors
HP 8360 Family Sources
Table 1-4. Required options for HP 85360 LO sources
Model
HP 83620A
HP 83621A
HP 83622A
HP 83623A
HP 83624A
HP 83630A
HP 83631A
HP 83640A
HP 83642A
HP 83650A
HP 83651A
Recommended
Special Option
Options
Requirements
008
HP 83620A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87. If cable length
between the LO source and HP 85309A is
greater than 7 meters, contact your local HP
representative.
None
HP 83621A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87.
008
HP 83622A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87. If cable length
between the LO source and HP 85309A is
greater than 7 meters, contact your local HP
representative.
008
HP 83623A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87.
008
HP 83624A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87.
008
None
HP 83631A's with a serial prex less than
3103A require option H87.
008
None
008
None
008
None
None
None
Fast measurement speed and Quick Step mode
Older sources such as HP 8340/41 or early HP 8360s had slower frequency switching speeds
than newer HP 8360 sources. Typically, these slower sources limited the receiver to Frequency
Domain measurement speeds of 35 to 70 ms per frequency point. \fast measurement speed"
refers to receiver operation with a newer, faster, HP 8360 source.
Quick step mode is a dierent way of making faster measurements, it increases the speed of
Step Sweep measurements by up to six times. Refer to \Step Type" in Chapter 17 for more
information.
The following table shows the hardware and rmware requirements for fast measurement
speed and Quick Step mode. Any source with rmware not listed on this table will have
Frequency Domain measurement speeds similar to an HP 8340-family source, and it will not be
compatible with the Quick Step mode. Both RF and LO sources must be equipped as shown
below to attain fast measurement speed. Some older sources cannot be upgraded.
1-16 General Information
Compatible Instruments, Printers, Plotters, and External Monitors
Table 1-5. Compatible Sources for Fast Measurement Speeds
HP Model
Hardware
Serial Prex
83630A, 83650A, or
83651A
83621A or 83631A
All
83620A, 83622A, 83623A,
83624A, or 83640A
83642A
Firmware
Revision1
Upgrade Kit
March 8, 19912 Compatible|None required
March 8, 19912 Requires HP 83601A hardware
kit3
3103A
March 8, 19912 Requires 08360-60167 rmware kit
3104A to 3111A March 8, 19912 Requires 08360-60201 rmware kit
3112A
March 8, 19912 Compatible-None required
< 3103A
Nov 14, 19912 Not Compatible4
Nov 14, 19912 Compatible|None required
Not Compatible
Not Compatible4
<3145A
3145A
1 For millimeter wave band \W" compatibility, Firmware revision date must be October 23, 1992
2 If the rmware revision is dated earlier than March 8, 1991, it is compatible, even if the
hardware is compatible.
3 Includes installation.
4 Cannot be upgraded.
not
Compatible RF Sources
Any HP 8340/41 synthesized source (see note below).
Any HP 8360 (836xx) family synthesized source.
Note
Although any HP 8340 or 8341 will function with this receiver, units with
rmware dated 11 May 1988 (and later) allow you to make faster Step Sweep
measurements than earlier units. The rmware date is displayed whenever you
turn the HP 8340/41 ON. To utilize the faster measurement capability, you must
either:
Connect the HP 8340/41 STOP SWEEP BNC to the receiver's STOP SWEEP
BNC.
or
Place a BNC short on the HP 8340/41 STOP SWEEP connector.
If you do not have this rmware revision, and wish to upgrade, you can order
the HP 11875A upgrade kit. Contact your local sales oce for details.
Fast Measurement Speeds and Quick Step Mode
Refer to \Fast measurement speed and Quick Step mode", earlier in this section.
General Information 1-17
Compatible Instruments, Printers, Plotters, and External Monitors
Compatible Frequency Converters
A frequency converter is required to downconvert RF frequencies to the 20 MHz IF frequency
required by the HP 8530A. The following frequency converters are available:
HP 85310A Distributed Frequency Converter.
The standard HP 85310A allows the receiver to measure microwave frequencies from 2 to 26.5
GHz. The remote mixers allow the reference and test antennas to be separated by up to 30
meters (100 feet).
The HP 85310A is comprised of an HP 85309A LO/IF Unit and HP 85320A/B external mixers.
The advantage to the HP 85310 is high sensitivity. External mixers mount on the reference and
test antenna masts.
HP x85325A Millimeter Wave Subsystem
When you use the HP 85325A MM-Wave mixer system, the HP 85310A allows you to measure
MM-Wave frequencies in the R, Q, U, V or W bands.
HP 8511A/B Frequency Converter (Test Set)
The HP 8511A frequency converter covers RF/microwave frequencies from 45 MHz to 26.5
GHz. The HP 8511B frequency converter covers RF/microwave frequencies from 45 MHz to
50 GHz. The HP 8511A or B oers simple setup and low cost frequency conversion. The
HP 8511A or B can also be used as a network analyzer test set during optional HP 8510C
operation. In this conguration the HP 8511 requires an external signal separation device (such
as a directional coupler).
Compatible Printers
The HP 8530A can print to the printers listed below. RS-232 or HP-IB models can be used in
each category. RS-232 printers work with the internal printer/plotter spooler, HP-IB printers do
not.
HP Laser printers and compatibles (RS-232 supplied, HP-IB not supported)
HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus and DeskJet 500 printers (RS-232 supplied, HP-IB not supported).
HP DeskJet 500C is supported for black printouts only. Color printouts are currently NOT
supported with this printer.
HP PaintJet (order option 001 for RS-232, option 002 for HP-IB)
HP PaintJet XL printers (order option 1AX for RS-232, option 1A8 for HP-IB)
HP ThinkJet printer (HP 2225D provides RS-232, HP 2225A provides HP-IB)
HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus printers (HP 2227A with standard width carriage, RS-232
supplied, HP-IB not supported)
1-18 General Information
Compatible Instruments, Printers, Plotters, and External Monitors
Compatible Plotters
RS-232 plotters work with the internal printer/plotter spooler, HP-IB plotters do not. The
following HP-IB or RS-232 plotters are supported:
HP 7550A/B or Plus (requires HP 24542H cable for RS-232 use. Order option 005 for HP-IB
use)
HP 7470A (out of production)
HP 7475A (option 1 provides RS-232, option 002 provides HP-IB)
HP 7440A ColorPro (option 1 provides RS-232, option 002 provides HP-IB)
Compatible External Monitors
The HP 8530 is designed to work with monitors that meet these four specications:
Horizontal scan rate of 25.5 kHz must be supported.
Vertical scan rate of 60 Hz must be supported.
The monitor must accept separate R G B signals.
The monitor must accept RGB signals at .7 volts.
Multisync monitors commonly meet all these requirements. The monitor can have one or
two sync inputs (composite sync or separate H, V sync), and positive and negative sync is
supported.
Some of the monitors that can be run with the HP 8530A are listed below:
Table 1-6. External Monitors
Manufacturer
Model
NEC
Multisync XL
NEC
Multisync II
NEC
Multisync Plus
Nanao
Flexscan 8060
Concorde Technologies CT 5117 Multiat Plus 17
CT 5121 Multiat Plus 21
IIYAMA Electric Co
MF 5117 Multiat Plus 17
At the time this manual was published, the only compatible HP monitor was the HP 35741BM.
This monitor has no sync connections as such. Sync pulses are superimposed on the green
video signal.
The HP 8530A cannot drive dedicated-format monitors such as CGA, EGA, VGA or SVGA.
General Information 1-19
System Overview
2
Chapter Contents
The following topics are covered in this chapter
Principles of Operation
Description of HP 8530A Internal Processes
Analog Signal Process Stages
Digital Data Process Stages
Factory Preset State
Hardware State
System Overview 2-1
Principles of Operation
Principles of Operation
This information is provided so you can have a better understanding of how the HP 8530A
makes measurements. If desired, you can skip this section and come back to it when
convenient.
Description of HP 8530A Internal Processes
A simplied block diagram of the HP 8530A receiver is shown in Figure 2-1. It is a high
performance vector receiver with four inputs, two independent digital processing channels, and
an internal microcomputer that controls measurement, digital processing, and input/output
operations. Examples of \digital processing" are features such as averaging, time domain,
calibration, and so on. A special System Bus gives the receiver complete control over the
RF source and, if required, LO source. This interface allows the receiver to make hard copy
outputs to HP-IB compatible printers or plotters. Two RS-232 ports are also supplied for
printing or plotting.
The system must contain a frequency converter, which down converts the RF measurement
frequencies to the 20 MHz IF required by the HP 8530A. To create the IF frequency, the HP
8511A/B frequency converter uses a built-in local oscillator. The built-in LO is digitally tuned
by the HP 8530A. The digital tuning data is sent over the \Test Set Interconnect" that links
the HP 8530A and the HP 8511A/B. The local oscillator mixes the measurement signals with
a similar frequency that is oset by 20 MHz. The result is the 20 MHz IF signal. Other down
converters, such as the HP 85310A, require another source to supply an LO signal. The HP
8530A tunes external LO sources with HP-IB commands sent over the System Bus.
2-2 System Overview
Principles of Operation
Figure 2-1. Simplied System Block Diagram
The HP 8530 has two main sections, illustrated in Figure 2-2.
Analog Section
In the analog section, analog circuitry detects the real (x) and imaginary (y) values of the input
signals. The real,imaginary values are then converted into digital values.
Digital Section
In the digital section, the microprocessor takes the digital data and performs any selected data
processing (averaging, calibration, time domain, and so on). The instrument then displays the
results in any format you choose. You can also output the results to printer, plotter, disc, or
external computer. There are two identical digital processing paths, called Channel 1 and
Channel 2. You can have dierent features turned ON in the two channels, and view the
dierent results. You can show the results of both channels on the screen at the same time,
using controls under the 4DISPLAY5 key.
System Overview 2-3
Principles of Operation
Figure 2-2. HP 8530A Measurement Data Flow Diagram
Analog Signal Process Stages
During a typical Frequency Domain measurement, the test signal source is swept from a lower
to a higher frequency. During a typical Angle Domain measurement, a single frequency is
measured while the antenna-under-test is moved around one axis.
Initially, the HP 8530A receives up to four 20 MHz signals from the external frequency
converter. The receiver separately down converts each signal to a 100 kHz IF carrier
frequency that can be used by the detection circuitry. (Refer to Figure 2-1.) Because frequency
conversions are phase coherent, and the IF signal paths are carefully matched (by design).
Thus, magnitude and phase relationships between the input signals are maintained throughout
the frequency conversion and detection stages. Automatic, fully-calibrated autoranging IF gain
stages maintain the IF signal at optimum levels for detection over a wide dynamic range.
Each measurement channel can use input a1 or a2 as the reference signal. The selected input
is also used as the phase-lock reference.
2-4 System Overview
Principles of Operation
Note
In hardware gating applications, the pulsed reference signal may not be suitable
for phase locking. In this case, you can use the other reference input for phase
locking. For example, assume your pulsed reference is on input a1, you can use
a2 as the phase lock reference.
Any of the three remaining inputs can be used as test inputs.
Figure 2-3. Phase Lock Reference
The input selector sends one test signal and one reference signal to the synchronous detectors.
When these are measured, the input selector sends the other test/reference signals.
The synchronous detectors develop the real (x) and imaginary (y) parts of the test or
reference signal by comparing the input to an internally-generated 100 kHz sine wave. This
method practically eliminates drift, osets, and circularity errors as sources of measurement
uncertainty. Each x,y pair is sequentially converted to digital values which are sent to the
main microprocessor.
Digital Data Process Stages
Digital signal processing proceeds under the control of the receiver's rmware operating system
executed by the main microprocessor.
About the Main Microprocessor
The main microprocessor is a 32 bit Motorola 68020 microprocessor running at a clock speed of
16 MHz. The rmware operating system takes advantage of multi-tasking software architecture
and several distributed processors to provide very fast data acquisition and display update
speed.
System Overview 2-5
Principles of Operation
Internal Data Flow
Figure 2-4 shows the parallel design of the two channels. Data has already been converted to
digital information at this point in the receiver's processing.
Figure 2-4. Independent Data Processing in Each Channel
Raw Data Stages
The microprocessor accepts the digitized real and imaginary data, and corrects IF gain and
quadrature errors before any other data processing is done. The calibration coecients used
in the IF correction stage are calculated periodically with an automatic self-calibration. This
automatic feature is dierent from the user calibration features. Next, the inputs are ratioed
together and identical copies of the data are sent to independent Channel 1 and Channel 2 data
processing paths.
There are eight raw data arrays. (Each parameter has its own raw data array, and each channel
has its own separate group of four parameters each.) The raw data array can be stored to
disc, or be transferred to or from a computer. You can actually send raw data into the receiver
from a computer, and the HP 8530A will process that data through later stages as if it were
measured data.
Now, any selected averaging is performed on Channel 1 or Channel 2. If the Fast CW mode is
in use, data is sent to the Fast CW buer from the active channel. If Fast CW mode is not being
used, Channel 1 averaged data is stored in the Channel 1 raw data array. Similarly, Channel 2
averaged data is stored in the Channel 2 raw data array.
Data \arrays" are data holding locations. A data array holds one X,Y data pair in a special
compressed data format called \Form 1." This format is described in the HP 8530A Keyword
Dictionary. The Fast CW buer can send data to computer if you are using the Fast CW mode.
The buer contains up to 100,000 X,Y data pairs in Form 1 format.
2-6 System Overview
Error Correction
Principles of Operation
If calibration is ON, the calibration \error coecient" values are used to modify the raw data.
These coecients contain the measurement oset values created during the calibration process.
Convert Parameter
The corrected data for each displayed parameter is modied if the Convert Parameter feature
is active. What is Convert Parameter? To explain this feature you must rst realize that the HP
8530 can directly ratio any two combinations of its a1, a2, b1, or b2 inputs with one exception.
The b2 input can never be the denominator in a ratio. For example, a1/b2 is normally
impossible. However, you can select b2/a1 then turn on Convert Parameter. The HP 8530 will
measure b2/a1, then mathematically invert the results.
Time Domain Operations
The data is then sent through the time domain transform if this optional feature is turned ON.
The Delay Table is accessible by computer controller. The delay table allows you to modify
the data to suit special needs. This feature is explained under \Delay Table" in the keyword
dictionary.
Corrected Data Array
The data is now stored in the Corrected Data Array. The corrected data for the active
parameter on the active channel are stored in this array. This data array can be stored to disc,
or be transferred to or from a computer. If data is transferred from the computer into the
array, later processing steps will be performed on that data.
Memory Arrays
These arrays hold data you have stored to one of the eight trace memories using functions
under the 4DISPLAY5 key. Each parameter on each channel have a specic memory number
assigned to it:
Table 2-1. Memory Numbers for Each Parameter on Each Channel
Channel/Parameter Memory Number
Channel 1
PARAM 1
Memory #1
PARAM 2
Memory #2
PARAM 3
Memory #3
PARAM 4
Memory #4
Channel 2
Memory #5
PARAM 1
Memory #6
PARAM 2
Memory #7
PARAM 3
Memory #8
PARAM 4
Trace Math
The next stage is trace math processing. Trace math performs a selected mathematical
operation using normal data as one operand, and memory data as the other.
System Overview 2-7
Principles of Operation
Format and Smoothing
Data is now modied as needed for the selected display format. If smoothing is ON, the data is
smoothed.
Formatted Data Array
The data is then sent to the Formatted Data Array. This data can be stored to disc, or be
transferred to or from a computer. Data in this array is a simple scalar value, it is no longer a
complex (vector) value.
Scaling and Display
The last step to scale the data (as specied by the user) and display it on the screen.
Channel Coupling
Many \stimulus" settings (such as RF power; start, stop, increment angle; start, stop, or CW
frequency, number of points, and so on) are \coupled" (always the same) between the two
channels. If a stimulus feature is \coupled," you cannot choose dierent settings (for that
feature) between Channel 1 and Channel 2. If a stimulus feature is \uncoupled," you can
choose dierent settings (for that feature) in the two channels. If you want to know whether a
specic feature is coupled or uncoupled, look it up in the keyword dictionary (or just try it).
2-8 System Overview
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
The receiver remembers most measurement settings when you switch back and forth between
channels, domains, parameters, or display formats. (This feature remembers all measurement
settings except stimulus settings.) This feature is automatic, and does not require you to use the
Save or Recall functions. The feature is called \limited instrument state memory."
Limited instrument state memory works by assigning a hierarchy to the instrument settings.
Here is the hierarchy:
Channel (1 or 2)
Domain (Frequency, Angle, or Time)
Parameter (1, 2, 3, or 4)
Format (any display format)
Response (scale and reference line)
Every mode in the above list remembers all settings you make that are lower in the hierarchy.
For example, assume you choose the following measurement settings.
Channel 1
Angle Domain
Parameter 3
Log mag (format)
Reference -10 dB
Scale 5 dB/div
Now you go to Channel 2 and make completely dierent settings.
When you go back to Channel 1, the settings shown above will automatically resume. This
hierarchical memory applies to all the controls in the above list.
System Overview 2-9
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
The Added Benet of the SAVE/RECALL feature
Stimulus settings are not part of the limited instrument state memory explained above. To save
stimulus settings along with all the other settings, you must use the SAVE/RECALL feature.
Two other advantages of the Save/Recall feature are:
Saved instrument states can be stored to disc.
Instrument states saved to Save/Recall register 8 becomes the default power-ON or User
Preset state.
2-10 System Overview
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
Factory Preset State
The Factory Preset State consists of the factory default values selected for various functions.
The following is a partial list of the preset state or value associated with a function. If you
have a question on a specic function, refer to the individual entry in the HP 8530A Keyword
Dictionary.
Table 2-2. Instrument Factory Preset Conditions
INSTRUMENT
STATE
DOMAIN
STIMULUS
PARAMETER
FORMAT
RESPONSE
CAL
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
MARKER
COPY
Selected Channel = 1, No Menu
Displayed
SAVE/RECALL Instrument States 1-8 Not
Changed.
Frequency
GATE OFF.
Maximum sweep range of source and test
set.
NUMBER OF POINTS = 201,
Source Power = depends upon source.
SWEEP TIME = 166 ms,
Sweep Mode: STEP sweep, CONTINUAL
Step Type: NORMAL
Channel 1 = Param 1, Channel 2 = Param
2.
Channel 1 = LOG MAG. Channel 2 = LOG
MAG.
SCALE = 10 dB/division,
REF VALUE = 0 dB, REF POSN = 5,
ELECTRICAL DELAY = 0 seconds, COAXIAL,
AVERAGING = OFF, SMOOTHING = OFF,
PHASE OFFSET = 0 degrees, MAGNITUDE
OFFSET = 0 dB,
MAGNITUDE SLOPE = 0 dB/GHz, NORMALIZE
OFF.
CORRECTION OFF,
Z0 = 50 Ohms,
VELOCITY FACTOR = 1.0,
TRIM SWEEP = 0,
CAL SETS 1-8 = Not Changed.
SINGLE CHANNEL, DATA.
Trace Memories 1-8 Not Changed.
Display Colors Not Changed.
Date/Time Clock On.
HP-IB Addresses Not Changed.
CRT ON, IF GAIN = AUTO.
MULTIPLE SOURCE = OFF
all OFF, 4 OFF,
DISCRETE
Marker List On, All Param/1 Marker.
PLOT ALL = FULL PAGE
Param 1 Data = Pen 3.
Param 2 Data = Pen 5.
Param 3 Data = Pen 6.
Param 4 Data = Pen 4.
Graticule = Pen 1.
Plot Type = Color.
System Overview 2-11
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
HARDWARE STATE
In general, the Hardware State functions are those that are required for proper operation at
power up and relate more to the hardware conguration of the receiver. These functions are
not aected by either 4USER PRESET5 or FACTORY PRESET . Values or text shown in parenthesis
are factory default settings.
HP-IB Addresses
ADDRESS of 8530 (16)
ADDRESS of SYSTEM BUS (17)
ADDRESS of SOURCE #1 (19)
ADDRESS of CONVERTER (20)
ADDRESS of PLOTTER (Selected bus: HP-IB, Address: 5)
ADDRESS of PRINTER (Selected bus: HP-IB, Address: 1)
ADDRESS of DISC (0)
ADDRESS of SOURCE #2 (31)
ADDRESS of PASS-THRU (31)
ADDRESS of REMOTE SWITCH (9)
ADDRESS of RF SWITCH (31)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Disc Unit Number 0
Disc Volume Number 0
System Phaselock Type (Internal)
System Phaselock Speed (Normal)
System Phaselock Step Type (Reads Source in System to Determine)
Multiple Source Values
RF Source #1
Numerator (1)
Denominator (1)
Oset (0)
LO Source #2
Numerator (0)
Denominator (1)
Oset (0)
Receiver
Numerator (1)
Denominator (1)
Oset (0)
HP-IB Response to PRES; Command (User Preset)
Warning Beeper (On)
Power Level RF Source #1 (+10 dBm)
Power Level LO Source #2 (+10 dBm)
2-12 System Overview
Automatic Recall of Instrument Settings
CRT Display Colors
Background Intensity (0%)
Softkeys (Bright White)
Warnings (Bright Red)
P1 Data (Bright Yellow)
P2 Data (Bright Cyan)
P3 Data (Bright Salmon)
P4 Data (Bright Green)
Graticule (Dim Grey)
Marker Symbols (White)
P1 Memory (Dim Yellow)
P2 Memory (Dim Cyan)
P3 Memory (Dim Salmon)
P4 Memory (Dim Green)
Stimulus Values (Dim White)
External Video Sync (Sync on Green, Negative)
Power Leveling
Source 1 (internal)
Source 2 (internal)
System Overview 2-13
Front and Rear Panel
3
Chapter Contents
Front Panel Display Features
Display Annotation Areas
One-Character Special Display Annotations
Using Softkey Menus
Front Panel Features
Rear Panel Features
Front and Rear Panel 3-1
Front Panel Features
Front Panel Display Features
Display Annotation Areas
Figure 3-1 shows a single-parameter display and its annotation areas.
Figure 3-1. Annotation Areas for Single Parameter display mode
For simplicity, only one type of display mode is discussed here. If you need information about
the various display modes, refer to \One-Character Special Display Annotations".
Channel/Parameter Identication Area
Measurement information appears at the top of the display for this display mode. The
parameter information, display format, reference line value, and the scale/division are shown.
Color matches the identication labels to the trace display. The active parameter is indicated
by a \ 7" symbol, and the color of the stimulus values (at the bottom of display) match the color
of the active parameter.
In the Single Parameter and Dual Channel display modes, Channel 1 information appears on the
left and Channel 2 information appears on the right.
Stimulus Values Area
The current start/stop, center/span, or single point stimulus settings appear along the
bottom of the display, and match the color of the active channel/parameter to emphasize the
channel/parameter you are controlling.
3-2 Front and Rear Panel
Active Entry Area
Front Panel Features
The active entry area of the display identies the current active function for the selected
channel/parameter, and matches the color of the active channel/parameter to emphasize the
channel/parameter you are controlling. Press 4ENTRY OFF5 to clear this area.
Title Area
The title area provides a space to enter up to 50 characters of information about the
measurement. Notice that the location of this area depends on the display mode. An example
of how to create a title is given in this chapter in later paragraphs.
System Messages Area
Prompts, error messages, and procedural advisories appear in the system messages area located
below the Channel 1 identication labels.
If an error that aects the measurement occurs, a message is displayed and a \beep" may signal
you to look at the message.
Note
An Error message remains on the display until:
It is replaced by another system message.
You press a function key such as 4START5 or 4USER PRESET5.
You manually clear the message by pressing 4ENTRY OFF5 (located above the
knob).
Note that error messages do not disappear automatically. This it is possible for
an error message to remain on the display, even if the error condition no longer
exists.
One-Character Special Display Annotations
Along the left side of the screen, certain one-character labels appear when you select receiver
functions that aect the accuracy or presentation of the measurement trace. These labels are:
* = Measurement Incomplete.
A = Averaging is ON.
C = Calibration is ON.
D = Normalization, Electrical Delay, Phase Oset, Magnitude Oset, or Magnitude Slope ON.
E = External or HP-IB trigger mode is ON.
G = Time Domain Gating ON.
H = Hold mode is ON.
M = Multiple Source ON.
O = Power has changed more than 24 dB between adjacent data points, and automatic IF
gain control could not fully track the change. This reduces measurement accuracy by a very
small amount. Refer to \IF Gain" near the end of Chapter 17.
S = Smoothing is ON.
These symbols are present if the given condition exists on any displayed channel/parameter.
That is, for dual channel displays, if either channel has smoothing turned on, the \S" is shown.
The measurement incomplete symbol \*" is displayed in several situations. After any
measurement restart, it signies that the rst sweep has not been completed. When this
Front and Rear Panel 3-3
Front Panel Features
symbol disappears you can be certain that all basic data acquisition and error correction
functions (except possibly averaging) are complete.
CRT annotation for Cartesian displays includes Trace labels:
1! indicates Channel 1, on the left side of the graticule.
2 indicates Channel 2, on the right side of the graticule.
> is the Reference Line Position symbol for Channel 1 (appears on the left side of the
screen).
< is the Reference Line Position symbol for Channel 2 (appears on the left side of the
screen).
Softkey Menu and Marker List Display Area
Softkey menus appear in the area on the right side of the display, and beside them are the
eight keys used to make menu selections. Menus and how to make selections are discussed
below.
The softkey menu display area is also used to display marker values and the internal date/time
clock of the receiver. Markers and the date/time clock can only be displayed when menus
are not being displayed. The dierent types of marker displays and the date/time clock are
discussed in the section titled \Display" in later chapters. An example of how to change the
date/time clock is given in the paragraph titled \Example: Using Menus", in this chapter.
Using Softkey Menus
The HP 8530 receiver system has a series of menus and sub-menus. Various operations can be
selected, modied, and recalled using front panel keys and the eight softkeys (located to the
right of the display).
The Menu Structures chapter of the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary shows all instrument menus
(in a series of fold out illustrations). HP-IB commands are shown next to each softkey where
applicable. This is the fastest and easiest place to see an overview of softkey menus.
This Operating and Programming Manual also shows the menus used by the HP 8530, organized
by functional group, along with explanations of each function.
How to Tell when a Function is Selected
If the function sets a value only, then the current value is displayed in the active entry area
when the function is activated. Use the knob, 8 9 , number/units, or 4=MARKER5 keys (in the
ENTRY block) to choose the desired value. With other functions, the softkey title of the
selected function is underlined.
Mutually-Exclusive functions
You can tell if several choices are mutually-exclusive because their softkey titles are connected
by vertical lines like this:
SWR
|
LINEAR
Other Softkey Protocol and Details
Some softkeys bring up other menus. Press the front panel key labeled 4PRIOR MENU5 to return
to the menu previously displayed. If the current menu is a rst-level menu, pressing this key
clears the softkey menu area.
3-4 Front and Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
Front Panel Features
Figure 3-2. HP 8530A Front Panel
Channel Selection
The receiver has two separate, identical measurement channels. The channel feature is much
like having two HP 8530 receivers setting next to one another.
Figure 3-3. Channel Selection Keys
Channel 1 and 2 can have dierent PARAMETER, FORMAT, or RESPONSE settings. In
addition, you can select Time Domain on one channel, and Frequency Domain on the other:
For example, you could set Channel 1 to Frequency Domain, PARAM 1. Then you could set
Channel 2 to Time Domain, PARAM 2. The receiver will measure each channel and display the
Front and Rear Panel 3-5
Front Panel Features
data. You can view the data separately (by changing channel), or you can display both sets of
data side-by-side (dual channel split) or superimposed (dual channel overlay).
Many \stimulus" settings (such as RF power; start, stop, increment angle; start, stop, or CW
frequency, number of points, and so on) are \coupled." If a stimulus feature is \coupled,"
you cannot choose dierent settings for Channel 1 versus Channel 2. If a stimulus feature
is \uncoupled," you can choose dierent settings in the two channels. If you want to know
whether a specic feature is coupled or uncoupled, look it up in the keyword dictionary.
3-6 Front and Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
Basic Measurement Functions
Four of the main control blocks on the front panel are STIMULUS, PARAMETER, FORMAT, and
RESPONSE. These are described below:
STIMULUS
This block lets you select RF power levels, and desired frequency and angle
settings. It also controls how you can trigger the instrument to take each point
of data. For example, you can trigger o the Record Increment pulses (coming
into the receiver's EVENT TRIGGER jack from the positioner controller) by
selecting EXTERNAL trigger. Alternatively, you can trigger over HP-IB using
the GET command.
PARAMETER The PARAMETER block contains the predened input ratio keys 4PARAM 15
(b1/a1), 4PARAM 25 (b1/a2), 4PARAM 35 (b2/a1), and 4PARAM 45 (b2/a2). The normal
measurement mode for the receiver is to mathematically ratio (divide) the
data from the test and reference antennas. Ratioed measurements reduce
most errors caused by the range, and shows the actual performance of the
Antenna Under Test. You can redene any of the parameter keys to ratio
any two inputs you desire. You can also look at any single input using the
SERVICE 1 a1 through SERVICE 4 b1 softkeys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORMAT
Format keys let you choose how the data is displayed on the screen. You can
select logarithmic magnitude 4LOG MAG5, linear magnitude 4LIN MAG5, phase
4PHASE5, polar logarithmic magnitude 4POLAR MAG5, and polar linear magnitude
LINEAR ON POLAR (located under the FORMAT 4MENU5 key)
The response block keys let you set the display scale and reference line.
RESPONSE
Functions under the MENU key let you turn on averaging and normalization.
(Normalization allows you to set the peak of the main lobe to 0 dBi and
measure other parts of the trace relative to the peak.)
Each major control block has functions that are not mentioned here. Refer to Chapter 6, 7, 8,
and 9 for descriptions of these features.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Front and Rear Panel 3-7
Front Panel Features
ENTRY Block
In some cases it is necessary to supply numeric values for a specic function, such as angle or
frequency. The 10 digit keypad is used to supply these values. The keys to the right of the
digits terminate the value with the appropriate units. Use 4G/n5 (Giga/nano), 4M/5 (Mega/micro),
4k/m5 (kilo/milli) and 4x15 (basic units: dB, dBm, degrees, seconds, Hz) as applicable. In addition
to entering data with the keypad, the knob can be used to make continuous adjustments, while
the 8 and 9 keys allow values to be changed in steps.
Changing Values Using the Numeric Keypad
To change a value using the numeric keypad:
1. Select the function (start angle, frequency, or any other function that requires a value). This
function becomes the \active function."
2. Enter the new value using numeric, decimal, and the 4+/05 toggle. 4+/05 changes the sign of
the number. If you make a mistake, press the 4BACKSPACE5 key. (If you have already pressed
a terminator key, you must re-enter the entire value).
3. Terminate the entry with the appropriate units.
Table 3-1. Numeric Value Terminator Key Usage
Angle
Frequency Power Power Slope Time Distance
Key
Name
G/n
{
GHz
M/
{
MHz
k/m milli degrees
kHz
1
x1
degrees
Hz
1 4x15 always represents single units.
3-8 Front and Rear Panel
{
{
{
dBm
{
{
{
dB/Ghz
ns
s
ms
s
nm
m
mm
m
Other Keys in the Entry Block
ENTRY OFF5
4
PRIOR MENU5
4=MARKER5
4
Front Panel Features
Removes old error messages or active function text from the screen.
\Active function text" is a message such as: START 090 that appears
when you change the value of a function.
This key takes you to the previous softkey menu.
This key can be useful when you are using markers. The easiest way to
explain what 4=MARKER5 does is by example. Assume you are making a
frequency response measurement, and the last marker you moved (the
active marker) is sitting at 11 GHz. Now assume you want to change the
center frequency to 11 GHz. All you need to do is press 4CENTER5 4=MARKER5.
The marker position (11 GHz) will become the center frequency.
Another way to use 4=MARKER5 is to transfer the marker value to another
function. As an example, assume you want to set the display reference line
to the value of the active marker (for example, assume the marker value is
013.2 dB). Press 4REF VALUE5 4=MARKER5, and the display reference line will
change to the value of the active marker.
MENUS Block
The four keys under MENUS are 4CAL5, 4DOMAIN5, 4DISPLAY5, and 4MARKER5:
Softkeys under 4CAL5 allow you to perform:
CAL
Antenna calibration
Radar cross section (RCS) calibration
1-Port network analyzer calibration
DOMAIN
The HP 8530 has three modes of operation, called domains:
Frequency Domain
Angle Domain
Optional Time Domain
Softkeys under 4DISPLAY5:
DISPLAY
Display one, two, three, or four parameter measurements.
Save the data trace to temporary storage memory.
Display memory traces.
Perform trace math functions on memory traces.
Allow you to change display intensity or colors.
Allow you to choose video settings for an external monitor.
MARKER
Softkeys under 4MARKER5 allow you to activate up to ve markers. Each
marker shows amplitude or phase values for a desired point on the
measurement trace. Marker Functions are:
Basic markers on the display trace.
Delta marker mode.
Front and Rear Panel 3-9
Front Panel Features
Marker search modes.
Marker list modes.
All the above features are explained in Chapter 5, Menus Block.
INSTRUMENT STATE Block
The four keys in the INSTRUMENT STATE block are 4LOCAL5, 4SAVE5, 4RECALL5, and 4USER PRESET5.
The 4LOCAL5 key has two uses:
If you are controlling the receiver with a computer, the front panel keys will not respond to
touch. Pressing 4LOCAL5 returns control to you.
4LOCAL5 also allows you to examine or change HP-IB addresses the receiver uses to control
peripherals and other instruments.
More information on the 4LOCAL5 key is provided in Chapter 11, Instrument State Block.
4SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 allow you to save and recall up to eight dierent measurement setups
(instrument states). You can also save your current setup as the \USER PRESET" state by
saving it to register 8. The receiver will return to that state whenever the instrument is turned
on, or if you press 4USER PRESET5.
An instrument state is dened as the condition of all current measurement settings, including
all domain, stimulus, parameter, format, and response settings.
More information on the 4SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 keys are provided in Chapter 14, Save and Recall.
AUXILIARY MENUS Block
The \AUXILIARY MENUS" contain the 4COPY5, 4DISC5, and 4SYSTEM5 keys.
4COPY5 controls hardcopy output, either printing or plotting. These features are explained in
Chapter 16, Printing and Plotting.
4DISC5 controls saving, loading, viewing, deleting, or undeleting disc les. You can also format
oppy discs (using DOS or LIF format), or select an external disc drive. These features are
explained in Chapter 15, Disc Operation.
4SYSTEM5 menus control internal functions of the HP 8530. For example, you can select normal
or wide IF bandwidth, or control phase locking. These features are explained in Chapter 17.
If using remote mixers, you can control the RF-to-LO frequency ratio (to select the desired
harmonic mode) using the Multiple-Source menu. This is explained in \Controlling Multiple
Sources" in Chapter 17.
3-10 Front and Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
MEASUREMENT RESTART Key
This key tells the receiver to abort the current measurement and start over. When you are in
the Frequency or Time domain, you can press this key whenever you want.
When using the Angle Domain, follow this procedure:
1. Stop the positioner controller and prepare it for a new scan.
2. Press 4RESTART5. This will abort the current measurement and return the HP 8530A to the
start of the next scan.
HP-IB Mode/Diagnostic Indicator
A small display above the disc drive comprises the HP-IB Mode/Diagnostic Indicator. The
indicator contains the characters R L T S 8 4 2 1.
R
When ON, shows that the receiver is in the HP-IB Remote Mode.
L
When ON, shows that the receiver is in the HP-IB Listener Mode.
T
When ON, shows that the receiver is in the HP-IB Talker Mode.
S
When ON, shows that an SRQ service request has been asserted.
These are self-test indicators. They normally ash various numbers during
8 4 2 1
power-on, then go out. If one or more numbers stay on permanently there is a
problem in the receiver.
The HP-IB and SRQ functions are discussed in Chapter 18, HP-IB Programming.
Built-In Disc Drive
The built in disc drive allows you to save measurement data, data from memory, instrument
conguration setups, save/recall registers, calibration data, or user-created graphics. Both
DOS and LIF disc formats are supported, and both disc types are automatically recognized.
R based computers, such as IBM PCs and compatibles.
DOS format is compatible with MS-DOS
LIF format is compatible with Hewlett-Packard computers, such as the HP 9000 Series 300
workstation family. The drive accepts high-capacity 1.44 MB discs. (Disc capacity is dierent
when using LIF format.)
Recessed TEST button
The front panel TEST button resets the main microprocessor. The receiver performs all self test
routines and a Factory Preset. Use a small diameter object such as a straightened paper clip to
press the recessed button.
Front and Rear Panel 3-11
Rear Panel Features
Rear Panel Features
Figure 3-4. Rear Panel Features
Top Box Rear Panel
RS-232 #1 and RS-232 #2
These are standard 9 pin male RS-232 serial connectors. The HP 8530A sends serial RS-232
printing or plotting commands out these ports. The receiver has dedicated printer/plot buers
for these outputs, although the buer for port #1 is larger. It is recommended that Port #1 be
used for high resolution printers such as the HP DeskJet or Laser printers. The larger printer
buer allows the instrument to nish servicing the printout more quickly, and return to making
measurements.
You can select RS-232 #1 or RS-232 #1 for your serial printer or plotter through the 4LOCAL5
MORE menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3-12 Front and Rear Panel
Rear Panel Features
EXTERNAL DISPLAY
The EXTERNAL DISPLAY port drives external multisync monitors. The receiver supports all
monitors that meet the requirements listed in Chapter 1. The Display section of Chapter 5
explains how to install and congure an external monitor.
Pin
15
14
13
12
11
Signal
No Connection
EXTVSYNC
EXTHSYNC
No Connection
DGND
Pin
10
9
8
7
6
Signal
Pin
Signal
EXTSYNCRTN
5 No Connection
No Connection
4 No Connection
EXTBLUERTN
3 EXTBLUE
EXTGREENRTN 2 EXTGREEN
EXTREDRTN
1 EXTRED
IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT
This interface is the communication link between the top and bottom portion of the HP 8530.
The IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT cable must be connected or the receiver will not function.
SYSTEM INTERCONNECT (System Bus Connector)
This bus allows the receiver to control slave instruments (RF source, LO source, printers, or
plotters). RF and LO sources must be connected to the System Bus not to the main HP-IB bus.
Printers and plotters can be placed on the System Bus if you want the HP 8530A to control
them.
Front and Rear Panel 3-13
Rear Panel Features
The System Bus has the same length limitations as the main HP-IB bus. Instruments on this are
addressed using a two-digit address from 01 to 31.
HP-IB Connector (HP-IB Bus)
The HP-IB bus allows the receiver to be controlled by an external computer. The bus is
compatible with IEEE 488 dated 1978, and IEC 625-1.
Line Voltage Selector
This switch allows you to select between 115 or 230 Vac mains.
Line Voltage Fuse
The replacement part number for the 3 amp line voltage fuse is 2110-0665. The fuse value for
the top box is the same for both line voltage positions.
Bottom Box Rear Panel
IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT
Refer to the description under \Top Box Rear Panel," above.
AUX1, AUX2, RECEIVER READY BNCs
These are not currently used. Some special options may use one or more of these connectors.
ENCODER INTERCONNECT
This connector is used to communicate with the HP 85370A Position Encoder. The HP 8530A
must be equipped with option 005 before it can operate with the HP 85370A Position Encoder.
EVENT TRIGGER BNC
This jack receives TTL external trigger signals from the positioner controller. Triggering occurs
on the negative edge of the trigger pulse. External triggering is selected through the STIMULUS
4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TEST SET INTERCONNECT
This interface allows the receiver to communicate with the HP 8511A/B frequency converter.
If the receiver used in HP 8510C \mode," this interface communicates with network analyzer
test sets.
SWEEP IN 0-10V BNC
When using an HP 8340/41 or 8350 RF source, connect the source's SWEEP OUT jack to this
receiver input. This, in conjunction with the STOP SWP connection, allows the Ramp Sweep
mode to function.
L.O. PHASELOCK OUT BNC
This jack provides a phase locking signal to an HP 8350A LO source. It should be connected to
the FM IN jack of the HP 8350.
3-14 Front and Rear Panel
STOP SWP BNC (Stop Sweep)
Rear Panel Features
The STOP SWP jack has two functions:
HP RF sources have a corresponding STOP SWEEP jack. The RF source pulls STOP SWEEP
low during band crossings and sweep retrace. This allows the receiver to wait for these
events when in Ramp Sweep mode.
When in external triggering or HP-IB triggering mode, the receiver allows STOP SWP (TTL) to
go HIGH when the receiver is ready to take more data. STOP SWP is pulled LOW when the
receiver is NOT ready to take data.
TRIGGER IN BNC
When using an HP 836xx family RF source, connect the source's TRIGGER OUT jack to this
receiver input. This, in conjunction with the STOP SWP connection, allows the Ramp Sweep
and Quick Step modes to function.
10 MHz IN BNC
This jack allows you to lock the HP 8530A timebase to the timebase of the (synthesized) source.
This is recommended if your system uses a synthesized LO source.
20 MHz OUT BNC
This jack is used for service functions.
PULSE OUT (OPT 008) BNC
This jack is not used by the HP 8530A at this time.
ANALOG 610V BNC
This jack is used for service functions.
Line Voltage Selector (Bottom Box)
A removable line voltage selector card allows you to select the appropriate ac mains voltage.
Line Voltage Fuse (Bottom Box)
If the voltage selector is set to 100 or 120V, use the 2.0 amp replacement fuse, part number
2110-0002. If the voltage selector is set to 220 V or 240 V, use the 1.5 amp replacement fuse,
part number 2110-0043.
Front and Rear Panel 3-15
4
Active Channel Block
Introduction
This chapter describes the two channels in the receiver, how they work, as well as showing
more detail on the internal workings of the receiver.
The Two Channels
The receiver has two separate, identical measurement channels. The channel feature is much
like having two HP 8530 receivers setting next to one another.
The term \active channel" refers to the channel that was activated last. When you select a
parameter, change measurement settings, and so on, you aect the active channel. In the same
way, only one parameter (PARAM 1, PARAM 2, PARAM 3, or PARAM 4) can be the active
parameter at any given time. The same applies to markers.
Figure 4-1. Channel Selection Keys
Independent Channel Settings
Channel 1 and 2 can have dierent PARAMETER, FORMAT, or RESPONSE settings. In addition,
you can select Time Domain on one channel, and Frequency Domain on the other. For example,
you could set Channel 1 to Frequency Domain, PARAM 1. Then you could set Channel 2
to Time Domain, PARAM 2. The receiver will measure each channel and display the data.
You can view the data separately (by changing channel), or you can display both sets of data
side-by-side (dual channel split) or superimposed (dual channel overlay). These functions are
available under the 4DISPLAY5 key.
Internal Data Flow
The internal data ow in each channel is described in Chapter 2, System Overview.
Active Channel Block 4-1
Menus Block
5
Chapter Contents
Calibration
Domain
Display
Markers
Menus Block 5-1
5-2 Menus Block
Calibration Requirements
Calibration
Section Contents
This section explains:
Information Pertaining to All Calibration Types
What is Calibration?
Calibration Requirements
Specic Calibration Procedures
Antenna Calibration
RCS Calibration
Network Analyzer Calibration
Response Calibration
Response & Isolation Calibration
1-Port Calibration
Supplementary Calibration Subjects
Storing and Loading Calibration Data (to/from disc)
Turning ON an Existing Cal Set
Principles and Care of Calibration Standards
Verifying Calibration Data
Modifying Network Analyzer Calibration Kit Denitions
Modifying a Calibration Set (error correction data)
Adjusting trim sweep
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition
Information Pertaining to All Calibration Types
What is Calibration?
Calibration, regardless of the exact type, reduces repeatable systematic errors caused by the
system, the chamber, or the antenna range. To achieve this, the receiver measures one or more
standards of known characteristics. During calibration, the receiver:
1. Measures the standard.
2. Compares the results to the known characteristics of that standard.
3. Calculates the exact amount of inaccuracy, and how much the measurement data must be
adjusted to compensate for it. The adjustment values are called \error coecients."
4. Stores the error coecients in memory.
When actual measurements are made, the calibration feature subtracts the error coecient
values, making the measurement much more accurate.
Menus Block 5-3
Calibration Requirements
The HP 8530A can perform three types of calibration:
Antenna Calibration
Antenna calibration allows measured data to be expressed
in dBi (dB relative to an isotropic radiator). A standard
gain antenna with known or dened gain values at specic
frequencies is used as a transfer standard to calibrate the
system.
RCS Calibration
Response and Background calibration reduces range errors
using a calibration target of known radar cross section. The
Response portion of the calibration measures the reections of
the calibration target. The Background portion measures the
empty antenna chamber to characterize and compensate for
clutter. After performing an RCS calibration, measurements are
expressed in dBsm (decibels per square meter).
Network Analyzer Calibration Network analyzer calibration greatly reduces repeatable
systematic errors during network analysis measurements.
A network analyzer calibration transfers the accuracy of
your calibration standards to the measurement of your
device. Network analyzer calibration standards are supplied
in a \calibration kit" which must be purchased separately.
Calibration kits are made for specic frequency ranges and
connector types.
Calibration Requirements
Calibration issues become much simpler if you calibrate using the same equipment and
instrument settings that you plan to use during the measurement.
Use the Same Equipment Setup in the Measurement
You must calibrate using the same adapters and cables that will be used for the measurement.
If the adapters or cables are changed between calibration and measurement, unpredictable
errors will result due to the fact that the error coecients determined during calibration are
incorrect for the altered setup. Even disconnecting and reconnecting the same adapter can
cause inaccuracy. If you change the setup, you must perform the measurement calibration
procedure again to calculate appropriate error terms for the new setup.
Settings You Can Change after Performing a Calibration
1. You can perform a network analyzer calibration in the frequency Domain, then change to
time domain, and the calibration will remain valid.
2. You can calibrate using a specic number of points, then make a measurement using a
smaller number of points.
3. You can perform an antenna calibration in the frequency domain, then change to the Angle
or Time Domain, and the calibration will still be valid. (If you change to the Angle Domain,
some HP 8530 receivers turn the calibration OFF. You must manually turn the calibration ON
again.)
4. You can perform a swept frequency calibration (in Ramp or Step sweep mode), then select a
Single frequency measurement. (Some HP 8530 receivers require you to turn the calibration
ON again.)
5-4 Menus Block
Calibration Requirements
5. You can change start and stop angle while in Angle Domain.
Setting Changes that Require Special Consideration
Other settings can be changed, but require special consideration.
Changing Parameter
The HP 8530A automatically turns calibration OFF if you change parameter. However, it
allows you to turn the calibration ON again for the new parameter. If you are not careful,
this can result in invalid data. There are situations (explained below) where you can change
parameter and get valid measurement results. The important thing to remember is that you
must know when the results are valid, and avoid situations where invalid data would result.
The instrument will not warn you.
To understand the considerations involved, remember that a calibration applies to a specic
hardware setup (a specic collection of cables, adapters, and so forth, connected in one specic
way). As long as the parameter you select will measure that equipment as it was originally set
up, the calibration will be valid.
For example, assume you originally connected the equipment to inputs b1 and a1, and
performed the calibration using b1/a1 ratio. You can select any parameter key that is currently
dened as b1/a1 and the calibration will be valid. (You can redene any parameter key to be
b1/a1.)
Changing Stimulus Values
Changing any of the following settings will cause the message CAUTION: CORRECTION MAY BE
INVALID to be displayed. Calibration remains ON.
Source Power
Power Slope
Dwell Time
Sweep Time
Sweep Modes
Trim Sweep Value
Settings that should not be changed
Selecting a Dierent Frequency Range
If you have performed any type of calibration across a frequency range, and then change
frequencies, calibration is automatically turned O, and CORRECTION RESET is displayed.
Selecting a Greater Number of Points
If you calibrate using a certain number of points, you cannot perform a measurement using a
greater number of points. If you attempt to select a greater number of points, calibration is
automatically turned O, and CORRECTION RESET is displayed.
Menus Block 5-5
Calibration Requirements
Using Averaging
For all calibrations, use the same or greater averaging factor than will be used for the
device measurement. In general, use an averaging factor of 8 or 16 for most measurements.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you increase the averaging factor for the isolation portion
of the calibration (in RCS calibration this is the background calibration). This can be easily
accomplished by turning Averaging ON before beginning the calibration, then leaving averaging
factor as the active function during the calibration.
If you are using averaging
If averaging is ON during calibration, then the correct number of measurements needed
to provide fully averaged data are automatically taken. For Ramp sweeps this means that
n+1 sweeps, where n is the current averaging factor, are taken. For Step, Single Point, or
Frequency List, each data point is averaged n times (where n is the selected number of
averages).
5-6 Menus Block
Calibration Requirements
Figure 5-1. Cal and Cal Type Menus
Menus Block 5-7
Calibration Requirements
Specic Calibration Procedures
The following pages contain information about specic types of calibration, including
step-by-step procedures on performing calibrations.
The receiver provides the following calibration types:
Antenna Calibration
RCS Calibration
Network Analyzer Calibration (only described in the operating and programming manual)
Response Calibration
Response and Isolation Calibration
1-Port Calibration
5-8 Menus Block
Antenna Calibration
Antenna Calibration
Antenna calibration allows measured data to be expressed in dBi (dB relative to an isotropic
radiator). A standard gain antenna with known or dened gain values at specic frequencies is
used as a transfer standard to calibrate the system.
Calibrating with a standard gain antenna corrects for the transmission response errors.
An optional part of antenna calibration is an \isolation calibration." This calibration reduces
crosstalk errors between input channels. The isolation cal requires a high quality RF load as a
calibration standard. The load you need is determined by the connector type and frequency
range of your system.
Important Terms
Cal
\Cal" is an abbreviation for \Calibration."
Cal Denition A cal denition is an ASCII le you create using a text editor. It contains
theoretical or measured frequency and gain values for the standard gain
antenna. You can create the le using any computer-based text editor
which can save text in plain ASCII format. The le can then be loaded into
the receiver from a DOS or LIF disc. A cal denition contains up to seven
\antenna denitions."
Antenna
The gain data for a specic standard gain antenna is called an \antenna
Denition
denition."
A nished calibration data le. During the calibration, the standard gain
Cal Set
antenna is measured and its performance is compared to one or more antenna
denitions. Any dierences are stored in an internal \cal set register." These
dierences are the error coecients which, when subtracted from the
measurement, result in calibrated results. In antenna calibration, the nal
measurement data is expressed in units of antenna gain (dBi). Cal sets can be
stored in internal registers or to disc.
Angle Domain and Frequency Domain Calibrations
If you perform a calibration while in angle domain, the calibration will be at one frequency.
(Angle Domain makes measurements at only one frequency.)
If you perform a calibration while in Frequency Domain, you can calibrate over a range of
frequencies.
Using a Frequency Domain Calibration in Angle Domain.
HP recommends that you calibrate using Frequency Domain, which calibrates over a range of
frequencies. You can then switch to Angle Domain, and pick any of the frequencies from the
Frequency Domain calibration. This gives you instant access to many calibrated frequencies
(one at a time) when in Angle Domain.
Only one limitation applies; the frequency you want to measure (in angle domain) must exist in
the original calibration. The receiver does not interpolate between calibrated frequencies.
Here are the basic steps involved in antenna calibration:
Menus Block 5-9
Antenna Calibration
5-10 Menus Block
Antenna Calibration
Standard Gain Antenna Denitions
To perform a calibration, the receiver must know the published gain values of the standard
gain antenna. HP has supplied a le containing data for seven Narda standard gain horns.
If You Are Using a Narda Standard Gain Horn that is Already Dened:
Data for Narda models 638, 639, 640, 642, 643, 644, and 645 are supplied in a single cal
denition le. This le, AC_NAR1, is supplied on the Antenna/RCS Cal Disc which was shipped
with the HP 8530A. If you are using one of these horns, load AC_NAR1 as explained below:
1. Insert the Antenna/RCS Cal Disc into the HP 8530A's disc drive.
2. Press 4DISC5 LOAD CAL KITS ANTENNA CAL DEF , the receiver will display a le directory
showing AC_NAR1. Since it is the only cal denition on that disc, it will already be
highlighted.
3. Press LOAD FILE .
When you perform the antenna calibration you will see the Narda horns listed in a softkey
menu. Information on the Narda horns is provided at the end of the calibration section. Please
note that your Narda standard gain horn calibration data may be dierent than the data on le
AC_NAR1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If You Are Not Using One of the Pre-Dened Narda Horns:
Create your own cal denition le as explained in \Creating a Standard Gain Antenna
Denition", at the end of this chapter. You will need a personal computer and a text editor that
can save text in plain ASCII format.
Note
If you calibrate over a wide frequency range, you may need to use two or
more standard gain antennas. Some users have asked us: \When calibrating,
what happens when two of the standard gain antennas have overlapping
frequencies?" The answer is: Where the frequencies overlap, the receiver uses
the calibration data for the standard gain antenna that was measured last.
Performing an Antenna Calibration
Frequency Domain Calibration
Initial Setup, Finding Boresight
1. Mount the standard gain antenna on the proper antenna mount and connect it to your
system.
2. Press: 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press: 4DOMAIN5 FREQUENCY .
4. Press: STIMULUS 4MENU5 SINGLE POINT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press 4CENTER5 and enter a frequency in the approximate center of the calibration
frequency range.
6. Press 4MARKER5.
7. Select the desired axis on the positioner controller.
Menus Block 5-11
Antenna Calibration
8. Move the positioner so the antenna is somewhere near its boresight position (a rough
approximation is ne).
9. Move the positioner until the at line reaches maximum amplitude (or minimum amplitude
if your antenna has a null at boresight). It is helpful to watch the marker value readout (in
the upper-left portion of the display). This digital readout of the amplitude makes it easy
to observe small (0.1 dB) changes.
10. Boresighting is usually interactive between axes, so repeat steps 5, 6, and 7 for each axis
until true boresight is found.
Choosing Calibration Stimulus Settings
1. Perform step a or b below, depending on if you want to calibrate at one or more frequency
points.
a. If you only want to calibrate at a single frequency press STIMULUS 4MENU5
SINGLE POINT . Press 4CENTER5 followed by the desired frequency, proceed to Antenna
Calibration Steps, below.
b. To calibrate over a range of frequencies, you must choose a sweep mode. Any mode
will work but the Frequency List mode is strongly recommended. The Frequency List
STEP SIZE function allows you to enter a known increment frequency. This is why
the Frequency List mode is better when performing a calibration. Ramp and step
sweep modes only allow you to choose a NUMBER of POINTS , and the receiver chooses
the increment frequency. This limits exibility in the calibration and often results in
inconvenient increment values (like 17.67 MHz). STEP SIZE allows you to choose a step
size that is convenient.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
Ramp Sweep mode is not always usable, depending on how your system is
congured. Ramp Sweep mode will not function is systems that use an LO
source. In addition, Ramp Sweep requires two BNC connections between the
receiver and the RF source.
Sometimes wide frequency ranges require you to use two or more standard gain antennas
to cover the whole frequency range. If this is the case, enter the entire frequency range
during the procedure below.
To use Frequency List mode, as recommended, perform the following sub steps:
i. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE EDIT LIST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ii. Press EDIT SEGMENT: START and enter the desired start frequency (for example,
8.2 GHZ).
iii. Press STOP and enter the desired stop frequency (for example, 12.4 GHz).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
iv. Press STEP SIZE and enter the desired frequency increment value. Assume for
a moment that your standard gain antenna has documented gain values every 50
MHz. You can choose smaller increments (for example, 25 MHz), and the receiver will
interpolate between known gain points. (Straight-line interpolation is performed.)
v. Press DONE . The receiver will display the number of points it will use in the
measurement, based on the selected step size.
vi. Press DONE again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
vii. Press FREQUENCY LIST to select Frequency List mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-12 Menus Block
Antenna Calibration
Antenna Calibration Steps
2. Press the 4CAL5 key (located in the MENUS block), then press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANT. CAL uWave A.1 FAR FIELD:RESPONSE
A menu will appear with seven standard gain antenna denitions to choose from.
3. Select the denition for your standard gain antenna. If you must create a denition for your
standard gain antenna, refer to \Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition", at the end
of this chapter.
The receiver will now measure the standard gain antenna, and create a list of osets called
a \Cal Set."
If you only want to measure one standard gain antenna, press DONE RESPONSE and proceed
to \Finishing the Gain Calibration," below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
If you see the error message: CAUTION: ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED,
the standard gain antenna does not cover the entire frequency range of the
calibration. You should do one of the following things:
a. Measure an additional standard gain antenna to cover the additional
frequencies.
b. Use a standard gain antenna that covers the entire frequency range. If your
antenna is specied to cover the selected frequency range: Make sure the
standard gain antenna denition really has entries for the entire frequency
range of that antenna. The person who created the \denition" le for that
antenna may not have entered values for its entire range. Refer to the
section on creating standard gain antenna denitions, in this chapter.
c. Select a calibration frequency span that is within the frequency range of the
standard gain antenna and do the calibration over again.
4. If you are calibrating for a wide frequency range, requiring more than one standard gain
antenna:
a. Mount the next standard gain antenna.
b. If necessary, boresight the antenna. You must stay in the current Domain and Sweep
Mode. For example, if you are currently in Frequency List mode, the receiver must
remain in this mode during boresighting or the calibration will be ruined. With a marker
still ON, turn the antenna until boresight (for that axis) is found. Turn the antenna in
small steps because of the delay between completed sweeps. Do this for each axis until
boresight is found.
c. Select the appropriate standard gain antenna denition from the softkey menu.
d. Repeat these sub-steps for each standard gain antenna you need to measure.
e. Press DONE RESPONSE when you are done.
If the error message: CAUTION: ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED appears, then the
denitions for your standard gain antennas do not cover the entire frequency range you
have selected. There are either gaps between adjacent denitions, or they do not provide
full coverage near the beginning or end of the frequency range.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Finishing the Gain Calibration
5. You are now done with the gain portion of the calibration. Now you should decide if you
want to perform an \isolation calibration." An isolation calibration reduces crosstalk
between inputs (either reference-to-test or test-to-test), and requires a high-quality 50
load.
Menus Block 5-13
Antenna Calibration
a. If you do not want to perform an Isolation Calibration, press OMIT ISOLATION and
proceed to \Saving the Cal Set to a Cal Set Register."
b. If you want to perform an isolation calibration, refer to \Isolation Calibration," below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Isolation Calibration
6. Replace the standard gain antenna with a 50 load. Make sure the load's connector is
torqued as shown in Table 5-1 to prevent RF leakage.
Table 5-1. Proper Connector Torque
Connector Torque Torque Torque Wrench
cm-kg N-cm in-lbs Part Number
Type-N
52
508
45
8710-1935
3.5 mm
9.2
90
8
8720-1765
SMA
5.7
56
5
8710-1582
2.4 mm
9.2
90
8
8720-1765
7. Press ISOLATION . The receiver will perform the isolation calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Saving the Cal Set to a Cal Set Register
8. Press SAVE FAR FIELD . A menu of eight cal set registers will appear. Press any of the eight
register softkeys and the cal set will be saved to that register.
The receiver will now turn calibration ON, so any measurement you make will be calibrated.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-14 Menus Block
Antenna Calibration
Angle Domain Calibration
Initial Setup, Finding Boresight
1. Mount the standard gain antenna on the proper antenna mount and connect it to your
system.
2. Press 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4DOMAIN5 ANGLE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 SINGLE ANGLE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press FREQUENCY OF MEAS , then enter the desired calibration frequency.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press MORE CONTINUAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press TRIGGER MODE TRIG SRC FREE RUN .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Select the desired parameter, 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or 4PARAM 45.
9. Turn on Marker 1 by pressing 4MARKER5 MARKER 1 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Now use the positioner controls to move the antenna. Watch the data readout for
Marker 1. When the marker reaches peak value you have found the boresight for that
particular axis.
11. Repeat for each axis, if necessary. Boresighting is iterative so you may have to measure
back and forth between axes until the true boresight is found.
Antenna Calibration Steps
1. Press the 4CAL5 key (located in the MENUS block), then press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ANT. CAL uWave A.1 FAR FIELD:RESPONSE
A menu will appear with seven standard gain antenna denitions to choose from.
2. Select the denition for your standard gain antenna. If you must create a denition for your
standard gain antenna, refer to \Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition", at the end
of this chapter.
The receiver will now measure the standard gain antenna, and create a list of osets called
a \Cal Set."
Press DONE RESPONSE and proceed to \Finishing the Gain Calibration," below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Finishing the Gain Calibration
3. You are now done with the gain portion of the calibration. Now you should decide if you
want to perform an \isolation calibration." An isolation calibration reduces crosstalk
between inputs (either reference-to-test or test-to-test), and requires a high-quality 50
load.
a. If you do not want to perform an Isolation Calibration, press OMIT ISOLATION and
proceed to \Saving the Cal Set to a Cal Set Register."
b. If you want to perform an isolation calibration, refer to \Isolation Calibration," below.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-15
Antenna Calibration
Isolation Calibration
4. Replace the standard gain antenna with a 50 load. Make sure the load's connector is
torqued as shown in Table 5-2 to prevent RF leakage.
Table 5-2. Proper Connector Torque
Connector Torque Torque Torque Wrench
cm-kg N-cm in-lbs Part Number
Type-N
52
508
45
8710-1935
3.5 mm
9.2
90
8
8720-1765
SMA
5.7
56
5
8710-1582
2.4 mm
9.2
90
8
8720-1765
5. Press ISOLATION . The receiver will perform the isolation calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Saving the Cal Set to a Cal Set Register
6. Press SAVE FAR FIELD . A menu of eight cal set registers will appear. Press any of the eight
register softkeys and the cal set will be saved to that register.
The receiver will now turn calibration ON, so any measurement you make will be calibrated.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-16 Menus Block
Antenna Calibration
Important Note On Antenna Measurements
Before you make actual measurements (with calibration ON), IT IS VITAL THAT YOU READ
THE FOLLOWING:
The frequencies you measure must exactly match the frequencies in the cal set le.
For example, assume you have calibrated from 10 GHz to 11 GHz with a step size of 100 MHz.
The calibrated frequencies in the cal set are:
10.0 GHz
10.1 GHz
10.2 GHz
10.3 GHz
10.4 GHz
10.5 GHz
10.6 GHz
10.7 GHz
10.8 GHz
10.9 GHz
11.0 GHz
You can measure any of these frequencies during the actual measurement. You cannot,
however, measure any other frequencies. For example, you cannot measure 10.55 GHz. The
receiver does not interpolate between frequencies in the cal set.
This is another reason why Frequency List mode is so useful when performing calibrations.
Entering a known, convenient step size makes it easy to know what frequencies are in the cal
set. Thus, you know precisely which frequencies you can measure with that calibration.
Things to Try
Assume you created a calibration in the Frequency Domain, using the Frequency List mode,
and you save the cal set to Cal Set Register 1. Now go to the Angle Domain. Some HP 8530A
receivers will now display the message CAUTION: CORRECTION RESET. Simply press 4CAL5
CORRECTION ON CAL SET 1 to turn the calibration ON again. The Frequency Domain
calibration is still valid, even though you are now in the Angle Domain. You can select any of
the frequencies in the original Frequency Domain calibration, and the calibration will remain
valid.
Now change the start and stop angle, notice that the calibration remains valid.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-17
RCS Calibration
RCS Calibration
RCS Calibration Description
This section explains how to perform an RCS calibration. RCS Response and Background
calibration reduce range errors using a calibration target of known radar cross section. The
Response portion of the calibration reduces phase and amplitude discrepancies between
the test and reference channels (tracking errors). The Background portion measures the
empty antenna chamber to reduce undesired reections (clutter). After performing an RCS
calibration, log magnitude measurements are expressed in decibels per square meter (dBsm).
You should become familiar with concepts presented in the Time Domain chapter before
performing an RCS calibration.
Important Information about Gating During the Calibration
Keep the following in mind if using gating during RCS calibration:
After the RCS calibration is completed, the calibrated response of the Calibration Target
will move, and the gate will no longer be centered around it. To make sure that you do not
accidentally leave the gate around the old (now incorrect) position, the receiver turns gating
OFF once calibration is done. When you perform actual RCS measurements, turn gating back
ON and center it around the response of your measurement target. Usually the target will be
at 0.00 seconds.
Remember, gating has limitations. Do not use gating if:
You are measuring a limited frequency span or number of points.
If using a frequency list where the points are not evenly spaced.
5-18 Menus Block
RCS Calibration
RCS Calibration Overview
Figure 5-2. Menus Associated with RCS Calibration
1. Determine the requirements of your measurement, including:
a. Stimulus Settings
b. Range Resolution
c. Alias Free Range
d. Gating Requirements
These requirements will determine the stimulus, window, and gate settings you should use.
2. Select Frequency Domain
3. Select stimulus settings, using one of the following methods:
Set start and stop frequency and number of points. This method is acceptable if you are
performing RCS calibrations for use in the Time Domain.
Use Frequency List mode with a start frequency, stop frequency, and a specic frequency
step value. This method allows you to know the exact frequencies represented in the
calibration. This method is preferable if you are going to make RCS measurements in
the Angle Domain. Why? Because you can then make calibrated measurements at any
Menus Block 5-19
RCS Calibration
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
frequency that exists in the calibration. (Remember, when making actual measurements,
the receiver cannot interpolate between calibrated frequencies.)
If desired, turn ON gating.
If desired, turn ON Averaging.
Specify RCS target type and its physical dimensions.
Perform the actual RCS calibration.
After the calibration, use UPDATE BACKGROUND if you change target mounts or if other
changes occur to the background. This updates the calibration so it is accurate given the
new background conditions.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RCS Calibration Procedure
As mentioned above, rst determine the needs of your measurement, then use the information
in Chapter 13, Time Domain Measurements, to calculate required start frequency, stop
frequency, and number of points, or the Frequency List mode settings required.
Select Stimulus Values
1. Enter the required frequency values using Start, Stop, and Number of Points, or by using
the Frequency List mode.
Select Gating (if Desired)
Gating is explained in the Time Domain chapter.
2. Use Gating as explained below:
a. If you are going to perform a gated calibration, make sure any previous calibrations are
OFF. THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT.
Press 4CAL5 CORRECTION OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
b. Next, determine the location and width of the target response. An easy way to do this
is to use display math:
i. Remove the RCS target and allow the receiver to measure one full frequency sweep.
ii. Save the measurement to memory by pressing:
4DISPLAY5 DATA -> MEMORY
iii. Select math subtraction mode by pressing:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SELECT DEFAULTS MATH OPERATIONS MINUS (-)
iv. Place the target on the mount, and allow another full measurement sweep.
v. Select Data minus Memory mode by pressing:
4DISPLAY5 MATH (-)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
vi. Only the target response will appear on the screen.
c. Press 4DOMAIN5 TIME BAND PASS SPECIFY GATE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
d. Choose the gate position and size using the gate START and STOP , or CENTER and
SPAN softkeys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
e. Select gate shape by pressing GATE SHAPE , then either MAXIMUM , WIDE , NORMAL , or
MINIMUM . In most circumstances, the factory default (Normal) is the best choice.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-20 Menus Block
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RCS Calibration
f. Turn Gating ON by pressing 4PRIOR MENU5 GATE ON .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
g. Position the gate around the target response.
If your target is a sphere, the placement of the gate is critical. Spheres produce a
secondary reection caused by RF energy propagating around the back of the sphere,
which ultimately arrives back at the receive antenna. This produces the secondary
reection, known as a \creeping wave."
If the creeping clearly separate from the main target response, place the gate around
just the main response. In this case make sure you select the OPTICAL SPHERE model
when you dene the RCS target (the next step).
If the main target response and the creeping wave are not clearly distinct and
separate, position the gate around both of them. In this case make sure you select the
TARGET: SPHERE model when you dene the RCS target (the next step).
Do not attempt to gate out very large background reections, or subsequent measurements will
not be accurate.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dene the RCS Target
The next step is to select they type of RCS target you use during calibration, and enter its
physical dimensions.
3. Press 4CAL5 MORE DEFINE RCS TARGT TARGET SELECTION .
4. Select the type of calibration target by pressing one of the following:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TARGET: SPHERE
PLATE
TRIHEDRAL
CYLINDER
DIHEDRAL
OPTICAL SPHERE
If You are Using a Sphere:
If you are NOT using gating during the calibration, always select TARGET: SPHERE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The Dierence between Sphere and Optical Sphere
The top selection, SPHERE , computes the exact solution for the radar cross section of a
perfectly conducting sphere.
The OPTICAL SPHERE selection computes the radar cross section of the sphere based on
geometric optics - in which the RF signal is treated as \optical rays" according to physical
principles of reection and refraction. The optical sphere selection is best used when the
wavelength of the RF energy is large enough that it approximates the behavior of light.
This is called the \optical region" of the sphere. The RF energy is in the sphere's \optical
region" when the following relationship between wavelength and sphere radius is true:
(2r 4 ) > 10
Where is wavelength and r is the radius of the sphere.
NOTE: Radar Cross Section data for all target types except SPHERE are based on geometric
optics.
5. Press 4PRIOR MENU5.
6. Enter the required (metric) dimensions of the target using the appropriate dimension
softkeys for each type of target:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-21
RCS Calibration
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TARGET RADIUS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TARGET HEIGHT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TARGET WIDTH
Figure 5-3 shows the dimensions required for each type of target.
To specify dimensions in meters, terminate the value with 4x15. To specify dimensions in
millimeters, use 4k/m5.
Figure 5-3. Dimensions Required by Dierent Target Types
On Dihedral and Plate targets, height and width are interchangeable. Trihedral
and sphere targets only require one dimension to be specied.
Note
Select Averaging (if Desired)
7. If desired, turn Averaging ON and set it to the required value. For example, press:
RESPONSE 4MENU5 AVERAGING ON/restart n [x1]]. Where n is the desired averaging
factor.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Perform the Calibration
8. Make sure the RCS target is on the mount.
9. Press 4CAL5 RCS CAL TARGET RESPONSE .
10. If gating is ON, you can select whether it will aect the calibration. To make current gating
settings aect the calibration, press GATING YES . If GATING NO is selected, current gating
settings will not aect the calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-22 Menus Block
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RCS Calibration
11. Measure the calibration target by pressing MEASURE target name . (This softkey displays
the name of the currently-selected target.)
At this time the receiver performs a response calibration on the target. This part of the
calibration reduces magnitude and phase discrepancies between the test and reference
channels (tracking errors).
12. Press TARGT RESP DONE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Optional Background Calibration
The next step is to measure the background. The background consists of the chamber
and mount without the RCS calibration target. This part of the calibration is an isolation
calibration. It reduces the eects of undesired chamber reections (clutter).
If you do not want to perform the background portion of the calibration, press
OMIT BACKGROUND DONE RESP&BACK . Now select one the of eight cal set registers to hold the
calibration data.
To perform the background calibration:
13. Remove the RCS target.
14. Press MEASURE BACKGROUND
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
15. Press DONE RESP&BACK . Now select one the of eight cal set registers to hold the
calibration data.
16. Now proceed with normal RCS measurements.
If you used single sweep mode to nd the target response (earlier in this procedure),
remember to change sweep mode back to the type needed for actual measurements. Most
often this is the Continual mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Updating the Background
Once calibration is done, if you change the RCS mount, or the background changes, you should
update the background. To do this:
1. Make sure the appropriate RCS calibration is ON.
2. Press: 4CAL5 RCS CAL UPDATE BACKGROUND
3. Press DONE RESP&BACK . Now select one the of eight cal set registers to hold the calibration
data:
a. You can store the updated calibration to the register which holds the original version, or:
b. If you change mounts regularly, you can store the updated calibration to a dierent cal
set register. Then you can recall the register appropriate for each RCS mount.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-23
Network Analyzer Calibrations
Network Analyzer Calibrations
This section explains network analyzer calibrations in detail.
What is Network Analyzer Calibration?
Network analyzer calibration greatly reduces repeatable, system-induced errors. This is
achieved by rst measuring the magnitude and phase response of one or more high-quality
standards. The standards, described below, are placed (one at a time) where the device under
test (DUT) would normally be. In other words, if the DUT would normally be placed at the end
of a certain cable, that's the exact spot you should place the standard device. This removes
errors caused by the cable and its associated connectors. This location is called the \test port."
The number of standards required depends on the calibration type.
Standards
Here are the devices that may be required during a network analyzer calibration:
Open
An open is a termination that presents an open circuit to the receiver. A
natural question to ask at this point is: \Why use a special termination when
you could just remove the device under test and leave the connection open?"
The reason is that a simple open connection has unwanted capacitance that
adversely aects the calibration. A \shielded open" termination solves this
problem.
A short is a termination that presents a short circuit at the test port.
Short
There are two types of loads, xed loads (lowband and broadband), and sliding
Load
loads.
Fixed loads are small terminations that present a nearly perfect 50 ohm
impedance. This absorbs almost all RF energy that is produced by the RF
Source. There are two types of xed load: lowband and broadband.
A sliding load is a long device with a moving plunger. This type of load is only
used in 1-Port calibrations. The sliding load has index marks along its length.
These marks allow you to move the plunger to dierent positions required by
the 1-Port calibration. The device has a designed-in \mismatch" whose phase
vector changes as you move the mismatch element (the mismatch element
moves when you move the plunger). The receiver compares the vector change
at the dierent element positions, and interpolates (very accurately) the
directivity errors in the system.
Calibration Kits
The calibration standards mentioned above can be obtained by purchasing a Hewlett-Packard
calibration kit. Cal kits can only be used with the connector type they are designed for. (For
example, there are dierent kits for 3.5-mm and type-N connector types.)
Always use a cal kit that has the proper connector types for your test port. Do not use
adapters with a cal kit of the wrong connector type. Your test port can have adapters on it,
provided that the adaptor will remain in place when you attach the DUT.
Data les provided with each cal kit must be loaded into the receiver. These data tell the
receiver the expected performance values of the standards. Cal kit data les are also called
\cal kit denitions" in this manual, because they dene the actual performance of the devices.
After the receiver measures the standards, it compares their apparent performance with
the information in the cal kit denition. Any dierences are due to errors in the system or
cables. The receiver produces a list of the dierences, called calibration coecients. When
5-24 Menus Block
Network Analyzer Calibrations
you later make actual measurements, the calibration coecients correct for the errors in the
system, thus producing highly accurate measurements. The dynamic range and accuracy of the
measurement is then limited by random errors and drift eects, and by the accuracy to which
the characteristics of the standard devices are known. This is the basic concept of vector
accuracy enhancement.
Other publications discuss the causes of these errors, details of the accuracy enhancement error
model, the physical aspects of the calibration standards, the mathematical response models of
the standards, and the vector mathematics used to correct the measured data. Background
theory and additional application information is described in the HP Application Note \Vector
Accuracy Enhancement."
Loading a Cal Kit Denition
1. Insert the disk.
2. Press 4DISC5 LOAD CAL KITS NETWORK CAL KIT .
A menu will appear showing the contents of the disc. HP cal kit discs actually contain data
les for several calibration kits.
3. Use the knob to select the data le for your cal kit.
4. Press LOAD FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Important Denitions
Cal
Cal Kit
Cal Kit Denition
Cal Set
Standard Class
\Cal" is an abbreviation for \calibration."
A cal kit is a purchased set of calibration standards,
including shorts, opens, and loads.
A data le that contains highly accurate data on the
performance of the cal kit devices.
A data le that holds the error coecients for a single
calibration. There are eight cal set registers in the HP
8530A, and you can save or load cal sets to or from disc.
A \standard class" would include all versions of one
type of termination. For example, the \shorts" standard
class is composed of all short terminations, including
male or female types.
Types of Network Analyzer Calibration
There are three types of network analyzer calibration available.
Response
A Response calibration measures and compensates for
amplitude and phase dierences between the test and reference
paths (tracking errors). The basic purpose of the cal is to
compensate for any attenuation or phase shift on either the
test or reference paths. The result of the calibration is that
the test and reference paths look nearly identical (electrically).
The advantage is that systematic tracking errors are greatly
reduced.
The response portion of the calibration is identical to the
Response & Isolation
response calibration explained above. The isolation calibration
reduces the eects of crosstalk, which will improve the
Menus Block 5-25
Network Analyzer Calibrations
PARAM 1 1-Port
Calibration Overview
dynamic range of the system. Isolation cal is of great benet
when measuring lters or attenuators. High dynamic range
helps assure that low-level signals are not masked by crosstalk
responses.
The 1-Port calibration measures three classes of standards to
measure directivity, source match, and tracking (frequency
magnitude and phase) errors. A 1-Port calibration is only
available for Parameter 1. However, you can redene
Parameter 1 to ratio any two inputs you desire.
In a typical application:
Set up your system for the measurement you want to make.
Select the type of cal you want to perform, Response, Response & Isolation, or PARAM 1
1-Port.
Connect the rst calibration standard and press the softkey for that standard. Repeat this
step for each required standard.
Save the calibration in any of eight calibration set memories.
Make actual measurements
The following diagram shows a typical operating sequence used when the device under test is
measured using more than one set of stimulus conditions (frequency range, number of points,
source power).
5-26 Menus Block
Response Calibration
Response Calibration
A Response calibration measures and compensates for amplitude and phase dierences
between the test and reference paths (tracking errors). The comparison is done at the exact
point in the test setup that the device under test (DUT) is usually connected. In other words,
if your DUT is normally connected at the end of a 5 meter cable, then the calibration standard
should be placed on the end of that cable during the calibration.
The basic purpose of the cal is to compensate for any attenuation or phase shift on either the
test or reference paths. The result of the calibration is that the test and reference paths look
nearly identical (electrically). The advantage is that systematic tracking errors are greatly
reduced.
A Response calibration requires a single standard class to measure the selected reference
path's frequency response (amplitude and phase). To perform a calibration for reection
measurements, you can use an open or a short. For transmission calibration use a \thru" (a
short cable). Refer to Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4. Calibration Setup for Response Cal
When DONE is selected, the receiver calculates error coecients. The coecients modify
normal measurement data so any amplitude and phase dierences between test and reference
paths are minimized.
Both basic and service parameters can use this calibration method.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-27
Response and Isolation Calibration
Figure 5-5. Transmission and Reection Response Error Models
Response Calibration Procedure
1. Press 4DOMAIN5 FREQUENCY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the desired Parameter and Stimulus settings.
3. Press 4CAL5 NETWK CAL CALIBRATE: RESPONSE .
4. At the test port (see Figure 5-4):
a. If calibrating for reection measurements, connect an open or a short to the test port.
b. If calibrating for transmission measurements, connect a length of transmission line (a
\thru") between the test port and the b1 input.
5. Torque the connection, or connections, as specied in Table 5-1.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Important If the standard labels (shown on the display) includes an M (male), or an F
(female), choose the sex that applies to the test port connector. This only occurs
when you are using sexed test port connectors such as type-N.
For example: Assume the test port has a female type-N connector. You
should choose the OPEN (F) or SHORT (F) softkey. The sex shown on the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
softkey menu refers to the sex of the test port, not to the sex of the calibration
standard.
6. Press SHORT , OPEN , or THRU , depending on the type of standard you have connected.
While the standard is being measured, the message: WAIT-MEASURING CAL STANDARD
appears. Do not press any front panel key while this message is displayed unless it is your
intent to stop the calibration process. When the standard has been measured, the standard
name will be underlined.
You only need to measure one standard for a Response calibration.
7. Press DONE RESPONSE . The Cal Set Save menu will now appear.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press any of the eight cal set register softkeys to save the cal set.
If the calibration memory register has an asterisk ( * ) next to it there is already a
calibration stored in it. If you select that register anyway, the old calibration set will be
deleted and replaced by the new one. If internal storage is already full, a calibration
set must be deleted using DELETE CAL SET before calibration can proceed. Selecting a
calibration set to receive error coecient data automatically replaces the old data with the
new data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-28 Menus Block
Error Correction Now Goes ON
Response and Isolation Calibration
The receiver will now turn calibration ON automatically. You can now make calibrated
measurements.
Response and Isolation Calibration
A Response calibration reduces tracking errors. Tracking errors are phase and magnitude
systematic dierences in the test and reference paths. This subject is discussed in more detail
in Response Calibration, earlier in this section. The response portion of this calibration will
greatly reduce measurement errors caused by tracking dierences.
The isolation calibration reduces the eects of crosstalk, which will improve the dynamic range
of the system. Isolation cal is of great benet when measuring lters or attenuators. High
dynamic range helps assure that low-level signals are not masked by crosstalk responses.
The response and isolation calibration requires two standard classes. The calibration standards
you need for the response calibration depends on whether you are making a reection or
transmission measurement.
Response Calibration
For reection calibration you need to use an open or a short. For transmission calibration use a
\thru" (a short cable). Refer to Figure 5-4.
Isolation Calibration
Isolation calibration requires the use of one or two loads. Refer to Figure 5-6. If you are
calibrating for reection measurements, place a single load as shown. If you are calibrating for
transmission measurements, place two loads as shown in Figure 5-6
Figure 5-6. Calibration Setup for Isolation Cal
Figure 5-7 shows the error model for transmission/reection response and isolation errors.
Menus Block 5-29
Response and Isolation Calibration
Figure 5-7.
Transmission/Reection Response and Isolation Error Model
Response & Isolation Procedure
1. Press 4DOMAIN5 FREQUENCY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the desired Parameter and Stimulus settings.
3. Press 4CAL5 NETWK CAL CALIBRATE: RESPONSE & ISOL'N .
4. Press RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. At the test port (see Figure 5-4):
a. If calibrating for reection measurements, connect an open or a short to the test port.
b. If calibrating for transmission measurements, connect a length of transmission line (a
\thru") between the test port and the b1 input.
6. Torque the connection, or connections, as specied in Table 5-1.
Important If the standard labels (shown on the display) includes an M (male), or an F
(female), choose the sex that applies to the test port connector. This only occurs
when you are using sexed test port connectors such as type-N.
For example: Assume the test port has a female type-N connector. You
should choose the OPEN (F) or SHORT (F) softkey. The sex shown on the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
softkey menu refers to the sex of the test port, not to the sex of the calibration
standard.
7. Press SHORT , OPEN , or THRU , depending on the type of standard you have connected.
While the standard is being measured, the message: WAIT-MEASURING CAL STANDARD
appears. Do not press any front panel key while this message is displayed unless it is your
intent to stop the calibration process. When the standard has been measured, the standard
name will be underlined.
You only need to measure one standard for a Response calibration.
8. Press DONE RESPONSE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-30 Menus Block
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Response and Isolation Calibration
9. At the test port (see Figure 5-6):
a. If calibrating for reection measurements, connect a load to the test port.
b. If calibrating for transmission measurements, connect loads to both the test port and to
the b1 input.
10. Torque the connection, or connections, as specied in Table 5-1.
11. Press ISOL'N STD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12. After WAIT-MEASURING CAL STANDARD is no longer displayed, press SAVE RESP&ISOL .
The Cal Set Save menu will now appear.
13. Press any of the eight cal set register softkeys to save the cal set.
If the calibration memory register has an asterisk ( * ) next to it there is already a
calibration stored in it. If you select that register anyway, the old calibration set will be
deleted and replaced by the new one. If internal storage is already full, a calibration
set must be deleted using DELETE CAL SET before calibration can proceed. Selecting a
calibration set to receive error coecient data automatically replaces the old data with the
new data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Error Correction Now Goes ON
The receiver will now turn calibration ON automatically. You can now make calibrated
measurements.
Menus Block 5-31
1-Port Calibration
1-Port Calibration
This calibration error model provides the best accuracy for measurement of a 1-port device,
providing full vector error correction for directivity, source match, and reection signal path
frequency response. The procedure uses three standards, usually a shielded open circuit, a
short circuit, and a load. Refer to Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8. Calibration Setup for 1 Port Cal
During the 1-Port calibration, all standards are connected at the test port (the point at which
the DUT will be connected during normal measurements). 1-Port calibrations are only available
with PARAM 1. However, you can redene PARAM 1 to ratio any two inputs you desire.
Figure 5-9 shows the error model for transmission/reection response and isolation errors.
Figure 5-9. 1-Port Error Model
Standards Required for a 1-Port Calibration
The 1-Port calibration sequence requires a minimum of three standards, an open, a short, and
at least one standard from the Loads menu.
5-32 Menus Block
1-Port Calibration
Figure 5-10. 1-Port Cal Menu
For some calibration kits, the standards on the Loads menu are specied as to the frequency
range they cover:
lowband loads are used for low microwave frequencies, usually up to 2 or
LOWBAND
3 GHz.
broadband loads are used over the full frequency range of the system.
BROADBAND
sliding loads are used for high microwave frequencies, usually starting at 2 or
SLIDING
3 GHz.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 5-11. LOADS Frequency Ranges
Performing a 1-Port Calibration
1. Press 4DOMAIN5 FREQUENCY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the desired Stimulus settings.
3. Press 4PARAM 15 4CAL5 NETWK CAL PARAM 1 1-PORT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. At the test port (see Figure 5-8), connect a shielded open circuit and torque it properly.
Important If the standard labels (shown on the display) includes an \M" (male), or an
\F" (female), choose the sex that applies to the test port connector. This only
occurs in sexed test port connectors such as type-N.
For example: Assume your test port has a female connector. You should choose
the OPEN (F) softkey. The sex shown on the softkey menu refers to the sex of
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the Test Port, not to the sex of the calibration standard.
Menus Block 5-33
1-Port Calibration
5. Press PARAM 1: OPEN . Open circuit data is measured.
While the standard is being measured, the message: WAIT-MEASURING CAL STANDARD
appears. Do not press any front panel key while this message is displayed unless it is
your intent to stop the measurement process. When the standard has been measured, the
standard name will be underlined.
6. Connect a short to the test port.
7. Press PARAM 1: SHORT . Short circuit data is measured.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
8. Press PARAM 1: LOADS to present the Loads menu. The loads you must use depends
on the frequency range of the calibration. The calibration kit will have the appropriate
standards for the frequency range covered by the kit. Measure the load, or loads, that
apply to your setup:
a. If required, connect a broadband load to the test port. Press BROADBAND .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
b. If required, connect a lowband load to the test port. Press LOWBAND .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
c. If required, connect a sliding load, and perform the following:
i. Move sliding element to the rst index mark.
ii. Press SLIDE IS SET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
iii. In this way measure ve to eight more index marks, pressing SLIDE IS SET each
time.
iv. Press SLIDING LOAD DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9. Press DONE LOADS . If the message ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED appears, then the
loads were not specied for the current frequency range (for example, only the LOWBAND
load was used for a sweep that crossed 2 GHz).
10. Press SAVE 1-PORT CAL then select any of the eight cal set registers.
If the calibration memory register has an asterisk ( * ) next to it there is already a
calibration stored in it. If you select that register anyway, the old calibration set will be
deleted and replaced by the new one. If internal storage is already full, a calibration
set must be deleted using DELETE CAL SET before calibration can proceed. Selecting a
calibration set to receive error coecient data automatically replaces the old data with the
new data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Error Correction Now Goes ON
The receiver will now turn calibration ON automatically. You can now make calibrated
measurements.
5-34 Menus Block
Storing and Loading Calibration Data
Supplementary Calibration Subjects
This portion of the calibration section discusses supplemental calibration subjects:
Storing and Loading Calibration Data (to/from disc)
Turning On an Existing Cal Set
Principles and Care of Calibration Standards
Verifying Calibration Data
Modifying Network Analyzer Cal Kit Denitions
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set (error correction data)
Adjusting Trim Sweep
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition
Storing and Loading Calibration Data (to/from disc)
Storing the Cal Set to Disc
Calibrations are sensitive to receiver stimulus settings. When you save a calibration to internal
memory or to disc, you should also save the current instrument state the same way. If saving
to disc, name the instrument state so you will know that it applies to the cal set le. Later,
when you want to use that calibration set, you must rst activate the instrument state that
applies to that cal set.
There are two ways to store cal sets to disc.
You can store a single cal set to a le.
You can store all eight cal sets to a single le.
Storing a Single Cal Set to a File
1. Insert a formatted disk, label side facing the CRT.
2. Press 4DISC5 STORE CAL SET 1-8 , then select the cal set register (1 through 8) that you
want to store to disk.
3. Use the \label maker" menu that appears to enter a name for the le. The le name prex
(CS ) is already entered. Use the knob and SELECT LETTER softkey to enter the desired le
name. You can enter up to seven characters. Press STORE FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Replacing an Existing File
If you want to replace an existing le, do not use the label maker feature. Instead, press
REPLACE MENU , a directory of cal set les (on the current disc) will appear. Use the knob to
select the le you want to replace, then press REPLACE FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-35
Storing and Loading Calibration Data
Storing Multiple Cal Sets to a File
If you have created several cal sets, you can store them all to a single le by performing the
following steps:
1. Press 4DISC5 STORE CAL SET ALL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Use the \label maker" menu that appears to enter a name for the le. The le name prex
(CA ) is already supplied. Use the knob and SELECT LETTER softkey to enter the desired
le name. Press STORE FILE .
If you want to replace an existing le, do not use the label maker features. Instead, press
REPLACE MENU , a directory of cal set les (on the current disc) will appear. Use the knob to
select the le you want to replace, then press REPLACE FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Loading Cal Sets from Disc
During normal work sessions you may need to load a cal set from disc and turn calibration ON.
Before you turn the calibration ON, remember to load the instrument state you saved for that
calibration.
Loading a File Containing a Single Cal Set
1. Load the instrument state that applies to the cal set you want to load.
2. Use 4RECALL5 to activate the instrument state you just loaded.
3. Press 4DISC5 LOAD CAL SET 1-8 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press the softkey for the register you want the cal set loaded into, (1 through 8).
5. A directory will appear that lists the cal set les on the disc. Use the knob to select the
desired cal set and press LOAD FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Now turn calibration ON by pressing 4CAL5 CORRECTION ON .
The cal set register menu will appear, allowing you to select one of the eight cal sets. Select
the one you just loaded.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Loading a File Containing Multiple Cal Sets
If you saved multiple cal sets to disc using the CAL SET ALL feature, you can load the le as
follows:
1. Press 4DISC5 LOAD CAL SET ALL .
2. A directory will appear that lists the \multiple cal set les" on the disc. Use the knob to
select the desired multiple cal set le and press LOAD FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Load the instrument state that applies to the cal set you want to use.
4. Use 4RECALL5 to activate the instrument state you just loaded.
5. Turn calibration ON by pressing 4CAL5 CORRECTION ON , then select the desired cal set from
the cal set menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-36 Menus Block
Storing and Loading Calibration Data
Turning ON an Existing Cal Set
CORRECTION OFF and CORRECTION ON provide selection of calibrated (ON) or non-calibrated
(OFF) vector measurement data. The C display annotation shows that correction is applied to
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the measurement.
Pressing CORRECTION ON brings the Cal Set Selection menu onto the display and the message
SELECT CALIBRATION SET onto the display. Cal set registers that actually contain cal sets are
marked with an asterisk (*). Select a register to recall that calibration set and apply it to the
measured data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Exiting and Resuming a Calibration Procedure
You can leave the cal menu at any time. For example, assume you want more averaging
or want to change display scale. To re-enter the calibration process, press 4CAL5
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE . This command resumes the calibration procedure where you left o,
and saves any calibration data you have already taken.
Example 1: You are in the middle of a 1-Port calibration, and have already measured two
standards. Before you measure the third you press RESPONSE 4MENU5 and activate averaging.
In order to return to the calibration properly, press 4CAL5 RESUME CAL SEQUENCE . The
calibration will resume at the point you were at previously. The data from the rst two
standards will be retained. Now go measure the third standard.
Example 2: You are performing an RCS calibration, and have nished the background portion.
You now go to the Target Response portion of the cal, and press GATING YES . Unfortunately,
you have forgotten to turn gating ON in the Domain menu, and an error message appears on
the screen. Press 4DOMAIN5 SPECIFY GATE GATE ON , then 4CAL5 RESUME CAL SEQUENCE .
Continue with the RCS cal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Limitations
Do not change any settings that aect the calibration (such as stimulus settings) in the middle
of a calibration. Doing so would invalidate the data for the standards you measured previously.
If you leave the Cal menu structure by pressing a function which displays another menu, press
4CAL5, RESUME CAL SEQUENCE . The last cal menu for which data is available will be displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Proper Connector Torque
Before performing a calibration, or regular measurements, it is important that all system
connections be torqued to specications (refer to Table 5-3). If system connections are not
properly torqued, the calibration or measurement you make may be inaccurate.
Table 5-3. Proper Connector Torque
Connector Torque Torque Torque Wrench
cm-kg N-cm in-lbs Part Number
508
45
8710-1935
Type-N
52
3.5 mm
9.2
90
8
8720-1765
5
8710-1582
56
5.7
SMA
8720-1765
8
90
9.2
2.4 mm
Menus Block 5-37
Principles and Care of Calibration Standards
Principles and Care of Calibration Standards
This section explains the special care required by network analyzer calibration standards,
principles behind their use, and common problems associated with them.
Calibration Standards Require Careful Handling
For best accuracy and repeatability, use great care in handling and storing the cal standards.
Their performance and accuracy depend on very precise mechanical tolerances, sometimes on
the order of a few ten thousandths of an inch. Therefore, cal standards must be handled and
stored more carefully than ordinary devices.
Proper Inspection, Cleaning, and Connection
Inspect and clean the connectors using the methods recommended in the calibration kit
manuals. Before using cal standards, gage the test port connectors, standards, cables, and
the test device to verify that the mating plane dimensions of all connectors are within the
allowable tolerances. To minimize repeatability errors, use an appropriate torque wrench when
tightening connections. Cal Kit manuals supply detailed information on cal standards, and
explain proper techniques for using them.
Principles of Operation
Network analyzer accuracy-enhancement is accomplished by measuring known cal standards.
The measured response is compared to the predicted response, then error terms are derived
from the magnitude and phase dierence between the measured response and the predicted
response. The predicted response is determined by using a complex mathematical model which
predicts the magnitude and phase response of the cal standard over its entire frequency range.
Thus, the accuracy improvement which can be expected is directly related to how well the
models predict the response of the standard. The model for each standard is specied in a data
le on the disc supplied with the calibration kits.
Examples of \perfect" standards are shown in the assumptions made for the xed and sliding
loads used in reection calibration. The device impedance is assumed to be exactly the system
characteristic impedance, Z0 , usually 50 ohms.
Quality of the Standards Aects Accuracy
The quality of the load used for calibration determines the eective directivity for reection
measurements. A high quality xed load exhibits the lowest repeatable return loss. The quality
of the sliding load is determined by the return loss of:
The connector.
The transmission line between the connector and the sliding element.
Standard Models Dier Depending on Connector Type
Standard models dier according to connector type. For example, the short circuit in the
Hewlett-Packard 7 mm calibration kit is modeled as a perfect zero ohm termination, having a
reection coecient of 16 6180 positioned at the reference plane. The short circuit in the
Hewlett-Packard 3.5-mm calibration kit is modeled as a perfect short displaced about 1 cm from
the reference plane.
Specications for the shielded open circuits add a reactive phase shift to the modeled response
characteristic. In order to model the typical non-linear phase shift, the shielded open circuit is
assumed to exhibit a phase shift with frequency that can be approximated using the equation
5-38 Menus Block
Modifying Network Analyzer Cal Kit Denitions
Ctotal = C0 + C1 *F + C2*F2 + C3*F3
Where C0 is the DC capacitance, C1*F is the capacitance times frequency, C2 *F2 is the
capacitance times frequency squared, and C3 *F3 is the capacitance times frequency cubed. The
shielded open circuits in the 3.5 mm calibration kit use a center pin extender, so the models for
these devices also include a linear phase shift component to account for the oset from the
reference plane.
Specications, Modifying a Cal Kit
The specications contained on the calibration kit data le are nominal values based on typical
expected responses of the standards. If you wish to substitute your own standards, or change
the models for the standards supplied in the calibration kit, you may use the MODIFY CAL KIT
sequence.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Common Problems
Common calibration problems which can be traced to standards are:
Non-repeatable contact due to wear, dirt, grease, or other contaminants on the contacting
surfaces or other accessible parts of the standard. Assure that the standard is properly
cleaned. Make sure the connector is dry.
Connector damage due to connecting the standard to a connector with mechanical defects or
out-of-spec tolerances. Use the connector gage on both the test port and the standard prior
to measurement calibration.
Poor contact due to improper alignment or torquing practice. Use the correct connection
technique and the proper torque wrench for each connection.
Using cal standards whose response does not match the constants in HP 8530 Cal Kit
memory. Load the proper cal kit data le for the cal kit you are using.
Verifying Calibration Data
Immediately following calibration, and at intervals during the measurement process, it is
recommended that you measure a standard device with known responses. This is to verify
that the system characteristics have not changed thus making the current calibration error
coecients invalid. Measuring a device from the calibration kit used for measurement
calibration will allow you to determine that the system is making repeatable measurements.
The measured response of a calibration standard will be exactly the modeled response if the
connection is repeatable.
To determine measurement accuracy, however, it is necessary to measure an independent
standard with known responses, such as the attenuators or air lines in the HP 8510 verication
kit, or a standard you produce that is representative of the devices you are testing. If
standards-quality data for the device is available, it can be compared with your measurement
results to determine accuracy. If the data is outside acceptable limits and good technique was
used during the calibration, then the system characteristics have changed, thus making the
current calibration error coecients invalid. Standards-quality measurement data is supplied
with the HP verication devices.
Menus Block 5-39
Modifying Network Analyzer Cal Kit Denitions
Modifying Network Analyzer Calibration Kit Denitions
The Modify Cal Kit menu structure allows you to create or change the mathematical model and
label for each calibration standard and to specify how the standards are used in the calibration
process. The following paragraphs provide an overview of the sequence used to modify a
calibration kit denition. Detailed descriptions of each part of the calibration kit denition is
included in the HP 8530 Keyword Dictionary. The calibration kit denition for each calibration
kit is provided as a Cal Kit data le on the disc supplied with each calibration kit, and it is
listed in the Standard Denitions and Standard Class Assignments tables in the calibration kit
manual.
You may explore the Modify Cal Kit menus without actually changing any part of the denition
stored in 8530 memory. Each time NETWK CAL 1 or MODIFY 1 NETWK KIT is pressed, the
selected calibration it denition is loaded from non-volatile memory to active memory.
Denitions and assignments that are not actually changed remain the same. The kit denition
is not re-stored into non-volatile memory until KIT DONE (MODIFIED) is pressed, so if you are
simply examining the contents, exit the menu structure by pressing 4CAL5, then NETWK CAL , do
not press KIT DONE (MODIFIED) .
Before entering the Modify Cal Kit menu structure, make certain that you have a copy of
the calibration kit denition you are about to modify. If necessary, copy the calibration kit
denition to disc by using the 4DISC5 STORE CAL KITS NETWORK CAL KIT operation in the disc
menu.
Now locate the calibration kit documentation tables found in the calibration kit manuals and
use them as worksheets to specify the characteristics of each standard, the label for the
standard, assign each standard to one or more classes, to specify the label for each class, and
nally to specify the new label for the modied calibration kit.
To modify the calibration kit denition:
1. Press 4CAL5 MORE MODIFY CAL SET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press SELECT STANDARD , then select the device denition to be modied by entering a
Standard Number (a numeric between 1 and 22). Now press 4x15.
The Standard Type menu is displayed with the current standard type underlined. Press the
appropriate standard type key,
3. Enter the appropriate characteristics of the standard using the Standard Denitions and
the Specify Oset menus.
4. Label the standard using LABEL STD key and the Title menu. This label will appear on the
cal Standard Selection menu during the calibration procedure.
5. Repeat this sequence for each new or modied standard in the calibration kit. Standard
denitions not changed during this process are included in the modied calibration kit with
their pre-existing values.
6. Press SPECIFY CLASS , then use the Specify Class menus to assign appropriate standards
to each of the classes required for the calibration type. When you select a class, the
current standard numbers assigned to that class are listed in the title area. Enter one, or
a sequence of, standard number followed by 4x15 for each standard to be used in the class,
then press CLASS DONE (SPEC'D) .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Now press LABEL CLASS and name each new or changed standard class. This label will
appear on the appropriate cal menus when there is more than one standard assigned to the
class.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-40 Menus Block
Modifying Network Analyzer Cal Kit Denitions
8. Repeat this procedure for each of the Standard Classes required for the calibration
procedure.
9. Next, press LABEL KIT and name the modied calibration kit. This name will appear in
the Cal menu, under the softkey label NETWK CAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
10. Finally, press KIT DONE (MODIFIED) to store the new kit in place of the current kit.
The last character in the calibration kit label is replaced with * when that kit denition has
been modied. This is why you must give the modied kit your a new label.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-41
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set
You can modify a calibration set in the following ways:
Reduce the number of points measured after a calibration set has been created.
Create a new set by zooming in on a frequency subset of the original calibration set
frequency range.
Reduce Number of Points After Calibration
This type of modication allows the number of points to be reduced without aecting the
calibration or the endpoints of the current frequency range. Thus, after a calibration using
801 points, either 401, 201, 101, or 51 points can be selected. This is accomplished by skipping
over alternate frequency points. For example, when the number of points is reduced from to
101 to 51, only every other point is measured.
Eects in Step Sweep Mode
This feature is designed for use in step sweep applications where you want to calibrate
using the maximum number of points, but perform portions of the test using less frequency
resolution. In these instances test time can be reduced by selecting fewer number of points,
resulting in a shorter time for the frequency sweep.
In the example shown in Figure 5-12, measurement calibration is performed using step sweep
and 801 points, then the number of points is reduced to 51. The time required to update the
trace is decreased by a factor of about 16. When necessary, the original number of points can
be selected by either changing the NUMBER OF POINTS selection, or, by recalling the original
calibration set.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 5-12. Reduced Number of Points After Calibration
If a number of points greater than the original calibration is selected, a caution message is
displayed and correction is turned o.
Eects in Ramp Sweep Mode
The number of points can also be reduced after calibration in the ramp sweep mode. However,
in order for the data to remain valid, the sweep time cannot change. This limits the usefulness
of this feature for ramp sweeps.
5-42 Menus Block
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set
After Factory Preset, the receiver automatically selects a faster sweep for 51 points than for
801 points. If the receiver's sweep time is changed after calibration, a caution is displayed
in order to alert the user to examine the resulting data carefully. The dynamics of the
measurement process change and the accuracy of the data may be aected. For best results
press STIMULUS 4MENU5 then SWEEP TIME and set the sweep time to 200 ms (milliseconds)
prior to measurement calibration. Now the sweep time will remain constant regardless of the
NUMBER OF POINTS selection.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Dening a Frequency Subset
After calibration in either ramp, step, or frequency list sweep mode, a subset of the current
frequency range can be selected by choosing new START/STOP or CENTER/SPAN frequencies
and a new calibration set. This provides a very useful \frequency zoom" function by allowing
the user to select any subset of the current frequency sweep. This results in faster sweeps
because fewer points are measured. The frequency subset menu is shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13. Modify Cal Set, Frequency Subset Menu
Create and Save the Frequency Subset
To dene a frequency subset:
1. Turn correction ON.
2. Press:
4CAL5 MORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MODIFY CAL SET
FREQUENCY SUBSET
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
As shown in Figure 5-14, markers appear on the trace to show you the current START/STOP
or CENTER/SPAN of the frequency subset.
3. Position these markers by pressing the SUBSET: START , SUBSET: STOP , SUBSET: CENTER
or SUBSET: SPAN softkeys and using the knob, step keys, or numeric entry keypad.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Now press CREATE & SAVE , then select a new calibration set. If you choose a register that
holds an existing cal set, the new cal set will overwrite the one currently in that register.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-43
Modifying a Network Analyzer Cal Set
The appropriate error coecients from the existing calibration set are transferred to the
new calibration set, a frequency list is created and stored, the frequency list sweep mode is
selected, and corrected data for the subset is displayed.
Figure 5-14. Dening a Frequency Subset
Note that the frequencies in the subset may be examined by selecting STIMULUS 4MENU5,
MORE , EDIT LIST . If this list is edited, correction is turned O. To return to the original
frequency sweep, recall the original calibration set. To select the frequency subset sweep,
recall the new calibration set.
Eects in Ramp Sweep Mode. A frequency subset created from a ramp sweep may be less
accurate than the original ramp sweep because the original calibration took place in ramp
sweep while the new frequency subset is measured in the frequency list sweep mode. Since
the ramp sweep is not phaselocked at each frequency point, the slight potential frequency
dierence at each point between the ramp and frequency list sweeps may cause the displayed
data to change.
To reduce this eect, prior to calibration in the ramp sweep mode, set the sweep time to
200 ms or greater, and perform the trim sweep (HP 8350-series and 8340-series sources only)
adjustment. The trim sweep adjustment, along with the slower sweep time minimizes the
frequency dierence at each point and improve accuracy of the data. For HP 8360-series
sources put the receiver in the SYSTEM BUS 'LOCAL' mode and press the source front-panel
keys 4USER CAL5 FullUsr Cal (use the Front-Panel Emulator Program for those sources with no
front-panel keys).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-44 Menus Block
Adjusting Trim Sweep
Adjusting Trim Sweep
The Trim Sweep Adjustment procedure applies to HP 8340, and only to measurements made
in the Ramp sweep mode. Trim Sweep adjusts the end frequency at band switch points. It
minimizes the frequency dierence between the end frequency of one band and the start
frequency of the next band.
Trim Sweep is considered a part of the measurement calibration process because it
provides most improvement when it is accomplished for each particular frequency range.
The TRIM SWEEP setting is saved as part of the instrument state when you press 4SAVE5
INSTRUMENT STATE n , and as part of the limited instrument state saved when you save a
calibration set. It is set to zero by FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Trim Sweep Procedure
To adjust trim sweep, your HP 8530A system must be setup to make an actual ratioed
measurement. The setup can be an antenna measurement, RCS, or a network analyzer-type
setup. The specic type of setup is not important, as long as it is a ratioed measurement (two
inputs are in use), and you can see an actual measurement trace on the screen. For example,
you could use a standard antenna measurement setup. If the HP 8530A is not currently in a
system, place a splitter on the output of the RF source, and inject the two signals into the
frequency downconverter.
NOTE: In an RCS system you should place a reector in the target zone.
1. Press 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the PARAM key that is appropriate for the inputs you are using (4PARAM 15 for b1/a1,
for example).
3. Set the START/STOP or CENTER/SPAN controls to sweep the frequency range of interest.
4. Select STIMULUS 4MENU5 STEP . When the sweep is complete, press DISPLAY DATA !
MEMORY MATH (/) . When the next sweep is complete, the trace should be a at line at zero
degrees.
5. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 RAMP . The displayed trace may exhibit a sharp phase transition at
the band switch points. Sharp transitions indicate the need to adjust TRIM SWEEP .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press 4CAL5 MORE TRIM SWEEP . Then use the knob to adjust the phase trace for minimum
phase change at the band switch points. When the best (attest) phase trace is achieved,
press 4SAVE5 INSTRUMENT STATE n to save this setting. Now proceed with the appropriate
measurement calibration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-45
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Denition
Introduction
If you use dierent standard gain antennas than those already dened, you must create a \cal
denition." To do this, you must:
Create an ASCII text le on a computer.
Save the le to disc
Load the le into the HP 8530A.
This section explains how to create your own denitions.
Important Terms
Cal Denition
Antenna Denition
A cal denition is an ASCII le you create using a text editor.
It contains theoretical or measured frequency and gain values
for one or more standard gain antennas. You can create the
le using any computer-based text editor which can save text
R
in plain ASCII format (which can save the le to an MS DOS
or HP LIF disc). The le can then be loaded into the receiver
from the disc. The cal denition le can contain up to seven
\antenna denitions."
The gain data for a specic standard gain antenna is called an
\antenna denition." As mentioned above, a cal denition
contains up to seven antenna denitions.
The Supplied Cal Denition
The HP 8530A is not shipped with a cal denition in memory. However, a pre-dened cal
denition (AC_NAR1) is supplied on the Antenna RCS/Cal Disc, which was shipped with the
receiver. You can load AC_NAR1, or a cal denition you create, by following the instructions in
\Loading the Cal Denition into the HP 8530A". Details on AC_NAR1 are provided at the end of
this section.
Required Hardware
A cal denition is a simple ASCII text le. You can create a cal denition using:
Any computer that can save ASCII les to MS-DOS compatible discs.
Any computer that can save ASCII les to discs formatted in Hewlett-Packard Logical
Interchange Format (LIF).
You MUST use a text editor that can save plain ASCII les!
5-46 Menus Block
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
Creating an Antenna Denition
A cal denition is composed of up to seven individual antenna denitions. Each antenna
denition applies to a specic standard gain antenna. Use the following instructions to create
an antenna denition.
Choosing the Number of Frequency Points to Dene
If the performance of the standard gain antenna is linear, you only need to dene a few
frequency points across the frequency band. Most standard gain antennas are not very linear,
so a greater number of frequency points are recommended. You can dene up to 201 frequency
points.
Covering a Wide Frequency Range
You can dene antenna denitions for up to seven standard gain antennas. This provides
continuous coverage over a wide frequency range. The calibration feature allows you to
measure up to seven antenna denitions for a single calibration.
Determine Required Stimulus Values
Determine the exact frequencies you want to use in the antenna denition. Hewlett-Packard
recommends that you choose frequencies that cover the entire range of your standard gain
antenna, even if you only make measurements at single frequencies.
Start frequency of your standard.
Stop frequency of your standard.
Dierence between frequency points (the frequency increment).
Number of frequency points.
The start and stop frequencies you already know from the published data.
Choosing the Number of Points
The more points you use the more accurate the calibration will be. The limiting factor is
usually the published data for the standard antenna. The accuracy and resolution of the
standard gain antenna graphs or tables will be the limiting factor in calibration accuracy.
Determining the Frequency Increment
To determine the frequency increment, divide the frequency span by the
(number of points 0 1).
For example:
Start frequency = 2 GHz
Stop frequency = 4 GHz
The frequency span is 2 GHz
Menus Block 5-47
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
Assume the standard gain antenna's graph or table provides 21 decipherable data values across
the 2 GHz frequency span:
Divide the frequency span by number of points 0 1:
2 x 109 / (21 0 1) = 100 MHz
The rst frequency in your antenna denition is the start frequency (2 GHz in this example).
From there, 20 additional points exist, each spaced 100 MHz apart. The rst three frequencies
would be:
2,000,000,000 Hz
2,100,000,000 Hz
2,200,000,000 Hz
The last frequency point would be the stop frequency.
Determining Gain Values at Each Frequency Increment (Graph Format)
Next, you must determine the gain values at each frequency increment. Figure 5-15 shows a
typical graph-style data sheet for a standard gain antenna.
Figure 5-15. Typical Standard Gain Antenna Performance Graph
1. Choose the start and stop frequencies. Examples shown in Figure 5-15 are 2 and 4 GHz,
respectively.
5-48 Menus Block
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
2. Mark the graph at each frequency increment. In the example graph an increment frequency
of 100 MHz is used. You MUST use evenly-spaced frequency points, \Even Frequency
Increments" explains why.
3. On the graph for your standard antenna, determine the gain at each frequency increment.
Figure 5-15 shows example gain values for 21 frequencies spaced 100 MHz apart.
4. Write down each gain value in ascending order corresponding to the frequencies they
represent.
If Using Data in Table Format
Table 5-4 shows an example performance specication table:
Table 5-4. Example Standard Gain Antenna Performance Table
FREQ. (GHz) GAIN dB FREQ. (GHz) GAIN dB FREQ. (GHz) GAIN dB
12.4
13.82
14.3
15.02
16.2
16.21
12.5
13.88
14.4
15.08
16.3
16.28
12.6
13.95
14.5
15.14
16.4
16.34
14.01
15.20
16.41
12.7
14.6
16.5
14.07
15.26
16.46
12.8
14.7
16.6
14.14
15.33
16.52
12.9
14.8
16.7
14.21
15.39
16.59
13.0
14.9
16.8
14.27
15.45
16.65
13.1
15.0
16.9
14.33
15.52
16.71
13.2
15.1
17.0
14.40
15.58
16.76
13.3
15.2
17.1
14.46
15.65
16.81
13.4
15.3
17.2
14.52
15.71
16.87
13.5
15.4
17.3
14.58
15.77
16.93
13.6
15.5
17.4
14.65
15.83
16.99
13.7
15.6
17.5
14.71
15.89
17.05
13.8
15.7
17.6
13.9
14.77
15.8
15.95
17.7
17.11
14.0
14.84
15.9
16.02
17.8
17.18
14.1
14.90
16.0
16.09
17.9
17.24
14.2
14.96
16.1
16.15
18.0
17.30
The example graph has 57 evenly spaced frequency points that are 100 MHz apart. You will
simply enter these gain values into the ASCII data le. You MUST use evenly-spaced frequency
points, \Even Frequency Increments" explains why.
Even Frequency Increments
The frequency increments in the antenna denition must be evenly spaced. If you look at
the example on the next page you will see why: The lines between BEGIN and END hold the
gain values. Notice that these lines do NOT specify the frequency of each gain value. Because
of this, the calibration feature must calculate the actual frequencies given the dened start
frequency, stop frequency and number of points. For this reason the antenna denition gain
values must represent evenly spaced frequency values.
When you perform the actual calibration you can choose any frequency points you wish. A
calibration can be performed at any frequencies you choose. The frequencies used in the cal
do not have to be the same as the frequencies in the antenna denition. (When calibrating, the
Menus Block 5-49
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
receiver will interpolate between frequency points in the denition.) Remember, however, that
a calibration must contain all the frequencies required by your measurements. When making
measurements, the receiver does not interpolate between calibration points.
Required ASCII File Format
The ASCII le must follow the CITIle format supported by the HP 8530A. Figure 5-16 shows
an example le for the data in Figure 5-15. At rst the le looks complicated. However only
the items pointed out in Figure 5-16 are variable. To save time, start by editing an existing
calibration denition le. One is supplied on the Antenna RCS/Cal Disc, which was supplied
with the receiver. The le name of the le is AC_NAR1.
The cal denition shown in Figure 5-16 contains only one antenna denition. A cal denition
with two antenna denitions is shown in \Creating a Cal Denition with Multiple Antenna
Denitions", later in this chapter.
Figure 5-16. Typical Standard Gain Antenna Performance Graph
5-50 Menus Block
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
In-Depth Description of a Cal Denition
The example below is of a cal denition that contains one antenna denition. The top four
lines are the header for the entire le. These lines must only occur once, at the top of the le.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.00
#NAME ANTENNA_DEF
These three lines should be included exactly as shown. The rmware revision on line 2
\HP8530A.01.00" does not need to be changed if your HP 8530A has a later rmware revision.
Keeping line 2 exactly as shown above is acceptable. These lines are part of the le header.
#NA DEF_LABEL uWaveA.1
This line denes the title for the antenna calibration softkey. You can change the label
\uWaveA.1" to any label you want, up to the limit of ten characters. This line is part of the le
header.
#NA STANDARD 1
This line starts dening the antenna denition. When creating several antenna denitions, the
number \1" should be incremented (2, 3, and so on) for each successive antenna denition.
\Creating a Cal Denition with Multiple Antenna Denitions" shows an example of this.
#NA STANDARD_LABEL SASGH-1.10
This denes the softkey label for this antenna denition. You can change the label
\SASGH-1.10" to any label you want, up to a maximum of ten characters. It is recommended
the label be changed to reect the type and frequency range of the standard gain antenna.
VAR FREQ MAG 21
Enter the number of frequency points at the end of this line (where the number 21 is located
in this example). The rest of this line always stays the same.
DATA GAIN [1] DB
This line does not aect the antenna denition in any way, but we recommend you leave it in.
(Future rmware revisions may require this line.)
SEG LIST BEGIN
SEG 2000000000 4000000000 21
SEG LIST END
These three lines dene the start frequency, stop frequency, and the number of points (again).
Frequencies must be expressed in Hertz. Never change the rst or third line.
Menus Block 5-51
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
BEGIN
1.70E1
1.714E1
1.725E1
.
.
.
1.855E1
1.858E1
1.86E1
END
The commands \BEGIN" and \END" must surround the gain values for each frequency. Enter
each gain value on a separate line. Gain values must be in ascending order corresponding to
the frequencies they represent.
Saving the Cal Denition File
Save the ASCII le to MS DOS or HP LIF disc.
Note
The lename must begin with the three characters: AC_
(The two letters AC followed by an underscore character.)
Loading the Cal Denition into the HP 8530A
To load a cal denition le:
1. Insert the disc into the HP 8530A's drive.
2. Press 4DISC5 LOAD CAL KITS ANTENNA CAL DEF , the receiver will display a le directory of
all cal denition les on that disk.
3. Use the knob to select the desired cal denition and press LOAD FILE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press 4CAL5. Notice that the key ANT. CAL contains the name you chose for that cal denition.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press ANT. CAL FAR FIELD: RESPONSE . You will see your antenna denition names next to
the softkeys buttons.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-52 Menus Block
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
Creating a Cal Denition with Multiple Antenna Denitions
You can create up to seven antenna denitions in a single cal denition le. To do this, simply
add one antenna denition right after another in the le. Do not repeat lines 1 through 4.
Change \STANDARD 1" to \STANDARD 2" in the second antenna denition, to \STANDARD 3"
in the third, and so on.
Change the label in the \#NA STANDARD LABEL" line in each antenna denition. Use labels
that are appropriate for each standard gain antenna. Do not use underscore characters in
labels. To avoid problems use keys A through Z, numbers 0 through 9, and dashes (-).
Here is an example of two antenna denitions in one le.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.00.26
NAME ANTENNA_DEF
#NA DEF_LABEL uWave A.1
#NA STANDARD 1
#NA STANDARD_LABEL SASGH-1.10
VAR FREQ MAG 10
DATA GAIN[1] DB
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1100000000 1700000000 10
SEG_LIST_END
BEGIN
1.63E1
1.64E1
1.65E1
1.66E1
1.67E1
1.68E1
1.685E1
1.69E1
1.7E1
1.71E1
END
#NA STANDARD 2
#NA STANDARD_LABEL SA12-1.70
VAR FREQ MAG 10
DATA GAIN[1] DB
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1700000000 2600000000 10
SEG_LIST_END
BEGIN
1.61E1
1.62E1
1.64E1
1.65E1
1.67E1
1.68E1
1.69E1
1.7E1
1.71E1
1.72E1
END
When you load this le into the receiver, these two antenna denitions will go into top two
Far-Field:Response menu positions.
Menus Block 5-53
Creating a Standard Gain Antenna Cal Denition
Details on the Supplied Antenna Denitions
The supplied cal denition contains seven Narda antenna denitions. This cal denition is not
loaded into receiver memory at the factory. Refer to Table 5-5. Only one cal denition le can
be loaded into the receiver at one time.
The Narda cal denition le is supplied on the Antenna/RCS Cal Disc, under the le name:
AC_NAR1 The Antenna/RCS Cal Disc is DOS compatible. The le AC_NAR1 has two uses:
You can load AC_NAR1 into the HP 8530A.
You can make copies of the le and modify them to create your own denitions.
Table 5-5. Antenna Denitions in the Supplied Cal Denition
Denition Manufacturer Model Frequency Range
Name
Number
NAR 645
Narda
645 1.70 to 2.60 GHz
NAR 644
Narda
644 2.60 to 3.95 GHz
NAR 643
Narda
643 3.95 to 5.85 GHz
642 5.40 to 8.20 GHz
Narda
NAR 642
640 8.20 to 12.40 GHz
Narda
NAR 640
639 12.40 to 18.00 GHz
Narda
NAR 639
638 18.00 to 26.50 GHz
Narda
NAR 638
The most recently-loaded cal denition is saved in non-volatile memory, and is retained when
you turn AC power OFF.
5-54 Menus Block
Domain
Domain
The Domain menu provides selection of the three possible domains of the network analyzer:
Frequency Domain.
Time Domain (requires option 010).
Angle Domain.
Figure 5-17. Domain Menu
Frequency Domain
Allows you to measure antenna magnitude and phase performance across one or more
frequencies. Frequency Domain measurements must be made at a single angle. In Frequency
Domain mode, the x-axis of the display is frequency. Internal triggering (free run trigger mode)
is commonly used when measuring frequency, but external triggering can be used as well. You
can measure a single frequency, or choose from Ramp, Step or Frequency List sweep modes.
Figure 5-18. Frequency Domain
Menus Block 5-55
Domain
Time Domain (Time Band Pass)
This optional feature allows you to make RCS measurements or see the time response of an
antenna (time is shown on the displays x-axis). One use of time domain is when measuring
multi-path range reections. Internal triggering is usually used in this mode.
Time domain data is mathematically calculated from Frequency Domain data. This is done
using the \chirp-Z" inverse Fourier transform. Therefore, the rst step in time domain
measurements is to make a measurement in the Frequency Domain.
Figure 5-19. Time Domain
Angle Domain
Allows you to make angle scan measurements at a single frequency. In Angle Domain mode,
the x-axis of the display is angular degrees. External triggering is used (HP-IB or TTL) in this
mode. You can measure a single angle, or a range of angles.
Figure 5-20. Angle Domain
Specify Time and Specify Gate
These functions are described in Chapter 13, Time Domain Measurements
5-56 Menus Block
Display Annotation Areas
Display
Section Contents
This section discusses the front panel display, and functions available under the 4DISPLAY5 key.
4DISPLAY5 Key Functions
Displaying More than One Trace
Adjusting the Display
Changing CRT Intensity
Changing Background Intensity
Changing Display Colors
Using an External Monitor
Using Trace Memory
Using Trace Math
Changing the Default Trace Math Function
Performing a Trace Math Operation
Comparing Channel 1 Data with Channel 2 Data
4DISPLAY5
Key Functions
Figure 5-21. Display and Display Mode Menus
Press 4DISPLAY5. Choices under the Display menu allow you to:
View single or dual channel display.
View one, two, three, or four parameters.
Change the color attributes of the CRT.
Congure the receiver for an external monitor.
Save traces to memory and display recall them on the screen.
Menus Block 5-57
Adjusting the Display
Perform complex trace math. Trace math performs vector addition, subtraction,
multiplication, or division between the current data trace and the memory trace.
Displaying More than One Trace
A simple rule explains if the receiver WILL measure a specic parameter:
If the parameter is displayed on the screen, it will be measured.
The opposite of this rule is also true:
If the parameter is NOT displayed on the screen, it will NOT be measured.
The number of parameters to be measured is selected with the following softkeys:
Measures and displays one parameter. Choose the desired
SINGLE PARAMETER
parameter by pressing 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or
4PARAM 45 keys.
Measures and displays PARAM 1 and PARAM 2 for the active
TWO PARAMETER
channel.
THREE PARAMETER
Measures and displays PARAM 1, PARAM 2, and PARAM 3 for
the active channel.
Measures and displays all four parameters for the active
FOUR PARAMETER
channel. The parameters in the inactive channel will not be
measured.
Measures and displays one parameter (of your choice) in each
DUAL CHANNEL
channel. For each channel, choose the desired parameter by
pressing 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or 4PARAM 45 keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adjusting the Display
Changing CRT Intensity
To change the overall display intensity press:
4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY INTENSITY . Use the knob or entry keys to enter the intensity
value desired. Terminate entries with the 4x15 key.
The factory default value is set to 83% This value lengthens the CRT life. The intensity level
cannot be saved or recalled, it remains as set unless you perform a factory preset.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Changing Background Intensity
Background intensity can be changed to any value from 0 to 100%. The factory default value
is zero. Background intensity can be saved and recalled.
5-58 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
Changing Display Colors
The displayed colors can be changed. Color changes can be saved and recalled. Figure 5-22
shows the Adjust Display menu.
Figure 5-22. Adjust Display Menu
If you press DEFAULT COLORS , display attributes revert to the factory default colors and
background intensity. The following table lists default color denitions:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-59
Adjusting the Display
Table 5-6. Default Settings for Display Elements
Display
Element
Softkeys
Warning
Parameter 1 Data
Parameter 2 Data
Parameter 3 Data
Parameter 4 Data
Graticule
Markers
Parameter 1 Memory
Parameter 2 Memory
Parameter 3 Memory
Parameter 4 Memory
Stimulus Value
Readout
Color
white
red
yellow
cyan
(blue)
salmon
(pink)
green
gray
white
yellow1
cyan1
(blue)
red1
green1
white
Tint Brightness Color
%
%
0
0
14
53
100
100
100
100
0
100
100
60
0
100
36
38
0
0
11
60
93
49
80
70
70
100
0
0
85
60
0
41
0
75
63
90
55
85
0
1 The standard color has been modied, using dierent tint,
brightness, or color intensity. This is why the color is darker
than the standard color.
How to Modify Colors
The following steps demonstrate how to change, save, and recall the colors for the displayed
elements.
1. Press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY MODIFY COLORS . This keystroke sequence displays the
Modify Colors menu.
2. Choose one of the display elements shown on the menu. For example, press MORE
STIMULUS . By selecting the stimulus element, you have actually chosen to modify the color
assigned to the stimulus value notation shown on the display. Now you can adjust the tint,
brightness, and color saturation for that color. The tint, brightness, and color default settings
vary with the display element or color selected.
a. Press BRIGHTNESS . Use the knob to vary the intensity of the color from very dim
(cannot be seen at 0%) to very bright (100%).
b. Press COLOR . Use the knob to vary the color saturation of the color from white (0%) to
all color (100%).
c. Press TINT . Tint is the range of hues. Tint ranges from red, through green and blue, and
back to red.
The tint setting for the primary colors is as follows:
yellow = 14.
blue (cyan) = 53.
red = 0.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-60 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
3. The RESET COLOR softkey returns the display element/color to the default color denition
for that color.
4. Press PREDEFINED COLORS to display the menu of colors with predened denitions for
tint, brightness, and color.
5. Choose one of the predened colors, for example GREEN . The display element/color turns
green and the last active function, tint value, in this case, is shown.
6. To save the color modications you have made, press 4PRIOR MENU5 as many times as
necessary to return to the Adjust Display menu or press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY . Now,
press SAVE COLORS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. To recall a previously saved color setup, press RECALL COLORS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using an External Monitor
The receiver is designed to work with external multisync video monitors. The controls in this
menu allow you to congure the system to work with specic monitor types.
How to Tell if a Monitor will be Compatible
Here are the monitor compatibility requirements:
The monitor must have separate R-G-B inputs. These can either be individual jacks, or a
multi-pin connector (if the proper adapter or cable is available). The cable supplied with the
HP 8530A will plug into separate jacks.
The monitor must be compatible with a 25.5 kHz horizontal scan rate.
The monitor must be compatible with a 60 Hz vertical scan rate.
The monitor must accept 0.7 V input levels on its RGB inputs, with a 75 ohm impedance.
H,V sync inputs (if the monitor is equipped with them) must be TTL compatible.
Many multisync monitors meet these requirements. Note that the external video controls have
no eect on the HP 8530's built-in display.
Menus Block 5-61
Adjusting the Display
Figure 5-23. External Video Menu
Installing an External Monitor
External video connections are made with the D1191A external video cable, provided with the
receiver. The following pages show four major types of multisync monitors, and explain how to
install them.
5-62 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
Monitors that Use Separate Horizontal and Vertical Sync
Figure 5-24. Monitor with Two Sync Connectors (Separate H,V Sync)
The gure above represents a monitor that uses separate horizontal and vertical sync signals.
Connect the ve cables as shown. Connect the other end of the cable to the HP 8530A
rear-panel EXTERNAL DISPLAY connector.
HP 8530A Settings
1. Press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY EXTERNAL VIDEO H,V SYNC .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Look in the operator's manual for the monitor and determine if it requires a positive or
negative sync pulse.
On the receiver, press POSITIVE SYNC or NEGATIVE SYNC as required.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Monitor Settings
Read the monitor's operating manual. If necessary, congure monitor switches or controls for:
0.7 V R-G-B inputs, 75 ohms.
Horizontal sync rate of 25.5 kHz.
Vertical sync rate of 60 Hz.
The monitor should now be operational.
Menus Block 5-63
Adjusting the Display
Monitors that Use One Sync Connector
Figure 5-25. Monitor with one Sync Connector (Composite Sync)
The gure above represents a monitor that uses a composite sync signal (which combines
horizontal and vertical sync signals on one line). Connect four of the cables as shown. The
brown/white cable is not needed. Connect the other end of the cable to the HP 8530A
rear-panel EXTERNAL DISPLAY connector.
HP 8530A Settings
1. Press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY EXTERNAL VIDEO COMPOSITE SYNC .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Look in the operator's manual for the monitor and determine if it requires a positive or
negative sync pulse.
On the receiver, press POSITIVE SYNC or NEGATIVE SYNC as required.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Monitor Settings
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Read the monitor's operating manual. If necessary, congure monitor switches or controls for:
0.7 V R-G-B inputs, 75 ohms.
Horizontal sync rate of 25.5 kHz.
Vertical sync rate of 60 Hz.
The monitor should now be operational.
5-64 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
Monitors with No Sync Connectors
Figure 5-26. Monitor with No Sync Connectors (Sync on Green)
The gure above represents a monitor that requires sync signals to be superimposed on the
green video line. Connect the R-G-B cables as shown. The black/white and brown/white cables
are not needed. Connect the other end of the cable to the HP 8530A rear-panel EXTERNAL
DISPLAY connector.
HP 8530A Settings
Press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY EXTERNAL VIDEO SYNC ON GREEN .
Negative sync is standard for \sync on green" monitors, and the HP 8530A selects this mode
automatically.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Monitor Settings
Read the monitor's operating manual. If necessary, congure monitor switches or controls for:
0.7 V R-G-B inputs, 75 ohms.
Horizontal sync rate of 25.5 kHz.
Vertical sync rate of 60 Hz.
The monitor should now be operational.
Menus Block 5-65
Adjusting the Display
Monitors that Support All Sync Types
Figure 5-27. Monitor Supporting All Sync Types
The gure above represents newer monitors that support all sync types:
Sync on Green
Composite Sync
Separate H,V Sync
You can install this kind of monitor using any of the preceding setups. Such monitors usually
lock-on (automatically) to any sync you supply. If you don't want any extra BNC cables laying
around behind the monitor, plug in all ve BNC connections. Connect the other end of the
cable to the HP 8530A rear-panel EXTERNAL DISPLAY connector.
HP 8530A Settings
1. Press 4DISPLAY5 ADJUST DISPLAY EXTERNAL VIDEO .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Choose the sync mode which is appropriate for the sync connections you have made:
H,V SYNC , COMPOSITE SYNC , or SYNC ON GREEN . If you have connected all ve
connectors, you can choose any of the HP 8530A sync modes.
3. Look in the operator's manual for the monitor and determine if it requires a positive or
negative sync pulse.
On the receiver, press POSITIVE SYNC or NEGATIVE SYNC as required.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Monitor Settings
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Read the monitor's operating manual. If necessary, congure monitor switches or controls for:
0.7 V R-G-B inputs, 75 ohms.
A horizontal sync rate of 25.5 kHz.
A vertical sync rate of 60 Hz.
Sync Type (composite, sync or green, or H,V.)
5-66 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
The monitor should now be operational.
When external video conguration settings change
The instrument will never change external video settings once you have made them. The only
exception is if you load the operating system again, or change from HP 8530A operation to
optional HP 8510C operation, or vice versa. Changing between these two \modes" requires the
applicable operating system to be loaded.
Using Trace Memory
You can store a measurement in one of eight trace memories and then compare it with the
current measurement trace data in any format. Using softkeys in the Display menu, the Data
and Memory traces can be displayed alone or simultaneously (Data and Memory).
In both single channel and dual channel operation the display data, memory, and trace math
operations are always uncoupled; you may select memory operations independently for each
channel.
Storing a Trace in Memory
Press the 4DISPLAY5 key in the MENUS block to bring the top level Display menu onto the CRT.
Factory Preset selects DISPLAY: DATA for both channels, which displays the current data
trace.
To store the current trace to memory, press: DATA ! MEMORY 1 .
Each parameter (in each channel) is saved to a predened memory register. For example,
Parameter 1 on Channel 1 is normally stored to memory register 1. The following table shows
the default memory registers for each parameter in each channel:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 5-7. Memory Numbers for Each Parameter on Each Channel
Channel/Parameter Memory Number
Channel 1
Memory #1
PARAM 1
Memory #2
PARAM 2
Memory #3
PARAM 3
PARAM 4
Memory #4
Channel 2
PARAM 1
Memory #5
PARAM 2
Memory #6
Memory #7
PARAM 3
Memory #8
PARAM 4
The memory in use is displayed in the DATA ! MEMORY softkey label.
Displaying the Memory Trace
To display only the stored memory trace, press DISPLAY: MEMORY . Notice that when the
memory trace is displayed:
The trace indicator for Cartesian displays (1 for channel 1 or 2 for channel 2), disappears.
This indicator is normally displayed at the end of the trace.
If a sweep is in progress, it stops.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-67
Adjusting the Display
The parameter label (in the channel identication area) changes to show which memory is
displayed.
Settings that can, and cannot be changed. You may select any format and response setting to
view the stored trace. The Stimulus 4START5 and 4STOP5 controls are not active. The marker is
operational, reading the frequency and value of the memory trace.
Displaying Data and Memory at the Same Time
Press DISPLAY: DATA and MEMORY . The two traces are then displayed on the same grid, using
the same scale/division, reference line value, and reference line position used for the current
data trace. The parameter label includes the label of the memory trace (M1, M2, M3 and so on).
Again, notice that the current data trace is annotated by the channel number (1 or 2 at the end
of the trace), and that the memory trace is not annotated. The marker reads only the current
data trace.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 5-28. Display of Memory, Data and Memory
Settings that can, and cannot be changed. When you are displaying Data and Memory,
certain receiver settings must remain the same or Data and Memory will automatically turn O.
Changing the following settings will cause this to occur:
Domain
Number of Points
Start Angle, Stop Angle
Increment Angle
Turning calibration On or O
Other receiver settings can be changed for the current trace, without aecting the Display and
Memory feature.
Selecting Default Memory
As mentioned earlier, each parameter (in each channel) saves to a specic memory register.
The \select defaults" feature allows you to choose any of the eight memory locations for any
parameter (on either channel). You could select memory 7 for Parameter 1 (on channel 1), for
example.
5-68 Menus Block
Adjusting the Display
Figure 5-29. Select Default Trace Memory
1. Press 4CHANNEL 15 or 4CHANNEL 25.
2. Press 4DISPLAY5 SELECT DEFAULTS to display the Select Defaults menu. The current default
memory for the selected channel is underlined.
3. Press DEFAULT to MEMORY: 1 2 , 3 , 4 , or MORE DEFAULT to MEMORY 5 , 6 , 7 , or 8 .
This selects the memory register for the currently selected parameter (for the current
channel).
The Display menu reappears, and the DATA ! MEMORY label shows the current selection.
Volatile and non-volatile trace memories. Memory registers 1, 2, 3, and 4 are non-volatile
memories (their contents are not lost when instrument power is turned o). Memories 5, 6, 7,
and 8 are volatile (their memory contents are lost when power to the instrument is turned o).
Operational life of non-volatile memory. Memory registers 1, 2, 3, and 4 use solid-state
memory that is rated for a at least 10,000 DATA ! MEMORY operations. If this number of
storage operations is exceeded, the memory could \wear out." This is not likely to occur within
the lifetime of the instrument. However, if you control the receiver with a computer, and use
repetitive DATA ! MEMORY operations, HP recommends that you use memory registers 5, 6, 7,
or 8 instead of 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-69
Using Trace Math
Using Trace Math
Complex mathematical operations include:
Vector addition.
Vector subtraction (current data 0 memory data).
Vector multiplication.
Vector division (current data 4 memory data).
These operations can be performed on the Data trace using a selected memory, or, in dual
channel operation, from the other channel.
After Factory Preset, the default math operation for both channel 1 and channel 2 is
MATH (/) . You can change the math function to addition, subtraction, or multiplication using
the Select Defaults menu. This is explained below. You can choose one math function for
Channel 1 and another for Channel 2.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Changing the Default Trace Math Function
If a dierent mathematical operation is desired:
1. Select 4CHANNEL 15 or 4CHANNEL 25.
2. On the Display menu, press SELECT DEFAULTS . This displays the Select Defaults menu
(shown in Figure 5-30).
3. Press MATH OPERATIONS . This displays the Math Operations menu (Figure 5-30). The
current selection is underlined. In the following descriptions, the term \trace" refers to
complex data pairs in real, imaginary format. When the term \corrected" is used, it means
that the data is calibrated if a valid calibration is currently active.
4. Press one of the following softkeys:
Adds the corrected Data trace and Memory trace.
PLUS (+)
Subtracts Memory trace from the corrected Data trace.
MINUS (0)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Data Trace 0 Memory Trace
MULTIPLY (*) Multiplies the corrected Data trace with the Memory trace.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DIVIDE (/)
Divides the corrected Data trace by the Memory trace.
Data Trace 4 Memory Trace
If the current trace and the stored trace are identical, the complex ratio
between them is 1 and a Cartesian display of the result is a at line at
0 dB, degrees, or seconds. Figure 5-29 shows a typical result of such a
comparison. A polar display of the result is a small cluster of points at 1 6
0 .
The display shows the result of the operation and the selected operation appears in
parentheses ( ) with MATH on the Display menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-70 Menus Block
Using Trace Math
Figure 5-30. Select Default Trace Math
Performing a Trace Math Operation
To perform a trace math operation (in this example the default operation, division, is shown):
1. Store the trace in memory by pressing:
4DISPLAY5 DATA ! MEMORY
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press: MATH (/)
The display then shows the ratio of the current trace over the stored trace. Notice that the
parameter label in the channel identication area changes to show that the math operation is
being performed.
Complex math operations are performed on the real and imaginary data from the corrected
data array for the selected channel. The data is processed by the math function before display
formatting and thus the results can be viewed in any format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Comparing Channel 1 Data with Channel 2 Data
Press 4DISPLAY5 SELECT DEFAULTS MORE to access DATA from CHANNEL 1 and
DATA from CHANNEL 2 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA from CHANNEL 1 and DATA from CHANNEL 2 allow you to perform trace math using
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
current data from one channel and current data from the other channel. As an example of
using this capability, proceed as follows:
Press the following keys:
4CHANNEL 25 4PARAM 15
4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE DUAL CHANNEL SPLIT
4CHANNEL 15 4PRIOR MENU5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SELECT DEFAULTS MORE DATA from CHANNEL 2
MATH (/)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-71
Using Trace Math
Channel 1 now displays the complex ratio of channel 1 data divided by channel 2 data.
Remember that Channel 2 trace math is independent from Channel 1. That is why Channel 2 is
displaying normal data (without trace math) at this time. You set up Channel 1 for trace math
in the above steps, but you did not select trace math for Channel 2.
Although it is intended that this operation be used in dual channel operations, if a Channel
1 single channel display is now selected, the feature uses the last Channel 2 data acquired.
It is important to note that Channel 2 must have been selected for at least 1 sweep after
DATA from CHANNEL 2 was selected in order for the result to be meaningful.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-72 Menus Block
Standard Marker Functions
Measurement Markers
Section Contents
Marker Functions
Using Standard Markers
Delta Mode Markers
Marker Search Modes
Examples of Marker Use
Marker Functions
Marker functions are:
Simple markers on the display trace
Delta (1) marker mode
Marker search modes
Marker list modes
In addition, you can choose whether markers can move only to measured values or
continuously along the trace.
Using Standard Markers
Markers are most often used to read the trace value at the marker position. The trace value of
the active marker is displayed in the Channel Identication block directly below scale/division.
The stimulus value (frequency, time, or angle depending upon the domain selected) at the
marker position is displayed in the Active Function area of the screen.
Figure 5-31. MARKER Key and Marker Menus
Menus Block 5-73
Standard Marker Functions
Select the Active Marker
Markers are made active by pressing the 4MARKER5 key in the MENUS block and choosing a
marker from the Marker menu.
1. Press 4MARKER5.
This causes the last selected marker to be displayed on the trace and display the Marker
menu. (Marker 1 is the default active marker.) You can now move the active marker to any
position on the trace using the knob, step, or numeric keys.
2. Press MARKER 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , or 5 softkeys to select another of the ve measurement
markers as the active marker.
3. Use the knob, step, or numeric keys to position the marker.
The active marker is indicated by a 5 symbol, and the other markers are indicated by 4
symbols. Thus in Figure 5-32, Marker 1 is active, Markers 2, 3, 4, and 5 are not active. To read
the value or change the position of a marker, you must make it the active marker.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
Figure 5-32. Markers on Trace
To move the active marker to the position of a given stimulus value, enter the numeric value
and its units. For example to move MARKER 2 to 5 GHz, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER5 MARKER 2 455 4G/n5
When you press the units terminator, the active marker moves to the data point nearest to that
stimulus value. It also displays the trace value (amplitude or phase) in the active entry portion
of the display.
Press the 8 or 9 step keys to move the active marker left ( 9 ) or right ( 8 ) 1 x division (1/10 of
the stimulus span).
Marker values remain displayed even when you select another function (such as 4SCALE5). The
knob/entry keys no longer control the marker position, but the marker and the trace value
remain displayed.
To remove all marker values from the CRT display press the softkey all OFF .
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-74 Menus Block
Standard Marker Functions
Marker Units
The units given for the trace value depend on the current selected display format. Refer to
Table 5-8.
Table 5-8. Marker Units
FORMAT
MARKER Basic Units
Frequency Domain:
Time Domain:
LOG MAG
dB
LIN MAG
(unitless) (reection)
(unitless) (transmission)
PHASE
degrees ( )
POLAR MAG
dB; 6 ' (reection)
dB; 6 (transmission)
SWR
(unitless)
LIN on POLAR
6 ' (reection)
6 (transmission)
REAL
x (unitless)
IMAGINARY
jy (unitless)
Angle Domain
LOG MAG
dB
LIN MAG
(unitless) (reection)
(unitless) (transmission)
PHASE
degrees ( )
POLAR MAG
dB; 6 (reection)
dB; 6 (transmission)
SWR
(unitless)
LIN on POLAR
6 (reection)
6 (transmission)
REAL
x (unitless)
IMAGINARY
jy (unitless)
For unitless quantities such as Linear Magnitude and Real, the marker value is displayed in
units (u=units; mu=milliunits). A reection coecient measurement of 0.94 is displayed as
940.00 milliunits.
Continuous and Discrete Markers
Press 4MARKER5, then MORE MORE to display the third Marker menu. The two choices,
MARKERS DISCRETE and MARKERS CONTINUOUS , select how the marker moves along the trace.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In this mode, markers can only be placed on an actual stimulus point.
As they move, markers will jump from one stimulus point to another.
MARKERS CONTINUOUS In this mode, markers can be placed at any stimulus value. If a marker
is placed between two measured stimulus points, the receiver performs
straight-line interpolation to provide the marker with a value. The
accuracy of the marker readout is not specied, and the resulting data
value must be used with some discretion.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKERS DISCRETE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-75
Standard Marker Functions
Marker List Displays
The third Marker menu also contains the marker list functions:
MARKER LIST ON / OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FOUR PARAM 1 MARKER/
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FOUR PARAM 5 MARKERS
The \Marker List" is a data readout that displays up to ve marker values. This list cannot be
seen if softkey titles are on the screen, because they use the same display area as the softkey
titles.
Example of the Default Mode (\Four Param 1 Marker" mode)
1. Select four parameter display by pressing:
4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE FOUR PARAMETER
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Turn on a marker, then press 4PRIOR MENU5 until you see the marker data displayed. It
normally appears as shown below:
Figure 5-33. Default Marker Data Display (Four Param 1 Marker mode)
Four Param 1 Marker Mode
The default marker list mode is the \Four Param 1 Marker" mode, illustrated in Figure 5-33.
This mode shows data for only one marker, but the values for that marker are shown for each
displayed parameter.
At the top of the marker data readout is the stimulus value for the active marker (Marker 1
in this case). In this example the active marker is at 0 degrees.
5-76 Menus Block
Standard Marker Functions
The rst data readout (from the top) shows the Marker 1 value for Parameter 1.
The second data readout shows the Marker 1 value for Parameter 2.
The third data readout shows the Marker 1 value for Parameter 3.
The fourth data readout shows the Marker 1 value for Parameter 4.
Four Param 5 Marker Mode
Figure 5-34 shows a typical display with 4MARKER5 MORE MORE FOUR PARAM 5 MARKER
selected:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 5-34. Four Param 5 Marker mode
In this mode, up to ve marker values are shown on the screen, but they only apply to the
active parameter. For example, in Figure 5-34 Parameter 1 is the active parameter. To see the
marker values for Parameter 2, press 4PARAM 25.
Notice the 7 symbol next to the Marker 1 annotation. This symbol denotes the active marker.
You do not have to turn on all ve markers to use this mode.
Marker List On/O
The MARKER LIST ON/OFF softkey turns the marker list feature On or O.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-77
Delta Marker Functions
Delta Mode Markers
Use the delta (1) marker mode to read the dierence in trace value and stimulus value
between any currently selected active marker and another marker designated as the reference
marker.
Figure 5-35. Marker and 1 Mode Menus
The 1 mode sequence uses both the Marker menu and the 1 mode menu as follows:
1. Press 4MARKER5. A marker is displayed and the Marker menu appears. Use the knob to
position this marker to any desired point on the trace.
2. Press the 1 MODE MENU softkey. This displays the 1 mode menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose the reference marker by pressing a softkey 1 REF = 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , or 5 , dierent
from the current active marker. Any marker can be designated as the reference marker,
causing the currently selected active marker to read relative to it.
The Marker menu reappears on the display with the designated marker labeled 1 REF =.
4. Use the knob to position the active marker anywhere on the trace. The stimulus dierence
between the active marker and the reference marker is displayed as the active entry.
The trace value dierence between the active marker and the reference marker is
displayed in the normal marker readout. The \normal" marker readout is located above the
measurement graticule, on the left-hand side.
If the current active 0and the reference marker are at the same position, the displayed value is
zero.
If the current active marker is also selected as the reference marker, the displayed value is zero
at all points on the trace because the marker is reading relative to itself.
To exit the 1 marker mode press 1 MODE MENU , 1 OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-78 Menus Block
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNN
Delta Marker Functions
Figure 5-36. 1 Mode Markers on Trace
Marker Search Modes
Select any marker search mode by pressing 4MARKER5, MORE , then MARKER to MINIMUM ,
MARKER to MAXIMUM , MARKER to TARGET , or BEAM/BAND WIDTH . When you press one of
these softkeys, the mode selection is underlined and the selected search is executed.
MARKER to MINIMUM and MARKER to MAXIMUM always nd the minimum or maximum data
point on the trace, respectively.
BEAM/BAND WIDTH nds the bandwidth of the display trace in the frequency domain. The
bandwidth value is set by the TARGET VALUE key. This function uses marker 3, marker 4, and
marker 5. If any of these markers are active when the BANDWIDTH or BEAM WIDTH function is
executed they will be reset.
This function only works in the frequency domain with a logarithmic display (LOG MAG, LOG
POLAR).
In the angle domain BEAM/BANDWIDTH will nd the beamwidth of the displayed traces, similar
to the frequency domain function.
MARKER to TARGET begins at the lowest stimulus value (the left side on Cartesian displays),
and searches for the target value.
If in discrete marker movement mode, the search stops at the stimulus point nearest to the
target value. The search always stops at the nearest actual measurement point that is below
the target value.
If in continuous marker movement mode, the search stops at the target value. The active
function shows the stimulus value and the actual trace value is shown in the marker
readout.
Unsuccessful target searches result in the message TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND.
Set the target value by pressing TARGET VALUE then enter the target value for the current
Format using the knob, step, or numeric keys. Switch between formats to see that the target
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-79
Delta Marker Functions
value is dierent for each format selection. Factory Preset selects a certain target value for
each format, for example 03 dB for 4LOG MAG5.
As an example:
1. Move the marker to any position on the trace, then press TARGET VALUE , =MARKER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Now move the marker to another position on the trace, then press MARKER to TARGET . The
marker moves to the trace value closest to the target value,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 5-37. Marker Search Modes
Search Right and Search Left
Press SEARCH RIGHT or SEARCH LEFT to search for the next minimum, maximum, or target
value beginning from the present marker position to the right or left on the trace, respectively.
The search always nd a next minimum or next maximum, although another target value may
not be found.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-80 Menus Block
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Delta Marker Functions
1 Mode Operation
When operating in the 1 mode, the target searches begin from the current reference marker
instead of the lowest stimulus value. For example, a target search for 03 dB moves the active
marker to the next point 03 dB relative to the reference marker, to the right or left of the
reference marker, if a point exists.
Figure 5-38. 1 Mode Marker to Target
Example of Delta Marker Use
1. Press 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Make a measurement or load a measurement data le that has several maximums and
minimums. Remember, when you load a data le from disc you must place the receiver
in HOLD mode (using the Stimulus menus). If you are in Angle Domain, make sure the
current start angle, stop angle, and increment angle result in the same number of angles as
used in the data le. Refer to the chapter on disc drive operation for more information.
3. Press 4MARKER5. Marker 1 is active by default. The stimulus value and the trace value are
displayed in the upper-left corner of the display. The Marker menu also appears.
4. Position the marker on the trace using the knob, the step keys, or numeric entry.
5. Press MARKER 2 . Marker 2 is now active. Note the triangle symbol at marker 1 inverts to
indicate that it is no longer the active marker. Position marker 2.
6. Press MARKER 1 . Marker 1 is now active; Marker 2 symbol inverts.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press 1 MODE MENU , then press 1 REF = 2 . The delta symbol appears near marker 2 to
indicate that it is the reference marker. The stimulus dierence and trace value dierence
between the active marker and the reference marker (active 0 reference) is displayed.
8. Use the knob to move marker 1.
9. Press MARKER 3 . Marker 3 is now the active marker and it reads relative to marker 2.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-81
Delta Marker Functions
10. Press 4PRIOR MENU5. The marker list appears in the softkey menu display area. Notice
that all readings are dierences between the reference marker (2) and the other markers.
Marker 3 is denoted as the active marker by the 7 symbol in the marker list.
11. Press 4MARKER5 1 REF = 2 . Marker 2 is now active and it reads relative to itself. Use the
knob to position marker 2.
12. Press 1 MODE MENU , then 1 OFF . Marker 2 is active and it reads the trace value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
13. Press all OFF . The markers disappear.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
14. Press 4MARKER5, MORE , MARKER to MINIMUM . Marker 2 (which was the last active marker)
moves to the minimum trace value.
15. Press SEARCH LEFT . Marker 2 moves to the next trace minimum between the present
marker position and the beginning of the trace.
16. Press 4PRIOR MENU5, MARKER 1 , MORE , MARKER to MAXIMUM . Marker 1 moves to the
maximum trace value.
17. Press MARKER to TARGET . Marker 1 begins from the lowest stimulus value and moves
to the measurement point that is closest (but less than) the target value. If the message
TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND appears, press TARGET VALUE and enter an appropriate value for
the current format, then press MARKER to TARGET again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
18. Press SEARCH RIGHT . Marker 1 moves to the rst target value to the right (increasing
stimulus) of its present position, if another target value is found.
19. Press SEARCH LEFT . Marker 1 moves to the rst target value to the left (decreasing
stimulus) of its present position, if found.
20. Press 4PRIOR MENU5, 1 MODE MENU , then 1 REF = 2 . Now marker 1 is active and marker 2
is the reference.
21. Press MORE , MARKER to TARGET . Marker 1 begins from the current reference marker
position and moves to the rst point closest to the target value, if found.
22. Press SEARCH RIGHT . Marker 1 moves to the rst target value to the right (increasing
stimulus) of the reference marker position, if found. Press SEARCH LEFT . Marker 1 moves
to the rst target value to the left (decreasing stimulus) of the reference marker, if found.
23. Press 4PRIOR MENU5 1 MODE MENU 1 OFF all OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5-82 Menus Block
Delta Marker Functions
Beamwidth and Bandwidth Functions
The receiver can determine beamwidth automatically using the Beam/Band Width function. If
the instrument is in Frequency Domain, the BEAM/BAND WIDTH key determines bandwidth. If
the instrument is in Angle Domain, the BEAM/BAND WIDTH key determines beamwidth.
The default \target value" is for beamwidth or bandwidth at 03 dB. The \target value"
species the dB value (below the peak) where beam width is measured. To set the target value
to a dierent number, press 4MARKER5 MORE TARGET VALUE 4+/-5 n 4x15. Where n is the target
value in dB. The 4+/-5 key is required because the target value is most likely a negative value
(06 dB, and so on).
Press 4MARKER5 MORE BEAM/BAND WIDTH , the value is now displayed on the screen.
This function automatically turns ON delta markers.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Menus Block 5-83
6
Stimulus Functions
Chapter Contents
This chapter describes the Stimulus functions of the HP 8530A. The following topics are
described:
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
Measurement Frequency
Increment Angle
Sweep Mode (single or swept angle)
HP 85370A Position Encoder Controls
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Setting Frequency Sweep
Selecting the Number of Points to Measure
Source Sweep Modes
Creating a Frequency List
Sweep Time
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Sweep Execution, Hold, Single, Number of Groups, Continual
Setting Stimulus Power
Trigger Modes (Free Run, External, or HP-IB)
Stimulus Functions 6-1
Stimulus Functions
Introduction to Stimulus Functions
Figure 6-1. STIMULUS Function Block
Stimulus block keys (and the associated Stimulus menus) allow you to setup and control the
stimulus parameters of the RF and LO source. The 4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5 and 4SPAN5 keys
control frequency, time, or angle, depending on the domain that is currently selected.
The STIMULUS 4MENU5 key displays the top level Stimulus menu. This menu controls:
In Angle Domain:
Source Power (RF and LO sources)
Measurement Frequency (a single CW frequency)
Increment Angle (angular distance between measurement points)
Sweep Modes (Single or Swept Angle)
Trigger modes (Free Run, External, or HP-IB)
In Frequency and Time Domain:
Source Power (RF and LO sources)
Sweep time
Number of data points taken during the sweep.
Sweep modes (Frequency List, Ramp, or Step)
Trigger modes (Free Run, External, or HP-IB)
The Stimulus Power menu and Stimulus More menu are the same in all domains, and are
described later in this chapter.
6-2 Stimulus Functions
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
In Angle Domain, 4START5 and 4STOP5 are used to set the start and stop angle, and the Stimulus
menu provides other functions as well. There are two versions of Stimulus menu: One version
applies to the Angle Domain, the other applies to the Frequency and Time Domains.
Figure 6-2. Stimulus Menu (in Angle Domain)
Setting Measurement Angles
When making Angle Domain measurements, you can enter a desired angle span using the
START5 and 4STOP5 keys. For example, press 4START5 090 4x15, then 4STOP5 90 4x15 to setup
a pattern measurement from 090 to +90 . To correct errors made during entry, use the
4BACKSPACE5 key.
Other methods are available for setting angle span, such as using the 4CENTER5 and 4SPAN5 keys,
or using the knob, or 485 495 keys to change values.
4
Setting Measurement Frequency
Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 to enter the main Stimulus menu.
FREQUENCY of MEASUREMENT selects the CW frequency of the Angle Domain measurement.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The HP 8530A can only make angle measurements at one frequency. If you want to make
multiple-frequency measurements at multiple angles, you must use an external computer
controller with appropriate software.
Example of Use:
Press FREQUENCY of MEASUREMENT 10 4G/n5 to set the measurement frequency to 10 GHz.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Functions 6-3
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
Setting Increment Angle
INCREMENT ANGLE , coupled with the Start and Stop Angle, tells the receiver how many points
of data it should acquire during the measurement.
For example, assume you select the following:
Start Angle:
090
Stop Angle:
+90
Increment Angle: 1
This measurement would result in 181 points of data. In this case the receiver knows it must
take 181 points of data before the measurement is nished. If you are using external trigger
mode (with triggers sent by the positioner controller), the receiver will expect 181 triggers
before the measurement is nished. Refer to the section on External Triggering (later in this
chapter) for more details.
Remember, the receiver does not control the positioner controller. The receiver depends on the
trigger pulses from the positioner controller (or on HP-IB GET commands from a computer)
to know exactly when data should be acquired. Also, the receiver has no way of knowing
the actual direction the positioner is pointing. The receiver assumes that the positioner is
at the start angle when the rst trigger occurs. Be sure that the rst trigger occurs when the
positioner is at the start angle. In the above example this would be at -90 . Triggers occurring
before this will cause the receiver to start the measurement too early.
For example, assume that a certain positioner controller issues a trigger pulse at 091 . The
receiver would take one point of data and assume that it applies to the start angle (090 ).
The measurement would continue, with data being oset by 1 throughout the rest of the
measurement (this example assumes the increment angle is set to 1 ).
Example of Use:
Press INCREMENT ANGLE 2 4x15 if the positioner controller is set to an increment angle of 2
degrees. Terminate Increment Angle entries with one of the following terminator keys:
4k/m5 millidegrees
4x15 degrees
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selecting Sweep Mode (single or swept angle)
SINGLE ANGLE and SWEPT ANGLE determine whether the receiver will acquire data at a single
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
angle, or over a span of angles. These two softkeys are toggles, selecting one turns the other
OFF.
Use Single Angle mode to boresight an antenna. Use Swept Angle mode to make pattern
measurements.
6-4 Stimulus Functions
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
HP 85370A Position Encoder Operation
Introduction
This section applies only if you are using an HP 85370A. It describes the HP 8530A softkeys
that control the HP 85370A Position Encoder. Remember, the HP 85370A works only when the
HP 8530A is equipped with option 005, Position Encoder Interface. This section assumes the
positioner encoder is properly installed and congured.
Note
If external triggers are used, do not apply a trigger signal to the HP 8530A
EVENT TRIGGER when using the HP 85370A. Apply an external trigger only
when using the HP 8530A External Trigger mode.
Position Encoder Softkeys
Figure 6-3. Position Encoder (option 005) Softkeys
Stimulus Functions 6-5
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
To access the Position Encoder menus press:
4DOMAIN5 ANGLE
STIMULUS 4MENU5 ENCODER FUNCTIONS
The position encoder softkeys are:
Position encoder operation functions:
AXIS A , AXIS B , or AXIS C
ENCODER ANGLE and BORESIGHT ANGLE
SAVE OFFSET and CLEAR OFFSET
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Position encoder conguration functions (press MORE to see these functions):
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SYNCHRO SINGLE or DUAL
ANG POL 0 to 360 or +/-180
ANG DISPLY ON/MOVE or OFF
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
Conguration Functions
Single and Dual Synchro
The single and dual synchro control softkeys are:
Selects single synchro (1:1) operation. This is also referred to as coarse
SYNCHRO SINGLE
resolution mode. This setting is independently applied to each axis.
Selects dual synchro (1:1 and 36:1) operation. This is also referred to as
DUAL
ne resolution mode. This setting is independently applied to each axis.
Selecting single and dual synchro mode for any axis. (Select single and dual settings
independently for each axis.)
1. Press: 4DOMAIN5 ANGLE
STIMULUS 4MENU5 ENCODER FUNCTIONS
2. Select the desired axis by pressing: AXIS A , AXIS B , or AXIS C
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press: MORE SYNCHRO SINGLE or DUAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Repeat the last two steps for each axis.
Angle Display Modes
The angle display mode softkeys are:
Causes the HP 8530A and the position encoder to display angles in 0 to
ANG POL 0 to 360
360 format.
+/-180
Causes the HP 8530A and the position encoder to display angles in
6180 format.
ANG DISPLY ON/MOVE This softkey performs two functions:
1. If angle display is already turned ON, this softkey moves the angle
readout to a dierent position on the display. There are ve dierent
positions.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-6 Stimulus Functions
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
2. It turns the angle readout ON if it was previously OFF. This aects
the HP 8530A display.
From the Encoder More menu, press ANG DISPLY ON/MOVE . The
position of the angle readout changes. There are ve possible
positions. One of the positions is above the Time/Date box, in the
lower right-hand corner of the screen. This position cannot be seen
if softkeys are being displayed. Press 4PRIOR MENU5 until the softkey
menus disappear, and you will be able to see the angle readout.
Turns the HP 8530A angle display OFF.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
OFF
Operational Functions
Axis Controls
AXIS A , AXIS B and AXIS C select the axis that is currently in use. Angles are displayed for
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the selected axis on the HP 8530A and on the position encoder. When changing between axes,
the receiver recalls any previously used oset, (described later) and which synchro mode was
selected, (single or dual).
Boresight Angle
BORESIGHT ANGLE places the active marker at the peak of the antenna pattern. This is the
rst step during boresighting. Once the active marker is at the peak, this value can be saved as
an oset. Subsequent measurements will show the peak at 0 . BORESIGHT ANGLE turns OFF
any delta markers that are in use.
The normal marker features may also be used to place an active marker on boresight. It is
easiest to nd boresight using normal marker functions if the antenna has a non-symmetrical
shape.
Use this function during boresighting when using swept angle mode. This command places the
active marker at the current position range of the displayed trace. If this angle is out of the
display range it will put the active marker to the start angle. This function turns OFF any delta
markers that are in use. It can also be used to enter an oset angle using the numeric keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Oset Functions
The softkeys that control angle oset are shown below:
SAVE OFFSET
For use after boresighting. SAVE OFFSET \zeros" the angle readout on
the receiver and position encoder. The oset does not take eect until
the next angle scan of the positioner. This step would be performed
after using the BORESIGHT ANGLE or ENCODER ANGLE keys. (The
active marker may also be moved to boresight manually, then use
SAVE OFFSET .) You may also press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ENCODER ANGLE n 4X15 SAVE OFFSET , where n is the desired angle.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
For example, assume boresight for axis A is at +7 degrees. and the
active marker has been placed at that position (using normal marker
functions or BORESIGHT ANGLE ). Pressing SAVE OFFSET (and taking
another sweep) would cause boresight to appear at 0 . All angle
readings will be displayed relative to that angle (for that axis only).
Clears the oset memory completely and eliminates any oset
currently in use for the displayed axis.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CLEAR OFFSET
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Functions 6-7
Angle Domain Stimulus Controls
Details about Save Oset
Osets are axis independent. Save Offset operates independently for each of the three
axes. The receiver also remembers the osets you used last for each axis.
Adding incremental osets. If conditions cause the boresight to change, move the active
marker to the new boresight (manually, or with BORESIGHT ANGLE , or ENCODER ANGLE ), and
press SAVE OFFSET again. The incremental change will be added to the oset. SAVE OFFSET
remembers the rst oset used, and adds or subtracts subsequent SAVE OFFSET values
incrementally to the original value.
Here is an example of how Save Offset works. Assume boresight for axis A is at +7 . Move
the active marker to that angle (by whatever means), press SAVE OFFSET and measure another
sweep. Boresight will now appear to be at 0 (angle readings are oset by 7 ).
Later in the day you change antennas, and boresight moves 1 in a positive direction. If a
marker is placed at that point, and SAVE OFFSET is pressed again, the oset will change by 1 ,
for a total oset of 8 . Remember, the change will not take eect until the next angle scan.
CLEAR OFFSET clears the oset memory, so a new starting oset may be entered. Oset is
actually cleared on the next angle scan.
The oset value is saved with the instrument state when the 4SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 keys are used.
This allows dierent osets to be saved in the Save/Recall registers for later use.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Encoder Settings and Save/Recall Registers
All the encoder conguration and operational settings are saved when the Save/Recall registers
are used.
Details about Save Oset
Osets are axis-independent. Save Oset operates independently for each of the three axes.
The receiver also remembers the osets you used last for each axis.
Adding incremental osets. If conditions cause the boresight to change, move the active
marker to the new boresight (manually or with BORESIGHT ANGLE ), and press SAVE OFFSET
again. (NOTE: you must take another sweep before pressing SAVE OFFSET a second time.) The
incremental change will be added to the oset. SAVE OFFSET remembers the rst oset you
use, and adds or subtracts subsequent SAVE OFFSET values incrementally to the original value.
You must take a sweep between each press of the SAVE OFFSET softkey.
Here is an example of how Save Oset works. Assume boresight for axis A is at +7 . You move
the active marker to that angle (by whatever means) and you press SAVE OFFSET . Now you
measure another sweep. Boresight will now appear to be at 0 (angle readings are oset by 7 ).
Later in the day you change antennas, and boresight moves 1 in a positive direction. If you
press SAVE OFFSET again, the oset will change by 1 , for a total oset of 8 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CLEAR OFFSET clears the oset memory, so you enter a new starting oset. Oset is actually
cleared on the next sweep.
The oset value is saved with the instrument state when you use the 4SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 keys.
This allows you to save dierent osets in the Save/Recall registers for later use.
Using oset functions. The Oset function is discussed in \To Find Boresight" in Chapter 5 of
the HP 8530A User's Guide..
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-8 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Control
The Stimulus keys 4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5, and 4SPAN5 set the frequency or time parameters
for the measurement. The softkeys under the STIMULUS 4MENU5 key allow you to use other
stimulus functions as well.
Figure 6-4. Stimulus Menu (in Frequency or Time Domain)
Setting Frequency Values
When making Frequency Domain measurements, you can enter a desired frequency span with
the 4START5 and 4STOP5 keys, or with the 4CENTER5 and 4SPAN5 keys. Enter specic frequency
values using the knob, 485 495 keys, or number keys in the ENTRY block. Terminate numeric
entries with an appropriate terminator key:
4G/n5 GHz or nanoseconds
4M/5 MHz or microseconds
4k/m5 kHz, or milliseconds
4x15 Hz, dBm, seconds (in power slope mode: dB/GHz)
To familiarize yourself with the source controls, press 4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5, or 4SPAN5, and
observe the current stimulus values at the bottom of the display. Use the ENTRY block keys to
change values.
Rotate the knob or press a step key, notice that the value is instantly changed. Now enter a
value using the number keys, then terminate the entry by pressing one of the terminator keys.
When you press one of the terminator keys, the value is entered and the system is set to the
specied value.
For example to change the start frequency to 2 GHz, press:
4START5 2 4G/n5
Or
2000 4M/5
In both examples above, the same frequency is selected for the start frequency. To correct
errors made during entry, use the 4BACKSPACE5 key.
Stimulus Functions 6-9
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
If you press 4START5 or 4STOP5, the Start/Stop display mode is automatically selected, and you
can set the start or the stop frequency. If you press 4CENTER5 or 4SPAN5, the center/span display
mode is selected and you can set the center frequency or the span width.
The range of possible frequency settings depends on the frequency limits of the RF source and
frequency converter.
When to Use START/STOP versus CENTER/SPAN
Start and Stop settings are most useful when you are performing pass/fail testing over the full
frequency band of the device or antenna under test. Center and Span are convenient if you
see a spurious response at one frequency and want to zoom in to see it closely.
Spurious responses are never at nice, even frequencies, that are easy to enter through the front
panel. Rather, they are always at weird frequencies like 11.432987345 GHz. The receiver has a
convenient feature which makes it easier to select such a frequency. Simply place a marker on
the spurious response, then press 4CENTER5 4=MARKER5. The center frequency will be set to the
same frequency as the marker. This is explained in more detail below:
Selecting Frequencies Using Markers
You can instantly set 4START5, 4STOP5, or 4CENTER5 to the frequency of the active marker. Here's
how:
1. Turn on a marker.
2. Use the knob to position the marker anywhere on the trace.
3. Press any of the three keys: 4START5, 4STOP5, or 4CENTER5
4. Press the 4=MARKER5 key (in the bottom of the ENTRY block). The marker frequency value
now becomes the new start, stop, or center frequency.
Selecting the Number of Points to Measure
After a Factory Preset, the receiver selects 201 points per sweep. In the Frequency Domain
this produces 200 equally spaced frequency intervals.
To change the number of points:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 NUMBER of POINTS . This brings the Number of Points menu onto
the display. The current value is underlined.
2. Press the appropriate softkey to select 51, 101, 201, 401, or 801 points. Sweep time
increases when you choose a higher number of points.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-10 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Figure 6-5. Number of Points Menu
Number of points is always coupled, meaning that selecting the number of points for one
channel automatically selects the same number of points for the other channel.
With broadband sweeps, responses that are narrow with respect to the frequency interval
may not be accurately represented. For example, with a 10 GHz sweep width, the frequency
resolution is:
Number of
Frequency Resolution
Points
(10 GHz Span)
200 MHz
51
100 MHz
101
50 MHz
201
25 MHz
401
12.5 MHz
801
This means that with 51 points selected, responses that are narrower than 200 MHz are not
represented accurately using a 10 GHz sweep width. Figure 6-6 shows the eect of changing
the number of points from 51 to 401 in such a measurement.
Figure 6-6. Narrow Band Responses Shown with 51 Points (left) and 401 Points (right)
Stimulus Functions 6-11
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Source Sweep Modes
Four source sweep mode selections are available on the Stimulus menu.
The source is swept in a continuous analog sweep from the lower to
RAMP
upper frequency and data is acquired without stopping the sweep. This
mode is compatible with synthesized or non-synthesized sources.
For HP 8350 sources, RAMP selects the standard analog sweep with
open loop YIG oscillator tuning accuracy and repeatability.
For HP 8340/41 sources, RAMP selects standard analog \lock and roll"
sweep. The source is phase-locked at all frequencies for sweep widths
less than 5 MHz.
To use Ramp sweep mode with an HP 8340/41 or 8350 source:
Connect the receiver's SWEEP IN 0-10V BNC to the source's SWEEP
OUT BNC.
Connect the receiver's STOP SWP BNC to the source's STOP SWEEP
BNC.
For HP 836xx sources, RAMP selects enhanced analog \lock and roll"
sweep. The source reads its frequency at the end of the rst sweep
and adjusts the slope and oset of the 0 to 10V sweep voltage ramp
so subsequent sweeps are more accurate. The receiver processes the
rst sweep (called the \learn" sweep), at a slightly slower speed than
subsequent sweeps.
To use Ramp Sweep mode with an HP 836xx source:
Connect the receiver's TRIGGER IN BNC to the source's TRIGGER
OUT BNC.
Connect the receiver's STOP SWP BNC to the source's STOP SWEEP
BNC.
The source is tuned and phaselocked at each frequency point. This
STEP
mode is available only with synthesized sources. You can select two
speeds for the Step mode using controls under the 4SYSTEM5 key. These
are Normal Step and Quick Step. Refer to \Step Type" in Chapter 17.
Quick Step mode requires the same BNC connections (listed above)
as required when using an HP 836xx with Ramp mode (TRIGGER IN,
STOP SWP). (Quick Step mode does not function in a system that uses
multiple sources.)
Sets the source to the center frequency of the sweep already selected
SINGLE POINT
in the Ramp or Step sweep mode. Single Point mode only measures one
point of data. Displaying one point of data on the screen would result
in one little dot in the middle of the screen. To make the signal level
easier to see, the receiver duplicates the data so a at horizontal line
goes across the entire display.
Allows you to enter a list of frequencies, or frequency spans, for
FREQUENCY LIST
measurement. For non-synthesized sources, the receiver sets the
source to CW mode and tunes it to each frequency point in the list.
For synthesized sources, the source is phase-locked at each frequency
point, as in the Step sweep mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-12 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Before you select Frequency List mode, create a list of frequencies to
measure. This process is explained in \Frequency List Mode", later in
this chapter.
Selecting a Sweep Mode
To select a source mode:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5. The current source mode is underlined.
2. Use the corresponding softkey to select the source mode: RAMP STEP SINGLE POINT or
FREQUENCY LIST .
You may switch between Ramp, Step, Single Point, and Frequency List modes at any time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Entering Ramp, Step, and Single Point Stimulus Values
For Ramp and Step sweep modes, enter the frequency span using the 4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5,
and 4SPAN5 controls. To select another frequency in the single point mode, press 4CENTER5 and
the annotation C.W. will appear in the active entry area. Now enter the new frequency using
the knob, step, or numeric keys.
Speed of Ramp, and Step Modes (in HP 8511 systems)
When using 64 averages or less, taking one sweep in Step or Frequency List modes takes
the same time as approximately 100 sweeps in the Ramp Mode. This comparison assumes
you are using Normal Step mode. If your RF source supports Quick Step mode, Step Sweep
measurement speed can be increased up to six times. Notice that measurement time at each
step changes very little until averaging factor is set to 128 or greater. Quick Step mode requires
the STOP SWEEP and SOURCE TRIGGER (BNC cables) to be connected between the receiver
and RF source. (Quick Step mode does not function in a system that uses multiple sources.)
More information on Quick Step mode is provided in Chapter 17.
Stimulus Functions 6-13
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Frequency List Mode
Frequency List allows you to measure arbitrary frequencies, or frequency bands. The
frequency list is made up of segments and each segment may consist of a single CW frequency
or a frequency span. The span may be specied using start/stop or center/span keys. You can
select the number of data points to be acquired by choosing a frequency step size or a number
of points.
Before you select Frequency List mode, you must enter a list of frequencies to measure. If
the Frequency List mode is selected and a frequency list has not been created, the message
FREQUENCY LIST EMPTY appears and the sweep mode is not changed.
Figure 6-7. Frequency List Menu Structure
6-14 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Creating a Frequency List
The following instructions explain how to create and edit a frequency list.
Entering the First Segment
To create a frequency list:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5, MORE , then EDIT LIST . The Frequency List menu appears as
shown above.
2. Press ADD , the rst segment appears.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press SEGMENT: START and enter the start frequency of the rst segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press SEGMENT: STOP and enter the stop frequency of the segment.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Press SEGMENT: STEP SIZE and enter the frequency step.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. Press SEGMENT: DONE . Now press DONE again to return to the main Stimulus menu, then
press FREQUENCY LIST . The sweep of the frequency list now begins.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 6-8. Enter the First Segment
Add Segments
To add a segment to the list:
1. Press EDIT LIST , then press ADD . Each time you press ADD the current segment is
duplicated.
2. Enter new segment values by following the instructions given previously, then press
SEGMENT: DONE .
The segments do not have to be entered in any particular order, they are sorted automatically
by start or CW frequency each time you press SEGMENT: DONE . If you try to add more
than the maximum allowed number of segments or frequency points, a warning message is
displayed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Functions 6-15
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Editing the Frequency List
Changing a Segment
To change the contents of the list, press EDIT LIST to display the edit Frequency List menu,
press SEGMENT to choose a segment, then press EDIT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SEGMENT key determines the segment to be edited or deleted. Press SEGMENT then enter
the number of the segment in the list or use the knob or step keys to scroll the pointer > to the
segment number. Press EDIT to edit the current segment. The segment edit menu appears,
allowing you to change any of the segment characteristics.
Please note that the 4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5, and 4SPAN5 keys in the Stimulus block are not
used during the frequency list editing process.
For example, enter a frequency list as follows:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5, MORE EDIT LIST .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press the following keys:
a. ADD SEGMENT: START 425 4G/n5.
b. SEGMENT: STOP 445 4G/n5.
c. SEGMENT: STEP SIZE 41005 4M/5.
d. SEGMENT: DONE DONE FREQUENCY LIST .
The frequency list sweep starts.
In the Frequency List mode, you can edit, add, and delete the segments while making a
measurement. When you press SEGMENT: DONE , the frequency list segments are arranged in
ascending order and the measurement restarts using the new frequencies.
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Deleting a Segment
When you press DELETE the current segment is deleted.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adding a Segment
Now add a segment to the list as follows:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE EDIT LIST .
2. Press the following:
a. ADD SEGMENT: START 445 4G/n5
b. SEGMENT: STOP 485 4G/n5
c. SEGMENT: STEP SIZE 42005 4M/5
d. SEGMENT: DONE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The sweep restarts and the new list is measured.
6-16 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Duplicate Points
If you followed the above sequence, notice that the point at 4 GHz is brighter. This is because
it is being measured and plotted twice. Later, in the Printing and Plotting chapter, you will
see that you can print the list of measured frequencies and values in tabular format. If you
performed this operation you would see that 4 GHz is listed twice. If this is an undesired
duplication, press DUPLICATE POINTS , then DUPLICATES DELETED . The sweep is restarted
and any duplicate point is measured and displayed only once.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Frequency List Save and Recall
Of course you may save the current frequency list in the same way as any instrument state is
saved, by using the 4SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 keys.
Selecting All Segments or a Single Segment
It is very convenient to dene all segments of the frequency list, perform the measurement
calibration, and then select a single segment for viewing. This simplies measurement
calibration because all segments are calibrated with a single connection of the standards and
speeds the measurement process because you can examine only the segment of interest for the
current test.
When you press FREQUENCY LIST with more than one segment dened, the menu allows
selection of either ALL SEGMENTS or SINGLE SEGMENT . Press SINGLE SEGMENT to cause
the current selected segment to become the active segment and the receiver to measure that
segment. Use the step keys, knob, or numeric entry to select the segment for measurement.
Figure 6-9 shows the display when the complete frequency list is swept, then after a single
segment is selected. The current listing of frequency list segments is displayed with the
arrow pointing to the current segment. If you do not want the frequency list displayed, press
STIMULUS 4MENU5 and it disappears but segment number remains the active function. Note
that the Stimulus values at the bottom of the screen show the actual frequency range being
measured and that Correction remains ON.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 6-9. Frequency List, Display of Single Segment
Stimulus Functions 6-17
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Exit Frequency List
To exit the Frequency List mode, press STIMULUS 4MENU5, then press RAMP , STEP , or
SINGLE POINT . The frequency endpoints of the frequency list are used for the Ramp or Step
sweep.
FACTORY PRESET clears the frequency list and selects DUPLICATES MEASURED .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Sweep Time
In Ramp mode, pressing STIMULUS 4MENU5 displays the SWEEP TIME softkey. This function
allows you to change the amount of time it takes to complete a frequency sweep. If you have
selected Step or Frequency List mode, SWEEP TIME changes to DWELL TIME . Dwell time is the
amount of time the receiver waits before measuring the data after the source has settled at the
next frequency point.
To change the sweep time:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5, SWEEP TIME . The current value appears in the active entry area.
2. Use the ENTRY block controls to set the new sweep time. Terminate with one of the
following keys:
4k/m5 milliseconds
4x15 seconds
If the sweep time/dwell time selected is faster than the DUT response time, the measurement
response will be distorted. Distortion of the trace, or an error message, indicates that the
sweep is too fast.
Usually, the optimum sweep time can be determined using the formula:
Sweep Time (s) > [Span (GHz) 2 Group Delay (ns)] / 100
The length of the dwell time can be determined by using the formula:
Dwell Time (ms) = Sweep Time (ms) 4 (Number of Points 0 1)
Select the fastest possible sweep time or the shortest possible dwell time that does not result in
distortion of the trace. In the Ramp sweep mode, the Factory Preset state selects a sweep time
of 166.0 ms/sweep for 51, 101, 201, and 401 points, or 184 ms/sweep for 801 points.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Distortion Caused by Excessively-Fast Sweep Time
Measurements using far eld ranges, or narrow band antennas, may be sensitive to sweep time.
Two conditions, coupled with a fast sweep time, can distort a measurement:
If the sweep width is wider than the device's bandwidth.
If there is a signicant delay between the transmitter and the device under test.
This occurs because the device does not have time to respond fully to the Stimulus signal. If
distortion is occurring, the trace will change when the sweep time is slowed. The following
example shows the eects of this type of distortion.
6-18 Stimulus Functions
Frequency/Time Domain Stimulus Controls
Example: Eects of Sweep Time
If you use a far eld range, or test narrow-band antennas (such as narrow-band at plate
antennas), determine optimum sweep speed as follows:
1. Set up the measurement and notice the appearance of the trace at the Preset sweep time.
2. Store this trace in memory by pressing 4DISPLAY5, DATA!MEMORY ,
DISPLAY: DATA and MEMORY .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Then use the Stimulus menu to set the sweep time to 110 milliseconds/sweep.
4. Compare the new trace to the original. Store this new trace by pressing 4DISPLAY5,
DATA!MEMORY and change the sweep time again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. Repeat this process until you reach the fastest possible sweep time with no change in
the trace. This is the optimum sweep time for that device using that frequency span and
number of points.
Instructions for storing and comparing traces are provided in the \Display" section of this
manual.
Figure 6-10. Eects of Sweep Time
Stimulus Functions 6-19
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Sweep Execution, Hold/Single/Number of Groups/Continual
You can choose the number of frequency sweeps, or angle scans, using the HOLD , SINGLE ,
NUMBER of GROUPS , and CONTINUAL softkeys. These softkeys are available when you press
STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 6-11. Stimulus More Menu
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
HOLD
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SINGLE
Hold mode stops the measurement process. Most processing functions
can be changed while in this mode unless they require additional sweeps.
When in this mode the enhancement annotation H appears on the display.
This is the mode you should use when loading data les from disk. When
you load data in Hold mode, the receiver will process it according to
current instrument settings and display it on the screen.
This softkey executes a measurement restart, takes a single group of
sweeps, and then places the receiver in HOLD mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NUMBER of GROUPS This softkey initiates a specic number of measurement sweeps, then
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
places the receiver in Hold mode. To enter a number of groups, press
NUMBER OF GROUPS followed by a numeric entry and 4x15. Entering a
number of groups automatically forces a measurement restart.
After the group is nished an H appears in the annotation area, showing
that the receiver is in Hold mode. You may restart the number of groups
at any time by entering a number and pressing 4x15.
In this mode the receiver continually executes the sweeps required to
produce a measurement. This is the Factory Preset selection.
To resume continual operation, press CONTINUAL at any time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
CONTINUAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-20 Stimulus Functions
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Why use Number of Groups?
A group of sweeps consists of the number of frequency sweeps necessary to present data for
the current measurement. For example, if in Ramp sweep mode with averaging on, the trace is
fully averaged by n+1 groups of sweeps, where n is the averaging factor. Number of Groups
can be used to signify that the measurement is complete. If the Averaging Factor is 16, then
press NUMBER of GROUPS , enter 17, 4x15. When the measurement is complete, the receiver goes
into the Hold mode.
Using Step sweep or Frequency List, 1 sweep always equals 1 group because all necessary
data is taken at each frequency step. Regardless of the averaging factor you may enter
NUMBER of GROUPS , 415 4x15 for this conguration.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Coupled/Uncoupled Channels
Most features in the receiver are uncoupled, which means you can choose dierent settings in
each channel. Many Stimulus settings, however, are coupled (if you change a coupled setting in
one channel, it aects the other channel as well).
How to tell if a function is coupled
To determine if any given function is coupled or uncoupled, make it the active function. Press
CHANNEL 15, change the function value, and then press 4CHANNEL 25. If the active function value
shown for Channel 2 has also changed, the two channels are coupled. Otherwise the function
is always uncoupled and can be set independently. The HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary explains
whether any given function is coupled or uncoupled.
4
Setting Stimulus Power
The following paragraphs describe controls for setting and monitoring RF power.
Figure 6-12. Source Power Menu
Stimulus Functions 6-21
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Setting Source Output Power
The POWER SOURCE 1 softkey allows you to set the RF source's output power. The output
power setting applies to the power at the source's RF OUTPUT connector. After Factory
Preset, the source RF power level is usually set to +10 dBm. In most applications this level
does not need to be changed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Be aware of your source's maximum power output, especially at higher frequencies.
Maximum power from RF sources is generally less at higher frequencies. If the sources
UNLEVELED indicator comes on you are requesting more power than the source can produce
across the selected frequency band. It is not harmful for the source to operate unleveled. Also,
unleveled power usually does not aect ratioed measurements.
If you need to change RF source power, perform the following steps:
1. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 POWER MENU POWER SOURCE 1 . The current value appears on the
display.
2. Use the ENTRY block controls to set the new source power level. Press the 4x15 key to set
the source RF power in dBm.
Messages appear on the display if the selected power is too low or too high for proper receiver
operation:
IF OVERLOAD indicates that the power level is too high for the receiver inputs.
PHASE LOCK LOST, NO IF FOUND, VTO FAILURE, or similar messages indicate that the receiver
is not getting enough power to make measurements. This may be caused by the RF power
being too low, or by a problem (incorrect connections or a failure) in the measurement
system.
Remember that 4ENTRY OFF5 must be pressed to clear an error message, it does not go away
automatically when you correct the problem.
Please note that all keys associated with a second source (source 2) apply to Multiple Source
applications and are described in Chapter 17.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using Power Slope
RF source power is internally leveled at its RF output. However, at times it is necessary to
compensate for losses through cables, or some other system problem. The power slope function
enters a power oset that increases as the frequency sweep progresses. The common use for
this feature is to compensate for higher cable losses as frequency increases, thus preserving
dynamic range.
Press POWER SLOPE SLOPE SRC1 ON and enter a positive or negative power slope oset in
dB/GHz. Input a positive oset if you are compensating for cable losses. The source will start
the next sweep at the base power setting, then increase (or decrease) power as the sweep
progresses. Press SLOPE SRC1 OFF to turn o the power slope function. Factory Preset selects
slope o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-22 Stimulus Functions
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Trigger Modes
Pressing STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE shows the following menu:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 6-13. Trigger Mode Menu
The Three Triggering Modes
The HP 8530A provides three trigger modes. Press STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE ,
then one of the following:
In Angle Domain, internal triggering is appropriate when using the
TRIG SRC INTERNAL
HP 85370A Position Encoder. If you do not use the Position Encoder,
use External Trigger or HP-IB Trigger (described below). Internal
triggering causes the receiver to trigger itself automatically.
HP-IB Trigger. In this mode a computer controller must issue a GET
TRIG SRC HPIB
command over the HP-IB bus to start a measurement. The receiver
pulls the rear panel STOP SWEEP BNC line (TTL) HIGH when ready
to take data. More information on HP-IB triggering is supplied under
\TRIG SRC HPIB" in the keyword dictionary.
This mode is appropriate if your system does not use the HP 85370A
TRIG SRC EXTERNAL
Position Encoder. This trigger mode starts a measurement when a
negative-edge TTL signal arrives at the rear panel EVENT TRIGGER
input BNC. The trigger pulse usually comes from the positioner
controller's INCREMENT Trigger output. This allows the positioner
to trigger a measurement at each increment angle. The receiver
pulls the rear panel STOP SWEEP BNC line (TTL) HIGH when ready
to take data.
The annotation E appears on the left-hand side of the display if you are using external or
HP-IB triggering. Trigger settings are stored with the instrument hardware state, not with the
instrument state.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Functions 6-23
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
External and HP-IB Triggering Controls
When you select HP-IB or external triggering, the trigger menu softkeys TRIGGER: STIMULUS ,
and TRIGGER: PARAM 1 through TRIGGER: PARAM 4 become active. When selected, these
keys make the receiver wait for a trigger before measuring a specic parameter or before
moving to the next stimulus point.
Here is a description of each trigger control softkey:
TRIGGER: STIMULUS
When turned ON (underlined), TRIGGER: STIMULUS forces
the receiver to wait for a trigger before moving to the next
stimulus point. (This is the next angle in Angle Domain, or the
next frequency in Frequency Domain.) TRIGGER: STIMULUS
allows you to use RF sources that are not compatible with the
HP 8530A System Bus.
When turned ON, the receiver to waits for a trigger pulse
TRIGGER: PARAM 1
before measuring parameter 1.
When turned ON, the receiver to waits for a trigger pulse
TRIGGER: PARAM 2
before measuring parameter 2.
When turned ON, the receiver waits for a trigger pulse before
TRIGGER: PARAM 3
measuring parameter 3.
When turned ON, the receiver waits for a trigger pulse before
TRIGGER: PARAM 4
measuring parameter 4.
Each of these softkeys is an ON/OFF toggle, and you can turn them on or o in any
combination. When a softkey title is underlined, that function is ON. When the title is not
underlined, the function is OFF.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
How these Functions Work when One Parameter is Being Measured
The TRIGGER: STIMULUS function can always be used. However, the TRIGGER: PARAM
functions work dierently. If you are only displaying (measuring) one parameter, only the
TRIGGER: PARAM softkey for that parameter will eect triggering.
For example, if you are viewing parameter 2, as shown in Figure 6-14, only the
TRIGGER: PARAM 2 softkey will work. The other parameter-related softkeys
TRIGGER: PARAM 1 , TRIGGER: PARAM 3 , and TRIGGER: PARAM 4 will be ignored, because
these parameters are not being measured.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-24 Stimulus Functions
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Figure 6-14. Custom External Triggering Flowchart (one parameter)
How these Functions Work when Multiple Parameters are Being Measured
If more than one parameter is being measured, the receiver will check the ON/OFF condition
of each softkey ( TRIGGER: PARAM 1 , TRIGGER: PARAM 2 , TRIGGER: PARAM 3 , and
TRIGGER: PARAM 4 ) before it measures them. Refer to Figure 6-15. If TRIGGER: PARAM 1
is on, for example, the receiver will wait for a trigger before it measures parameter 1. This
process repeats for each parameter.
EXAMPLE 1.
TRIGGER: STIMULUS ON
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 1
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 2
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 3
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 4
In this example, the receiver will:
1. Wait for one trigger before moving to the initial angle or frequency (stimulus value).
2. When the trigger arrives, the receiver will move to the initial stimulus value (start frequency
or start angle), then measure all four parameters.
3. This process repeats for each successive stimulus value.
Note that only one trigger is required per stimulus point. Thus, the receiver can trigger o the
Record Increment output from a positioner controller.
The most common use for TRIGGER: STIMULUS is when using an RF source that is not
controlled by the HP 8530. TRIGGER: STIMULUS allows you to move the source to the next
stimulus point, then have the receiver make the measurement.
EXAMPLE 2.
TRIGGER: STIMULUS OFF
ON
TRIGGER: PARAM 1
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 2
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 3
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus Functions 6-25
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
In this example, the receiver will:
1. Proceed immediately to the rst stimulus point, then wait for a trigger pulse before
measuring parameter 1.
2. When the trigger arrives, the receiver will measure all four parameters. Why? Since
the other three \wait for a trigger" softkeys are OFF, they will be measured along with
parameter 1.
3. This process repeats for each successive stimulus point.
This conguration is the default external trigger setup, and will work if using the Record
Increment from a positioner controller. Remember, only displayed parameters are measured. If
you only have Parameters 1, 2, and 3 on the display, Parameter 4 will not be measured.
EXAMPLE 3:.
TRIGGER: STIMULUS OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 1
ON
TRIGGER: PARAM 2
OFF
TRIGGER: PARAM 3
ON
TRIGGER: PARAM 4
OFF
In this example, the receiver will:
1. Proceed immediately to the rst stimulus point, then wait for a trigger pulse before
measuring parameter 1.
2. When the trigger arrives, the receiver will measure parameters 1 and 2, then it will stop and
wait for another trigger.
3. When the second trigger arrives, the receiver will measure parameters 3 and 4.
4. This process repeats for each successive stimulus point.
This setup could be used if you need to measure two parameters, then switch inputs using
external hardware (before measuring the second two parameters).
Note
If you are in External Trigger mode, and you turn all ve softkeys OFF, the
receiver will never wait for any triggers. Instead, it would \free run" as if it
were in the Internal Trigger mode. However, the HP 85370A Position Encoder
would not work properly in this case. The Encoder requires that you select
the actual Internal Trigger mode ( TRIG SRC INTERNAL ) or it will not operate
properly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6-26 Stimulus Functions
Stimulus Controls Applicable to All Domains
Figure 6-15. Custom External Triggering Flowchart (four parameters)
Stimulus Functions 6-27
7
Parameter Functions
PARAMETER block keys select the parameter to be measured and displayed. The Parameter
menus allow you to measure the signal levels on the four receiver inputs, and change Basic
Parameter denitions.
Chapter Contents
Basic Parameters
Parameter Menu
Service Parameters
Redening Parameters
Changing the Display Title
Figure 7-1. Parameter Function Block
Parameter Functions 7-1
Parameter Functions
Basic Parameters
The 4PARAM 15 4PARAM 25 4PARAM 35 and 4PARAM 45 keys select the \Basic Parameter" to be
measured and displayed. The label P1, P2, P3, or P4 appears above the measurement
graticule, showing which parameter you selected. By default, Basic Parameters select ratioed
measurements.
Parameter Menu
Pressing the PARAMETER 4MENU5 key displays the Parameter menu. This menu (and the menus
under it) allow you to:
Select Service Parameters, which allow you to measure the signal levels arriving at the
receiver inputs.
Change the denitions of the four Basic Parameters.
Change the display title (annotation).
Figure 7-2. Parameter Menu
Service Parameters
SERVICE 1 a1 , SERVICE 2 b2 , SERVICE 3 a2 , and SERVICE 4 b1 , allow you to measure
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
the unratioed power at the receiver a1, a2, b1, or b2 inputs.
For example, press PARAMETER 4MENU5, then SERVICE 1 a1 . Figure 7-3 shows a typical
display of this measurement. This display represents the power incident at the a1 input, which
is often the reference signal for antenna/RCS measurements. Now select SERVICE 2 b2 . This
measures the b2 input, which is often a reference signal input.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-2 Parameter Functions
Parameter Functions
Figure 7-3. Typical SERVICE 1, a1 Measurement
Power Accuracy of Service Parameter Measurements
Service Parameter measurements are not displayed with power meter accuracy, and they
do not compensate for the frequency response and conversion loss of HP 8530A internal
components. However, these service parameters, when properly used, are of great value in
setting up the receiver to achieve maximum accuracy and dynamic range.
Redening Parameters
Redening parameters makes it possible to:
Select a1 or a2 as the phase lock input.
Change the measurement ratio for any of the four Basic Parameters.
FACTORY PRESET restores all basic and service parameter denitions to their standard values.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 7-1 lists the standard parameter denitions selected when the FACTORY PRESET key is
pressed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 7-1. Standard PARAMETER Denitions
Parameters
Function
Basic
Service
Param 1 Param 2 Param 3 Param 4 a1 b2 a2 b1
Drive Port
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Phase Lock
a1
a1
a1
a1
a1 a1 a1 a1
Numerator
b1
b2
a2
b1
a1 b2 a2 b1
Denominator
a1
a1
a1
a1
NO RATIO
Conversion
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Parameter Functions 7-3
Parameter Functions
Descriptions of Each Denition Type
This selects the RF power drive port if using an S-parameter test set.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DRIVE
This selects which reference input, a1 or a2, is the phase lock reference. It is
possible to input the test signal on one reference input (a1 for example) and
use the other for the phase lock reference. The input you select in this menu
should reect the input receiving the phase lock signal. This is valuable if your
reference signal is not suitable for phase locking (for example, if it is less than
40 dBm, or if it is pulsed|as with a hardware gating system).
Selects the input which will be the numerator in a ratioed measurement. The
NUMERATOR
SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey accesses a series of functions which are related
to troubleshooting and repair of the instrument, and have no operational use.
DENOMINATOR Selects the input which will be the denominator in a ratioed measurement. If
you select NO RATIO the input dened as the numerator will be measured in a
non-ratioed fashion.
The b2 input cannot be selected as a denominator. You can get around this
limitation using the Conversion feature, described below:
As mentioned in the denominator description, you cannot select b2 as the
CONVERSION
denominator in a measurement. Here is an example of how to get around this
limitation: Assume you need to measure b1/b2, (you are using a1 or a2 for
your phase locking signal). All you must do is select a b2/b1 measurement,
and press CONVERSION 1/PARAM . This measures b2/b1, but inverts the
measurement mathematically, resulting in b1/b2 data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PHASE LOCK
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Redene Basic Parameters
To redene one of the basic parameters (PARAM 1, PARAM 2, PARAM 3, PARAM 4):
1. Press PARAMETER 4MENU5.
2. Press the front-panel key in the PARAMETER block that corresponds to the parameter to be
redened: 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or 4PARAM 45.
3. Press REDEFINE PARAMETER . This displays the redene parameter menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Use the softkeys to choose the phase lock, numerator, denominator, and conversion
denitions to be used in the new denition of the parameter:
Press the softkey corresponding to the item on the redene parameter menu to be
redened. This displays a menu of the available choices, and the current selection is
underlined. Press the softkey corresponding to the new denition.
Changes are executed immediately when the softkey corresponding to the new denition is
pressed.
5. When the parameter has been redened, press REDEFINE DONE to save the state that has
been dened. Now each time you select this parameter, your denition is displayed.
Please note that Factory Preset restores the standard denitions given in Table 7-1.
Redened basic parameters cannot be recalled as part of an instrument state.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7-4 Parameter Functions
Parameter Functions
Figure 7-4. Redene Parameter menu Structure
Changing the Display Title
Each displayed measurement has an annotation (a title), above it. By default, this title displays
the ratio for that measurement (b1/a1, for example). You can change the annotation to a
user-selected alpha-numeric title. Here's how:
1. Press: PARAMETER 4MENU5 PARAMETER LABEL
2. Use the label-maker menu to select a 5 character label, press TITLE DONE when you nish.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press: ANNOTATE W/LABEL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To revert back to the measurement ratio as a title, press: ANNOTATE W/INPUT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Parameter Functions 7-5
8
Format Functions
Introduction
Format block keys and the Format menu, shown in Figure 8-1, allow choices of the format used
in displaying the measurement. Any format may be chosen for any parameter.
Figure 8-1. Format Function Block and Format Menu
Display Format Keys
The following formats are available from the main front panel Format keys:
4LOG MAG5
Displays magnitude data in Cartesian logarithmic format.
4PHASE5
Displays phase data in Cartesian format.
4LIN MAG5
Displays magnitude data in Cartesian linear format.
4POLAR MAG5
Displays magnitude data in logarithmic polar format.
Format Functions 8-1
Format Functions
Format Menu Softkeys
The following formats are available when you press FORMAT 4MENU5:
Standing Wave Ratio in Cartesian format.
SWR
NNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LINEAR on POLAR
Magnitude data in linear polar format.
Shows the real portion of the measurement data in Cartesian format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
REAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
IMAGINARY
Shows the imaginary portion of the measurement data in Cartesian
format.
Important Information Regarding Polar Format
\Polar display format" in Angle Domain is completely dierent from polar format in Frequency
Domain. Refer to Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2. Dierences in Angle and Frequency Domain Polar Formats
Polar in the Angle Domain
The polar display (on the left) shows the radiation pattern of the antenna. The magnitude
of the data (in dB or dBi) is displayed versus positioner angle. Zero degrees is located at the
top-center part of the display. Increasing angle values proceed clockwise.
Polar in Frequency Domain
The polar display (on the right) shows the magnitude and phase response of the antenna (or
device) under test versus angle. Zero degrees phase angle is at the right-hand side of the polar
graticule, and increasing phase angles proceed counter-clockwise from zero.
8-2 Format Functions
Format Functions
Format Examples
The following pages show example display formats. The rst two pages show all eight formats
applicable to Frequency Domain. The last page shows formats typically used in Angle Domain.
The examples on the following pages explain the key and softkey commands used to set them
up. Only display commands are given, steps on setting up the actual measurement are not
included.
Cartesian Log Format
Refer to Figure 8-3. This is one of the most commonly used formats.
The sample measurement also uses all ve markers. There are markers at the peak of the main
lobe, at the 03 dB points, and at each main sidelobe. Also, delta markers are turned ON, with
Marker 1 as the reference marker. Thus, Markers 2 through 5 show and logarithmic amplitude
values relative to Marker 1. Marker use is explained in the Marker Functions section.
Figure 8-3. Cartesian Log Format for a Single Parameter
To set up your receiver for this type of display, perform the following steps:
1. Press: 4LOG MAG5
2. Press 4REF POSN5 10 4x15 (This sets the reference line to the top graticule).
3. Press 4SCALE5 455 4x15 (This sets vertical scale to 5 dB per division).
4. After the measurement, the peak of the main lobe may go o the top of the screen. If this
occurs, press 4REF VALUE5 and turn the knob clockwise until the peak is visible.
Format Functions 8-3
Format Functions
Polar Log Format
The polar logarithmic format is used often in antenna measurements. The sample shown in
Figure 8-4 is an example of an Angle Domain measurement.
Figure 8-4. Polar Log Format for a Single Parameter
To set up your receiver for this type of display, perform the following steps:
1. Press: 4POLAR MAG5
2. Press 4SCALE5 4105 4x15 (This sets vertical scale to 10 dB per division).
3. After the measurement, the peak of the main lobe may go o the top of the screen. If this
occurs, press 4REF VALUE5 and turn the knob clockwise until the peak is visible.
8-4 Format Functions
Format Functions
Cartesian Log Format, Two Parameter Overlay
Figure 8-5 shows how you can view two traces at once. This gure shows the sum and the
dierence signals from a monopulse antenna.
Figure 8-5. Dual Channel Overlay Display
To set up your receiver for this type of display, perform the following steps:
1. Set up the measurement. Measure one of the signals on Parameter 1, and the other on
Parameter 2.
2. Press:
3. Press: 4PARAM 15
4. Press: 4LOG MAG5
5. Press 4REF POSN5 10 4x15 (This sets the reference line to the top graticule).
6. Press 4SCALE5 455 4x15 (This sets vertical scale to 5 dB per division).
7. Press: 4PARAM 25
8. Press: 4LOG MAG5
9. Press: 4REF POSN5 10 4x15
10. Press: 4SCALE5 455 4x15
11. After the measurement, the peak of the main lobe may go o the top of the screen. If this
occurs, press 4PARAM 15 4REF VALUE5 and turn the knob clockwise until the peak is visible. If
necessary, adjust the reference value of Parameter 2 as well.
12. You can show these two signals side by side by pressing: 4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE SPLIT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Format Functions 8-5
Format Functions
Log Format, Dual Channel Split
Figure 8-6 shows how you can view two traces side by side. This gure also shows the sum
and the dierence signals from a monopulse antenna. Notice that this is a dual channel
measurement. Dual channel measurements can do some things that simple two-parameter
measurements cannot. The receiver sends the data for each channel through independent,
parallel data processing paths. Because of this, there are several features you can set
independently between the two channels. Time Domain processing, trace math, delay table,
and smoothing can be ON in one channel and OFF in the other, or may have dierent settings.
Figure 8-6. Dual Channel Split Display
To set up your receiver for this type of display, perform the following steps:
1. Press: 4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE DUAL CHANNEL SPLIT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press: 4CHANNEL 15 4PARAM 15 4POLAR MAG5
Press 4SCALE5 475 4x15 (This sets vertical scale to 7 dB per division).
Press: 4CHANNEL 25 4PARAM 25
Press: 4LOG MAG5
Press: 4REF POSN5 10 4x15 4SCALE5 455 4x15
After the measurement, the peak of the main lobe may go o the top of the screen. If this
occurs, press 4CHANNEL 15 4REF VALUE5 and turn the knob clockwise until the peak is visible.
Note the actual reference value used.
Press 4CHANNEL 25 and enter the same reference value as used in Channel 1.
8-6 Format Functions
Format Functions
Frequency and Time Domain Data Shown Simultaneously
Figure 8-7 shows frequency and time domain data placed on the screen at the same time. This
is possible using dual channel display mode. Channel 1 is placed in Frequency Domain mode,
and Channel 2 is placed in Time Domain mode.
Figure 8-7. Frequency and Time Domain Display
To set up your receiver for this type of display, perform the following steps:
1. Press: 4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE DUAL CHANNEL SPLIT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press: 4CHANNEL 15 4DOMAIN5 FREQUENCY 4PARAM 15
3. Press: 4LOG MAG5
4. Press: 4REF POSN5 10 4x15 (This sets the reference line to the top graticule).
5. Press 4SCALE5 455 4x15 (This sets vertical scale to 5 dB per division).
6. Press: 4CHANNEL 25 4PARAM 25 4LOG MAG5 TIME BAND PASS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
7. Press: 4REF POSN5 10 4x15
8. Press: 4SCALE5 4105 4x15
9. After the measurement, adjust scale and reference settings as required.
Format Functions 8-7
Response Functions
9
Response block function keys provide various options in positioning the trace and the reference
line on the display. The associated Response menu structure oers selections for:
Normalizing measurement data to the peak of the main lobe.
Averaging and smoothing (noise reduction techniques).
Adding magnitude slope and oset, and phase oset.
Using electrical delay features.
Chapter Contents
Changing Display Scale and Reference
Response Menu
Normalizing Data
Magnitude Slope and Magnitude Oset
Phase Oset
40 dB and 60 dB Pattern
Trace Averaging and Smoothing
Delay Features
Electrical Delay
Setting Velocity Factor
Auto Delay
Figure 9-1. Response Function Block
Response Functions 9-1
Response Functions
Changing Display Scale and Reference
Setting Scale and Reference Values Automatically
Press 4AUTO5 to automatically select a scale and reference value that results in the display of
the entire trace. You can make further adjustments as desired. For Cartesian displays, 4AUTO5
usually works best when the reference line is at the center of the measurement grid.
Changing Display Scale Manually
Press 4SCALE5, and then use the knob, step, or numeric 4x15 keys in the ENTRY block to change
the scale/division value. The trace expands or contracts around the reference position line.
Changing the Position of the Reference Line Manually
Press 4REF POSN5 to move the reference position line on Cartesian displays. 4REF POSN5 does not
function in polar displays.
The reference position line for Channel 1 is identied by the > indicator on the left of the
graticule; for Channel 2 it is the < indicator on the right side of the graticule.
At Factory Preset 4REF POSN5 is set to 5. To move the reference position line, press 4REF POSN5,
and then use the knob, step, or numeric keys to change its position. If you use the numeric
keys, 0 is the bottom graticule; 10 is the top graticule. Terminate a numeric entry with 4x15.
Changing the Value of the Reference Line Manually
Use 4REF VALUE5 and the knob, step, or numeric and units keys to assign a new value to the
Cartesian reference position line or the polar outer circle. The trace is positioned relative
to the reference position so changing the reference value moves the trace, but does not
change the marker value. For polar displays, changing 4REF VALUE5 is equivalent to changing
scale/division.
The Eect of Factory Preset on Display Settings
Factory Preset assigns an appropriate 4SCALE5, 4REF VALUE5, and 4REF POSN5 setting for each
format of each parameter on each channel. Color assignments are not changed by Factory
Preset.
9-2 Response Functions
Response Functions
Response Menu
Press the RESPONSE 4MENU5 key to display the Response menu. The Response menu structure
oers selections for:
Normalizing measurement data to the peak of the main lobe.
Averaging and smoothing (noise reduction techniques).
Adding magnitude slope and oset, and phase oset.
Using electrical delay features.
Figure 9-2. Response Menu Structure
Response Functions 9-3
Response Functions
Normalizing Data
Pressing RESPONSE 4MENU5 NORMALIZE MENU accesses the normalization functions of the
receiver:
NORMALIZE ACT. TRACE
\Normalize Active Trace." This softkey sets the peak magnitude
of the active parameter's trace (beam peak) to 0 dB. Markers
placed on any other part of the active parameter's trace will
display values that are relative to the 0 dB peak. This operation
only aects the active trace.
\Normalize All to Active Trace." This softkey nds the largest
ALL TO ACT.TRACE
magnitude value in the active parameter's trace (beam peak)
and sets it to 0 dB. Markers on all traces will display values that
are relative to the peak of the active parameter's trace. All
of the traces are normalized with the magnitude oset of the
active parameter.
This softkey sets all of the magnitude osets on all traces to 0.
CLEAR
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
If you use the magnitude oset feature, you should be careful
when using normalize functions. NORMALIZE ACT. TRACE ,
NORMALIZE ALL TO ACT.TRACE , and CLEAR modies the values used by the
magnitude oset feature.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using NORMALIZE ACT. TRACE or NORMALIZE ALL TO ACT.TRACE causes the D annotation to
appear on the display. This shows that the magnitude oset has been changed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Magnitude Slope and Magnitude Oset
Press RESPONSE 4MENU5 NORMALIZE MENU to access the magnitude slope, magnitude oset,
and phase oset functions.
Magnitude slope and magnitude oset produce an eect on the displayed Frequency or Time
Domain traces. Magnitude slope adds a magnitude oset that begins at 0 dB at 0 Hz, and
increases by the selected dB/GHz over the frequency sweep. Magnitude oset adds a constant
magnitude value to each frequency point. A non-zero value for either function causes the
D annotation to be displayed.
Reasons for using magnitude slope and oset include:
Viewing deviation from constant magnitude.
Viewing compensation for magnitude loss versus frequency.
Viewing compensation for insertion of a series attenuator in the test setup.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Phase Oset
The phase oset function adds a xed phase shift to each frequency point of the current
selected trace. It also changes the marker value. Phase oset can be set independently for
each parameter in each channel.
When the phase oset value is other than 0 degrees for the current parameter, the D
enhancement annotation appears on the left side of the CRT to indicate that phase oset is
applied to the current trace.
9-4 Response Functions
Response Functions
40 dB and 60 dB Pattern
These softkeys allow you to instantly view either of two common display setups:
40 dB Pattern Displays a 40 dB range, from 0 dB to 040 dB. It also places the reference line
at the top of the display, and sets the value of the reference line to 0 dB. If
4LIN MAG5 or 4LOG MAG5 are selected, scale is set to 4 dB/division. If a polar
display is selected, scale is set to 8 dB/division.
60 dB Pattern Is similar to the 40 dB Pattern function, but displays a 60 dB range (from 0 dB
to -60 dB.)
Trace Averaging and Smoothing
Averaging reduces random noise variations in measurements, improving both accuracy and
resolution. Smoothing changes the eective measurement aperture by averaging adjacent
measurement points. Both averaging and smoothing can be used simultaneously. Both can be
set independently for each channel.
Averaging
Averaging enhances meaningful resolution and increases dynamic range by eectively
decreasing the input noise bandwidth.
Press AVERAGING ON/restart then use the knob, step, or numeric keys to select the averaging
factor applied to the displayed data. Terminate a numeric entry with 4x15.
When averaging is turned on, the A enhancement annotation appears on the display. Averaging
restarts when:
The averaging factor is changed.
An important measurement or display characteristic is changed.
When a measurement calibration device is selected for measurement.
When AVERAGING ON/restart or the MEASUREMENT 4RESTART5 key is pressed.
Averaging details. In the Ramp sweep mode, the new trace, weighted by 1/n, is summed with
the current trace, weighted by (n01)/n, where n is the averaging factor. This is an exponential
running average. Also, the averaging factor selection controls the number of sweeps taken
for measurement of a standard during measurement calibration. When a calibration standard
selection key is pressed, n+1 groups are automatically taken, where n is the selected averaging
factor.
Note that in the Ramp sweep mode: Each time averaging is restarted, the averaging algorithm
starts with a small averaging factor, and increases the averaging factor group-by-group, up
to the selected factor. This allows fast convergence to the nal value. This fast convergence
algorithm means that the trace is fully averaged in n+1 sweeps rather than 4n sweeps, as
would be the case if the fast convergence were not used.
In the Step sweep, Single Point, and Frequency List sweep modes, each data point is averaged
n times as it is read, so only one sweep is required to present fully averaged data. This is a
linear block average.
Notication when averaging is nished. You can use the NUMBER of GROUPS function on
the STIMULUS menu to signal when the trace is fully averaged. Here's how:
1. Enter the averaging factor as explained above. For example, assume you require an
averaging factor of 16.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Response Functions 9-5
Response Functions
2. With an averaging factor of 16, enter NUMBER of GROUPS 17 4x15. When the H annotation
appears, the data is fully averaged. The receiver is now in Hold mode.
Averaging factor recommendations. Select an averaging factor appropriate to the operation
being performed. When adjustments to the test device or test setup are made, select a lower
averaging factor (128 or below) to see changes quickly. If a very noisy trace is being analyzed,
use a higher value (up to 4096) and allow more time for the trace to settle.
Averaging operates in factors which are powers of 2 (2n ). Averaging factors which are not
powers of 2 are rounded down to the closest power of 2. For example, if a factor of 150 is
entered, it is rounded down to 128.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 9-3. Results of Averaging
Smoothing
Smoothing operates on Cartesian data formats in much the same way as a video lter operates,
producing a linear moving average of adjacent points. The selected smoothing aperture is
displayed in percent of sweep width, as shown in Figure 9-4.
When smoothing is applied to the trace the S annotation appears. The smoothing aperture (the
width of the linear moving average) is displayed in degrees, Hz, or seconds, depending upon
the domain selected. When polar display formats are selected, trace data is not smoothed.
However, the smoothing aperture is displayed.
Figure 9-4. Smoothing Operation
9-6 Response Functions
Response Functions
Figure 9-5. Results of Smoothing
Delay Features
Electrical Delay
The electrical delay function acts as an electronic line stretcher, providing a calibrated phase
compensation versus frequency with femtosecond resolution. In eect, the specied delay
is added to the reference signal path in order to make measurements such as deviation
from linear phase, described later in the Viewing Data Chapter. Electrical Delay can be set
independently for each parameter on each channel and aects both the phase and delay
frequency domain trace and the time domain trace.
Using Electrical Delay
Press RESPONSE 4MENU5 DELAY MENU ELECTRICAL DELAY . The Active function shows
electrical delay in terms of seconds, as well as the equivalent length (in meters), relative to the
current Velocity Factor setting. After Factory Preset, Velocity Factor is relative to the speed of
light in free space.
For example, select 4PHASE5, and then use the knob to change the value. Notice that when
delay is added, the D annotation appears on the left side of the display. You can use the step
keys and the numeric and units keys to enter the amount of electrical delay desired.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Delay Options
The two options for the electrical delay feature are:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
COAXIAL DELAY
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
WAVEGUIDE DELAY
Coaxial and Waveguide softkeys allow you to select the media type simulated by the electrical
delay function.
Coaxial Delay. Factory Preset selects COAXIAL DELAY which applies a linear phase
compensation to the trace. That is, the eect is the same as if a corresponding length of perfect
vacuum dielectric coaxial transmission line was added to the reference signal path.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Response Functions 9-7
Response Functions
Waveguide Delay. Selecting WAVEGUIDE DELAY applies a non-linear phase shift which follows
the standard dispersive phase equation for rectangular waveguide. When WAVEGUIDE DELAY
is pressed the active function becomes the WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF frequency, which is used in
the phase equation. Choosing a Start frequency less than the Cuto Frequency results in phase
errors.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table Delay
The TABLE DELAY selection allows an array of real,imaginary data pairs input by the user
via the HP-IB to be applied to the data for the selected channel. Selecting TABLE DELAY
disables Electrical Delay, Magnitude Slope, and Magnitude Oset. This array must be loaded
using HP-IB (see description in the Programming section of this volume), then the table may be
stored and loaded using the disc drive.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selecting Velocity Factor
The relative velocity factor of propagation can be selected. Press:
4CAL5 MORE VELOCITY FACTOR
The active function is now Relative Velocity Factor. After Factory Preset, this value is 1.0
which is the equivalent of the speed of light in free space (2.997925 x108 meters per second).
The range of the relative velocity factor is 0.001 to 500, with values less than 1 indicating that
the propagation velocity is less than the speed of light in free space.
For example, the relative velocity is 1 divided by the square root of the dielectric constant for
the media, er . For waveguide media in standard air, the dielectric constant is about 1.00064,
giving a relative velocity factor of about 0.999680.
Changing the velocity factor changes only the supplementary distance readout.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Auto Delay
A major use of electrical delay is to:
Provide the line stretcher function in deviation from linear phase measurements.
To balance the reference and test signal path lengths to nd the electrical length of the test
device.
The AUTO DELAY key automatically selects the appropriate value of electrical delay to balance
the reference and test signal path lengths and thus result in a reasonable balanced (at) phase
trace at the marker position. When you press AUTO DELAY , the phase values at the marker
position and the two adjacent points are sampled and electrical delay is added in order to make
the phase constant. You may then make ne adjustments of Electrical Delay to achieve the
desired trace.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
9-8 Response Functions
Entry Block Controls
10
In some cases it is necessary to supply numeric values for a specic function, such as angle or
frequency. The 10 digit keypad is used to supply these values. The keys to the right of the
digits terminate the value with the appropriate units. Use 4G/n5 (giga/nano), 4M/5 (mega/micro),
4k/m5 (kilo/milli) and 4x15 (basic units: dB, dBm, degrees, seconds, meters, Hz) as applicable.
In addition to entering data with the keypad, the knob can be used to make continuous
adjustments, while the 8 and 9 keys allow values to be changed in steps.
Entry Block Controls 10-1
Entry Block
Changing Values Using the Numeric Keypad
To change a value using the numeric keypad:
1. Select the function (start angle, frequency, or any other function that requires a value). This
function becomes the \active function." Notice that the function now appears in the \active
function area" of the display.
2. Enter the new value using numeric keys, decimal point, and a terminator key. To change
the sign of the entry, press 4+/05. If you make a mistake, press the 4BACKSPACE5 key. (If you
have already pressed a terminator key, you must re-enter the entire value).
3. Terminate the entry with the appropriate units.
Table 10-1. Numeric Value Terminator Key Usage
Angle
Frequency Power Power Slope Time Distance
Key
Name
G/n
0
GHz
M/
0
MHz
k/m milli degrees
kHz
1
x1
degrees
Hz
1 4x15 always represents single units.
Other Keys in the Entry Block
ENTRY OFF5
4
PRIOR MENU5
4=MARKER5
4
0
0
0
dBm
0
0
0
dB/Ghz
ns
s
ms
s
nm
m
mm
m
Removes old error messages or active function text from the screen.
\Active function text" are messages like START 090 that appear when you
changed the value of a function.
This key takes you to the previous softkey menu.
This key can be useful when you are using markers. The easiest way to
explain what 4=MARKER5 does is by example. Assume you are making a
frequency response measurement, and the last marker you moved (the
active marker) is sitting at 11 GHz. Now assume you want to change the
center frequency to 11 GHz. All you need to do is press 4CENTER5 4=MARKER5.
The marker position (11 GHz) will become the center frequency.
Another way to use 4=MARKER5 is to transfer the marker value to another
function. As an example, assume you want to set the display reference line
to the value of the active marker (for example, assume the marker value is
013.2 dB). Press 4REF VALUE5 4=MARKER5, and the display reference line will
change to the value of the active marker.
10-2 Entry Block Controls
Instrument State Block
11
Chapter Contents
This chapter discusses the following keys:
LOCAL
SAVE and RECALL
USER PRESET
Figure 11-1. Instrument State Block Keys
The four keys in the INSTRUMENT STATE block are 4LOCAL5, 4SAVE5, 4RECALL5, and 4USER PRESET5.
Figure 11-2. LOCAL Key Menus
Instrument State Block 11-1
Instrument State Block
LOCAL
The 4LOCAL5 key has two uses:
If you are controlling the receiver with a computer, the front panel keys will not respond to
touch. Pressing 4LOCAL5 returns control to you.
4LOCAL5 also allows you to examine or change HP-IB addresses the receiver uses to control
peripherals and other instruments on the System Bus.
LOCAL Softkey Menus
The softkeys under 4LOCAL5 determine the HP-IB addresses the receiver uses when it
communicates with:
Printers or plotters on either RS-232 bus, or on the (HP-IB) System Bus.
Instruments on the System Bus.
Here is a list of the softkeys and a description of each one:
This denes the HP-IB address of the HP 8530A. The HP 8530A
ADDRESS OF 8530
will respond to HP-IB commands (sent over the main HP-IB bus)
when this address is used.
This denes the address of the system bus. A computer
SYSTEM BUS
controller can send commands directly to the HP 8530A's
system bus when it uses this address. Before this occurs you
must rst program the destination System Bus address using
PASS-THROUGH , explained below. (This feature is explained in
greater detail in Chapter 18, HP-IB Programming.)
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
SOURCE #1
controlling an RF source.
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
SOURCE #2
controlling an LO source. To use an LO source, the Multiple
Source mode must be turned on, as explained in Chapter 17.
Brings up the Converter Menu, which allows you to select:
CONVERTER
The type of frequency converter in use.
The System Bus address for the frequency converter.
These controls are explained below:
Press CONVERTER HP 8511B if you are using the HP 8511B
frequency converter.
Press ALL OTHERS if you are not using an HP 8511B frequency
converter.
SET ADDRESS denes the System Bus address the receiver uses
when controlling the HP 8511 frequency converter. (Standard
HP 8511A's do not need to be connected to the System Bus at
all.) Enter address 31 if using a standard HP 8511A, assuming
it is not connected to the System Bus. Use address 20 for an
HP 8511A option 001 or for an HP 8511B, because they are
connected to the System Bus.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
11-2 Instrument State Block
Instrument State Block
If you have an HP 8511A with option 001, and you need the
multiplexed IF feature: Connect the HP 8511A to the System
Bus, and enter address 20.
If you are using an HP 85309A frequency converter, enter
address 31.
REMOTE SWITCH
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
controlling a remote switch.
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
RF SWITCH
controlling an RF switch.
Pressing MORE accesses the following commands:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DISC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: HP-IB
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRINTER: HP-IB
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #2
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
controlling an external disc drive.
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when
controlling an HP-IB plotter.
Tells the receiver to send plots to RS-232 port #1.
Tells the receiver to send plots to RS-232 port #2.
Denes the System Bus address the receiver uses when creating
printouts.
Tells the receiver to send printouts to RS-232 port #1.
Tells the receiver to send printouts to RS-232 port #2.
Pressing MORE MORE accesses this command:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PASS THROUGH
It is possible for a computer controller to send HP-IB commands
through the HP 8530A to a device on the System Bus. When
this occurs, the computer \hands" the command to the HP
8530A (by sending to the SYSTEM BUS address). The HP 8530A
then passes the command to the device (on the System Bus) at
the address specied by PASS THROUGH .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Instrument State Block 11-3
Instrument State Block
SAVE and RECALL
SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 allow you to save and recall up to eight dierent measurement setups
(instrument states). An instrument state is dened as the condition of all current
measurement settings, including all domain, stimulus, parameter, format, and response settings.
When you press 4SAVE5 or 4RECALL5, a menu appears which lists the eight Save/Recall registers.
When saving, choose the register you want to hold the instrument state. If an asterisk (*) is
next to the register number, an instrument state is already in that register. If you select a
register that has an instrument state in it, you will overwrite the old instrument state with the
current one.
When you recall an instrument state, current instrument settings change to those dened in the
instrument state. If you save the instrument state to Save/Recall register #8, it becomes the
User Preset state. Refer to \User Preset," at the end of this chapter.
4
Storing Instrument States to Disc
You can save instrument states to disc, as explained in Chapter 15, Disc Drive Operation.
An instrument state you load from disc does not automatically go into eect. After loading the
instrument state to a register, you must then press 4RECALL5 and select that register.
USER PRESET
You can save your current setup as the \USER PRESET" state by saving it to Save register 8.
The receiver will return to that state whenever the instrument is turned on, or if you press
4USER PRESET5.
11-4 Instrument State Block
12
Viewing Data
Chapter Contents
Viewing Multiple Parameters and Channels
Viewing Data from Disc
Viewing Multiple Parameters and Channels
The HP 8530A allows you to display:
One, two, three, or four Parameters for a single Channel.
One parameter from each of the two channels.
Split or Overlay display.
How Many Parameters does the Receiver Measure?
The receiver does not measure all parameters at all times. A simple rule explains which
parameters will be measured:
If the parameter is displayed on the screen, it will be measured.
The opposite of this rule is also true:
If the parameter is NOT displayed on the screen, it will NOT be measured.
Selecting the Number of Parameters or Channels to Display
Press 4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY MODE . The number of parameters to be measured is selected with the
following softkeys:
measures and displays one parameter. Choose the desired
SINGLE PARAMETER
parameter by pressing 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or
4PARAM 45 keys.
measures and displays PARAM 1 and PARAM 2 for the active
TWO PARAMETER
channel.
measures and displays PARAM 1, PARAM 2, and PARAM 3 for
THREE PARAMETER
the active channel.
measures and displays all four parameters for the active
FOUR PARAMETER
channel. The parameters in the inactive channel will not be
measured.
measures and displays one parameter (of your choice) in each
DUAL CHANNEL
channel. For each channel, choose the desired parameter by
pressing 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, or 4PARAM 45 keys.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Viewing Data 12-1
Viewing Data
Viewing Data from Disc
The following rules apply to loading data from disc:
Before loading data from disc, place the receiver in Hold mode by pressing STIMULUS 4MENU5
MORE HOLD . Otherwise the data you load will be immediately overwritten with new data.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In Frequency Domain, the currently-selected number of points must match the number
of points in the data le. For example, if you want to load a Frequency Domain data le
with 801 points, make sure you set the HP 8530A to Frequency Domain mode, and select
STIMULUS 4MENU5 NUMBER of POINTS 801 softkey.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In Angle Domain, the current Start, Stop, and Increment Angle settings must result in a
number of measurement angles that matches those in the disc le.
For Example. You currently have Start Angle set to 090 , Stop Angle to +90 , and Increment
Angle to 1 . This results in 181 measurement angles. You could load any disc le that has 181
angles in it.
To load a le with a dierent number of measurement angles, set the Start, Stop, and
Increment Angle to values that will result in the appropriate number of angles.
Note: The Start Angle, Stop Angle, and Increment Angle do not have to match those in the
disc le. The only requirement is that the current number of measurement angles must
match the number of angles in the le. Assume you are using the settings listed in the above
example. You could load a le with a Start Angle set to 045 , Stop Angle to +45 , and
Increment Angle to O.5 . In both cases the number of angles in the measurement is 181.
If you load Raw data, the receiver places it in the Raw data array, and performs all
subsequent data processing functions on it. This includes calibration (if turned on) as well as
all display formatting. After all processing is done the data appears on the screen.
If you load \Data" data (corrected data), the receiver places the data in the Corrected data
array, performs all display formatting. After all processing is done the data appears on the
screen.
If you want to load a display memory le, make sure all memory functions are o. You can
make sure of this by pressing 4DISPLAY5 DISPLAY: DATA . This selection displays current
measurement data.
1. Now that the requirements have been explained, press:
4DISC5 LOAD MORE
2. Now you can choose whether to load Raw data, \Data" (error corrected) data, or Formatted
data. Press the softkey that corresponds the type of data you saved previously.
3. Use the knob or 8 9 keys to select the le you wish to load.
4. Press 4LOAD FILE5. The data will appear on the display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
12-2 Viewing Data
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
13
Chapter Contents
Introduction
Using Front Panel Controls in Time Domain Mode
Time Domain General Theory
Time Domain Radar Cross Section Measurements
Range Gating
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
Time Domain Transmission Measurements
Introduction
This chapter explains how to make reection and transmission measurements in the Time
Domain. Measurements made in the Frequency Domain are transformed mathematically into
the Time Domain using the internal high-speed computer in the HP 8530A. The Time Domain
response provides very useful insight into the RCS or antenna measurement. This chapter
explains basic Time Domain concepts and describes how to use this feature in:
Radar Cross Section Measurements
Antenna Impedance Measurements
Antenna Transmission Response Measurements
All HP 8530As have Time Domain menu keys. However, Time Domain operation only functions
if the receiver has option 010. If your HP 8530A is not equipped with this option, the message
FUNCTION NOT IMPLEMENTED will appear if you select a Time Domain function.
Using Front Panel Controls in Time Domain Mode
In the Time Domain, the STIMULUS keys (4START5, 4STOP5, 4CENTER5, and 4SPAN5) refer to time,
and they aect the horizontal (time) axis of the display. Time domain settings are independent
of the selected frequency range. You can enter time values using the knob, step keys, or the
keypad. The keypad terminators refer to time in seconds:
4G/n5 represents nanoseconds
4M/5 represents microseconds
4k/m5 represents milliseconds
4x15 represents seconds
Enter picoseconds as a decimal nanosecond value. For example, to enter 10 picoseconds,
press .01 4G/n5.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-1
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain General Theory
Time Domain General Theory
In Frequency Domain measurements, a device's response to RF energy at CW or sweeping
frequencies is measured. A Time Domain measurement determines a devices response to a
specic waveform, as a function of time. An example is when bouncing an RF radar pulse o
an object and measuring the return RCS signal.
With \direct measurement" systems (such as time domain reectometers), Time Domain
measurements are made by sending a known waveform pulse (or impulse) out to the device
under test (DUT), and measuring the waveform returned as a function of time. The HP 8530A
does not measure time domain directly, since it is a frequency measuring device. However,
any waveform can be mathematically formed by adding many frequencies together. Therefore,
the receiver can measure DUT performance at various frequencies and then mathematically
calculate its Time Domain response. In most ways, the mathematical model is actually superior
to systems that measure Time Domain directly. Noise performance is usually much better,
and the time axis is very stable and accurate. The calibration feature of the HP 8530A also
improves measurement performance, which is not possible in direct measurement systems.
The relationship between the Frequency Domain measurement and the Time Domain response
is described by the Fourier Transform:
Frequency Domain ! Time Domain
h(t)
H(f) 0!
It is therefore possible to measure the response of an antenna or an RCS target in the
Frequency Domain and then mathematically calculate the inverse Fourier Transform of the
data to give the Time Domain response. The receiver does this calculation using Chirp-Z Fast
Fourier Transform (FFT) computation techniques. As explained later in this chapter, the
Chirp-Z FFT has advantages over standard FFT techniques.
13-2 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Time Domain Radar Cross Section Measurements
Time Domain Radar Cross Section (RCS) testing provides a way to determine the target's
RCS response. Time Domain characterize the response of the test target to an RF-Burst having a
specic an impulse envelope.
Viewing a Time Domain RCS Measurement
To view a Time Domain RCS measurement, you must rst set up the measurement parameters
and make a measurement in the Frequency Domain. As you will see later, there is much
interdependency between the Frequency and Time Domain responses. Figure 13-1 shows a
typical RCS measurement conguration using a pair of broadband transmit and receive horn
antennas. The target (a metal cylinder) is mounted on a foam target mount, located inside an
anechoic chamber. The target is measured from 8 GHz to 12 GHz with 801 frequency points.
(Using a large number of points in the Frequency Domain measurement has many advantages,
as will be explained throughout this chapter.) Figure 13-2 shows the Frequency Domain and
the Time Domain response of the target.
Figure 13-1. Typical RCS Measurement Conguration
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-3
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Figure 13-2. Frequency Domain Response versus Time Domain Response
The Time Domain response is calculated from band-limited Frequency Domain data. The
receiver shows the calculated response of the target to an RF burst with an impulse-shaped
envelope. The Time Domain response contains information from every measurement frequency
point. The most useful display format is LOG MAGNITUDE (Cartesian) format, which displays
the envelope of the impulse response.
The Frequency Domain RCS measurement is a composite response of all of the scatterers
present on the target. The Time Domain measurement shows the eect of each individual
scatterer as a function of time (or distance). In Time Domain, the target gives two separate
responses of approximately equal amplitude (which are caused by reections from the front
and back ends of the target). Note that the presence of two closely-spaced Time Domain
responses (of approximately equal amplitude) produces the large amount of ripple in the
Frequency Domain response. The happens because the two RCS responses are adding in and
out of phase.
Interpreting The Time Domain RCS Response
The Time Domain response measures RCS versus down range, and the horizontal time
axis corresponds to the two-way travel time to the test target and back. The vertical axis
corresponds to the RCS response of the target and test range. Figure 13-3 shows only the Time
Domain response of the target with an expanded scale.
13-4 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Figure 13-3. Typical RCS Time Domain Response
The rst response on the display (at 4 ns) is caused by the coupling between the horn
antennas.
The next largest response, located at 29.5 ns, is the RCS reection from the Compact
Antenna Range Reector.
Next, the reection at 85 ns is caused by the test target.
Other responses can be caused by reections from the back wall of the anechoic chamber or
from secondary reections of energy within the test range.
Note
To convert from time to distance in RCS measurements, multiply the time scale
by:
0.5 2 the velocity of light (2.998 2 108 m/sec)
The factor of 0.5 accounts for the 2-way travel time of the impulse in the RCS
(reection) measurement.
RCS Down-Range Resolution
RCS Down-Range Resolution refers to the minimum separation between target scatterers
that can be resolved by the Time Domain impulse. For the HP 8530A, this is determined by
the width of the Time Domain impulse (which is inversely proportional to the measurement
frequency span). Wider frequency spans result in narrower Time Domain impulse widths and
better RCS down-range resolution.
The RCS down-range resolution depends on the measurement frequency span and the window
that is selected. Table 13-1 gives the approximate formulas for the impulse width for the
dierent RCS waveforms.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-5
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
RCS Waveforms
The HP 8530A can provide a number of dierent Time Domain waveform shapes as the test
stimulus. Three built-in waveforms oer trade-os between Time Domain impulse width
and sidelobe levels. The feature which provides dierent Time Domain waveforms is called
\windowing." Windowing describes the technique of modifying the Frequency Domain data
prior to its conversion to Time Domain data.
The Windowing feature was provided to reduce ringing in the Time Domain response (the
impulse \sidelobes"), or to allow users to modify the impulse waveform to meet their own
needs. Sidelobes are created by the abrupt transitions in the Frequency Domain measurement
at the start and stop frequencies.
The \MINIMUM" window provides the narrowest Time Domain impulse but causes relatively
high (013 dB) sidelobes. The resulting Time Domain impulse is useful in resolving closely
spaced scatterers of similar amplitude, but it is ineective in resolving target scatterers of
widely dierent amplitudes.
The \NORMAL" window provides a Time Domain impulse with a good compromise between
impulse width and sidelobe level (044 dB). The NORMAL window is the default (factory preset)
selection, and it is recommended for most RCS measurements.
The \MAXIMUM" window provides a Time Domain impulse with no detectable sidelobes, but
with a signicant increase in impulse width.
Table 13-1.
Approximate Impulse Width Formulas for Dierent Window Types
(Time Domain Waveforms).
Window
Type
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Impulse Width Formula
1.20 4 Frequency Span 2 1.0
1.20 4 Frequency Span 2 1.6
1.20 4 Frequency Span 2 2.4
User-Dened Waveforms
Impulse Sidelobe
Level
013 dB
044 dB
090 dB
For computer controlled measurement systems, it is possible to program the HP 8530A with
a user-dened windowing function (for example, with Hamming or Hanning windows). To
do this, load the Frequency Domain coecients (for your special window) into the HP 8530A
\Delay Table." There is one delay table for each channel. Initially, this table must be supplied
over HP-IB from a controller.
The delay table consists of a complex (real and imaginary) data entry for each point in the data
trace. Each entry can be thought of as a complex scaling factor, which is multiplied with the
measured data just after error correction and before Time Domain. Because the operation
takes place before Time Domain processing, the delay table can be used to create user-dened
Time Domain waveforms.
With Table Delay and the MINIMUM window selected, the HP 8530A will display the Time
Domain response of the RCS target according to the user-supplied waveform. Refer to \Table
Delay" in the Keyword Dictionary for more information.
13-6 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Time Domain Digital Resolution
Digital Resolution is dened as the ability to locate a single response in time. In other words, if
only one response is there, this is how closely you can pinpoint the peak of that response. The
Digital Resolution is equal to the digital resolution of the CRT (which is the time span displayed
divided by the number of points). Maximum Digital Resolution is achieved by centering the
response on the display and then reducing the time span. Therefore, the Digital Resolution is
always much ner than the Down-Range Resolution.
The digital resolution of the Time Domain trace is determined by the Number of Points
measured in the Frequency Domain and by the time span that is displayed. The HP 8530A
digital Inverse Fourier Transform method applies these points to the time span that is
displayed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain increasingly higher digital resolution of the Time
Domain trace by reducing the displayed time span. This is an advantage the Chirp Z Fast
Fourier Transform (FFT) has over standard FFT processing methods. Standard FFT methods
require the Number of Points to be spread across the entire Time Domain Alias-Free Range,
thereby limiting the digital resolution.
By reducing the displayed time span, you can usually obtain sucient digital resolution for
viewing the RCS responses, even with a low number of Frequency Domain points. Note that
increasing the digital resolution does not increase the ability to resolve individual target
scatterers. Higher digital resolution simply gives better point-to-point resolution of a Time
Domain trace.
Figure 13-4. Typical Aliased Response
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-7
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
RCS Alias-Free Range
Alias-Free Range is the length in time that a measurement can be made without encountering
a repetition of the response (see Figure 13-4). The repetition of the Time Domain response
occurs at regular intervals of time and is a consequence of the Frequency Domain RCS
response being measured at discrete frequencies, rather than over a continuous spectrum. The
separation between Time Domain response repetitions is known as the Alias-Free Range, and
it is exactly equal to 1/1F (the spacing between Frequency Domain data points). Alias-Free
Range is therefore directly proportional to the Number of Points and inversely proportional to
the frequency Span (Stop 0 Start frequency). Alias-Free Range can be calculated using the
following formula.
Alias-Free Range = 1/1F or (Number of Points 0 1) 4 Frequency Span
Aliasing
The term aliasing is an undesired condition where Time Domain repetitions overlap. To prevent
aliasing with RCS measurements, make sure:
Time Domain Alias-Free Range approximately twice the RCS chamber length
As a sample calculation, for a 401 point measurement from 8.2 GHz to 11.2 GHz
(SPAN = 3.0 GHz), the Alias-Free Range is:
(401 0 1) 4 3.0 GHz = 133 nsec (40.0 meters).
Thus, the length of the test range from the range antennas to the chamber back wall must be
20 meters or less (one half of the Alias-Free Range). Otherwise the Time Domain responses will
overlap (aliasing occurs). Remember to multiply by the relative velocity of light to get actual
physical length.
How to Increase Alias-Free Range
To increase the Alias-Free Range, it is recommended that you rst increase the Number of
Points measured in the Frequency Domain. If going to the maximum Number of Points (801)
is not sucient, then you must reduce the Frequency Domain measurement span. Reducing
frequency span also reduces the RCS Time Domain resolution. So reduce the measurement
frequency span only as much as is absolutely necessary.
How to Distinguish an Aliased Response from a Real Response
When aliasing occurs, it can be dicult to tell the real Time Domain response from an aliased
response. Here is one way to determine whether a response is real:
1. Save the Time Domain response into memory.
2. Select Frequency Domain.
3. Decrease the measurement frequency span a small amount.
4. Allow a full frequency sweep.
5. Select Time Domain.
6. Display data and memory.
Since reducing the frequency span increases the Alias-Free Range, any aliased response will
move along the time axis. Any real Time Domain response will remain stationary, although it
will change in appearance slightly.
13-8 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Measurement Errors and Calibration
Measurement errors are caused by undesired range reections, dierent electrical
characteristics between the test and reference channels, and other causes. This section
discusses the causes of common measurement errors, and explains how calibration is used to
reduce these errors.
Time Domain Noise Floor Reduction
One advantage of the HP 8530A Time Domain conversion technique is that it reduces receiver
noise in the Time Domain, proportional to the Number of Points measured in the Frequency
Domain. The Time Domain noise is lower by 10 log (Number of Points), which greatly increases
the Time Domain dynamic range.
For example, for a measurement at 801 frequency points, converting to the Time Domain will
reduce the receiver noise by 29 dB! (This is also known as \processing gain.") Because of this,
most RCS measurements will be limited by residual chamber clutter rather than receiver noise.
Eects of RCS Calibration on Time Domain Responses
RCS calibration reduces the eects of systematic measurement errors (those that are stable and
repeatable), and displays the RCS of the target in dBsm (dB relative to a square meter). RCS
calibration aects both Frequency and Time Domain data. Refer to the two-term error model
shown in Figure 13-5.
Figure 13-5. RCS Isolation and Response Error Model
Isolation Error Term (Range Clutter). The RCS Isolation error term accounts for RCS \range
clutter." This is caused by leakage between the transmit and receive antennas and by spurious
reections within the anechoic chamber. These signals arrive in parallel with the target
responses, and they limit the receiver's ability to measure small RCS targets.
Frequency Response Error Term. The Frequency Response error term accounts for electrical
dierences between the test and reference paths, caused by the test system. The signals in the
test and reference channels do not track each other perfectly because the cables, connectors,
antennas, and other components in the test and reference paths are not identical. This causes
measurement errors because the receiver measures the response of the test setup along with
the performance of the device under test. Frequency response errors are the dierences in
phase and amplitude (between the test and reference paths), caused by the test setup itself.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-9
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
The frequency response error term accounts for these dierences, as well as other \non-RCS"
measurement eects. To the extent that these measurement errors are repeatable, they can be
quantied (during calibration) and their eects removed from the measured data.
RCS Calibration makes two separate measurements:
It measures the reference target.
It measures the empty chamber.
The order of measurement does not aect calibration. After these two measurements are
nished, the HP 8530A:
Subtracts the chamber response (background) from the reference target response.
Divides the result by the theoretical response of the reference target to give the frequency
response error term.
The empty chamber response is then used as the isolation error term.
If the target mount changes, simply install the new target mount (with calibration turned ON)
and perform an \Update Isolation" calibration. Refer to the RCS Calibration section for more
details.
RCS Calibration is performed on Frequency Domain data, and therefore aects both Frequency
Domain and Time Domain RCS responses. Of particular interest in this section are the eects of
calibration on the Time Domain responses (see Figure 13-6).
Horizontal Axis: Target Zone Shift. The location of the reference target along the time axis
will change when RCS calibration is turned ON. With calibration OFF, the location (in time) of
the target zone is determined by:
The distance between the range antennas and the test target.
To a lesser extent, by the electrical dierences between the test and reference paths. Since
calibration is OFF, frequency response errors still aect the measurement.
When the receiver turns calibration ON, it moves the target zone to zero seconds (because of
the phase calibration performed on the Frequency Domain data).
Vertical Axis: Clutter Removal and Reference Level Shift. RCS calibration will also apply
background subtraction to remove much of the range clutter from the Time Domain RCS
measurement. This makes the target response more visible.
After calibration, the receiver adjusts the overall reference level to display the target
amplitude in dBsm.
13-10 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Figure 13-6. Time Domain RCS Response Before and After Calibration
Target Shadowing and Target Scattering
RCS calibration can be less eective when removing range clutter behind the target zone. This
is because the target \shadows" a portion of the chamber directly behind itself. While the
target is in place, it may block some of the transmitted RF energy from the back wall of the
chamber. During the rst part of the calibration, the receiver measures the target plus the
background. The background measured has the shadow. Next, you remove the target and the
receiver measures just the background, however, the shadow no longer exists. This causes the
background subtraction to be less accurate. After calibration, a large back-wall reection may
reappear if the calibration target is large.
In addition, the target can scatter energy toward the walls and ceiling, which can cause
spurious responses that arrive after the target zone responses.
Shadowing and target scattering reduce the receiver's ability to observe small RCS responses
when large target responses are also present.
RCS Measurement Concepts
It is important to understand the following concepts when interpreting measured RCS
responses.
Masking
Target masking is when the RCS response of one target scatterer will aect the measured
response of each subsequent scatterer. This occurs because the energy reected from (or
absorbed in) the rst scatterer never reaches those that are behind it. The result is that the
subsequent scatterers will present a lower RCS response than would occur if the rst scatterer
was not present.
Reverberations
Complex RCS targets will often have reverberations that occur within the target structures.
This causes their RCS Time Domain responses to be distributed (in time) beyond the calculated
target electrical length.
It is important to consider masking and reverberations when determining the best frequency
and Time Domain settings for viewing the target.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-11
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Range Gating
The HP 8530A Gating feature allows you to selectively view individual portions of the Time
Domain response. Once you gate out unwanted Time Domain responses, you can then view
the data in the Frequency Domain: the eects of the Time Domain responses outside of the
gate will be removed. For RCS measurements, this allows the user to gate out unwanted RCS
responses (those that originate outside the target zone). Thus, gating mathematically removes
undesired responses from both time and Frequency Domain data. Refer to Figure 13-8.
A Gate is a band-pass shaped Time Domain lter. The user has direct control over the gate
width and location. There are three Gate indicators:
START and STOP
The Gate START and STOP indicate the 06 dB cuto times.
Gate SPAN = STOP 0 START.
CENTER
The GATE CENTER indicates the center time (not frequency) of this
lter.
A Gate has a bandpass lter shape, as shown in Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7. Typical Gate Shape
Gating Example
This example demonstrates the use of gating to reduce the eects of unwanted RCS responses
when measuring a metal sphere. The gate is centered around the target zone and, with the
gate applied, the eects of the responses outside the gate are removed. In the Frequency
Domain, this removes the high frequency ripple from the response. Figure 13-8 shows the
eects of gating in the Frequency and Time Domains.
13-12 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Figure 13-8. The Eects of Gating in Time and Frequency Domains
Select Gate Shape
Four dierent Gate shapes are available:
Minimum
Normal
Wide
Maximum
As shown in Figure 13-9, each of the Gates have dierent passband atness, cuto rate, and
sidelobe levels. T1 indicates the Gate Span which is the time between the Gate start and stop
indicators. T2 is the time between the edge of the Gate Passband and the 06 dB Gate stop time.
T3 (equal to T2 ) is the time between the Gate stop time and the point where the lter rst
reaches the level of the highest Gate Sidelobe. The Gate characteristics for each Gate shape are
listed in Table 13-2.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-13
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Figure 13-9. Gate Characteristics
Gate
Shape
Minimum
Normal
Wide
Maximum
Table 13-2.
Gate Shape Characteristics Using Dierent Window Settings
Passband
Sidelobe
Cuto Time
Minimum
Ripple
Levels
T2 = T3
Gate Span T1
0.6/fspan
024 dB
60.40 dB
1.2/fspan
1.4/fspan
045 dB
60.04 dB
2.8/fspan
4.0/fspan
052 dB
60.02 dB
8.0/fspan
11.2/fspan
080 dB
60.01 dB
22.4/fspan
The Passband Ripple and Sidelobe Levels are descriptive of the gate (lter) shape. The Cuto
Time, T2 = T3 (see Figure 13-9), indicates how fast the gate lter rolls o. For each gate shape,
there is also a Minimum Gate Span (T1min = 2 x T2 ) which gives a lter passband of zero.
An easy way to calculate minimum Gate Span is shown in the far right column in Table 13-2.
For example, if you are using Normal Gate Shape, minimum Gate Span = 2.8 4 frequency span.
Entering a Gate span that is smaller than minimum will produce a distorted lter shape which:
Will have no passband.
Will have a wider shape.
May have higher sidelobe levels.
Will give an incorrect indication of gate Start and Stop times.
Therefore, you should always select a Gate Span that is higher than the minimum value. The
cuto time and the minimum Gate Span are inversely proportional to the frequency span of the
measurement as indicated in Table 13-2.
For best results using Gating, you should:
Always center the Gate around the response (or responses) that you want to retain in the
measurement.
Make the Gate Span wide enough to include all of those responses.
13-14 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Gating During RCS Calibration
The HP 8530A RCS Calibration procedure allows you to use gating during calibration. The
gated calibration applies the Gate to the frequency response error term (Er) only, allowing
removal of the eects of shadowing and scattering caused by the reference target.
Gating (during RCS calibration) better characterizes the reference target and the frequency
response error (Er) of the measurement system.
The \Gating during Calibration" feature is located in the Target Response menu. There are two
selections:
GATING YES
If selected, the HP 8530 will use the current gate settings during the gated
calibration. If Gating is currently turned OFF, the HP 8530 will prompt you to
rst set up and turn on the gate before measuring the reference target. NOTE:
you can re-enter the existing calibration by pressing \RESUME CAL". Once you
have set up the gate, you do not have to start the calibration over again.
If selected, no gate is used (in the calibration), regardless of whether gating is
GATING NO
turned ON or OFF.
With gating ON during RCS calibration, the receiver applies the current Time Domain gate
settings to the data that results from the raw measured data of the reference target minus
the background. The gate provides better characterization of the reference target, because
it removes the eects of interactions of the reference target with the test chamber. Gating
can remove the eects of reference target scattering, and it can also reduce the eects of
reference target shadowing. Remember that gating only removes responses that lie outside of
the gate.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Setting the Gate for a Gated RCS Calibration
You should select gate Start, Stop, Center, and Span times while viewing the reference target
response in the Time Domain. Make the gate span wide enough to include the full target zone
response. At minimum, the gate span should be at least wide enough to be centered on the
peak response of the reference target and include its full Time Domain response.
If your target is a sphere, the placement of the gate is critical. Spheres produce a secondary
reection caused by RF energy propagating around the back of the sphere, which ultimately
arrives back at the receive antenna. This produces the secondary reection, known as a
\creeping wave," located in time by (2 + ) 2 radius 2 c (c=velocity of light) after the main
(specular) response from the front of the sphere.
If the creeping wave is clearly separate from the main target response, place the gate around
just the main response. In this case make sure you select the OPTICAL SPHERE model when
you dene the RCS target (as explained the section on RCS calibration).
If the main target response and the creeping wave are not clearly distinct and separate,
position the gate around both of them. In this case make sure you select the TARGET: SPHERE
model when you dene the RCS target.
Because the gate start and stop indicators show the 06 dB points of the gate lter, it is
important to locate them beyond the peak of the responses that are to be kept within the gate
to prevent distorting the responses.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Do Not Use Gating When
...
You are measuring a small frequency span or number of points.
If using a frequency list where the points are not evenly spaced.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-15
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain RCS Measurements
Do not attempt to gate out very large background reections, or subsequent measurements will
not be accurate.
Note
Be sure to turn OFF any existing calibration before making the gate settings for
a gated calibration. RCS calibration (gated or ungated) moves the target zone
to zero seconds in the Time Domain. Because of this, setting the gate while
calibration turned ON will put the gate in the wrong place. Since this will
produce a bad calibration, the HP 8530A will issue a warning if you attempt to
do this. If this ever happens, press TIME DOMAIN, GATING, GATE OFF, and
then return to the calibration by pressing CAL, RESUME CAL.
Using Gating During Subsequent Measurements
If gating is used during the calibration, HP recommends that it also be used in subsequent
calibrated RCS measurements. After calibration is nished, the receiver turns the gate OFF
automatically. It does this because the RCS calibration procedure shifts the target zone to
zero seconds, and the current gate would be in the wrong place. Move the Gate center to the
appropriate location around zero seconds before turning the gate back ON.
Eects of Gating on Background Calibrations
Gating has no eect on the isolation portion of any calibration, gated or ungated. It is applied
only to the dierence trace that is used when constructing the frequency response error term
during a gated RCS calibration.
13-16 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
Time Domain is also very useful when measuring antenna impedance. This type of
measurement requires you to add a coupler to the measurement conguration, as shown
in Figure 13-10. For antenna impedance measurements, the Time Domain response gives a
measure of reection coecient versus time. This can give signicant insight into the design of
the antenna.
Figure 13-10. Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurement Setup
Time Domain concepts are often very similar between Radar Cross Section measurements and
antenna impedance measurements. This section will discuss only those areas that are unique to
impedance measurements. Please refer to the section on Time Domain RCS Measurements for
additional information on Time Domain measurements.
As an example of a measurement using Time Band Pass, consider the reection of a standard
gain antenna, measured at the end of a cable.
Procedure
1. Perform a 1-port calibration, as explained in the Calibration section.
2. Then connect the standard gain antenna to the test cable, being careful not to move the
cable (which could invalidate the 1-port calibration).
3. Press: 4DOMAIN5 TIME BANDPASS
4. Press LOG MAGNITUDE AUTO to display the trace and observe the Time Domain response of
the antenna. Figure 13-11 shows a typical Frequency Domain and Time Domain response.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-17
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
Figure 13-11. Typical Frequency and Time Domain Response of an Antenna
Interpreting the Time Band Pass Reection Response Horizontal Axis.
NOTE: When you read the following paragraph, you need to know the denition of the term
\calibration plane." A \calibration plane" is the exact place (electrically) where you placed
the calibration standards during a calibration. This is the only location in the system that is
actually calibrated.
In Time Band Pass reection measurements, the horizontal axis represents the amount of time
that it takes for an impulse, launched at the \calibration plane," to reach the discontinuity in
the antenna and return. Thus, this is the two-way travel time to the discontinuity.
The Marker reads out both the time and the electrical length to the discontinuity. The
electrical length is obtained by multiplying the time by the velocity of light in free space
(2.997925E8 m/sec). To get the physical length, multiply the displayed electrical length
by the relative velocity of light in the transmission medium of the antenna, or use the
VELOCITY FACTOR function. Using Velocity Factor along with Electrical Delay can produce
accurate distance measurements in dispersive media such as waveguide. Refer to the
description of the Electrical Delay feature in the Response chapter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Interpreting the Time Band Pass Reection Response Vertical Axis.
The quantity displayed on the vertical axis depends on the selected display format. Time
Band Pass defaults to the Linear Magnitude format, which displays the response in reection
coecient () units. This can be thought of as an average reection coecient of the
discontinuity over the frequency range of the measurement.
Other useful formats are listed in Table 13-3. The Time Band Pass response gives the magnitude
of the reection only and has no direct impedance information (R, L, or C).
Table 13-3. Useful Time Band Pass Formats
Format
Trace Value
LINEAR MAG
Reection Coecient Units
LOG MAG
Return Loss (dB)
SWR
SWR Units
13-18 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Resolution
Time Domain antenna impedance resolution refers to the minimum separation between
antenna impedance discontinuities that can be resolved by the Time Domain impulse. For the
HP 8530A, this is determined by the width of the Time Domain impulse, which is inversely
proportional to the measurement frequency span. A wider measurement frequency span
will produce a narrower Time Domain impulse, which gives better resolution of the antenna
discontinuities.
Formulas for determining the impulse width and impulse shape are given in Table 13-1 in the
section on Time Domain RCS measurements.
Antenna Impedance Alias-Free Range and Aliasing
Time Domain antenna impedance measurements also have an Alias-Free Range that is equal to
1/1F, the spacing between Frequency Domain data points (the same as for RCS measurements).
In general, aliasing is much less limiting for antenna impedance measurements than for RCS
measurements. It is recommended that the Alias-Free Range be at least twice as large as the
electrical length of the antenna.
To increase the Alias-Free Range, rst increase the Number of Points measured in the
Frequency Domain. If going to the maximum Number of Points (801) is not sucient,
reduce the Frequency Domain span. (Reducing frequency span also reduces the RCS Time
Domain resolution. So reduce the measurement frequency span only as much as is absolutely
necessary.)
Eects of 1-Port Calibration on Antenna Impedance Time Domain
Responses
The purpose of 1-port calibration is to reduce the eects of systematic measurement errors
(those that are stable and repeatable), and to display the antenna impedance both in
Frequency and Time Domain. Antenna calibration uses a three term error model, as shown in
Figure 13-12.
Figure 13-12. Antenna Impedance 1-Port Error Model
The 1-port impedance error model contains directivity, source match, and Frequency Response
error terms. Directivity is an isolation type of error term that arrives in parallel with the
response of the antenna. It is characterized by measuring a very high quality broadband
50 ohm load (from a calibration kit). The Source Match error term represents the non-ideal
impedance match that the measurement system presents to the antenna. (An indirect analogy
in RCS error measurements is the multi-dimensional \scattering" responses caused by the
reference target. Because source match of the antenna impedance measurement conguration
is conned to one dimension, it can be characterized and be used in calibration.) The
Frequency Response error term describes the phase and amplitude dierences between the test
and reference channels. Source Match and Frequency Response error terms are characterized
by measuring a shielded (and modeled) open circuit and a short circuit (oset short circuits
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-19
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Impedance Measurements
are used in waveguide in place of the open circuit). With a balanced test conguration, these
measurement errors are very stable and repeatable, and their eects can be removed from the
measured data.
Note
When calibrating at the end of a cable, it is important to minimize the
movement of the cable during and after the measurement calibration (since this
can change it's frequency response and invalidate the calibration). In addition,
to minimize the eects of changing temperature on measurement calibration,
it is important that the test and reference cable lengths be approximately
equal. (To test for this, measure a short circuit with no calibration applied and
view the Frequency Domain phase. A well balanced test conguration will
have little or no phase change with frequency when a coaxial short circuit is
measured.)
Eects of 1-Port Calibration
With calibration OFF, the location (in time) of the antenna impedance is determined by the
electrical balance of the test and reference cables. After calibration is applied, the reference
plane will be shifted to zero seconds (this is a result of the phase calibration that occurs to
the Frequency Domain data). The 1-port calibration greatly improves the accuracy of the
impedance measurement.
Antenna Impedance Time Domain Concepts
The following concepts are important to understand when interpreting the measured antenna
impedance Time Domain responses.
Masking in Impedance Measurements
Masking is a physical phenomenon that occurs when an impulse response of one impedance
discontinuity aects (or hides) the response of subsequent discontinuities in the antenna.
This occurs because the energy reected from (or absorbed in) the rst discontinuity never
reaches the second. The net eect is that the subsequent discontinuities will present a lower
impedance than would occur if the rst discontinuity was not present. In addition, the antenna
under test will radiate energy during the impedance measurement. This radiated energy
can reect o nearby objects and be received by the test antenna. This appears in the Time
Domain as an impedance response that is far separated (in time) from the response of the
actual antenna. For this reason, it is recommended that the antenna be pointed toward free
space (if outdoors) or towards low reection absorber when making impedance measurements.
Gating can be used to remove the eects of these radiated-reected signals from the impedance
measurement.
Gating in Impedance Measurements.
The HP 8530A Gating feature provides the ability to selective view individual portions of
the Time Domain response. After converting back to the Frequency Domain, the eects
of the Time Domain responses outside of the gate are removed. For antenna impedance
measurements, this allows the user to view the responses of individual discontinuities within
the antenna. You can also gate out responses caused by radiated-reected responses. See the
section on RCS Gating for a discussion of gate lter shapes. There is no provision for using
gating during a 1-port calibration (because of its inherent high accuracy). However, gating can
be used after 1-port calibration is turned ON.
13-20 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Transmission Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Transmission Measurements
Time Domain is also useful when making antenna transmission measurements and
characterizing the antenna test range for multipath signals.
Time Domain concepts are very similar between Radar Cross Section measurements and
antenna transmission measurements. This portion of the manual will cover only those areas
that are unique to antenna transmission measurements. Please refer to the section on Time
Domain RCS Measurements for additional detail on Time Domain measurements.
Time Domain Characterization of Antenna Range Multipath
Antenna range multipath describes signals received by the test antenna from directions other
than line-of-sight from the transmitter.
The dominant sources of multipath responses occurring in outdoor ranges are the:
Responses caused by direction illumination of the ground.
Energy reecting from nearby buildings or other objects.
For indoor ranges, multipath can be caused by:
Reections from non-ideal absorber material
Direct illumination from the feed antenna of a compact antenna test range (CATR) to the test
antenna.
Scattering o of CATR reectors
Re-radiation of the receive antenna that illuminates close-in obstacles and causes secondary
responses.
These multipath responses arrive in parallel with the main line-of-sight response. Because the
reception of multipath depends on the radiation pattern of the antenna and its orientation,
the resulting errors are not stationary and there is no simple mathematical technique to
characterize and remove them. However, Time Domain analysis of the test range can help to
determine their levels, which can help in the placement of absorber or other structures to
reduce their reception by the test antenna.
Antenna range geometry is a signicant factor when attempting to distinguish Time Domain
transmission responses. The dierence in the main path and ground path can be determined
using the following formula (for equal antenna heights and a at ground contour). The
dierence between these two paths on a conventional outdoor range depends on the height (H)
of the antennas above ground and the distance (D) between the transmit and receive antennas.
1 = (Square Root (D2 + (2H)2)) 0 D
Usually, higher antennas or shorter distance between transmit and receive towers cause a
greater dierence between the direct and ground path responses.
Antenna Impulse Response
The following concepts are important to understand in interpreting the measured antenna
transmission Time Domain responses. Formulas for determining the Time Domain impulse
width and impulse shape are the same as given in Table 13-1, in the RCS Time Domain section.
However, due to the dispersion and to internal reections, many antennas have Time Domain
response that extends longer in time than would be expected, as shown in Figure 13-13.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-21
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Transmission Measurements
Figure 13-13. Responses in a Typical RCS Range
When using Time Domain to distinguish between main path responses and ground path
responses, the path dierence delta must be greater than the impulse response of the
antenna under test. In general, broadband antennas have shorter duration transmission Time
Domain impulse responses. It is recommended that the antenna be characterized only over
its operational bandwidth. Measuring an antenna outside of its bandwidth will not reduce its
impulse response width, and it may adversely aect the Time Domain measurement.
Antenna Transmission Alias-Free Range and Aliasing
Time Domain transmission response measurements also have an Alias-Free Range that is equal
to 1/1F, where 1F is the spacing between Frequency Domain data points (the same as for RCS
measurements). Usually, aliasing is much less limiting for antenna transmission measurements
than for RCS measurements. It is recommended that the Alias-Free Range of the measurement
be less than the greatest dierence between the line-of-sight path and multi-path signals. Note
that this dierence is usually far less than the actual length of the antenna test range.
To increase the Alias-Free Range, rst increase the Number of Points measured in the
Frequency Domain. If going to the maximum Number of Points (801) is not sucient, then you
must reduce the Frequency Domain span. Since this reduces the Time Domain resolution, it
is recommended that you keep the frequency span as wide as possible (within the operating
bandwidth of the test antenna).
Eects of Antenna Calibration
The purpose of antenna gain calibration is to calibrate the antenna transmission response in
dBi (relative to an isotropic radiator). Although the intention is to reduce the eect of all test
range measurement errors, the only error terms that can be characterized are the receiver
isolation (crosstalk) and the range/receiver frequency response. A 2-term error model is used.
However, this does not remove the eects of multipath. The frequency response error term is
characterized by measuring a standard gain antenna.
Before calibration is turned ON, the location (in time) of the antenna transmission response
is determined by the dierence between the line-of-site transmission path and the reference
13-22 Introduction to Time Domain RCS and
Antenna Measurements
Time Domain Antenna Transmission Measurements
signal transmission path. After antenna calibration is turned ON, the main antenna
transmission response in time shifts to zero seconds.
Gating
The HP 8530A Time Domain gating feature can remove the eects of unwanted Time Domain
responses. For antenna test ranges where there is adequate separation of the line-of-sight and
multipath responses, Time Domain gating can remove the eects of the range multipath, with
signicant results. When converting back to the Frequency Domain, the eects of the Time
Domain responses outside of the gate are removed. See the earlier section on RCS Gating for a
discussion of gate lter shapes.
For automated antenna systems, the Time Domain gating feature can remove the eects of
multipath from antenna pattern measurements. This procedure involves making broadband
measurements at discrete rotation angles (stepped positioner motion). During the measurement
(or afterwards in post-processing), the Time Domain gating feature can be used to remove the
multipath from each multiple frequency measurement. After the measurement is complete, the
end result is up to 801 dierent antenna patterns (one for each measurement frequency) that
have had the eects of multipath removed. For more information, obtain the paper \Making
Accurate Antenna and Radar Cross Section Measurements," which is available upon request.
Errors Caused by the Gating Process
When using gating to remove the eects of unwanted response paths, it can be dicult to
determine the resulting measurement accuracy in the Frequency Domain response. Usually
the net result is better because of the reduction of the unwanted signal, but it is dicult to
determine just how much better. The following guidelines are suggested.
First, consider the eect of the unwanted signal on the desired response. Table 13-4 lists the
measurement error that can be caused by stray signals at dierent levels relative to that of the
desired response.
Table 13-4. Gating Uncertainty
Unwanted Signal to
Desired Signal
Ratio
10 dB
0 dB
010 dB
020 dB
030 dB
040 dB
6 Amplitude
Uncertainty
Completely in error
+6 dB 0 1 dB
+2.4 dB 0 3.3 dB
+0.83 dB 0 0.92 dB
+0.27 dB 0 0.28 dB
+0.09 dB 0 0.09 dB
Phase Uncertainty
Completely in error
645 deg
618 deg
65.7 deg
61.8 deg
60.57 deg
If setting a gate span also reduces some of the main response, then you will incur the an error
proportional to the relative level of the response to the main level. Again, Table 13-4 is a good
guideline in determining the eect of this operation.
Introduction to Time Domain RCS and 13-23
Antenna Measurements
SAVE and RECALL
14
Saving and Recalling Instrument States
SAVE5 and 4RECALL5 allow you to save and recall up to eight dierent measurement setups
(instrument states). An instrument state is dened as the condition of all current
measurement settings, including all domain, stimulus, parameter, format, and response settings.
When you press 4SAVE5 or 4RECALL5, a menu appears which lists the eight Save/Recall registers.
When saving, choose the register you want to hold the instrument state. If you select a register
that has an instrument state in it, you will overwrite the old instrument state with the current
one.
When you recall an instrument state, current instrument settings change to those dened in the
instrument state.
4
Storing Instrument States to Disc
You can save instrument states to disc, as explained in Chapter 15, Disc Drive Operation.
An instrument state you load from disc does not automatically go into eect. After loading the
instrument state to a register, you must then press 4RECALL5 and select that register.
USER PRESET
You can save your current setup as the \USER PRESET" state by saving it to Save register 8.
The receiver will return to that state whenever the instrument is turned on, or if you press
4USER PRESET5.
FACTORY PRESET
To return the receiver to its factory-default settings (shown below), press:
4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Factory Preset State
The Factory Preset State consists of the factory default values selected for various functions.
The following is a partial list of the preset state or value associated with a function. If you
have a question on a specic function, refer to the individual entry in the HP 8530A Keyword
Dictionary.
SAVE and RECALL 14-1
Save and Recall
Table 14-1. Instrument Factory Preset Conditions
INSTRUMENT
STATE
DOMAIN
STIMULUS
PARAMETER
FORMAT
RESPONSE
OFF.
CAL
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
MARKER
COPY
14-2 SAVE and RECALL
Selected Channel = 1, No Menu Displayed
SAVE/RECALL Instrument States 1{8 Not Changed.
Frequency
GATE OFF.
Maximum sweep range of source and test set.
NUMBER OF POINTS = 201,
Source Power = depends upon source.
SWEEP TIME = 166 ms, RAMP SWEEP,
CONTINUAL,
Channel 1 = Param 1, Channel 2 = Param 2.
Channel 1 = LOG MAG. Channel 2 = LOG MAG.
SCALE = 10 dB/division,
REF VALUE = 0 dB, REF POSN = 5,
ELECTRICAL DELAY = 0 seconds, COAXIAL,
AVERAGING = OFF, SMOOTHING = OFF,
PHASE OFFSET = 0 degrees, MAGNITUDE OFFSET = 0 dB,
MAGNITUDE SLOPE = 0 dB/GHz, NORMALIZE
CORRECTION OFF,
Z0 = 50 Ohms,
VELOCITY FACTOR = 1.0,
TRIM SWEEP = 0,
CAL SETS 1{8 = Not Changed.
SINGLE CHANNEL, DATA.
Trace Memories 1{8 Not Changed.
Display Colors Not Changed.
Date/Time Clock On.
HP-IB Addresses Not Changed.
CRT ON, IF GAIN = AUTO.
MULTIPLE SOURCE = OFF
all OFF, 4 OFF,
DISCRETE
Marker List On, All Param/1 Marker.
PLOT ALL = FULL PAGE
Param 1 Data = Pen 3.
Param 2 Data = Pen 5.
Param 3 Data = Pen 6.
Param 4 Data = Pen 4.
Graticule = Pen 1.
Plot Type = Color.
Disc Drive Operation
15
Chapter Contents
Features
Disc Capacities
ASCII and Binary File Types
Compatible Disc Types
Changing between DOS and LIF discs
Initializing Discs
Storing Disc Files
Loading Disc Files
Viewing a Directory of Files
Deleting Disc Files
Un-Deleting Disc Files
Using an External Disc Drive
Disc Unit and Volume Number
Guide to Saving Data
Sharing a System
Viewing or Plotting Old Data (from disc)
CITIle Reference
Features
Features under the 4DISC5 key allow you to save measurement, calibration, or instrument state
information to disc. This information can be retrieved when desired. You can use the built-in
internal disc drive, or compatible external disc drives. External drives must be connected to
the system bus. You can control these devices using the 4DISC5 key in the AUXILIARY MENUS
block, and its associated menus.
The 4DISC5 key and related menus allow you to:
Store les (save various types of data to internal or external disc).
Load les (load a disc le containing data).
Delete les from internal or external disc.
Un-Delete the last le you deleted.
View a directory of les
Initialize new discs.
Use internal or external disc drives.
Both internal disk and SS/80 type external disc drives can provide data storage for instrument
states, calibration error coecient sets, calibration kit denitions, measurement data, memory
data, hardware states, user display memory, delay table, or machine dump (these terms are
dened later in this chapter).
Disc Drive Operation 15-1
Disc Functions
Compatible Disc Types, Disc Storage Capacity
The receiver can initialize oppy discs using DOS format or Logical Interface Format (LIF). DOS
format is used by PC compatibles, LIF is used by HP 9000 series 200/300 workstations. The HP
8530 uses high-density or low-density 3.5 inch discs. Use only certied double-sided discs or
you may cause excessive wear to the disc drive.
Table 15-1. Disc Storage Capacities
Disc Type
LIF Capacity
DOS Capacity
Low Density
622 KB
720 KB
High Density
1.244 MB
1.44 MB
DOS Subdirectories
The HP 8530A can only access les on the \root" directory of a disc. Files cannot be accessed
in DOS subdirectories.
Disc Menu
Figure 15-1.
Disc Menu, Data Type Select Menu, Setup Disc Menu, and Initialize Disc Menu
15-2 Disc Drive Operation
Disc Functions
ASCII and Binary File Types
The receiver can save some le types in binary le format, and others in ASCII format. The
format used for each type of data cannot be changed by the user, and are listed in Table 15-2.
All other types of data are saved as shown in Table 15-2.
Binary data les require less disc space and the le transfer is faster. If the cal set le is to be
read by a computer, use ASCII format.
Table 15-2 shows the information you can store to internal or external disc drives, and the data
format the receiver uses when saving it (ASCII or binary).
Table 15-2. Information You Can Store To Disc, and How it is Saved
Files Saved in
Files Saved in
ASCII Format
Binary Format
Memory data
Network Analyzer Calibration Kit
RAW measurement data
Calibration kit denitions
DATA (corrected) measurement data The user portion of the display memory
FORMATTED measurement data
Hardware state
The electrical delay table
Instrument states
Calibration error coecient sets
Machine dump
Antenna Calibration Denition
The ASCII data is saved in the CITIle ASCII format. CITIle adds informative headers to the
information in the le, and allows data to be exchanged with the Hewlett-Packard Microwave
Design System. Complete information on the CITIle format is provided at the end of this
chapter.
Changing between DOS and LIF Discs
When you insert a formatted disc, the receiver can automatically tell whether it is LIF or DOS
format. The only time you must choose between LIF and DOS is when you initialize discs.
Initializing Discs
1. Before you initialize a oppy disc make sure the write-protect tab is completely shut.
2. Insert the disc with the label-side facing left.
3. Press 4DISC5 SETUP DISC .
4. To initialize the disc using DOS format, press INITIALIZE DOS DISC INIT DOS? YES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. To initialize the disc using LIF format, press INITIALIZE LIF DISC INIT LIF? YES .
The initialization process takes about 2 minutes 20 seconds per disc.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Disc Drive Operation 15-3
Disc Functions
Note
The disc drive has a light that comes ON when the disc is being accessed. Do
not eject the disc when this light is ON or you could lock-up the receiver. If
this occurs, simply place the disc back into the drive.
Storing Disc Files
Files that are associated with internal instrument operation (instrument states, hardware
states, machine dumps, and so on) are stored in binary format. Measurement data is always
stored in \CITIle" ASCII format. The \CITIle" format has informative headers, and allows
data to be exchanged with other programs. Complete information on the CITIle format is
provided at the end of this chapter.
1. Insert an initialized disc.
2. Press 4DISC5 STORE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Choose the type of le by pressing one of the following keys:
Press this softkey, then select the instrument state register
INST STATE 1-8
you want to store to disc.
Press this softkey to store all eight instrument states to one
INST STATE ALL
le.
Press this softkey, then select the memory register you want
MEMORY 1-8
to store to disc.
Press this softkey to store all eight memories to one le.
MEMORY ALL
Press this softkey, then select the cal set you want to store
CAL SET 1-8
to disc.
Press this softkey to store all eight cal sets to one le.
CAL SET ALL
Press this softkey, then select the cal kit denition you want
CAL KITS
to store to disc (Network Cal Kit or Antenna Cal Denition).
RCS cal denitions cannot be stored to disc.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
15-4 Disc Drive Operation
Disc Functions
Press MORE to see the following choices:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA: RAW
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FORMATTED
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DELAY TABLE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
USER DISPLAY
Press this softkey to store the raw data array for the active
channel.
Press this softkey to store the calibrated data array for the
active channel.
Press this softkey to store the formatted data array for the
active channel.
Press this softkey to store the electrical delay table to disc.
Press this softkey to store User Display graphics to disc.
Press this softkey to store multiple source mode settings,
HP-IB settings for external hardware, and test set (frequency
converter) states.
Press this softkey to store the following instrument registers
MACHINE DUMP
to a single disc le:
a. Current instrument state
b. Instrument states 1{8
c. Cal sets 1{8
d. Cal kits
e. Hardware state
f. Memories 1{8
When you load a machine dump from disc, the contents of
these internal registers are replaced with the data from the
machine dump le.
Note: Before saving a machine dump le, store your current
measurement setup in Save Register 8 (the user preset/power
ON register). Later, when that machine dump is loaded,
the receiver will wake up in that state. When a machine
dump le is loaded, the receiver wakes up with whatever is
in Register 8. The machine dump does not automatically
remember your desired setup unless it is stored in Register 8.
4. A \label maker" menu will appear. Notice that the menu has a list of alpha-numeric
characters and a selector arrow. The le name prex for the selected type of data will
already be entered for you.
If you want to overwrite an existing le, press REPLACE FILE . A list of the current disc
les will appear on screen. (The receiver will only list the type of les selected in step 3.
For example, if you are storing a Raw data le, only raw data les will be shown in the
directory listing).
Use the knob or 8 9 keys to select the le you want to replace, then press REPLACE FILE .
The instrument will now store the le to disc.
5. If you are creating a new le enter the desired le name as follows:
a. Using the rotary knob, place the cursor under the rst desired letter or number. Press
SELECT LETTER . If you make a mistake press BACK SPACE . Continue until you have
selected all desired characters. You can enter up to seven characters. Note: If saving
to DOS discs, the sixth and seventh characters will become a le name extender. For
example: RD 12345.67
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
HARDWARE STATE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Disc Drive Operation 15-5
Disc Functions
b. When you are done entering le name characters, press STORE FILE to store the le to
disc.
The error message CAUTION: DISC IS WRONG FORMAT, INITIALIZE TO USE means:
A. The disc has never been initialized.
B. The disc is not a compatible format. Apple Macintosh's (GCR) format is not
compatible, for example. Use a DOS or LIF compatible disc, or copy any important
les o the disc and initialize it in DOS or LIF format.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Loading Disc Files
You can load les in any sequence with the following considerations:
Before loading measurement data, turn on hold mode by pressing:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE HOLD
Otherwise the data you load will be immediately overwritten with new data.
In Frequency Domain, the currently-selected number of points must match the number
of points in the data le. For example, if you want to load a Frequency Domain data le
with 801 points, make sure you set the HP 8530A to Frequency Domain mode, and select
STIMULUS 4MENU5 NUMBER of POINTS 801 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
In Angle Domain, the current Start, Stop, and Increment Angle settings must result in a
number of measurement angles that matches those in the disc le.
For Example. You currently have Start Angle set to 090 , Stop Angle to +90 , and Increment
Angle to 1 . This results in 181 measurement angles. You could load any disc le that has 181
angles in it.
To load a le with a dierent number of measurement angles, set the Start, Stop, and
Increment Angle to values that will result in the appropriate number of angles.
Note: The Start Angle, Stop Angle, and Increment Angle do not have to match those in the
disc le. The only requirement is that the current number of measurement angles must
match the number of angles in the le. Assume you are using the settings listed in the above
example. You could load a le with a Start Angle set to 045 , Stop Angle to +45 , and
Increment Angle to 0.5 . In both cases the number of angles in the measurement is 181.
If you do not perform these initial steps, the current \number of points" may not match
the number of data values in the disc le. If this occurs, an error message similar to the
following with appear:
CAUTION: UNABLE TO LOAD 181 POINTS
If you load Raw data, the receiver places it in the Raw data array, and performs all
subsequent data processing functions on it. This includes calibration (if turned on) as well as
all display formatting. After all processing is done the data appears on the screen.
If you load \Data" data (corrected data), the receiver places the data in the Corrected data
array, performs all display formatting. After all processing is done the data appears on the
screen.
Calibration must be turned OFF when you load cal sets.
If the display memory feature is ON (a memory trace is displayed on the screen), you can
only load memory data les into empty memory registers. If the display memory feature is
OFF, you can load memory data les into any memory register.
15-6 Disc Drive Operation
Disc Functions
Loading a File
Perform the following steps to load a disc le.
1. Press 4DISC5 LOAD .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Now choose the type of le you want to load.
3. If you choose to load an instrument state, memory, cal set, or cal kit.
a. Choose the specic destination register. For example, if you choose CAL SET 1-8 the
receiver now displays CAL SET 1 through 8 register choices. Select the desired register
to hold the cal set data.
If you select any other data type you do not have to select a destination register.
4. A \le selector" box now appears on the screen. The le selector shows a directory of all
les of the desired type. For example, if you chose CAL SET 1-8 , the le selector lists only
the cal set les on the disc.
5. Use the 8 9 keys or knob to highlight the desired le, then press LOAD FILE . The le will
now load from disc.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Viewing a Directory of Files
Press 4DISC5 DIRECTORY to display a directory of all the les on the inserted disc. Each disc can
hold many les in each data type. There are often more les on the disc than can be seen at
one time. Use the knob to scroll through the le listing.
Each HP 8530A data le type has a three-character prex. The prex is convenient for two
reasons:
It allows the HP 8530A to show only the les of a specic type. When you are loading a Cal
Set le, it is convenient to see a listing that only includes that type of le.
If you are performing a directory listing of the disc, the prexes show the exact type of each
le.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
File Type
Cal Kit
Cal Set
Cal All
Memory File
Memory All
Inst State
Hardware State
Program
Table 15-3. File Types and Prexes
Prex
File Type
CK_
Instrument State All
CS_
Raw Data
CA_
Data
DM_
Formatted
MA_
Display
IS_
Delay Table
HS_
Machine Dump
PG_
Antenna Denition
Prex
IA_
RD_
DD_
FD_
UD_
DT_
MD_
AC_
Disc Drive Operation 15-7
Disc Functions
Deleting Disc Files
DELETE eliminates the specied le from the disc. To delete a le:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4DISC5 DELETE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Now, select the type of le you wish to delete.
3. A File Selector box will now appear on the screen, listing all disc les of the selected type.
Place the box-shaped cursor over the le you wish to delete (using the knob or 8 9 keys).
4. Press DELETE FILE . The le will be deleted. If you made a mistake and really did not want
to delete the le, un-delete the le as explained below:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Un-deleting Disc Files
This feature only works on discs that have been formatted in the Logical Interchange Format
(LIF).
Press UN-DELETE to restore the most recently deleted le. You cannot retrieve a deleted le if
any of the following actions occur:
If you store another le on the disc after the deletion.
If you remove the disc and then reinsert it.
If you delete a second le. (The un-delete feature only works on the last le you deleted.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using an External Disc Drive
Compatible Disc Drives
An external disc drive must be HP-IB compatible. It must be able to use the Hewlett-Packard
SS/80 protocol, and be capable of being formatted to 256 bytes per sector.
You can use a oppy disc, hard disc, or combination hard/oppy drive.
Disc Unit Number and Disc Volume
The softkeys DISC UNIT NUMBER and DISC VOLUME only apply to external disc drives.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Connections and Conguration Settings
Install the drive using the installation portion of the disc drive's operating manual, and the
following instructions. If you have a hard drive, read about setting up \volumes" in the drive's
manual. Hewlett-Packard hard discs can be partitioned into two or more volumes, which act
like separate drives.
1. Connect the external drive to the receiver's System Bus.
2. Select the number of desired hard disc volumes using the hard disc's rear panel selector.
3. Make sure the external drive's HP-IB address matches the address in the receiver's HP-IB
address menu (press 4LOCAL5 MORE DISC ). You can change the address shown in the address
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
15-8 Disc Drive Operation
Disc Functions
menu by entering the actual address followed by the 4x15 key. Alternatively, you can change
the HP-IB address switches on the external disc drive. Turn the disc drive O, then On if
you change its HP-IB switch settings.
4. Press 4DISC5 STORAGE IS EXTERNAL then SET UP DISC to select the unit and volume
number (explained below).
5. If using a disc drive that has more than one drive mechanism (unit), you must select the
specic drive you want to use. The default is 0 (usually the left drive on a dual oppy drive,
or the hard disc in a oppy/hard disc combination drive).
If you want to use the right-hand drive (in a dual oppy system), or the oppy drive in a
hard disc/oppy drive:
Press 4DISC5 SET UP DISC DISC UNIT NUMBER 415 4x15
Refer to the disc drive's operating manual to verify the unit numbers used by your drive.
6. Hard drives can be partitioned into one or more \volumes." Volumes act like separate
drives, even though they are, in fact, part of the same physical disc. A control wheel on the
back of the hard disc selects the number of volumes that can be used. Select the specic
volume you want to address by pressing:
4DISC5 SET UP DISC DISC VOLUME , then enter the desired volume number and press 4x15.
Volume 0 through 7 may be specied. Factory Preset selects volume 0.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
You must initialize each hard disc volume before use. Refer to \Initializing a
Hard Disc" later in this section.
If the disc drive does not respond to subsequent commands the message NO DISC is displayed.
Check the disc address again (both on the unit itself and in the receiver's 4LOCAL5 Menu), Also
check and the unit and volume number again.
Initializing a Hard Disc
If using a hard disc for the rst time you must initialize each volume. You can do this using a
computer, or using the HP 8530A. To initialize the hard disc using the HP 8530A, follow these
steps:
1. Set the volume number to 0 by pressing: 4DISC5 SET UP DISC DISC VOLUME 405 4x15.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press: INITIALIZE LIF DISC
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press INIT LIF? YES . Depending on the size of that volume it will take between 10 to 30
minutes to initialize.
4. Select the next volume number (if using a multi-volume drive), repeat steps 1, 2, and 3.
5. Repeat the above steps for each volume.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Disc Drive Operation 15-9
Disc Functions
Guide to Saving Data
This section explains two common applications for saving data.
First of all, a more in-depth description of the dierent le types will be helpful in this
discussion:
Instrument
These states contain front panel settings, including:
States
Instrument settings
Frequency list segments
Whether calibration was On or O
Whether the Delay table was On or O
Whether user display was on or o
The cal set in use (if any) for that state
Whether electrical delay was On or O
The instrument state does not keep track of calibration data, cal kit denitions,
user delay table contents, or any settings that control external hardware.
Memory
These store a display data trace. These stored traces can be viewed next
to current data. Memory trace data can be used as an addend, subtrahend,
multiplicand, or dividend of current data using trace math features.
A cal set contains all the error coecients for a calibration you have
Cal Sets
performed.
Contains the mathematical models for the precision standards in a calibration
Cal Kit
kit.
Note: In the following descriptions, data is described as being aected by various features
(averaging, calibration, and so on). Such user-selected features only aect the data when
turned On.
Raw data is averaged, but no other processing is performed. This data is
Raw Data
stored in an internal memory array called the \Raw Data Array." Raw data is
composed of complex data pairs (real,imaginary) for each stimulus point.
\Data" Data This is measurement data that has been processed by calibration, electrical
delay, the user-dened delay table, and time domain. \Data" data is stored in
an array in complex data pairs.
Formatted
This is measurement data that has been processed by trace math, smoothing,
Data
and has been formatted according to any display settings. If you have selected
a Cartesian display format, formatted data is no longer a complex value, but is
scaler (magnitude only). If you have selected Polar format, formatted data is a
complex value.
The delay table allows you to mathematically change each raw data point with
Delay Table
a complex (real,imaginary) multiplier of your own choosing. The result is saved
in the \Data" data array. The receiver multiplies each measurement data pair
with the corresponding number pair in your delay table.
User Display Contains user-dened graphic elements drawn on the display.
Hardware
These are mostly settings found under the 4SYSTEM5 or 4LOCAL5 keys. These
State
settings control HP-IB addresses, multiple source settings, and other
hardware-related settings. The hardware state also controls the default RF
source power.
Machine Dump Stores the following registers:
All eight Instrument States
15-10 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
The Hardware State
All eight Memory registers
All eight Cal Sets
All Antenna Cal Denitions and Network Analyzer Cal Kits
Delay Table
User Display graphics
Sharing a System
Often several users must share the receiver. When you nish your session it is useful to save
your setup so you can begin working quickly during your next session.
In this application you should:
1. Store one or more instrument state les to disc, as needed. If you have saved
many dierent instrument states you may want to store them all at once using the
INSTR STATE ALL softkey.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. If you have performed one or more calibrations, store them to disc. If you used many
dierent calibrations, you may want to save them all at once using the CAL SET ALL
softkey. Save an instrument state for each cal set. This will ensure that you can recall the
settings that are applicable for each calibration.
Calibrations are sensitive to ambient temperature and humidity, and therefore have a
limited life span. In addition, a cal set's life can be limited because of changes to the
system's components (including wear). You can use \old" calibrations if you measure a
well-known device and compare the data to expected data. You can then decide whether or
not the old calibration is still useful.
3. If using a special calibration kit, store the cal kit denition to disc too.
4. It is a good idea to save the hardware state to disc, especially if your receiver is controlling
more than one source. The hardware state saves all multiple source settings. The hardware
state also saves various HP-IB settings for external hardware. You can skip this if the
hardware setup rarely or never changes.
5. If using a user-generated delay table, store it to disc.
6. If you created special graphic elements, store them to disc.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Saving Everything
If you use a large number of states, cal sets, memories, and so on, you may nd that storing
using Machine Dump is easier. This takes longer than saving one or two individual types
of data, and takes up more disc space. However, this may be the best method in complex
situations.
When you load a Machine Dump from disc, the contents of applicable internal registers are
replaced with the data from the machine dump le.
A Machine Dump le does not automatically save the current measurement settings. Before
saving a Machine Dump, always save the current measurement setup to save register 8. If you
do this, the instrument will return to a known setup when you load the Machine Dump le.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Viewing or Plotting Old Data
If you know you want to plot, analyze, or view data at a later date, store the Raw, \Data," or
\Formatted" data to disc.
Disc Drive Operation 15-11
CITIle Reference
CITIle Reference
CITIle is a standardized data format, used for exchanging data between dierent computers
and instruments. CITIle stands for \Common Instrumentation Transfer and Interchange" le
format.
CITIle denes how the data inside an ASCII package is formatted. Since it is not tied to any
particular disc or transfer format, it can be used with any operating system (BASIC, DOS,
UNIX, etc.), with any disc format (LIF, DOS, HFS, etc.), or with any transfer mechanism (disc,
LAN, GPIB, HP-IB, and so on).
By careful implementation of the standard, instruments and software packages using CITIle
are able to load and work with data created on another instrument or computer. It is possible,
for example, for a receiver to directly load and display data measured on a scalar receiver, or
for a software package running on a computer to read data measured on the receiver.
CITIles use ASCII text format. While this format does take up more bytes of space than
binary format, ASCII data is a standard type of format which is supported by all operating
systems. In addition, the ASCII format is accepted by most text editors. This allows les to be
created, examined, and edited easily, making CITIle easier to test and debug.
This section describes CITIle data format. The following topics are covered:
How Disc Files are Named
Which Files are Stored in CITIle Format
What is in a CITIle
CITIle Keyword Reference
CITIle Receiver-Specic (#NA) Denitions
Error Array Numbering
CITIle Examples
Converting Between Disc Formats
15-12 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
Disc Files
The receiver allows you to select the le name of your choice. However, it add a three
character prex to the beginning of the le name. Each type of data le has a unique prex.
Table 15-4. File Name Prexes
Prex
AC
CK
CS
CA
DM
MA
HS
IS
File Type
Antenna Denition
Calibration Kit
Calibration Set
Cal All
Memory File
Memory All
Hardware State
Instrument State
File Format
CITIle
Binary
CITIle or Binary
CITIle
CITIle
CITIle
Binary
Binary
Prex
IA
PG
RD
DD
FD
UD
DT
MD
File Type
Instrument State All
Program
Raw Data
Data Data
Formatted Data
User Display
Delay Table
Machine Dump
File Format
Binary
Binary
CITIle
CITIle
CITIle
Binary
CITIle
Binary
The current receiver CITIle version is unable to read les unless they have an appropriate
prex. There are other prexes but they only apply to binary les (instrument states and so
on).
Disc Drive Operation 15-13
CITIle Reference
What is in a CITIle
A typical CITIle package is divided into two parts: a header portion which shows information
about measurement settings, and a Data portion which usually contains measurement or
calibration data.
Here is a typical CITIle created while in the Frequency Domain:
................................................
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME RAW_DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 51
DATA P[1] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1000000000 2000000000 51
SEG_LIST_END
COMMENT
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 13 09
46
23.0
................................................
BEGIN
-3.54545E-2,-1.38601E-3
0.23491E-3,-1.39883E-3
2.00382E-3,-1.40022E-3
Remaining data values (51 total)
END
................................................
Header
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Here is a typical CITIle created while in the Angle Domain:
................................................
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME RAW_DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR ANGLE MAG 181
DATA P[1] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG -90.0 90.0 181
SEG_LIST_END
#NA CW_FREQ 1000000000
COMMENT
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 13 15
59
28.0
................................................
BEGIN
-6.09008E-1,1.66412E0
Remaining data values (181 total)
-8.39721E-1,7.72583E-1
END
................................................
15-14 Disc Drive Operation
Header
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CITIle Reference
The Header
Each line in the header usually starts with a keyword, followed by various parameters. A
dictionary of CITIle keywords is provided in \CITIle Keyword Reference".
CITIle Title Line
The title line describes the implementation of CITIle in use. For example:
CITIFILE A.01.01
Device-Specic Information
The # lists settings that apply to a specic device. For example, #NA POWER1 1.0E1 would mean
that source #1 is set to 1 dBm. All varieties of the #NA keyword are listed in Table 15-6.
# NA VERSION
The receiver also uses this line to announce its model number (HP
HP8530A.01.04
8530A) and rmware revision (01.04):
#NA TITLE
This line shows any display title you had placed on the screen. This
is explained in more detail in \HP 8530 Receiver Keywords", later in
this section.
The receiver uses this line to state whether the CITIle contains raw,
#NA NAME RAW_DATA
calibrated, formatted, memory, or calibration set data. More on #NA
NAME is explained in \HP 8530 Receiver Keywords".
This line shows which instrument register held the data when you
#NA REGISTER 1
stored it to disc.
Domain Information (independent variable declaration)
The VAR keyword denes the independent variables. FREQ indicates that the receiver was in
Frequency Domain. The terms ANGLE or TIME indicate that the receiver was in either Angle
Domain or Time Domain, respectively. The number at the end of this line is the number of
measurement points (51 in the Frequency Domain example, 181 in the Angle Domain example).
VAR FREQ MAG 51
VAR ANGLE MAG 181
Type of Measurement Data (dependent variable declaration)
The DATA keyword denes the dependent variables. This includes the measured parameter (for
example \P[1]" indicates that the measurement data is from a Parameter 1 measurement). \RI"
indicates that the information in the second half of the CITIle (the data section) contains pairs
of data in Real,Imaginary format.
DATA P[1] RI
The receiver only supports the real,imaginary style of data list at this time.
Stimulus Information
In Angle Domain. In Angle Domain, the stimulus is always expressed as follows:
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG -90 90 181
SEG_LIST_END
The middle line contains the actual stimulus information. The data is given in this order: Start
Angle, Stop Angle, Number of Angles Measured.
Disc Drive Operation 15-15
CITIle Reference
In Frequency Domain. When in Frequency Domain, two formats are used (depending on the
current sweep mode). In Sweep or Ramp mode, the following format is used:
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1000000000 2000000000 51
SEG_LIST_END
The frequency information is in this order: Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, Number of
Points.
If you are using FREQUENCY LIST mode, the following format is used:
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
1000000000
1100000000
1200000000
VAR_LIST_END
Each frequency in the list is included.
CW Frequency (Angle Domain Only)
Angle Domain CITIles will show the CW frequency of the measurement:
#NA CW_FREQ 1000000000
Date and Time
The le will also show the date and time you saved the le. 24 hour \military" time format is
used.
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
COMMENT
28.0
59
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 13 15
Data
The CITIle stores data arrays. An array is numeric data that is arranged with one data
element per line. A CITIle package may contain more than one array of data. Arrays of data
start after the BEGIN keyword, and stop at the END keyword.
BEGIN
-3.54545E-2,-1.38601E-3
0.23491E-3,-1.39883E-3
2.00382E-3,-1.40022E-3
END
Determining the Type of Measurement that Created the Data
The DATA keyword is followed by a term that denotes the type of measurement (Param 1,
Param 2, Param 3, or Param 4) and shows that data is in the Real,Imaginary format.
For example:
DATA P[1] RI
Remember, a frequency list may exist here.
BEGIN
0.86303E-1,-8.98651E-1
8.97491E-1,3.06915E-1
-4.96887E-1,7.87232E-1
.
15-16 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
.
And so on, down to the end of the list...
-5.65338E-1,-7.05291E-1
END
This example shows real,imaginary data for an Param 1 measurement. The number to the left
of the comma (,) is real data, the number to the right of the comma is imaginary data.
CITIle Packages
The header and data portion shown above make up one CITIle \package." There can be more
than one CITIle package in a given disc le. With the HP 8530 receiver, for example, storing
\memory all" will save all eight of the memories held in the instrument. This results in a single
le which contains eight CITIle packages.
Multiple Data Lists in a Single Package
There may be more than one list of dependent variables (measurement data) in a CITIle
package. If so, there will be a data statement for each list. Here is an example:
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
P[1]
P[2]
P[3]
P[4]
RI
RI
RI
RI
Remember, a frequency segment list may exist here.
BEGIN
list of data values for Param 1
END
BEGIN
list of data values for Param 2
END
BEGIN
list of data values for Param 3
END
BEGIN
list of data values for Param 4
END
Disc Drive Operation 15-17
CITIle Reference
CITIle Keyword Reference
Keyword
CITIFILE
NAME
VAR
15-18 Disc Drive Operation
Table 15-5. CITIle Keyword Reference
Example and Explanation
Example: CITIFILE A.01.01
Identies the le as a CITIle, and indicates the revision level of the
le. The CITIFILE keyword and revision code must precede any
other keywords.
The CITIFILE keyword at the beginning of the package assures the
device reading the le that the data that follows is in the CITIle
format. The revision number allows for future extensions of the
CITIle standard.
The revision code shown here following the CITIFILE keyword
indicates that the machine writing this le is using the A.01.01
version of CITIle as dened here.
Example: NAME CAL_SET
Allows the current CITIle \package" to be named. The name of the
package should be a single word with no embedded spaces. A list of
standard package names follows:
Denition
Label
Uncorrected data.
RAW_DATA
Data that has been error corrected. When
DATA
only a single data array exists, it should be
named \DATA".
Corrected and formatted data.
FORMATTED
Data trace stored for comparison purposes.
MEMORY
Coecients used for error correction.
CAL_SET
Description of the standards used
CAL_KIT
Model and serial numbers of standard gain
ANTENNA_DEF
antenna.
Delay coecients for calibration.
DELAY_TABLE
Example: VAR FREQ MAG 201
Denes the name of the independent variable (FREQ), the format of
values in a VAR_LIST_BEGIN table (MAG) (if used), and the number of
data points (201).
CITIle Reference
Table 15-5. CITIle Keyword Reference (continued)
Keyword
Example and Explanation
#
Example: #NA POWER1 1.0E1
Allows variables specic to a particular type of device to be dened.
The pound sign # tells the device reading the le that the following
variable is for a particular device.
The NA shown here indicates that the information is for a network
analyzer or a receiver. This convention allows new devices to be
dened without fear of conict with keywords for previously dened
devices. The device identier (NA) may be any number of characters.
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
Indicates that a list of segments for the independent variable follow.
Format for the segments is: segment type (SEG), stimulus start,
stimulus stop, number of points. There are several segment types in
the CITIle format guidelines, however, CITIle revision A.01.01
supports only SEG (a linear segment). Therefore, the middle line in
the SEG LIST will always start with SEG.
The current SEG LIST implementation only supports a single
segment. If there is more than one segment, the VAR_LIST_BEGIN
construct is used.
SEG_LIST_END
Denes the end of a list of independent variable segments.
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
Indicates that a list of the values for the independent variable
(declared in the VAR statement) follow.
VAR_LIST_END
Denes the end of a list of values for the independent variable.
DATA
Example: DATA P[1] RI
Denes the name of an array of data that will be read later in the
current CITIle \package", and the format that the data will be in.
Multiple arrays of data are supported by using standard array
indexing as shown above. Version A.01.01 of CITIle only supports
the RI (real and imaginary) format, and a maximum of two array
indexes.
Commonly used array names include the following:
P
Parameter
S
S parameter
E
Error Term
VOLTAGE
Voltage
a ratio of two voltages (A/R).
VOLTAGE_RATIO
Disc Drive Operation 15-19
CITIle Reference
HP 8530-Specic (#NA) Denitions
Data Grouping
Data arrays of the same type, obtained during a single measurement operation, are stored
in a single CITIle package. For an error correction, this means that all the error correction
arrays are stored in the same CITIle package. For S-parameter data, this means that all the
parameters acquired during a measurement operation are stored in the same CITIle package.
The term \package" was dened earlier in this section.
HP 8530 Receiver Keywords
The denition of CITIle allows for statements that are specic to a certain type of device.
Table 15-6 lists the currently dened commands for the #NA (network analyzer/receiver)
keyword. (The term #NA originated with the HP 8510, and originally stood for \Network
Analyzer.")
15-20 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
Table 15-6. Network Analyzer/Receiver Statements
Statement
#NA ARB_SEG x y p
#NA CAL_TYPE cc
#NA CW_FREQ frequency
#NA DUPLICATES dd
#NA FREQ_INFO ii
#NA IF_BW gg
Explanation
A list segment, as entered by the user.
xx = start value
y = stop value
p = number of points
The type of calibration used:
Where cc = 1 through 5:
1 = response cal.
2 = response and isolation cal.
3 = one port cal on port #1.
4 = not used
5 = not used
6 = antenna calibration
7 = RCS calibration
The CW frequency of an Angle Domain measurement. This is a
\write only" command. When a CITIle is loaded, the receiver
will NOT read this line, and it will NOT change the current CW
frequency.
\Delete duplicates" ag. Determines if points listed more then
once should be measured more then once.
If dd = 0, then points listed more then once are measured as
many times as they are listed.
If dd = 1, then a particular point is measured once.
The frequency information ag.
If ii = 0, then frequency information is not displayed on the
instrument's screen.
If ii = 1, then frequency information is displayed on the
screen.
The IF bandwidth setting of the receiver.
gg = IF bandwidth in Hertz.
Disc Drive Operation 15-21
CITIle Reference
Table 15-6. Network Analyzer/Receiver Statements (continued)
Statement
#NA PARAMS aa
#NA POWER1 pp
#NA POWER2 pp
#NA POWER_SLOPE ss
#NA POWER_SLOPE2 ss
#NA REGISTER nn
#NA SLOPE_MODE mm
#NA SLOPE_MODE2 mm
#NA SPAN xx yy pp
15-22 Disc Drive Operation
Explanation
Bitmap of valid parameters for a calibration.
Where aa = bit positions 1-8:
Bit #1 = Param 1
Bit #2 = Param 2
Bit #3 = Param 3
Bit #4 = Param 4
Bit #5 = Service 1 a1
Bit #6 = Service 2 b2
Bit #7 = Service 3 a2
Bit #8 = Service 4 b1
A bit equal to one means that the calibration is valid for that
parameter, a zero means that the calibration is not valid for that
parameter. Bit #0 is the least signicant bit.
Power level of signal source #1.
pp = power in dBm.
Power level of signal source #2.
pp = power in dBm.
Change in power versus frequency for source 1.
ss = dBm/GHz
Same as POWER_SLOPE but for source 2.
Register in instrument that the current data package was stored
in.
nn = number of register.
On/o ag for source 1 power slope.
mm = 0 is o
mm = 1 is on
Same as SLOPE_MODE but for source 2.
The sweep parameters:
xx = start value
yy = stop value
pp = number of points
CITIle Reference
Table 15-6. Network Analyzer/Receiver Statements (continued)
Statement
#NA STANDARD nn
#NA SWEEP_MODE ss
#NA SWEEP_TIME tt
#NA TITLE user title
Explanation
Antenna calibration denition standard (1 through 7).
nn = number of standard.
Type of sweep done to make measurements:
0 = swept
1 = stepped
2 = single point
3 = fast CW
4 = list
The sweep time of the receiver:
tt = time in seconds.
A user-dened title will appear here, if the user has created a title
for the measurement. Creating titles is done using the 4SYSTEM5
DISPLAY FUNCTIONS TITLE functions. This CITIle line is a
\write only" function. When a CITIle is loaded, the receiver will
NOT read this line, and it will NOT place the title on the screen.
Linearity adjustment value for swept sources. Not Applicable for
HP 8360 series sources.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
#NA TRIM_SWEEP tt
Error Array Numbering
Current receiver implementations use between one and three error coecient arrays in order
to perform error correction. The CAL_TYPE keyword description in Table 15-6 lists the currently
dened calibration types. Table 15-7 denes the meanings of each coecient array with respect
to the error model used.
Table 15-7.
Names of Error Coecient Arrays
for Dierent Calibration Types
Error Array Frequency Response &
Name
Response
Isolation
Ed or Ex
E1
Er or Et
E2
|
Er or Et
E3
|
|
All
1- Port
Ed
Es
Er
Disc Drive Operation 15-23
CITIle Reference
CITIle Examples
The following are examples of CITIle packages.
A Display Memory File
This example shows a receiver display memory le. Notice that there is no frequency
information in the le. This is because data in display memory is not linked to frequency.
Note that instrument-specic information (#NA information) is also stored in this le.
#NA REGISTER 1 indicates that the le is for memory register 1. This Frequency Domain
measurement had 51 points.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME MEMORY
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 51
DATA P RI
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
COMMENT
26
50.0
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 14 11
BEGIN
0.75256E-1,8.95263E-1
-5.81298E-1,-2.24731E0
0.63400E-1,3.82476E-1
Remaining data values (51 total)
END
15-24 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
Data File Examples
This example shows a data le (a CITIle package created from the \data" register of the
receiver).
Data File Example 1: Frequency Domain, Step or Ramp Mode
In this case, 51 points of real and imaginary data was stored, and frequency information was
recorded in a segment list table.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 51
DATA P[1] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 2000000000 3700000000 51
SEG_LIST_END
COMMENT
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
59.0
08
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 14 11
BEGIN
2.70355E-1,3.94592E-1
1.40112E0,-3.10156E0
1.33209E-1,0.97396E-1
Remaining data values (51 total)
END
Disc Drive Operation 15-25
CITIle Reference
Data File Example 2: Frequency Domain, Frequency List Mode
This example shows a Frequency List measurement with two segments.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 6
DATA P[1] RI
#NA DUPLICATES 0
#NA ARB_SEG 2000000000 2200000000 3
#NA ARB_SEG 3500000000 3700000000 3
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
2000000000
2100000000
2200000000
3500000000
3600000000
3700000000
VAR_LIST_END
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
COMMENT
40.0
19
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 14 11
BEGIN
-1.76202E0,-1.32629E-1
-6.40991E-1,-1.06561E0
-3.87542E-1,-2.67059E-1
9.01001E-1,2.00903E0
-1.67541E-1,-6.97937E-1
-1.06005E0,-5.41259E-1
END
When an instrument's frequency list mode is used, as it was in this example, a list of
frequencies is stored in the le after the VAR_LIST_BEGIN statement.
The frequency list used in this measurement contained two segments. The rst was from 2.0 to
2.2 GHz, with a step size of 100 MHz. This information is shown in the CITIle as:
#NA ARB_SEG 2000000000 2200000000 3
The second segment is from 3.5 to 3.7 GHz, with a 100 MHz step size, as shown in the CITIle:
#NA ARB_SEG 3500000000 3700000000 3
All six frequency points for this cal set are listed between VAR_LIST_BEGIN and VAR_LIST_END
.
15-26 Disc Drive Operation
Data File Example 3: Angle Domain
CITIle Reference
This example shows an Angle Domain Measurement. The start angle is 010 degrees, stop angle
is 10 degrees, and increment angle is 1 degree. A total of 21 angles were measured.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME RAW_DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR ANGLE MAG 21
DATA P[1] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG -10.0 10.0 21
SEG_LIST_END
#NA CW_FREQ 1000000000
COMMENT
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 13 15
59
28.0
BEGIN
-6.09008E-1,1.47932E0
-6.10301E-1,1.66412E0
-5.99076E-1,1.85746E0
Remaining data values (21 total).
END
Disc Drive Operation 15-27
CITIle Reference
A Three-Term Cal Set File
This example shows network analyzer 1-Port cal set le. 1-Port calibrations compensate for
three error terms, directivity, tracking, and source match. Therefore, there are three data
portions in a 1-Port cal set CITIle. These three arrays of error correction data are dened by
using three DATA statements, E[1] to E[3].
When a cal set le is loaded, it must include the original instrument settings for that
calibration. As explained in the Calibration chapter, calibrations are sensitive to certain
instrument settings, known collectively as the \limited instrument state." You must use the
limited instrument state that was in eect when the calibration was created. To accomplish
this, the CITIle stores all settings in the limited instrument state. This is why there are so
many #NA statements in the CITIle example below.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME CAL_SET
#NA REGISTER 4
VAR FREQ MAG 6
DATA E[1] RI
DATA E[2] RI
DATA E[3] RI
#NA SWEEP_TIME 9.999994E-2
#NA POWER1 1.0E1
#NA POWER2 1.0E1
#NA PARAMS 2
#NA CAL_TYPE 4
#NA POWER_SLOPE 0.0E0
#NA POWER_SLOPE2 0.0E0
#NA SLOPE_MODE 0
#NA SLOPE_MODE2 0
#NA TRIM_SWEEP 0
#NA SWEEP_MODE 5
#NA LOWPASS_FLAG -1
#NA FREQ_INFO 1
#NA IF_BW 10000
#NA SPAN 2000000000 3700000000 6
#NA DUPLICATES 0
#NA ARB_SEG 2000000000 2200000000 3
#NA ARB_SEG 3500000000 3700000000 3
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
2000000000
2100000000
2200000000
3500000000
3600000000
3700000000
VAR_LIST_END
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
COMMENT
59
21.0
CONSTANT TIME 1992 01 14 10
BEGIN
-0.20507E-1,-1.112E0
-3.013E-1,8.05297E-1
2.80151E0,4.87060E0
-2.94296E-1,-1.01257E-1
4.83673E-1,-6.42150E-1
-5.97778E-1,-1.35675E0
END
BEGIN
-8.02612E-1,-6.63574E-1
-7.09594E-1,-6.14410E-1
9.23535E0,-1.90615E1
-2.59613E-1,1.45568E-1
15-28 Disc Drive Operation
CITIle Reference
-2.99499E0,-2.98901E0
-8.99047E-1,-1.1427E0
END
BEGIN
1.95709E0,1.52410E0
1.62799E0,-6.76574E-1
1.30937E2,-1.10546E1
8.17138E-1,-9.95513E-1
-5.57226E0,3.15771E0
-1.32922E0,2.67529E0
END
A \DATA" Measurement Data File with Four Parameter Display On
This example shows what is saved when four parameter display is turned on. Note that the
instrument saves data for all four parameters, Param 1, Param 2, Param 3, and Param 4. You
can choose Raw, Data, or Formatted data as with single parameter mode.
CITIFILE A.01.01
#NA VERSION HP8530A.01.12
#NA TITLE
NAME DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 51
DATA P[1] RI
DATA P[2] RI
DATA P[3] RI
DATA P[4] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 2000000000 5000000000 51
SEG_LIST_END
YEAR MONTH DAY HOUR MINUTE SECONDS
COMMENT
52.0
54
01 14 09
CONSTANT TIME 1992
BEGIN
2.28668E-1,-8.42804E-1
5.21728E-1,-5.88806E-1
4.63378E-1,3.89648E-1
Remaining data values (51 total)
END
BEGIN
7.93487E-1,-5.46844E-1
-1.93560E0,4.61731E-1
3.49548E-1,1.51519E0
Remaining data values (51 total)
4.85855E-1,4.27047E-1
END
BEGIN
1.10870E-1,-3.44604E-1
0.80329E-1,1.30134E-1
-8.57055E-1,1.24285E0
Remaining data values (51 total)
END
BEGIN
3.51599E0,-2.99499E0
1.20880E-1,-1.88468E-1
3.14086E-1,2.11315E0
Remaining data values (51 total).
END
Disc Drive Operation 15-29
16
Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Chapter Contents
Compatible Printers and Plotters
Installation Considerations
RS-232 Print/Plot Buers
Adding Your Own Annotations to the Display
Printing
Installing a Printer
Using a Laser Printer
Standard Conguration
High Speed Conguration
Using an HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus, or DeskJet 500 Printer
Using an HP QuietJet, QuietJet Plus, PaintJet or PaintJet XL Printer
Using an HP ThinkJet Printer
Printing One Snapshot per Page
Printing Two Snapshots per Page
Printing Tabular Measurement Data (as text)
Printing Instrument Settings and System Conguration (as text)
Plotting
Installing a Plotter
One Color or Multi-Color Plots
Selecting Pen color
Plotting One Snapshot Per Page
Plotting Individual Display Components
Plotting a Selected Quadrant (four snapshots per page)
Compatible Printers and Plotters
A list of compatible printers and plotters is provided in Chapter 1, General Information, of the
HP 8530A Operating and Programming Manual.
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-1
Copy Functions
Installation Considerations
The following topics explain the printing and plotting capabilities of the HP 8530A.
Supported Interfaces
The 4COPY5 key (in the AUXILIARY MENUS block) provides the means to control output to an
HP-IB or RS-232 plotter or printer.
Connecting an HP-IB Printer or Plotter
If you use an HP-IB printer or plotter, connected it to the System Bus. HP-IB outputs are not
buered, after giving the print or plot command you must wait until the plot/print is nished
before pressing any other keys. Pressing any key during the output aborts the plot or print
and can cause a timing error. If you need to abort a plot or print use the ABORT PRINT/PLOT
softkey found on the rst level Copy menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Connecting an RS-232 Printer or Plotter
The HP 8530A has two serial interfaces. You can select either of these interfaces for printing or
plotting. In addition, you can assign one of the ports to a printer, and the other to a plotter.
An RS-232 plotter/printer normally accepts data and does not \answer" or \acknowledge"
that data has been received and as such, the receiver may be unable to determine if a
plotter/printer is connected to the RS-232 port selected. A message saying that the plot is
complete may result even if no plotter/printer is connected.
Selecting the HP-IB (System Bus) or RS-232 Ports
Softkeys in the 4LOCAL5 menu allow you to:
Select HP-IB (System Bus), RS-232 Port #1, or RS-232 Port #2 for serial printers or plotters.
Set the HP-IB address of an HP-IB printer or plotter. Information on address selection is
provided in the SYSTEM chapter.
RS-232 Print/Plot Buers
Both RS-232 ports have a built-in print/plot buer. The receiver can dump most (or all) of the
data into the buer during the print or plot. Once all of the data has made it into the buer,
the buer continues to send the data to the printer or plotter, and the receiver can make
measurements again.
The buer in RS-232 Port #1 is much larger than the one in RS-232 PORT #2. Therefore, it is
preferable to connect your printer or plotter to Port #1. This becomes more important when
making high resolution printouts at 150 or 300 DPI. (These high resolutions are available if
you use an HP DeskJet or laser printer.) High resolution printouts contain a large amount of
data, which takes longer to send to the printer. The larger buer in Port #1 holds more data,
reducing the time it takes to resume measurements. Print resolution is explained fully in the
printer setup section.
The System Bus does not supply a print/plot buer. Because of this, measurements are
suspended until the print or plot is completely nished.
16-2 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Copy Functions
Adding Your Own Annotations to the Screen
You can add your own text annotations to the screen before printing or plotting. To do this:
1. Press 4SYSTEM5 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS TITLE . A \label maker" menu will appear.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Use the front panel knob to place the selection cursor under the rst desired letter or
number. Press SELECT LETTER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Repeat this step for each desired character. Press SPACE to insert a space, and BACKSPACE
to back up if you make a mistake. ERASE TITLE will remove the title front the screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
4. Press TITLE DONE when you are nished entering the title.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-3
Printer Setup
Using a Printer
This section explains:
How to install RS-232 or HP-IB printers.
How to congure the printer and the HP 8530A.
How to Print
Printing Features
The printing feature allows you to:
Print an exact copy of the display (a \snapshot").
Print measurement data in table form.
Print instrument settings and system conguration.
Print in Color, Monochrome, Portrait, or Landscape mode.
Print one snapshot (measurement display) per page
Print two snapshots per page.
What is Printed
The displayed measurement is printed or plotted exactly as displayed on the screen. The
softkey menus do not appear on prints/plots unless you select them using an HP-IB command.
The marker list and real-time clock are printed (if they are active), unless softkey menus are
being printed.
Installing a Printer
Installation is described in the HP 8530A On-Site Service Manual.
Selecting the Output Port
Select the appropriate output port for your printer as follows:
1. Turn the receiver ON.
2. If using a serial printer: Press 4LOCAL5 MORE PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #1 or
PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #2 , depending on which serial port you used.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If using an HP-IB printer: Press 4LOCAL5 MORE PRINTER: HP-IB . The message PRINTER
HP-IB ADDRESS 1 will appear on the screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-4 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printer Setup
Printer and HP 8530A Conguration
The next step is to make appropriate switch settings on the printer, as explained in following
pages. Also, the HP 8530A must be congured so it controls your printer properly. This is done
with the Dene Print menus, located under the 4COPY5 key. Refer to Figure 16-1.
Figure 16-1. Dene Print Menu
The required settings are dependent on the type of printer you use. The following pages
explain how to setup:
HP-Compatible Laser Printers
HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus, or DeskJet 500 Printers
HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus Printers
HP PaintJet or PaintJet XL Printers
HP ThinkJet Printers
Non-HP Printers
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-5
Printer Setup
Using a Laser Printer
Connect the printer as explained in the installation chapter of the HP 8530A On-Site Service
Manual.
Conguring the Laser Printer
There are two ways to congure a laser printer.
Standard
This conguration requires no extra equipment and provides normal laser
printer print speeds. Customers have asked for faster laser print-outs than
the standard setup provides (it takes about 7 minutes to print one page at 300
DPI). This speed problem is caused by the laser printer, not with the HP 8530.
However there is a clever way to get around the problem and speed printing
up signicantly. So why even talk about the \standard" (slow) method?
Answer: Because the high speed method requires a special printer cartridge
that you may not have.
High Speed
The high speed conguration requires a special plug in cartridge for the printer.
With this cartridge, a simple measurement display will print in about 12
seconds. A very complex print takes about 2 minutes 20 seconds. Most prints
will come out in 1 minute or less.
Standard Conguration
Turn the laser printer ON. Refer to the laser printer's operating manual.
Select SERIAL input/output (I/O).
Use the factory default RS-232 settings for the printer:
9,600
Baud Rate
ON
Robust Xon
DTR Polarity HI
These settings never have to be entered again.
Other Laser Printer Settings
1. If using metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for setup instructions.
2. Make sure paper is loaded
Conguring the Receiver
Selecting Printer Resolution
The HP 8530 allows you to select four dierent print resolutions for laser printers: 75, 100,
150, and 300 dots per inch (DPI). To choose a specic resolution:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT MORE PRINTER RESOLUTION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the desired value using the keypad, and press 4x15.
Note: Higher resolutions take longer to print.
For instructions on making actual printouts, refer to \Printing".
16-6 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printer Setup
High Speed Conguration
As mentioned above, you will need a special cartridge called the \Plotter in a Cartridge"
from Pacic Data Products. This device programs the laser printer so it understands plotter
commands (HP-GL). The cartridge essentially turns the laser printer into a plotter. The \laser
plotter" accepts HP-GL commands and \draws" the picture in its own memory. The printer
then produces a page based on the \drawing" in its memory.
Why it is Faster?
In normal laser printer operation, the analyzer must send pixel data for the entire page - even
if the displayed measurement is very simple. A whole page of pixels at 300 DPI requires a little
over 1 megabyte of data. It takes a long time to transfer this much data over the serial bus.
With HP-GL emulation, printing is faster for two reasons: 1. There is far less data to transfer
since only HP-GL commands must be sent over the serial bus. 2. The laser printer must only
change memory locations that equate to black pixels. The majority of memory locations (those
that represent white pixels) do not need to be accessed. This saves even more time.
My printer has Built-In HP-GL, Do I still Need the Cartridge?
Yes. To use the built-in HP-GL emulation mode, laser printers usually require the computer or
instrument to send a special \escape sequence" code. The code turns HP-GL mode ON. Such
printers usually do not allow you to turn HP-GL mode ON from the front panel. At this time,
the HP 8530A cannot send this special code, so you must use a special cartridge to use HP-GL
mode.
Ordering the Cartridge
There are two versions of Plotter in a Cartridge:
Standard
For use with the HP LaserJet Series II.
\Personal Edition" (P.E.) For use with the HP LaserJet IIP, IID, III, and IIID.
You can order either of these cartridges from many computer suppliers. We found them for
about half suggested retail price at:
DH Systems: 1940 Cotner Ave,
Los Angeles, CA 90025
(800)-747-4755
Attention: Sales Department
The part number to order from DH Systems is:
Standard
DH 701-PCRT
Personal Edition
DH 702-PCRT-P
If you want to contact the manufacturer of the cartridge, call or write:
Pacic Data Products
9125 Rehco Road, San Diego, CA. 92121
Phone: (619) 552-0880
Fax: (619) 552-0889
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-7
Printer Setup
Printer memory required
The plotter in a Cartridge requires 1.5 Mbytes of printer memory in order to operate.
Setting up the Printer
1. Turn the laser printer ON. Refer to the laser printer's operating manual to perform the
following.
2. Select SERIAL input/output (I/O).
3. Use the factory default RS-232 settings for the printer:
Baud Rate
9,600
Robust Xon
ON
DTR Polarity HI
Other Laser Printer Settings
1. If using metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for setup instructions.
2. Turn the printer OFF.
3. Install the \Plotter in a Cartridge." If your printer has two cartridge slots make sure you use
the left slot.
4. Turn the printer ON.
5. Make sure paper is loaded
Conguring the Receiver
The following instructions will look unusual because you will be telling the HP 8530A to plot.
Remember, the laser printer will look just like a plotter to the HP 8530A.
1. Determine which HP 8530A RS-232 port has the printer connected to it. (HP recommends
RS-232 Port #1 because it has a larger printer buer than RS-232 Port #2.)
2. Press 4LOCAL5 MORE and PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #1 or PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #2 . Be
sure you have chosen the appropriate port under \PLOTTER:" on the softkey menu.
3. To \print" press:
4COPY5 PLOT TO PLOTTER PLOT: ALL
For other \printing" options, refer to the section on PLOTTING later in this chapter.
Remember, the receiver thinks the laser printer is a plotter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-8 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Printer Setup
Note
You may want to photocopy the following notice and tape it near your HP
8530A:
TO PRINT:
1. Make sure the \Plotter In a Cartridge" is Installed. Turn the printer OFF
when installing the cartridge! (Remember, it goes in the left cartridge slot.)
2. On the HP 8530, press 4COPY5, PLOT TO PLOTTER , PLOT:ALL (trust us on
this).
This could save the \occasional" user a great deal of confusion when they try
to make print outs.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Switching Between a Real Plotter and an HP-GL-emulating Laser Printer
To switch between a laser printer (acting like a plotter) and a real plotter, you must select the
port to which the desired device is connected.
Press 4LOCAL5 MORE , then press one of the following softkeys:
Press this to select a real plotter connected to the HP-IB bus.
PLOTTER: HP-IB
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press this to select a real plotter or \laser plotter" connected to
RS-232 Port #1.
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #2 Press this to select a real plotter or \laser plotter" connected to
RS-232 Port #2.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-9
Printer Setup
Using an HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus, or DeskJet 500 Printer
Choose the serial (RS-232) or HP-IB setup, depending on how your printer is equipped:
Serial Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual. The HP 8530A does not support the
Centronics interface.
Serial DIP switch settings
Make sure all DIP switches (mounted in the lower-front portion of the printer) are all in the
down position. These recommended switch settings assume you are using 8.5 by 11 inch paper.
If using metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for proper DIP switch settings.
Prepare the Printer for Use
Load the paper, then turn the printer ON.
Conguring the Receiver
Selecting Printer Resolution
The HP 8530 allows you to select four dierent print resolutions for HP DeskJet printers: 75,
100, 150, and 300 dots per inch (DPI). To choose a specic resolution:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT MORE PRINTER RESOLUTION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the desired value using the keypad, and press 4x15.
Note: Higher resolutions take longer to print.
Now refer to \Printing" for instructions on making actual printouts.
Additional Steps Required for the HP DeskJet 500C
The color capabilities of the HP DeskJet 500C are NOT currently supported. You can use this
printer to make black printouts by performing the following steps:
1. Make sure the Receiver is set to Monochrome mode by pressing:
4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT PRINT TYPE MONOCHROME
2. Remove the color ink cartridge, place it in a safe, clean place. Be careful not to touch the
electrical contacts.
3. Install a black ink cartridge. Part numbers for black cartridges are supplied in Appendix D
of the HP 8530A Users Guide.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-10 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printer Setup
Using an HP QuietJet, QuietJet Plus, PaintJet, or PaintJet XL
Printer
Choose the serial (RS-232) or HP-IB setup, depending on how your printer is equipped:
Serial Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
Serial DIP switch settings
Make sure all DIP switches are positioned as shown in Figure 16-2. If necessary, refer to the
printer's user's guide for switch location. These recommended switch settings assume you are
using 8.5 by 11 inch paper. If you are using Metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for
the appropriate switch settings.
Figure 16-2. HP QuietJet and PaintJet (Family) Printer Serial Switch Settings
HP-IB Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
HP-IB address DIP switch settings
Set the printer DIP switches as shown in Figure 16-3. The HP 8530A uses address 01 as the
default HP-IB address for printers. Figure 16-3 shows proper switch settings (with the HP-IB
address set to 01). If you are using Metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for the
appropriate switch settings.
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-11
Printer Setup
Figure 16-3. HP QuietJet and PaintJet (Family) Printer HP-IB Switch Settings
Prepare the Printer for Use
1. Load the paper, then turn the printer ON.
On HP QuietJet, QuietJet PLUS, and PaintJet Printers (not XL):
2. Move the Paper Advance Knob (on the right-hand side of the printer) to advance the paper.
Set the top of the page so it is just above the inkjet print head. These printers automatically
set Top of Form to the current position when the paper Advance Knob is moved.
Conguring the Receiver
Selecting Printer Resolution (HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus printers)
The HP 8530 allows you to select two dierent print resolutions for HP QuietJet printers, 96
and 192 dots per inch (DPI). To choose a specic resolution:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT MORE PRINTER RESOLUTION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Enter the desired value using the keypad, and press 4x15.
Note: higher resolutions take longer to print. Refer to \Printing" for instructions on making
actual printouts.
Selecting Printer Resolution (HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL printers)
90 DPI is the only resolution supported for these printers. This resolution is selected
automatically when you select color printing (see below).
Printing In Color
If using the HP PaintJet or PaintJet XL printers, set the HP 8530A for color printing as follows:
Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT COLOR . Making this selection automatically sets the printer
resolution for an HP PaintJet or PaintJet XL printer (90).
Now refer to \Printing" for instructions on making actual printouts.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-12 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printer Setup
Using an HP ThinkJet Printer
Choose the serial (RS-232) or HP-IB setup, depending on how your printer is equipped:
Serial Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
Serial DIP switch settings
Make sure all DIP switches (mounted on the back of the printer) are down (o). These
recommended switch settings assume you are using 8.5 by 11 inch paper. If you are using
Metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for the appropriate switch settings.
HP-IB Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
HP-IB address DIP switch settings
The HP 8530A uses address 01 as the default HP-IB address for printers. Figure 16-4 shows
proper switch settings (with the HP-IB address set to 01). These recommended switch settings
assume you are using 8.5 by 11 inch paper. If you are using Metric paper sizes, refer to the
printer manual for the appropriate switch settings.
Figure 16-4. HP ThinkJet printer HP-IB Switch Settings
Prepare the Printer for Use
1. If using metric paper sizes, refer to the printer manual for setup instructions.
2. Turn the printer ON.
3. Load the fan-fold paper. Use the 4LF5 key to advance the paper. Set the top of the page so it
is just above the inkjet print head.
4. Turn the printer OFF, then ON to set top of form.
Conguring the Receiver
Selecting Printer Resolution
The HP 8530A allows you to change printer resolution. The HP ThinkJet printer, however, can
only be used with the 96 dots per inch (DPI) setting. To check the current printer resolution
setting:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT MORE PRINTER RESOLUTION .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. If necessary, press 495 465 4x15.
Refer to \Printing" for instructions on making actual printouts.
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-13
Printer Setup
Using Non-HP Printers
Choose the serial (RS-232) or HP-IB setup, depending on how your printer is equipped:
Serial Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
Serial DIP switch settings
Refer to the User's Guide for your printer, make sure the following settings are made:
Table 16-1. Serial Printer Settings for Other Printers
Item
Proper
Setting
Serial1
ON
BAUD Rate
9600
Parity
None
XON-XOFF/DTR XON-XOFF
7/8 Bits
8 Bits
Stop Bits
1
1 Most laser printers must be
set to SERIAL mode by the
user.
HP-IB Setup
Connect the printer as explained in the service manual.
HP-IB address DIP switch settings
Refer to the printer's User's guide for instructions. The default address used by the HP 8530 is
01.
Before Printing
Load paper and, if using fan-fold paper, align the paper properly. Turn the printer ON, set top
of form.
Now refer to the Printing and Plotting chapter in the HP 8530 Users Guide for instructions on
making actual printouts.
16-14 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printing
Printing
The printing feature allows you to:
Print an exact copy of the display
Print tabular data
Print instrument settings and system conguration
Printouts can be make in Portrait or Landscape mode.
Landscape and Portrait Printing
Next, dene the print orientation. Select either PRINT PORTRAIT or PRINT LANDSCAPE .
Portrait orientation is the factory default. See Figure 16-5 and Figure 16-6.
Press MORE to set the printer resolution, margins widths and total print width.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 16-5. Landscape Printer Orientation
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-15
Printing
Figure 16-6. Portrait Printer Orientation
Printing One Snapshot per Page (Portrait or Landscape)
Two printout sizes are available, half page (use portrait mode) and full page (use landscape
mode).
1. Select Portrait or Landscape orientation by pressing: 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT , then press
PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press AUTO FEED ON .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. To print, press 4PRIOR MENU5 PLOT TO PRINTER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Printing Two Snapshots per Page
By leaving the Auto Form Feed feature OFF, and Portrait mode ON, two screen snapshots can
be printed to a single page:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT PORTRAIT AUTO FEED OFF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4PRIOR MENU5 PLOT TO PRINTER . The printer will now start printing the rst snapshot.
(Laser printers will show a ashing LED or other data transfer indication.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
Once you have pressed PLOT TO PRINTER , wait until PLOT COMPLETE is
displayed before you press any other front panel key (otherwise the print will
abort).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. After PLOT COMPLETE appears on the screen, you can press keys on the HP 8530A.
Before printing the second snapshot you can change instrument settings, make another
measurement, or load data from disc.
16-16 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printing
HP PaintJet XL printers will stop printing when the rst snapshot is 3/4 complete. This is
normal, it will nish the snapshot when you perform the next step.
4. Press 4COPY5 (if necessary), then PLOT TO PRINTER . The next snapshot will be sent to the
printer.
If using a laser printer, the data transfer indicator will start ashing again. Wait for the laser
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
printer transfer indicator to stop ashing before proceeding to the next step.
HP PaintJet XL printers will stop printing when the second snapshot is 3/4 complete. This is
normal, it will nish the snapshot when you perform the next step.
5. When the printer stops printing (or when the laser printer data transfer light stops ashing),
press DEFINE PRINT FORM FEED . (This step is not required if you are using an HP ThinkJet
Printer.)
FORM FEED causes fanfold-paper printers to go to the top of the next page. It causes laser
printers to eject the page.
Alternatively, you can press 4FORM FEED5 on the printer. (Some printers must be taken OFF
LINE before you can form feed.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
If you abort a printout, always use form feed to eject the partial printout. This
is especially important on laser printers, otherwise a portion of the aborted
snapshot will be superimposed on your next printout.
Printing Tabular Measurement Data
You can print out all measurement data points for the active parameter, or for all four
parameters in the active channel:
1. Select Auto feed by pressing 4COPY5 DEFINE PRINT AUTO FEED ON .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. To print, press 4PRIOR MENU5 LIST TRACE VALUES .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
a. To print data for the active parameter only, press LIST ONE PARAMETER in the new
menu.
b. To print data for all four parameters, press LIST ALL PARAMETERS
The list below shows an example of an Frequency Domain list trace value output.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
FREQUENCY (HZ)
7.5000000000E+09
7.5062500000E+09
7.5132500000E+09
7.5198750000E+09
7.5265000000E+09
dB
04.0609370000E+01,
04.0003900000E+01,
03.9474610000E+01,
03.8996090000E+01,
03.8386710000E+01,
0.0000000000E+00
0.0000000000E+00
0.0000000000E+00
0.0000000000E+00
0.0000000000E+00
The rst column is the always the stimulus value, followed by two columns of trace values in
the basic units selected by the current FORMAT selection. If the marker value consists of a
single value, for example LOG MAG or PHASE, the second column is zero.
Changing the format of the tabular data
To change the format of the list trace data, press 4COPY5 DEFINE LIST . This displays the dene
list menu as shown in Figure 16-7.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-17
Printing
Figure 16-7. Dene List Menu
You can dene various format aspects of the printed tabular data.
The number of lines of data printed depends upon the number of points selected (Stimulus
menu) and the list skip factor. When the skip factor = 1, all frequency points are printed.
When the skip factor = 2, every other frequency point is printed, and so on with larger
skip factors. At skip factor = 4 (default value) with 201 frequency points of data, the list
contains 51 points of information, one full (8.5 x 11 inch) page. To set skip factor, press
LIST SKIP FACTOR and use the knob or numeric entry keys to enter a value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Press LIST FORMAT to view the menu selections that control the column formats.
You can adjust the overall number of characters of the printed stimulus data as well as
the decimal position and the units selected. Select STIMULUS: WIDTH and use the knob or
numeric entry keys to enter a number representing the desired number of characters. The
minus sign and decimal point are counted as characters. The column heading varies with the
domain currently active. Select STIMULUS DECIMAL POSITION to set a value that represents
the number of digits after the decimal point. Select STIMULUS UNITS to view the available
stimulus unit selections. ( STIMULUS UNITS performs no function in Angle Domain, since the
only available units are degrees.)
The value for stimulus units change depending on the domain selected. The default settings
are:
Angle: Degrees
Frequency: MHz
Time: milliseconds
The column 1 and column 2 information is formatted in similar manner.
COLUMN 1 WIDTH sets the overall number of characters printed for column 1 and
COLUMN 1 DECIMAL POSITION sets the number of digits after the decimal point.
COLUMN 2 WIDTH and COLUMN 2 DECIMAL POSITION set the column 2 format aspects.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-18 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printing
For those printers with automatic paper feed capabilities you can select: FORM FEED to cause a
page to automatically eject from the printer and AUTO FEED ON/OFF to set the automatic next
page load to either on/o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Printing Instrument Settings and System Conguration
The Copy menu also makes it possible to document the HP 8530 system conguration (System
Parameters) and instrument settings (Operating Parameters). Refer to Figure 16-8 for the menu.
Figure 16-8. System/Operating Parameters Menu
To display the current system operating parameters, press SYS/OPER PARAMETERS then press
SYSTEM PARAMETERS or OPERATING PARAMETERS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Next, press LIST PARAMETERS or PLOT PARAMETERS , depending or whether you have a
printer or plotter. Current page position and pen number are used for the plot. To restore the
measurement display press the softkey RESTORE DISPLAY or any front-panel key other than a
softkey.
Refer to Table 16-2 for a typical system parameters listing.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-19
Printing
Table 16-2. Typical Initialized System Parameters Listing
RESTORE
DISPLAY
PRINT
PARAMETERS
hp
SYSTEM PARAMETER
8530 HP-IB ADDRESS
SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS
SOURCE HP-IB ADDRESS
SOURCE 2 HP-IB
ADDRESS
CONVERTER HP-IB
ADDRESS
PLOTTER HP-IB
ADDRESS
PRINTER HP-IB
ADDRESS
DISC HP-IB ADDRESS
Channel 1
Channel 2
16
17
19
31
16
17
19
31
20
20
5
5
1
1
0
0
31
PASS-THRU ADDRESS
USER DISPLAY ADDRESS 31
31
31
0
SRQ MASK (PRIMARY)
SRQ MASK (SECONDARY) 0
0
0
PLOT
PARAMETERS
Operating parameters provides two pages of documentation for the present system state. Refer
to Table 16-3 and Table 16-4. The examples below assume the receiver is in Frequency Domain.
16-20 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Printing
Table 16-3. Typical Operating Parameters Displays (rst page)
RESTORE
DISPLAY
LIST
PARAMETERS
OPERATING PARAMETER
Channel 1
NUMBER of POINTS
SWEEP TIME
SOURCE 1 POWER
SOURCE 1 POWER SLOPE
Channel 2
201
100.0 ms
10.0 dBm
0.0 dB/GHz
OFF
SOURCE 2 POWER
10.0 dBm
SOURCE 2 POWER SLOPE 0.0 dB/GHz
201
100.0 ms
10.0 dBm
0.0 dB/GHz
OFF
10.0 dBm
0.0 dB/GHz
ELECTRICAL DELAY
PHASE OFFSET
MAGNITUDE SLOPE
MAGNITUDE OFFSET
IF AVERAGING FACTOR
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
OFF
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
OFF
s
dB/GHz
dB
PLOT
PARAMETERS
s
dB/GHz
dB
PAGE
PARAMETERS
Table 16-4. Typical Operating Parameters Displays (second page)
RESTORE
DISPLAY
LIST
PARAMETERS
OPERATING PARAMETER
SMOOTHING APERTURE
Channel 1
0.0 % SPAN
OFF
Channel 2
0.0 % SPAN
OFF
Z0
GATE START
GATE STOP
WINDOW
GATE SHAPE
50.0 0500.0 ps
500.0 ps
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
50.0 0500.0 ps
500.0 ps
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
4.0 GHz
MARKER
MARKER
MARKER
MARKER
MARKER
1
2
3
4
5
PLOT
PARAMETERS
PAGE
PARAMETERS
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-21
Installing a Plotter
Using a Plotter
This section explains:
Installing the Plotter
Plotting Options
Plotting
Plotting Features
The plotting feature allows you to:
Plot an exact copy of the display (a \snapshot").
Plot selected display components, such as the data, graticule, markers, or text.
Plot in one color (monochrome) or in multiple colors (color).
Plot one snapshot per page
Plot four snapshots per page.
Select specic pens and pen colors.
What is Plotted
The displayed measurement can be plotted out exactly as displayed on the screen, or you can
print certain screen components such as the data, graticule, markers, or text only. The softkey
menus do not appear on plots unless asked for using an HP-IB command. The marker list and
real-time clock are always plotted if they are active, unless menus are being plotted.
Installing a Plotter
Installation is described in the HP 8530A On-Site Service Manual.
Selecting the Output Port
Select the appropriate output port for your plotter as follows:
1. Turn the receiver ON.
2. If using a serial plotter: Press 4LOCAL5 MORE PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #1 or
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #2 , depending on which serial port you used.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If using an HP-IB plotter: Press 4LOCAL5 MORE PLOTTER: HP-IB . The message PLOTTER
HP-IB ADDRESS 5 will appear on the screen.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Special instructions for connecting the HP 7550
HP 7550 plotters have two RS-232 ports, however, the two ports are wired dierently. You
should use the male RS-232 port (marked \COMPUTER"). The RS-232 cables shipped with the
HP 8530A will not work with the HP 7550, you must order an HP 24542H cable.
HP 7550B and 7550 Plus plotters must be placed in \7550A Emulation" mode, with TIMEOUT
turned O. Refer to the HP 7550B or Plus User's Guide for instructions.
16-22 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Plotting Options
HP 7550B and 7550 Plus Plotters
The HP 7550A/B plotter is congured using its front panel controls. To use either of these
plotters you must do the following:
Select HP 7550A emulation mode.
Turn the TIMEOUT feature O.
Instructions on how to perform these steps are provided in the HP 7550B or 7550 Plus User's
Guide.
Plotting Options
Press 4COPY5 to display the Copy menu (Figure 16-9).
Plotting Options
Press DEFINE PLOT , select any of the following plotting options:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Choose PLOT TYPE: MONOCHROME (to use one pen only) or PLOT TYPE: COLOR (to use all
pens).
Choose dierent pens for parameter 1, 2, 3, and 4 traces, or for the graticule, using
SET PEN NUMBERS . (If you plotter has multiple pens.)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Turn Auto Form Feed ON or OFF.
Choose full page or 1/4 page plot size using SELECT QUADRANT and either select FULL PAGE
or one of the four quadrant softkeys.
The softkeys AUTO FEED ON/OFF and FORM FEED apply to plotters with automatic
paper feed capabilities. FORM FEED causes a page to automatically eject from the plotter.
AUTO FEED ON/OFF sets the automatic next page load to either on/o.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Selecting Pen Color
For multiple-pen plotters, each display component can be plotted using a dierent pen/color
using the softkey SET PEN NUMBERS on the Copy menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PLOT PLOT TYPE: COLOR SET PEN NUMBERS then press the softkey
corresponding to the display element for which, you wish to select a pen number. Insert the
pen in the plotter pen slot corresponding to the number selected for that display element.
Continue to select pen numbers for the other display elements in the same way.
2. Press 4COPY5 to return to main Copy menu. Select PLOT TO PLOTTER and then the softkey
corresponding to the material you wish plotted using the pen numbers just chosen:
PLOT: ALL , DATA , MEMORY , GRATICULE , MARKER(S) , TITLE , or TEXT .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. If you selected a single element, wait for the plot to be completed, then repeat the process
as often as needed to complete the multi-pen plot.
The following sequence causes the entire plot to be drawn using a single pen.
4COPY5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DEFINE PLOT
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-23
Plotting Options
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOT TYPE: MONOCHROME
PRIOR MENU5
4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOT TO PLOTTER
PLOT: ALL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Pen selections are saved as part of the Instrument State. The following is a list of the factory
default pen number assignments selected also, by the softkey DEFAULT PEN NUMBERS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Table 16-5. Default Pen Numbers
Display
Element
SOFTKEYS
WARNING
PARAM 1
DATA
PARAM 2
DATA
PARAM 3
DATA
PARAM 4
DATA
GRATICULE
16-24 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Pen
Number
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
Display
Element
MARKERS
PARAM 1
MEM
PARAM 2
MEM
PARAM 3
MEM
PARAM 4
MEM
STIMULUS
Pen
Number
1
3
5
6
4
1
Plotting
Plotting
This section explains:
Plotting all of the display
Plotting individual display components
Plotting a selected quadrant (four snapshots per page)
Plotting One Snapshot per Page
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PLOT SELECT QUADRANT FULL PAGE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Press 4COPY5 PLOT TO PLOTTER . The plot will begin.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If the marker list feature is on, it is plotted when PLOT ALL is executed. The same is true of
the date/time clock feature.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Plotting Individual Display Components
To plot only part of the display, press 4COPY5, 4PLOT TO PLOTTER5, followed by one of the
following:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOT: ALL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
DATA
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GRATICULE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER(S)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MEMORY
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TITLE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
TEXT
ALL FOUR PARAMETERS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To plot more than one of these (for example to plot the trace and then the graticule), wait
for the rst plot to be completed, then, without changing the plotter paper, press the softkey
corresponding to the other component you want to plot. Note that on certain plotters you may
have to load the paper again before the plot begins.
Copy (Printing and Plotting) 16-25
Plotting
Figure 16-9. Dene Plot and Plot to Plotter Menu Structure
Plotting a Selected Quadrant (four snapshots per page)
Factory Preset selects full page plots. The current selection is shown underlined on the select
quadrant menu.
To plot all or part of the display at approximately quarter-page size:
1. Press 4COPY5 DEFINE PLOT SELECT QUADRANT . This displays the plot quadrant menu.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. Select the quadrant for the rst plot by pressing LEFT UPPER , LEFT LOWER , RIGHT UPPER ,
or RIGHT LOWER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
3. Press 4COPY5 PLOT TO PLOTTER PLOT: ALL or one of the softkeys for plotting only part of
the display.
The material selected is plotted at approximately one-quarter size in the location you have
specied. To select the location for the next plot, select the next quadrant, select the location,
then select the material to be plotted. Repeat the process for the next plot. Note that on
certain plotters you may have to load and reload the paper to complete all four plots.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
16-26 Copy (Printing and Plotting)
Using System Functions
17
Chapter Contents
The following topics are covered in this chapter
System Menus
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Phaselock Controls
Warning Beeper
IF Calibration and Correction
Display Functions (Creating a Title, Adjusting the Date/Time Clock)
Security Features
Controls that Aect I/0
HP-IB Addresses
Power Leveling
Remote Switch Recall
Controlling Multiple Sources (Multiple Source Menu/mode)
Service Functions
Using System Functions 17-1
Controls that Aect the Receiver
System Menus
Figure 17-1 shows the main System menu.
Figure 17-1. Main System Menu and Part of the Display Functions Menu
17-2 Using System Functions
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Controls that Aect the Receiver
The following features only aect the receiver:
Phaselock Controls
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK to access the System Phaselock Menu, shown in
Figure 17-2. The functions of this menu control the timing of data acquisition cycle and the
point where the system is phaselocked.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 17-2. System Phaselock Menu
Lock Type
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK to access LOCK TYPE: INTERNAL or
LOCK TYPE: EXTERNAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
EXTERNAL lock type selects the system rst IF phase lock, and phase locks on an external
LO source. This setting is appropriate if your system uses an HP 85309A LO/IF unit, which
uses a non-synthesized LO source such as the HP 8350.
INTERNAL lock type selects the system rst IF phase lock, and the internal LO source. This
setting is appropriate for systems that use HP 8511A/B frequency converters.
NONE turns phaselock o. This setting is appropriate if your system uses an HP 85309A
LO/IF unit, which uses a synthesized LO source such as a HP 836xx family source.
Step Type
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK to access the Step Type softkeys.
The step type softkeys control the data acquisition cycle during Frequency Domain
measurements. There are two step types, Normal Step and Quick Step. Normal Step is the
factory default mode. Once changed by the user, this mode will never change. The mode you
choose, either Quick Step or Normal Step, aects measurements made in the Step or Frequency
List sweep modes.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-3
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Normal Step. Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK STEP TYPE: NORMAL to select Normal
Step mode.
In normal-step, the receiver tunes to a frequency and measures all necessary parameters before
breaking phaselock and tuning to the next frequency. The receiver goes through a complete
phaselock sequence at each frequency step.
This method of phaselock requires a software handshake only (occurs through the System
Bus). No other external connectors between the source and receiver are required and HP-IB
extenders can be used.
Quick Step Mode. Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK STEP TYPE: QUICK to select
Quick Step mode.
Quick Step mode increases the speed of Step sweep measurements up to six times. Quick Step
requires a compatible HP 836xx source, a list of compatible HP 836xx sources is provided in
\Fast measurement speed and Quick Step mode" in Chapter 1. Quick Step mode does not
function in a system that uses multiple sources.
The key attributes of the quick-step phaselock method are:
Each data acquisition point is fully synthesized.
The source is \tuned" from point-to-point, it does not break phaselock.
The receiver remains phaselocked to the source except at the source bandcross points or
when the test VTO needs to reset.
The receiver and source require two BNC connections, described below.
Typically (depends on averaging), increased data acquisition speed (six times improvement) is
achieved by this method of phaselock.
The HP 8530A uses STEP TYPE: NORMAL if the source is not compatible with quick step. HP
8340/41 sources are NOT compatible with quick step.
To use Quick Step mode with an HP 836xx RF source:
1. Connect the receiver's TRIGGER IN BNC to the source's TRIGGER OUT BNC.
2. Connect the receiver's STOP SWP BNC to the source's STOP SWEEP BNC.
3. Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK STEP TYPE: QUICK
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Lock Speed
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK to access the Lock Speed controls.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
LOCK SPEED NORMAL provides the best frequency accuracy when using Step, Single Point, or
Frequency List modes. Lock Speed Normal is the factory default setting. This feature has no
eect in Ramp Sweep mode.
LOCK SPEED FAST allows you to increase stepped measurement speed with a tradeo of
decreased frequency accuracy. Fast Speed increases the speed of Step, Single Point, and
Frequency List modes. This feature has no eect in Ramp Sweep mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-4 Using System Functions
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Warning Beeper
The BEEPER ON / OFF softkeys control whether you hear a \beep" whenever a warning
message is displayed. The BEEPER ON position is the factory default.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNN
IF Calibration and Correction
IF calibration/correction is an automatic calibration feature that reduces IF gain and
quadrature errors in each of the four input channels (a1, a2, b1 and b2). This process is
composed of two features:
IF Calibration IF calibration measures a crystal reference signal and determines gain a
quadrature errors for each input channel. A series of error-correction
coecients are calculated. The receiver rmware determines how often
IF calibrations should be performed. When the receiver is warming up, it
performs IF calibrations often. When the receiver is fully warmed up, it
performs IF calibrations less often.
Refer to Figure 2-1. To perform an IF calibration, the receiver measures a
100 kHz reference signal (from a built-in crystal oscillator) with the Test and
Reference Synchronous Detectors. Then, IF calibration calculates gain and
quadrature errors for each input channel.
The receiver inhibits periodic IF calibrations during Fast CW modes. The user
can also turn periodic IF calibrations OFF. You can also force an IF calibration
to be performed. Refer to the \IF Calibration Controls," below, for instructions.
IF Correction IF Correction subtracts IF calibration error coecients from the measurement
data. IF correction is always ON. IF correction occurs before any other data
processing, before data reaches the Raw Data Arrays.
IF Calibration Controls
Press 4SYSTEM5 IF CORRECTION to access the IF Calibration controls, which are described
below:
This softkey initiates an IF gain calibration before starting the
RESET IF CORRECTION
next group of sweeps.
This is the factory-default setting. When AUTO is selected,
IF CORRECT: AUTO
the receiver automatically performs IF calibrations at periodic
intervals.
IF CORRECT: MANUAL
This setting stops IF calibrations from occurring automatically.
You can manually perform an IF calibration by pressing:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
RESET IF CORRECTION
Even if Manual mode is selected, the receiver still modies measurement data with the
most-recent IF calibration coecients.
Using System Functions 17-5
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Display Functions
Part of the display functions menu is shown in Figure 17-1, the date/time functions menu is
shown in Figure 17-3.
Creating a Title
To create or change a title:
1. Press 4SYSTEM5, DISPLAY FUNCTIONS , TITLE . This brings the title menu and the existing
title onto the display.
2. To enter a character, position the " symbol below the character by turning the knob.
3. Press SELECT LETTER . The character appears as the last character in the title area. Repeat
this process to write the rest of the title.
4. Use the BACK SPACE softkey to erase the rst title character to the left of the arrow. When
you have nished creating or changing the title, select the softkey labeled TITLE DONE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Deleting a Title
To delete the whole title, press the softkey labeled ERASE TITLE or use the 4BACKSPACE5 key in
the ENTRY block to erase one character at a time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Adjusting the Date/Time Clock
Figure 17-3. Date/Time Functions Menu
To adjust the date/time clock annotation:
1. Press 4SYSTEM5, DISPLAY FUNCTIONS , DATE/TIME FUNCTIONS . This brings up the adjust
date/time menu.
2. Select SET YEAR . Notice that the date/time clock appears in the lower right-hand of the
display. Also, notice the prompt in the active entry area. Use the knob to adjust the year.
3. Select SET MONTH . Press 425 (or other numeric characters from 1 to 12), then press 4x15 to
terminate the entry. Notice that the month annotation is automatically translated to a three
letter abbreviation of the month, in the date/time annotation.
4. Select SET DAY . Use the 485/495 arrow keys to adjust the day.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-6 Using System Functions
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Controls that Aect the Receiver
Note that you can use the knob, numeric entry keys with a terminator, or the 485/495 arrow
key to enter any value. Any association with a particular key is for demonstration purposes
only.
In the same manner, you can adjust the hour and minutes of the date/time clock.
Security Features
The CRT OFF softkey turns the display o. Filament power to the CRT is turned o, resulting
in a blank display. External displays driven by the receiver rear-panel EXTERNAL DISPLAY
output continue to function. To turn the CRT ON again, press 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET ,
or recall an Instrument State which was created with the CRT turned ON.
The FREQUENCY OFF softkey turns o the display of frequency annotations. All stimulus
functions operate normally except that the start, stop, center, and span display values are
set to 0.000000000 GHz and the marker frequency value is blanked. Angle and Time Domain
stimulus displays are not changed. FACTORY PRESET or 4RECALL5 of Instrument State stored
without FREQUENCY OFF restores normal Frequency Domain displays.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-7
Controls that Aect I/O
Controls that Aect I/O
The following controls aect how the receiver communicates with external instruments:
HP-IB Addresses
The HP-IB address menu is identical to the main Local menu and address assignments are made
the same way. The following is a list of the available address assignments you can make using
either of these menus. The factory default values are shown in parenthesis. To learn more
about the HP-IB menu, refer to Chapter 11.
Note
If you perform either of the following, you must turn the receiver OFF, then
ON again:
When you change the address of any instrument on the System Bus.
When you replace an RF or LO source with a source having a dierent model
number.
System operating problems can result if you do not follow these precautions.
ADDRESS of 8530 (16)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of SYSTEM BUS (17)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of SOURCE #1 (19)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of SOURCE #2 (31)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of CONVERTER , SET ADDRESS (20)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of REMOTE SWITCH (31)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRESS of RF SWITCH (31)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE
DISC (0)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: HP-IB (05)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PLOTTER: RS-232 PORT #2
PRINTER: HP-IB (01)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
PRINTER: RS-232 PORT #2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MORE
PASS-THRU (31)
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
To set the System Bus address of the instrument:
17-8 Using System Functions
Controls that Aect I/O
1. Check the hardware switch (usually located on the rear-panel) of the instrument. Convert
the binary switch setting to decimal format.
2. Select the corresponding receiver softkey for that instrument.
3. Set the decimal value using the knob, step, or numeric entry keys.
4. Terminate with the 4x15 key.
5. PRESS 4RECALL5 MORE FACTORY PRESET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
HP-IB Congure
The softkeys in this menu control how the system operates in response to a PRES; command
(issued by a computer).
Select HP-IB USES USR PRESET to use the PRES; command the same as the front-panel key
4USER PRESET5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Select HP-IB USES FACTORY PRESET to use the PRES; command the same as the softkey
FACTORY PRESET (under 4RECALL5 MORE ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Edit Multiple Source
This softkey accesses the Edit Multiple Source Menu, which allows you to congure the system
for:
LO Sources.
External Mixers.
RF frequency multipliers which do not have a digital communications link (source module
interconnect) with the RF source.
Testing special modules that must be tested with an IF output frequency other than 20 MHz.
A complete tutorial on the Multiple Source feature is provided in \Controlling Multiple
Sources", later in this section.
Remote Switch Recall
Recalls a predened instrument state in an HP 3488A remote switch/control unit. The remote
switch must be set up with each correct instrument state required for the measurement before
this command is used.
For example, to recall HP 3488A remote switch state #1, press:
4SYSTEM5 MORE REMOTE SWITCH 1 4x15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Power Leveling
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE POWER LEVELING to enter the System Power Leveling Menu, shown in
Figure 17-4. This function is part of the Hardware State and is not changed by power-up or
preset or an instrument state recall.
The RF source (source 1) levels its power using its internal
SOURCE 1: INTERNAL
leveling when this is selected.
When this is selected, the RF source requires an external
SOURCE 1: EXT. LEVEL
leveling loop to complete its leveling loop. Refer to the
individual source manual to nd information on external
leveling requirements.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-9
Controls that Aect I/O
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SOURCE 1: MM MODULE
This setting should be used in millimeter wave systems where
the source module interface cable is attached to the SOURCE
MODULE INTERFACE connector on the RF source.
Figure 17-4. System Power Leveling Menu
Source 2 leveling requires two things:
The LO source HP-IB port must be connected to the receiver System Bus.
An LO source must be specied in the receiver's Multiple Source Menu before you can
change its power leveling type. Other LO source power and phaselock controls (LOCK TYPE)
are located in under 4SYSTEM5 key menus. The Source 2 leveling functions are the same as
those used for Source 1.
Frequency Converter Type
The HP 8530A needs to know whether or not you are using an HP 8511B frequency converter.
To select the type of frequency converter in use, press:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SYSTEM HP-IB ADDRESSES CONVERTER
If you are using an HP 8511B frequency converter, press CONVERTER HP 8511B . If you are
using any other type of frequency converter, press ALL OTHERS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-10 Using System Functions
Controlling Multiple Sources
Controlling Multiple Sources
Many measurement systems require remote mixers, and therefore require an LO source. Such
a system is shown in Figure 17-5. The receiver controls all aspects of RF and LO source
frequencies. In setups that use multiple sources, the Multiple Source Menu allows the receiver
to properly manage these frequencies.
Here is an example of a setup that requires multiple source mode. The system shown uses an
LO source and 3rd harmonic mixers.
Figure 17-5. Actual LO Frequency Required by a Harmonic Mixer
This setup creates two management tasks for the receiver:
The LO source must supply the appropriate LO signal to the mixer. The mixer will use the
third harmonic of the LO signal. The receiver must compensate by setting the LO source
frequency to be 1/3 of the needed frequency. The formula shown in Figure 17-7 would be
appropriate for this situation.
The mixer must produce a 20 MHz IF for the receiver. Therefore, the third harmonic of the
LO frequency must be 20 MHz away from the RF frequency.
The Multiple Source Menu provides the special control for this and other types of setups.
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE EDIT MULT. SRC. to display the Multiple Source Menu. It will appear as
shown in Figure 17-6.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-11
Controlling Multiple Sources
Figure 17-6. Edit Multiple Source Menu
There are three entries in the multiple source mode, labeled: SOURCE 1 (the RF source),
SOURCE 2 (the LO source), and RECEIVER. Each of these entries contains a blank formula.
the SOURCE 1 formula tells the receiver to adjust frequency commands sent to
SOURCE 1
the RF source.
the SOURCE 2 formula tells the receiver to adjust frequency commands sent to
SOURCE 2
the LO source.
the RECEIVER formula tunes the frequency converter to the frequency sent by
RECEIVER
the mixer.
Examples are provided later for each of these formulas.
Using the Multiple Source Menu
Given the test setup shown earlier, here is an example of how to use the Multiple Source Menu.
Look at the SOURCE 2 line. Like the other two lines, this one is accompanied by a formula.
Refer to Figure 17-7 and Figure 17-5.
Figure 17-7. Source 2 Modied for 3rd Harmonic Mixer System
17-12 Using System Functions
Controlling Multiple Sources
The term FREQ represents the original RF frequency requested by the user. First, the oset
(20 MHz) is added to the original frequency value. Since 1/3 is entered as a multiplier, (FREQ
+ 20 GHz) is now divided by 3.
The functions in the Multiple Source Menu, shown in Figure 17-6, are explained below:
As shown in Figure 17-7, the frequency multiplier is entered as a
MULTIPLIER NUMER.
fraction x/y where x is the numerator and y is the denominator.
This softkey allows you to enter the numerator, which is 1 in almost
all applications. Terminate this entry with 4x15.
This allows you to enter the denominator for the frequency
MULTIPLIER DENOM.
multiplier. In harmonic mixer setups, the denominator is always
equal to the harmonic used by the mixer. In other words, if the
mixer is a 10th harmonic type, use a denominator of 10. Terminate
this entry with 4x15.
This enters a xed oset which is added to, or subtracted from,
OFFSET FREQUENCY.
the FREQ frequency. (FREQ represents the stimulus (RF source)
frequency requested by the user). In most setups the oset you
enter becomes the IF frequency. To enter a positive oset, simply
enter the desired oset value. Terminate this entry with an
appropriate units key. To enter a negative oset, press 4+/-5, enter
the value, then press the appropriate units terminator key.
When used with SOURCE 1 or SOURCE 2, this sets the source to one
CONSTANT FREQUENCY
xed frequency. When used with RECEIVER, it tunes the frequency
converter to measure that particular frequency. Terminate this entry
with an appropriate units key.
Returns the Multiple Source Menu to the factory default settings.
DEFAULT
Press after dening the SOURCE 1, SOURCE 2 or RECEIVER formula.
DONE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
How to Enter the Example Conguration
Still following the original example setup, here are the steps required to congure the Multiple
Source Menu for the LO source and 3rd harmonic mixer.
First, congure the SOURCE 2 formula for a 3rd harmonic mixer, with 20 MHz oset:
1. Press DEFINE: SOURCE 2 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. The multiplier requires two values, the numerator, and denominator. For the example above
you would press:
3. MULTIPLIER NUMER. 1 4x15
4. MULTIPLIER DENOM. 3 4x15
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
5. OFFSET FREQUENCY 20 4M/5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
6. DONE (Indicates you are nished dening the Source 2 formula)
Next, congure the RECEIVER formula to measure the 20 MHz IF produced by the mixer. Press
the following keys:
1. DEFINE: RECEIVER .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
2. CONSTANT FREQUENCY 20 4M/5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-13
Controlling Multiple Sources
3. DONE
Now save the conguration. Before leaving the multiple source menus, either
MULT. SRC: OFF/SAVE or MULT. SRC: ON/SAVE must be selected. If not, all denition
changes are lost. These softkeys turn the function on or o and save the equation denitions
in the Hardware State. Note that changes can be made and saved with the mode o (using
MULT. SRC: OFF/SAVE ). This means that at power-up the equations are dened but not
active.
Figure 17-8 shows how the multiple source menu will look after you perform the above steps,
and press MULT. SRC: ON/SAVE .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Note
Do not be concerned If you see the error message: CHANGING STEP TYPE TO
NORMAL STEP. This message occurs if the receiver was in the Quick phase lock
mode. The receiver cannot use Quick phase lock mode when multiple sources
are in use, and selects Normal phase lock mode instead.
Figure 17-8.
Finished Multiple Source Conguration for LO Source and 3rd
Harmonic Mixers
Note that the example setup in Figure 17-5 requires NO changes to the default SOURCE 1
conguration.
Millimeter Wave Mixers
The SOURCE 2 setup would only change slightly for millimeter wave systems (that use mixers
with large harmonic values). For example, Q band mixers use 10th harmonic mixers. To use
these mixer types, you would simply enter a 10 as the multiplier denominator. The numerator
and oset remain the same.
Uses for the SOURCE 1 and RECEIVER Formulas
As implied above, the three formulas in the Edit Multiple Source menu (SOURCE 1, SOURCE
2, and RECEIVER) compensate for frequency translation that is occurring somewhere in the
system.
17-14 Using System Functions
SOURCE 1 Formula Use
Controlling Multiple Sources
The SOURCE 1 formula could compensate for any frequency translation occurring in the RF
portion of the system. An example would be a frequency multiplier that cannot communicate
digitally with the RF source. HP multipliers and most RF sources have an interconnect bus that
allows them to communicate directly. When using these devices you do not need to change the
SOURCE 1 formula from the default settings. However, if you have a source or multiplier that
does not have the interconnect, then change the SOURCE 1 formula as needed:
For example, for a 3x multiplier you would enter 1/3 as the multiplier (and no oset). Assume
you are using this type of setup, and you request an RF frequency of 45 GHz. The receiver
will divide that value by 3 and program the RF source for the new value (15 GHz). The RF
source outputs 15 GHz, which is then multiplied (by 3) by the RF multiplier. The multiplier
then outputs the desired 45 GHz signal.
RECEIVER Formula Use
All the examples above assume that a 20 MHz IF frequency is available from the frequency
converter. These examples are very useful if you are testing discrete antennas. However, some
users may need to test modules which contain mixers, and which may not a produce 20 MHz IF
output.
Figure 17-9 shows an example setup.
Figure 17-9. Module Testing Example
Note that the Module Under Test contains a 10th harmonic mixer. Also, the module only
produces a 1 GHz IF signal. In this example you must modify the SOURCE 2 and RECEIVER
formulas as follows:
SOURCE 2
Using System Functions 17-15
Controlling Multiple Sources
1/10 * ( FREQ +
1.000000000 GHz )
RECEIVER
1.000000000 GHz
(The RECEIVER is set to a CONSTANT FREQUENCY of 1 GHz.)
Why these settings are used. Here are the objectives of this measurement setup:
The nal LO frequency must mix with a 100 GHz RF signal to produce a 1 GHz IF. Therefore
the nal LO frequency must equal 99 or 101 GHz. For the sake of this example 101 GHz is
used.
The LO frequency output by the LO source must be 1/10th of the required LO frequency.
This is because the 10th harmonic mixers will essentially multiply the LO frequency by 10 (by
picking the 10th harmonic).
The setup must allow the receiver/frequency converter combination to measure the 1 GHz IF
signal.
These design objectives are met as follows:
The formula for SOURCE 2 must be:
1/10 * (RF FREQ + 1.000000000 GHz)
This yields:
Source 2 = 1/10 * (100 GHz + 1 GHz)
Source 2 = 1/10 * 101 GHz
Source 2 = 10.1 GHz
When the mixer picks the 10th harmonic, it will be at 101 GHz. Therefore the IF will be
1 GHz.
The Receiver must tune the HP 8511 frequency converter to measure 1 GHz. Setting
RECEIVER to a constant frequency of 1 GHz does this.
Figure 17-10 shows how the multiple source menu will appear after these changes are made.
Figure 17-10.
Finished Multiple Source Conguration for Hypothetical Module
17-16 Using System Functions
Service Functions
Service Functions
The service functions menu contain several functions that are useful to you as an operator.
Some keys on this menu however, are more appropriate for service personnel and are discussed
in the HP 8530A On-Site Service Manual.
Figure 17-11. Service Functions Menu
To view the service functions menu, press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Test Menu
The test menu is accessed by pressing 4SYSTEM5 MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU .
Selecting TEST MENU disables the HP-IB interface. This menu gives access to self-test menu
items. To return to normal operation, enter 15 then 4= MARKER5, or cycle line power, or press
TEST. Operation of selections from the test menu are described as part service procedures in
the HP 8530 On-Site Service Manual.
The following is a list of the options available on the test menu:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Using System Functions 17-17
Service Functions
Table 17-1. Test Menu
MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU
SYSTEM COMMANDS
15 RUN MAIN PROGRAM
A5 PROCESSOR EPROM
16 MEMORY OPERATIONS
A5 PROCESSOR RAM
17 RERUN SELF TEST
A7 DATA BUS
18 REPEAT TEST LOOP
A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR
A14 DISPLAY RAM
DISC COMMANDS
A7 TIMER/CLOCK/RS-232
A7 PUBLIC HPIB
19 LOAD PROGRAM DISC
A7 SYSTEM BUS
20 RECORD PROGRAM DISC
INTERRUPT SYSTEM
21 INITIALIZE DISC
A5 MULTIPLIER
A7 DISC CONTROLLER
SERVICE COMMANDS
A6 NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
IF DETECTOR DATA
22 RUN SERVICE PROGRAM
KEYBOARD
23 DIAGNOSE A FAILURE
LOOPING SELF TESTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
ENTER SELECTION, THEN PRESS =MARKER
Disc Commands
Use this selection to load or reload the operating system. Slide the
operating disc into the disc drive. Press 415 495 4=MARKER5. In about one
minute, the operating system should be loaded and running.
20 RECORD PROGRAM Use this selection to record a backup copy of the operating system on
DISC
an initialized blank disc. Slide the initialized disc into the disc drive.
Press 425 405 4=MARKER5
21 INITIALIZE
Use this selection a disc prior to recording the operating system on
DISC
it. You can use a disc that has been recorded on, but it should be
double-sided and of good quality. Slide the disc into the disc drive.
Press 425 415 4=MARKER5.
19 LOAD PROGRAM
DISC
System Bus Softkeys
Use the SYSTEM BUS `LOCAL' softkey to suspend all activity on the System Bus and enter the
hold mode. Front panel control of instruments connected to the System Bus is enabled to allow
you to change instrument functions not controllable from the receiver.
Selecting SYSTEM BUS `LOCAL' also allows an external controller to communicate directly
with any \appliance" or instrument on the System Bus via the System Bus Address.
Any pass-thru command to any \appliance" or instrument on the System Bus causes an
automatic System Bus `LOCAL'.
Selecting SYSTEM BUS `REMOTE' returns control of instruments on the System Bus to the
receiver. Source functions controlled by the receiver are returned to the state represented by
the current receiver Instrument State (for example: ramp/step/single point, frequency range,
sweep time, source power, and power slope). Other source functions set from its front-panel
are not changed. The test set is interrogated and parameter denitions are established (see
REDEFINE PARAMETER ). Raw data arrays are zeroed and the displayed trace is updated by the
next group of sweeps.
Addressing the receiver HP-IB after pass-thru to any System Bus Address (except address 31)
causes an automatic System Bus `Remote'.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-18 Using System Functions
Service Functions
IF Gain
The IF Gain menus allow you to select automatic or manual IF gain control for the HP 8530A
input signal paths. Remember, the IF section of the receiver:
Down converts the 20 MHz input signals to a lower frequency, so the signal is easier to
manipulate and sample.
Changes the amount of IF gain so the detectors and A/D converter operate with optimum
accuracy (refer to Figure 17-12).
Selects the input ratio (b1/a1 for example).
Normally the receiver uses automatic gain control. In this mode, the receiver automatically
adjusts IF gain for a high signal level (around 015 dBm) at the detectors and A/D converter.
This allows the detectors and A/D converter to operate with optimum accuracy. The default
(automatic) mode is appropriate for almost all measurement setups.
Why Use Manual control
You should use manual IF gain control if any of the following applies to your measurement:
There are large power changes between adjacent data points (greater than 24 dB between
points).
The \IF OVERLOAD" message keeps appearing, even though RF Power to the receiver inputs
is less than 010 dBm.
This situation can occur when measuring the copolar and crosspolar output of an antenna,
when using FASC or FASD Fast CW modes. The FASAD (autoranging Fast CW) and Fast IF
Multiplexing modes are immune to this problem.
Why the problem occurs. When the receiver measures a data point, automatic IF gain control
detects the power at the input. Assume (for example) that this is a very low power level. The
gain control increases IF gain to amplify the signal. This allows the synchronous detectors and
A/D converter (shown in Figure 17-12) to operate in their most accurate range. Now assume
the receiver measures the next data point, and the power level is much higher. The IF gain
stages are still set for the previously-measured low power level. When the large signal arrives,
it is amplied greatly and will often overdrive the detectors. The error message \IF OVERLOAD"
appears when this occurs.
Figure 17-13 shows a block diagram of the IF gain stage.
Using System Functions 17-19
Service Functions
Figure 17-12. Simplied Block Diagram of the HP 8530A Receiver
Note the block in Figure 17-12 titled \IF AMPS & INPUT SELECTOR," it is this section we will
be looking at more closely in Figure 17-13.
17-20 Using System Functions
Service Functions
Figure 17-13. Gain Stages in the IF section
You will notice that, in Figure 17-12, the 100 kHz mixers are shown as having only a single
output each. This is not really true. Figure 17-13 shows a closer representation of the
actual circuitry. The dierent signals (a1, a2, b1, and b2) are split o and routed to input
selectors. When you select a specic parameter, a ratio such a b1/a1 is selected. The receiver
automatically selects the correct positions on the input selector to send the b1 signal to the test
channel, and a1 to the reference channel.
The signals then go to a series of 12 dB ampliers. In automatic IF gain mode, the receiver
controls these ampliers. These ampliers can also be controlled manually with the softkeys in
the IF Gain Select Menu.
How to Use Manual IF Gain Controls Properly
You can solve the IF OVERLOAD problem by using manual IF gain, and setting it as necessary
for the higher power level.
Press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS IF GAIN . Then select gain control for either the
test or reference path with TEST AMP. GAIN or REFERENCE AMP. GAIN . The manual gain
control softkeys are now displayed:
Turns all four ampliers OFF for that test or reference path (0 dB gain).
GAIN: (MIN) 0
Turns one amplier ON for that test or reference path (12 dB gain).
GAIN: 1
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN: 2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN: 3
Turns two ampliers ON for that test or reference path (24 dB gain).
Turns three ampliers ON for that test or reference path (36 dB gain).
Turns all four ampliers ON for that test or reference path (48 dB
gain).
No matter which gain setting you choose, the receiver adjusts displayed power levels
automatically.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
GAIN: (MAX) 4
Using System Functions 17-21
Service Functions
Automated Measurement Issues
If you are controlling the receiver using a computer, the Autoranging Fast CW mode (FASTAD),
can measure large signal variations. It does this using automatic IF gain control.
Peek and Poke
Caution
The POKE function is for qualied service personnel only. Users should
NEVER use this softkey. Using POKE is a GUARANTEED way to mess up
the receiver's operating system, unless it is done under the supervision of a
qualied Hewlett-Packard service representative. Misusing POKE can cause all
kinds of operating and measurement problems. Some problems may corrupt
measurement data without the operator being aware of it.
Service personnel should remember that valid POKEs can change from one
rmware version to the next.
If you have already \poked" some values, you can restore the integrity of the receiver by
reloading the HP 8530A operating system. To do this, insert the operating system disc and
press:
4SYSTEM5 MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 19 4=MARKER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Purpose of Peek and Poke
It is possible to examine memory locations in the receiver using the PEEK softkey, and change
their contents using POKE . These functions are for service personnel only.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
The SOFTWARE REVISION softkey displays the date and revision code of the operating system
rmware. Use this key to determine the rmware revision and to help in communications
about the rmware.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
17-22 Using System Functions
18
HP-IB Programming
This chapter explains how to automate measurement and data processing operations using the
receiver system with an external controller over the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB).
Only programming is covered: familiarity with manual operation of the receiver system, gained
through Basic Measurements in this volume, is assumed, and details of how each function
works are not given unless these are unique to programmed operation or are dierent for
manual and programmed operation.
What is in this Chapter
What You Can Do with Remote Programming.
HP-IB Command Information
Setting up the System
Transferring Data Out of the Receiver
Using the Data
Transferring Data Into the Receiver
Commonly-Used Queries
Local Operation
Programming Examples
General HP-IB Programming
BASIC program listing
What You Can Do with Remote Programming
An external computer can be connected to the receiver HP-IB interface to:
Change instrument settings or set up measurements.
Transfer data to or from dierent stages of internal data processing.
Control instruments connected to the System Bus through the receiver.
Use the receiver CRT as a graphics display.
HP-IB Programming 18-1
HP-IB Programming Basics
HP-IB Command Information
Order of Programming Commands
Use standard HP-IB protocol to program the system state using generally the same sequence as
you press receiver front panel hardkeys and softkeys. From the computer, the receiver system
is treated as a single instrument, just as the various instruments that make up the system are
controlled using the receiver front panel.
Syntax Requirements
Mnemonics may be written using all uppercase characters (as in STAR; which is preferred), or
using initial uppercase followed by lowercase (as in Star; which is allowed).
Either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used. The receiver generally accepts syntax
with extraneous blanks; however note that spaces are not allowed within the mnemonic name:
For example, entering the mnemonic name MARK 1 in a statement would cause a syntax error,
but MARK1 would not.
Use the semicolon (;) to separate instructions. Use the comma (,) to separate each value in a
series.
If no units terminator follows the value for frequency and time units, the system defaults
to receiver Basic Units (Hz, seconds). Other quantities (power, length) do not use a units
terminator.
Mnemonics
The program code for each function is a four-to-eight character mnemonic version of its label.
Many mnemonics must be followed by a numeric value in the basic measurement units. For
example, the STIMULUS 4START5 key is programmed using STAR. Programming mnemonics
for all receiver front panel controls and menu softkeys are given in the HP 8530A Keyword
Dictionary.
Strings of commands are written in logical sequences, separated by the semicolon, such as
OUTPUT 716;"FACTPRES;STAR 2E9;STOP 18E9;PARA1;LINP;MARK1 9E9;"
This series of command mnemonics executes a Factory Preset, selects a 2 GHz to 18 GHz sweep,
displays Parameter 1 using the polar format, and then positions measurement marker #1 to 9
GHz. The semicolon (;) is used to terminate each individual command. Notice that the values
are in units raised to a power of 10. MARK1 9E9 means to place marker #1 (MARK1) to 9 GHz (9 x
109 ) The E represents \raised to the power of."
Numeric entries and units
Numeric entries with no units terminator are equivalent to pressing the 4x15 key in the entry
area. Instead of using the \E" exponent system you can simply enter the actual units for
frequency, time, or voltage:
Example:
OUTPUT 716;"FACTPRES; STAR 2 GHz; STOP 18 GHz; PARA1; LINP; MARK1 9 GHz;"
Frequency
Time
Angle
Use GHz, MHz, and kHz. No terminator is required for Hz units.
Use fs, ps, ns, us, and ms. No terminator is required for seconds.
Angles should be entered into your program in degrees units. No terminator is
required.
18-2 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
\Next Menu" commands are unnecessary
Certain functions must be programmed in strict order, but it is not necessary to program a key
whose only function is to present a new menu. For example, you can set marker 2 to minimum
trace value with the sequence:
"OUTPUT 716;MARK2; MARKMINI;"
These are the only commands you need, even though the front panel key sequence is
4MARKER5
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER 2 MORE
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
MARKER TO MINIMUM
It is not necessary to program the 4MARKER5 hardkey or the MORE softkey (in fact, there are no
HP-IB mnemonics for these keys).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Timing Considerations
In general, timing considerations are handled automatically and data is not presented until it
is valid. However, depending upon the speed of the computer, the programmer may need to
intervene in order to make certain that the data is ready for use.
The SING; and NUMG; instructions always hold o execution of the instructions that follow
until the specied number of groups is complete. These statements are the primary means of
data synchronization. For example, in the sequence:
"CHAN1; TIMB; SING; OUTPDATA;"
The SING; instruction holds o execution of any following instruction, OUTPDATA; in this case,
until a sweep is complete and the data is ready.
In addition, the output instructions (OUTPMARK; and OUTPACTI;) are always held o until all
preceding instructions are complete. For example:
"LOG MAG; MARK1 9 GHz; OUTPMARK;"
In this sequence the marker data is not made available until the format change has been
executed and the marker has been positioned. Likewise, operations such as AUTO; MARKMAXI;
MARKMINI; and EQUA; are held o until all preceding instructions are complete.
However, for the array output statements (OUTPRAWn; OUTPDATA; OUTPFORM; OUTPMEMO; and
OUTPCALCn;) the data is always made available immediately without regard to operations
which may be in progress, except for SING; and NUMG;. For example, in the sequence "TIMB;
OUTPDATA;" the instruction TIMB performs a Time Domain conversion, this requires a certain
length of time. Execution of OUTPDATA; is not delayed until the conversion is complete. Thus,
the data that is output is probably (depending upon the speed of the computer) not the actual
converted data, but the data that existed before the domain conversion.
If it is not desired or necessary to take new data, and you change the channel or domain
immediately before requesting data output, use the WAIT; instruction. WAIT; is used at any
time you wish to make certain that the instruction immediately preceding WAIT; has completed
before the instruction which follows WAIT; begins execution. So, for the Time Domain
conversion example, use a sequence like the one below:
"TIMB; WAIT; OUTPDATA;"
This assures that the conversion is complete before the data is made ready for output.
HP-IB Programming 18-3
HP-IB Programming Basics
Overview of Computer-Controlled Measurements
In a typical computer-controlled measurement, you:
Set up the system for a particular measurement.
Perform an appropriate measurement calibration for each parameter to be measured.
Save the calibration in a cal set memory.
Install the test device, measure its response. The receiver will apply calibration osets to the
data.
Output the data from the desired array to the computer.
The Stimulus settings and Parameter used during the calibration must match those used during
the calibrated measurement. Cal sets remember the stimulus settings that were in eect when
the calibration was made. When you recall a cal set, it automatically changes the stimulus
settings accordingly. The cal set does not remember any non-stimulus settings.
Setting up the System
Connect the External Computer
Connect the computer to the main HP-IB connector. Connect RF sources to the System
Interconnect. You must not connect the same device to the HP-IB connection and System Bus
at the same time!
Address Settings
Instrument interconnections and the HP-IB System Bus address settings in the receiver system
are shown at the beginning of the HP 8530A Installation Guide.
The receiver's System Bus uses two-digit HP-IB addresses to control instruments and
peripherals connected to it. To change these addresses, use the menu under the receiver's front
panel 4LOCAL5 key (the same menu is available under 4SYSTEM5 HP-IB ADDRESSES ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Set Up the Measurement Using HP-IB Commands
Set up the measurement using HP-IB Commands, following the guidelines already covered on
previous pages. Here is an example setup command string:
OUTPUT 716;"FACTPRES;STAR 2E9;STOP 18E9;PARA1;LINM;MARK1 19E9;"
This command string:
Performs a Factory Preset (which selects Frequency Domain and Step Sweep mode)
Sets start frequency to 2 GHz
Sets stop frequency to 18 GHz
Selects Parameter 1
Selects Linear Magnitude Display Format
Puts a marker at 19 GHz
Here is another example
OUTPUT 716;"FACTPRES;ANGL;STAR -180;STOP 180;FREM 10E9;INCA 0.5;
TWOP;PARA1;POLM;PARA2;LOGM;EXTTPOIN;"
18-4 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
This command string:
Performs a Factory Preset
Selects Angle Domain
Sets start angle 0180
Sets stop angle 180
Sets frequency to 10 GHz
Sets increment angle to 0.5
Selects Two Parameter Display
Selects Parameter 1
Sets Parameter 1 to Polar Magnitude display format
Selects Parameter 2
Sets Parameter 2 to Log Magnitude Display Format
Other commands are mentioned in the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary If you do not know
the command for a specic function, look at the \Menu Structures" chapter at the end of the
Keyword Dictionary. This section has fold-out pages showing all menu maps, each softkey
function, and the HP-IB mnemonic for each softkey.
Transferring Data Out of the Receiver
Sending Data to the Computer
You can send measurement data to the computer in one the following ways:
You can output the current-active marker value.
You can output a complete data trace.
Before you attempt to transfer data to the computer, you need to know some information
about:
The dierent receiver data arrays you can transfer.
The instrument features that aect each data array.
Which of the ve data transfer protocols (formats) you should use.
What Types of Data Are Available from the HP 8530A?
After making a measurement, you can send raw, corrected, or formatted measurement data
to the computer. These arrays represent dierent stages of data processing, illustrated in
Figure 18-1.
As explained below, there are specic HP-IB commands used to transfer each type of data
array.
HP-IB Programming 18-5
HP-IB Programming Basics
Figure 18-1. Data Processing Stages in the Receiver
The following data arrays can be read by an external computer:
Raw Data
This data array contains the ratioed and averaged measurement data results. (Note: In Fast CW
mode, raw data is the only available format.)
To transfer the data from this array to the computer, use the HP-IB command OUTPRAWn, where
n is the desired parameter (1, 2, 3 or 4). Refer to the HP 8530A the Keyword Dictionary for
syntax and other information on this command, or about any of the commands mentioned
below. The raw array data is in real,imaginary pairs. Raw data can be output for any
parameter at any time (assuming the parameter is actually being measured). (How can you tell
if a parameter is actually being measured? Answer: If a parameter is displayed on the screen,
it is being measured by the receiver. If a parameter is not displayed, it is not measured. For
example, if you select a three-parameter display, Parameters 1, 2, and 3 are measured and
displayed, Parameter 4 is not measured.)
Corrected Data Array
In addition to ratioing and averaging, corrected data has been through:
Time Domain
Calibration
Table Delay, Electrical Delay
Magnitude Oset
Remember that these features must be ON to aect the data.
To transfer data from this array to the computer, use the HP-IB command OUTPDATA. We
learned earlier that you can select any Raw Data array for transfer. You cannot do this with
the Corrected Data array. Instead, OUTPDATA outputs the data for the active parameter only.
The corrected data array is in real,imaginary pairs.
18-6 HP-IB Programming
Formatted Data Array
HP-IB Programming Basics
This data has had all the data processing of the Raw and Corrected data arrays, plus smoothing
and trace math processing.
To transfer data from this array to the computer, use the HP-IB command OUTPFORM. This
command outputs the data for the active parameter only.
The data format that you get out of the formatted array depends on the Domain you are in
and the display mode you are using:
If in Frequency or Time Domain.
If you are in a Polar display mode, the formatted array will output real,imaginary data pairs.
If you are in a Cartesian magnitude display mode (4LOG MAG5 or 4LIN MAG5), a data pair will be
output. The rst value will be magnitude data. The second value output is always zero. The
units will match those you selected for the display (dB or linear).
If you are in Cartesian Phase display format (4PHASE5), a data pair will be output. The rst
value will be phase (in degrees). The second value output is always zero.
If in Angle Domain. A data pair will be output. The rst value will be magnitude data. The
second value output is always zero. The units will match those you selected for the display (dB
or linear).
Calibration
Coecients
Delay Table
Memory Data
These are the error correction coecients created during calibration
(also called a \Cal Set"). The error coecient arrays can be read
from, or sent to a computer, just like the arrays described above.
Refer to the descriptions for the OUTPCALC and INPUCALC commands
in the HP 8530A the Keyword Dictionary.
Each parameter has its own special array called a \delay table." The
table must be created using an external computer, then be sent to the
receiver. The receiver will use the table to modify measurement data.
The table contains real/imaginary data pairs in the internal Form 1
compressed format. A typical use is to modify frequency domain
data to synthesize a special window shape for use in time domain
RCS measurements. Refer to the descriptions for the OUTPDELA and
INPUDELA commands in the HP 8530A the Keyword Dictionary.
Valid data can be read from this array if data has been stored to
memory. Refer to the descriptions for the OUTPMEMO command in the
HP 8530A the Keyword Dictionary. (There is no command to send
data directly into a memory from the computer. However, you can
send data to the raw or corrected array, then save it to memory using
DATI)
A trace currently stored in one of the eight trace math memories may
be output by selecting the memory, using
DEFM1; to select Memory 1,
DEFM2; to select Memory 2,
DEFM3; to select Memory 3,
DEFM4; to select Memory 4,
DEFM5; to select Memory 5,
DEFM6; to select Memory 6,
DEFM7; to select Memory 7, or
DEFM8; to select Memory 8.
First select the memory using the DEFMn; instruction, turn on
memory by issuing a DISPMEMO; instruction, then use OUTPMEMO; to
HP-IB Programming 18-7
HP-IB Programming Basics
read currently selected memory. This transfers the memory data in
real/imaginary pairs.
Data Always Comes from the Active Channel
Notice that there are two entirely dierent, parallel, data processing paths shown in
Figure 18-1. One path is for Channel 1 and one is for Channel 2. Each channel has raw,
corrected, and formatted data arrays. Because the paths are separate and independent,
dierent features can be ON in Channel 1 and OFF in Channel 2. As you have seen, the HP-IB
transfer commands let you select the parameter (1, 2, 3 or 4) for data transfer. But, since each
channel has four independent parameters, which channel will be used during the transfer? The
data transfer always occurs on the Active Channel.
Available Data Transfer Formats
In remote programming you can choose one of four binary data formats, or an ASCII data
format. The formats are listed below:
The descriptions of each Form, below, is provided so you can decide which transfer format is
appropriate for your needs. Specic information on byte sizes and structure of these formats is
provided in \Preparing the Computer to Transmit or Receive Data", later in this chapter; and
also in the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary.
(HP-IB Command: FORM1). Form 1 is signicantly dierent from the other four
Form 1
transfer modes. The biggest dierence is that you can only obtain data from
the Raw Array when you use Form 1. The other four transfer modes let you
choose any internal data array for transfer.
Form 1 is the fastest transfer format available, and is almost exclusively used
in Fast CW and Fast IF Multiplexing modes. Refer to \FORM 1" in the HP
8530A Keyword Dictionary for a full description of this transfer format. Form
1 data can be converted to oating point data in the computer. Form 1 is the
only transfer format you can use for Fast CW or Fast IF Multiplexing modes.
(HP-IB Command: FORM2). 32-bit IEEE 728 oating point format. This format
Form 2
is not commonly used. It consists of a header, a two-byte number indicating
how many bytes follow, then the real and imaginary data pairs for each
stimulus point.
Form 3
(HP-IB Command: FORM3). This is the recommended format for use with HP
9000 Series 200/300 workstations. It consists of a header, a two-byte number
indicating how many bytes follow, then the real and imaginary data pairs for
each stimulus point. Form 3 follows the 64-bit IEEE 728 standard format.
(HP-IB Command: FORM4). This format is ASCII, and is not as commonly used
Form 4
as other formats. One of the reasons for this is because it is S L O W. However,
even with this limitation there are still two good circumstances in which Form
4 is useful:
When rst learning how to transfer data. Form 4 comes out in ASCII format
that is meaningful to a human being.
When using GP-IB cards of limited ability. Some third party GP-IB (IEEE
488-2) cards (for PC compatibles) requires ASCII format data.
(HP-IB Command: FORM5). This is the recommended format for use with IBM
Form 5
PCs and compatibles. This is a 32-bit DOS-compatible oating point format.
The HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary describes each form in detail. It also describes the
component pieces of information that accompanies the data.
18-8 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
This example shows the data transfer to the computer when FORM3 is selected:
ASSIGN @Rec to 716; FORMAT OFF
OUTPUT @Rec; "FORM3; SING; OUTPDATA"
ENTER @Rec Preamble, Size, Data(*)
Use NUMG; or SING; to synchronize data output with completion of data acquisition. The
variable Preamble accepts the #A block header, the Variable Size accepts the value representing
the total number of data bytes in the block, and Data(*) accepts the real/imaginary data pairs.
If Data(*) is dimensioned to less than the number of points currently selected, then the
ENTER operation does not terminate and you may issue another ENTER statement to read the
remaining data, or send another receiver command (such as ENTO;) to terminate the receiver
data output mode.
How Much Data Is Transferred?
When you measure data, the receiver stores data for the entire sweep in the Raw, Corrected,
and Formatted arrays. In addition, data for all displayed parameters are stored in these arrays.
For example, if you have selected 201 frequency points, each array contains 201 data points.
In an Angle Domain measurement from 0180 to +180 degrees, 361 data points will be in each
array (remember, you have to take the start angle 0180 into account, that is why there are
361 points, not 360 points). If more than one parameter is displayed, a complete set of data
exists for each one.
When you transfer Raw Data, the entire array for the selected parameter (1, 2, 3 or 4) is sent
to the computer.
When you transfer Corrected Data or Formatted Data, the entire array for the active
parameter is sent to the computer.
Preparing the Computer to Transmit or Receive Data
Setting up the I/O Path
If you are using HP BASIC, the ASSIGN command sets up the I/O path and its attributes.
FORM1 requires the FORMAT attribute to be turned OFF (FORMAT OFF) in the assign statement.
All other data formats (2 through 5) require the format attribute to be ON (FORMAT ON). type
of data Format (Form 1 through Form 5) transfers data in three portions, each of equal size
(mentioned below).
The entire data block to be transferred is composed of:
A \preamble" or \header" block, composed of the characters #A. All Forms have this header
block except Form 4, and Form 1 when in the FASTCW modes.
A size block. This block contains the size (in bits), of the preamble, the size block itself, and
each data block. All Forms have this header block, except Form 4.
One data block for each frequency or angular point in the measurement. Each block contains
one data pair. Form 4 contains only data blocks.
The size of the preamble, size block, and data blocks
In Form 1 each block is 16 bits long (2 bytes per data point).
In Form 2, each block is 32 bits long (8 bytes per data point).
In Form 3, each block is 64 bits long (16 bytes per data point).
HP-IB Programming 18-9
HP-IB Programming Basics
In Form 4, This is an ASCII format, which contains only data blocks, each of which being 24
bytes long. Each of these blocks contain a data pair, in which the two numbers is separated by
a comma. Each block is separated by a line feed.
Form 5, each block is 32 bits long (8 bytes per data point).
When the data transfer begins, HP BASIC automatically reads the size information in the Size
Block, and transfers the data accordingly. Other languages require the user to dene these
block sizes ahead of time, usually when the I/O path is dened.
Setting Up Variables
Unless you are using Form 4, you must set up an integer variable for the preamble and the Size
Block. Dimension an array of appropriate size for the data. Form 4 data requires a string array.
Dynamic Array Allocation
Setting up xed array sizes is all you may need in simple programs. However, large
measurement programs may need to call subroutines that can intelligently determine the size of
the required data array. Fortunately, you can write your program so it reads the Size Block and
then dynamically allocates the required data array storage, as in this sequence:
ENTER Rec_Data;Preamble, Size
N=Size/16 ! 16 bytes per data point using Form 3
REDIM Data(1:N, 1:2)
OUTPUT Rec;"FORM3;OUTPDATA;"
ENTER Rec_Data; Data(*)
You can do the same thing in Frequency Domain by making the number of points the active
function then reading the value, as in this sequence:
OUTPUT Rec; "POIN; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER Rec_Data; Points
REDIM Data(1:Points, 1:2)
OUTPUT Rec;"FORM3;OUTPDATA;"
ENTER Rec_Data; Preamble, Size, Data(*)
A similar method could be used for Angle Domain. In this case you can calculate the number
of data points by reading the start angle, stop angle, and increment angle. You must make each
of these the active function before reading the value.
Note that all transfers use standard IEEE 728 block transfer formats with EOI asserted with
the last byte of data.
Performing the Actual Transfer
Now that you know which data array and transfer format to use, and have dimensioned
appropriate computer variables and an array, you are ready to perform the actual data transfer.
Example:
The following HP BASIC example performs a data transfer, and demonstrates many
commonly-needed tasks, including:
Measurement setup
Data acquisition
Conversion of real and imaginary data into magnitude and phase format
Printout of the values for each point
This is a complete example. It dimensions all needed variables, shows all HP-IB bus
\maintenance" commands, and so on. If you are not using HP BASIC you will have to write the
18-10 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
necessary lines of code for I/O setup. HP BASIC has advanced I/O features, and only requires
the ASSIGN command for this.
The sample measurement uses 201 points of data. All loop counters and arrays are written to
handle 201 points. Step sweep mode is used, with a single sweep. The example uses Form 3
transfer, but is applicable to Form 2 or Form 5 by changing \FORM3;" in line 210 of the code.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
OPTION BASE 0
DIM Data(200,1)
DIM Mag(200),Phase(200)
INTEGER Preamble,Size
ASSIGN @Rec TO 716
!
!
!Set loop and array counting at the number 0
!Dimension a 201 x 2 array to hold transferred data.
!Dimension two 1-dimensional arrays to hold the
!final magnitude and phase values for each point.
!Define integer variables for the preamble and
!size blocks.
!This sets up the I/O path for the receiver, and
!defines the HP-IB address used to talk to it.
ASSIGN @Rec_data2 TO 716;FORMAT OFF!
CLEAR 716
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
DEG
!
!Tells the receiver to do a User Preset.
!HP BASIC command to express angles in degrees
!rather than radians.
!
!The next line selects 201 points, Parameter 1, Log Magnitude display
!Log Format, Single Sweep, Form 3:
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"POIN201;PARA1;LOGM;SING;FORM3;"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPDATA;" !Tells the receiver to output the entire
!Calibrated Array (201 points)
!
ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)!Tells the computer to store:
!the Preamble in the "Preamble" variable
!the Size block in the "Size" variable
!All data in the "Data" array
!
!Start a for/next loop (loops 201 times)
FOR N=0 TO 200
!These two lines grab the first data point out
Real=Data(N,0)
!of the array (starts with the start freq. point)
Imag=Data(N,1)
!
!Convert one point of data from real,imaginary to magnitude,phase
!
Mag(N)=SQR(Real^2+Imag^2)
!Determine Magnitude value
IF Imag=0 AND Real<0 THEN
!Determine Phase value
Phase(N)=-180
ELSE
Phase(N)=2*ATN(Imag/(Real+Mag(N)))
END IF
!
!Mag(N) and Phase(N) are 1-dimensional arrays that will hold the new
!magnitude and phase data.
!
!
!The following two lines simply print the real, imaginary, Magnitude and
!Phase values for the first point and every 20th point.
!
IF N=0 OR N/20=INT(N/20) THEN
PRINT "Point:";N+1;TAB(13);"Real:";Real;TAB(36);" Imag:";Imag
PRINT "Point:";N+1;TAB(13);" Mag: ";Mag(N);TAB(36);"Phase: ";Phase(N)
END IF
!
NEXT N
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"Mark1;"
!Place receiver back in local mode
LOCAL 716
END
HP-IB Programming 18-11
HP-IB Programming Basics
Using the Data
As explained earlier, the HP 8530A outputs data in two basic formats:
Form 1 format
Real,Imaginary format.
Use the following information to process the data into usable formats.
Preprocessing Form 1 Data
Example 8 converts Form 1 Data into to real,imaginary pairs, which are then converted into
linear magnitude, log magnitude and phase data.
Using Real,Imaginary Format for Vector Math
Real and imaginary data in its existing form is useful for vector math. Once you have done any
mathematical processing of the data you can convert it into magnitude and phase information
as explained below.
Converting Real,Imaginary Data to Magnitude and Phase Data
As explained earlier in this chapter, data is often in real,imaginary data pairs. You can perform
vector math on this data directly, or you can convert it into magnitude and phase information
(refer to lines 71 through 81 in the programming example shown in \Performing the Actual
Transfer").
18-12 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
Transferring Data Into the Receiver
Raw, Corrected, Formatted Arrays
Trace data should be loaded into receiver memory while in Hold mode to avoid overwriting
the loaded data with newly acquired data. When Hold is selected, completion of a data input
operation initiates a data processing cycle in which the displayed trace is updated to reect the
new data. The following mnemonics prepare the receiver to transfer data pairs at the receiver
HP-IB to the specied array for the currently selected channel:
INPUFORM; load into selected channel Formatted data array,
INPUDATA; load into selected channel Corrected data array,
INPURAW1; load into selected channel Param 1 Raw data array,
INPURAW2; load into selected channel Param 2 Raw data array,
INPURAW3; load into selected channel Param 3 Raw data array, and
INPURAW4; load into selected channel Param 4 Raw data array,
INPUDATA; and INPURAWn; expect data in real,imaginary pairs regardless of the currently
selected display format.
Each display Parameter (1 through 4) has its own raw array, corrected array and formatted
array. In addition, each channel has an independent set of (four) parameters, each with their
own raw, corrected, and formatted arrays.
When you perform an INPUDATA; command, the data is placed in the corrected array for the
active parameter on the active channel. INPUFORM; works the same way.
With raw data, there is a dierent HP-IB command for each raw data array (INPURAW1;
through INPURAW4;). When you issue an INPURAW3; command, data is sent to the Parameter 3
raw data array in the active channel.
INPUFORM; requires you to supply data in exactly the same format as the receiver would
use during an OUTPFORM operation. (As explained earlier, when you output data from the
Formatted Array, the exact form of the data depends on the Domain the receiver is in, and
the selected display format. Depending on these conditions, the receiver outputs data in a
specic way. This is explained in \Formatted Data Array," earlier in this chapter. When you
use INPUFORM; you must make sure you send the data to the receiver in the same way the
receiver would use if it were sending the data to the computer.)
Note
You cannot send data to an array if that parameter is not displayed on the
screen. When a parameter is shown on the screen, it is essentially turned ON.
If a parameter is not on the screen, it is OFF. Usually, you cannot perform
functions (of any kind) on a parameter that is not currently shown on the
screen. This limitation applies to sending data to the various arrays.
For example, to send data to the corrected array of Parameter 4, one of the
following must be true:
SINGLE PARAMETER display mode is selected, and Parameter 4 is the selected
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
parameter.
FOUR PARAMETER display mode is selected, and Parameter 4 must be the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
active parameter.
HP-IB Programming 18-13
HP-IB Programming Basics
Trace Memories
First, use one the following commands to select the trace memory to be loaded:
DEFM1; select Memory 1,
DEFM2; select Memory 2,
DEFM3; select Memory 3,
DEFM4; select Memory 4,
DEFM5; select Memory 5,
DEFM6; select Memory 6,
DEFM7; select Memory 7, or
DEFM8; select Memory 8,
Next, load data into the Corrected data array, using:
"INPUDATA;"
Finally, store the data into the selected memory, using:
"DATI;"
The data format for these transfers is selected by the FORM1, FORM2, FORM3, FORM4 and FORM5
mnemonics as for the OUTP instructions. One of the FORMn instructions should precede each
transfer.
This example shows the data transfer from the computer to receiver Corrected Data array for
the currently selected channel using FORM3.
OUTPUT Rec; "HOLD; FORM3; INPUDATA;"
OUTPUT Rec; Preamble, Size, Data(*)
HOLD prevents overwriting the data just input with data from the next group of sweeps. The
variable Preamble holds the #A block header, the Variable Size holds the value representing the
total number of data bytes in the block, and Data(*) holds the real/imaginary data pairs.
the receiver accepts data until the specied number of bytes is received, or EOI is detected,
then terminates the listen mode. If the number of data bytes is not equal to the value of the
Variable Size, the message BLOCK INPUT ERROR is displayed. If the value of the Variable Size
does not correspond to the current number of points selected, then the message BLOCK INPUT
LENGTH ERROR is displayed. If more than the internally allocated number of bytes are input,
these bytes are treated like regular commands, which cause a syntax error. If less than the
specied number of bytes are input without an EOI, you may continue with another OUTPUT
statement.
Form 4 Input
When using FORM4, always suppress the CR/LF which would normally terminate the OUTPUT
statement that sends the INPU instruction as follows.
OUTPUT Rec; "HOLD; FORM4; INPUDATA;";
OUTPUT Rec; Data(*)''
The semicolon following the last quote mark is used in BASIC to suppress the normal CR/LF
sent at the end of the statement. Failure to suppress this character results in the receiver
accepting the CR/LF as the rst data byte.
18-14 HP-IB Programming
HP-IB Programming Basics
Commonly-Used Queries
Marker Value
The marker value is output as two ASCII numbers in the basic units for the selected display
format. Use two real variables, for example,
Mag,Phase
If the marker value consists of a single value, as when LOG MAG (LOGM;) or PHASE (PHAS;) is
selected, then the rst number becomes the desired value (magnitude or phase) and the second
value is set to zero.
Active Function Value
The current value of the active function is read as a single ASCII number in the basic units for
the quantity. The following sequence turns on marker 2, moves the marker to the maximum
value on the trace. Then OUTPACTI readies the receiver to output the current active function,
which is the stimulus value at the marker position in this sequence.
"MARK2; MARKMAXI; OUTPACTI;"
To accept the data, use a single real variable. For example:
Freq
Query System State
For instrument state settings that cannot be made the active function, use the Query
instructions function. For example:
DOMA?
This returns the current domain selection as an ASCII string enclosed as quotes, for example
"FREQUENCY" if the Frequency Domain is currently selected.
System Status
Important system status information is available by reading a two-byte status word. For
example,
"OUTPSTAT;"
This sets up the receiver to output the status value. You can then read one or two ASCII
numbers.
The following instruction outputs a single ASCII message number and, if desired, the text of
any System Message appearing on the display.
"OUTPERRO;"
A change in the status bytes can be set to generate the SRQ on specic events using the SRQM
instruction.
Where to Find Other Query Commands
Refer to the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary, near the end of Chapter 3, \Programming Codes."
HP-IB Programming 18-15
HP-IB Programming Basics
Local Operation
Return the receiver to local control by pressing the front panel 4LOCAL5 key or by issuing the
HP-IB command GTL 716 or GTL 7 (LOCAL 716 or LOCAL 7 using HP Series 200/300 BASIC
language).
Program Debugging Aids
To further assist in program development, statements DEBUON; (Debug On) and DEBUOFF;
(Debug O) are used to control a receiver debug mode in which the instruction currently being
executed is displayed in the Title area of the receiver display.
18-16 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Programming Examples
A sample program is supplied with your receiver, on the HP 8530A Software Toolkit Disc. The
name of the program is: 8530_PROGX
The program contains many example routines, which show how to perform various
programming tasks. The text on the following pages describe each of these examples.
The program requires BASIC 5.0 or higher with the following binaries: IO, MAT, TRANS, and
COMPLEX.
The disc also contains three measurement data les that are accessed by some of the
programming example routines.
ANG360
ANG180_SUM
ANG180_DEL
These are data les containing angle domain measurement data.
Example 1: Input Syntax Familiarization
This example can help you become familiar with the receiver HP-IB instructions. The rst
part of this example sends commands (entered by the user) to the receiver. The second part
sends query or output commands to the receiver and prints the response. When entering HP-IB
commands it is not necessary to use quotation marks or include the nal `;'. Syntax errors are
detected and cleared.
Refer to the \Example Program Listings" near the end of this chapter for the Example 1
program that is executable using HP BASIC.
! Start: !
INPUT "Type 8530 command."; String$
OUTPUT Rec; String$
GOTO Start
The Input statement displays a message, then waits for an input (type the string and then press
computer Return or ENTER). Using a simple program like this one, you can input commands
one at a time and observe the receiver response. At rst, try instructions such as:
"STAR 10 GHz"
Refer to the List Programming Codes in the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary to see the syntax
requirements for each programmable function.
Enter a sequence of instructions by separating each instruction with a semicolon (;), as follows:
"STAR 2 GHz; STOP 10 GHz; CHAN2; LINP"
The receiver instruction DEBUON causes all receiver instructions to be displayed in the Title area
of the receiver display. The last 30 characters in the instruction queue are displayed, with the
most recently received instruction at the left of the area, pushing instructions higher on the
queue o of the area to the right. This means that the currently executing command may not
be visible if the queue is over 30 characters in length. Use the receiver instruction DEBUOFF to
disable display of the command queue.
If the receiver does not recognize a mnemonic, or cannot execute it in the correct sequence,
then HP-IB activity stops and the instruction in error is shown in the Title area of the receiver
display with an upward pointing arrow at the location of the error. You must press 4LOCAL5,
then continue operation, or issue an HP-IB DCL or SDC (the example program does this for you).
HP-IB Programming 18-17
Programming Examples
Commands are executed in the sequence in which they are received by the receiver. When a
command is received, the syntax is checked, stored in the command queue, then executed.
Some commands, such as SING, free the processor for other tasks during the time that they
are executing. If time becomes available while such a command is executing, the process
of reading a command, syntax checking, storage in the command queue, and sometimes
overlapping execution continues until up to eight commands are stored for pending execution.
The second part of this example sends HP 8530A instructions that prompt a response from the
receiver. These are the query commands and the OUTPxxxx; commands. Refer the HP 8530A
Keyword Dictionary for more information.
OUTPUT 716;"STAR; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER 716; Freq
PRINT Freq
This will print the current value for Start Frequency.
Example 2: Active Function Output
This example executes a User Preset, then reads and prints the current values for seven
active functions. The value for any function that can be made the active function can be read
this way. Functions or settings that do not have an active function may be read using query
commands. (Refer to the end of Chapter 3 of the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary for a list
query commands.)
The value of the current active function is output as a single ASCII value in the basic units of
the function. For example:
OUTPUT Rec;"MARK1;OUTPACTI;"
ENTER Rec_data;Freq
When executed with a marker as the active function, the sequence (above) returns the
frequency (in Hertz) at the marker position.
The sequence AVERON; OUTPACTI; outputs the currently selected averaging factor. The
sequence ELED; OUTPACTI; returns the currently selected Electrical Delay value in seconds.
The title and various other user-dened labels can also be read over the HP-IB by making it the
active function, then reading the characters into a string variable. For example:
OUTPUT Rec;"TITL; OUTPTITL;"
ENTER Rec_data; String$
This returns the current title as the active function. Note that the title, calibration kit label,
standard class label, standard label, and the user parameter label are enclosed in quotation
marks. The standard class assignments list does not include the quotation marks.
Example 3: Marker Data Output
This example prints the x and y axis values of a marker in any selected domain or format. A
single sweep with averaging (factor of 4) is taken before reading the marker. Then, the display
format is queried and appropriate units are printed for the y axis value. Next, the x axis value
is read and the selected domain is queried and appropriate units are printed for the x axis.
If the system is currently operating in either the HOLD or the CONTINUAL mode (see
STIMULUS menu), then the data is output immediately; if SINGLE, or NUMBER OF GROUPS
has been selected, then the data output operation waits until the specied number of sweeps
is complete. For example, the following sequence selects the linear magnitude polar display,
turns on averaging, and commands 17 groups of sweeps. When complete, marker 1 is turned
18-18 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
on, moved to the maximum trace value, then the marker value is assigned to the variables Mag
and Phase:
OUTPUT Rec;"LINP; AVERON 16;"
OUTPUT Rec;"NUMG 17; MARK1; MARKMAXI; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER Rec_Data;Mag,Phase
The OUTPMARK; statement always transfers two values in standard ASCII format. As shown
in Table 18-1, the values depend upon the currently selected display format. Two values are
output in every display format, but for Cartesian displays the second value is zero.
Table 18-1. Marker Units
FORMAT
MARKER Basic Units
Frequency Domain:
Time Domain:
LOG MAG
dB
LIN MAG
(unitless) (reection)
(unitless) (transmission)
PHASE
degrees ( )
POLAR MAG
dB; 6 ' (reection)
dB; 6 (transmission)
SWR
(unitless)
LIN on POLAR
6 ' (reection)
6 (transmission)
REAL
x (unitless)
IMAGINARY
jy (unitless)
Angle Domain
LOG MAG
dB
LIN MAG
(unitless) (reection)
(unitless) (transmission)
PHASE
degrees ( )
POLAR MAG
dB; 6 (reection)
dB; 6 (transmission)
SWR
(unitless)
LIN on POLAR
6 (reection)
6 (transmission)
REAL
x (unitless)
IMAGINARY
jy (unitless)
Data taken in the step sweep mode requires only one group of sweeps (NUMG 1; or SING;)
because each data point is averaged before the next point is measured.
To move the marker to a specic stimulus value, include a numeric value in the instruction.
The following sequence moves marker 1 to the data point closest to 9.123456789 GHz, then
transfers the marker value:
OUTPUT Rec;"MARK1 9.123456789 GHz; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER Rec_data;Mag,Phase
HP-IB Programming 18-19
Programming Examples
Example 4: Marker Operation
This example nds the peak-to-peak range of a trace, measures the -3 dB bandwidth of an
antenna pattern, and nds the peak of the lobes. The antenna pattern data is loaded by the
subroutine Draw 360 from a data le (included on the software toolkit disc). This pattern data
is normalized to 0 dB and then \marker searches" are used to determine the bandwidth and
lobe peaks.
The marker functions are programmed in the same way as you would press the keys on the
front panel. For example:
OUTPUT Rec;"MARK2; MARKMAXI; DELR2; MARK1; MARKMINI; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER Rec_data;Mag,Phase
OUTPUT Rec;"OUTPACTI"
ENTER Rec_data;Freq
OUTPUT Rec;"DELO; MARKOFF"
This sequence moves marker 2 to the maximum trace value, selects the delta marker mode
with marker 2 as the reference marker, moves marker 1 to the maximum trace value, then
outputs the dierence between marker 2 and marker 1. Then the delta mode is turned o, and
the markers are turned o.
To read marker values in dual-channel display modes, rst select the channel, as follows:
OUTPUT Rec;"MARK1 3.5 GHz;"
OUTPUT Rec;"CHAN1; SING; AUTO; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER Rec_data;Mag,Phase
OUTPUT Rec;"CHAN2; SING; AUTO; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER Rec_data;Mag,Phase
The SING instruction (take single group of sweeps) or the NUMG instruction following channel
selection, parameter change, or domain change, ensures that the trace has been updated and
the data is ready to be read. After SING or NUMG the receiver is placed in the HOLD mode. It is
generally best to select the hold mode for data output. Use the CONT (CONTINUAL) instruction
to restart the sweep.
When the parameter selection is changed, it is necessary to take at least one group of sweeps
to assure current data.
Note that if the system is in Hold mode, the parameter is changed, and raw data is not
available, then the raw data array is initialized to the equivalent of measured data equal to 0,0
at every data point. If LOG MAG is selected, the marker magnitude value is approximately
0857 dB. The raw data array and trace are updated at the completion of the next group of
sweeps.
Example 5: Display Modes
Receiver display modes (single channel, dual channel and multiple parameter) are
demonstrated in split and overlay display formats. Also, marker list functions 1 marker/ and 5
markers are shown with a four parameter display.
18-20 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Example 6: Using =MARKER
Use of the = Marker (\EQUA;") function is demonstrated for reference value, stimulus settings,
and oset values. This may be very useful when combined with marker searches.
Use of the 4=MARKER5 (EQUA;) function to position the trace on the display is shown in the
following example.
OUTPUT Rec;"CHAN2; LOGM; MARK1; MARKMAXI; REFV; EQUA;"
This sequence selects channel 2, selects the LOG MAG display, moves the marker to the
maximum point on the trace, then assigns the current marker value to the REF VALUE.
In all EQUA; applications, the current marker value becomes the value of the current active
function. Valid functions for use with EQUA; are start, stop, center, span, reference value,
electrical delay, phase oset, and the cuto frequency for waveguide delay.
Example 7: Trace Data Output and Input
In this example, the receiver measures a single sweep, then outputs a 201 point Corrected Data
array using FORM 3. After this, the array of real and imaginary pairs is written back to the
receiver. Before writing the data, the receiver is put in Hold mode (this prevents the receiver
from acquiring new data and over-writing the data being written by the program). The current
data is rst zeroed (by re-setting the number of points while in Hold mode). This forces the
data array to be re-allocated and be initially loaded with zeros (-857 dB). Then the data is
written.
Example 8: FORM 1 Data Conversion
After taking a single sweep, the receiver outputs the current data array using FORM 1 output
format. This is the fastest form for data transfer. The FORM 1 data is then converted to
real,imaginary pairs, which are then converted to linear magnitude, log magnitude and phase
data.
Example 9: Using the Disc Drive
The rst part of this example stores (to disc) and then loads (from disc) the instrument state,
Formatted and Raw data arrays, display memory, and cal kit les. The le transfer can be done
using the receiver's internal drive, or a compatible external drive connected to the receiver's
System Bus. The program prompts the user to choose which drive to use (internal or external).
In the second part of the example program, the computer reads and displays the disc les
(which were stored in part 1 of the program). This is done to show the CITIle format. A disc
drive must be connected to the computer during this part of the example program.
The receiver disc drive is very useful during large tests because it provides capacity to store
instrument states, cal sets, calibration kits, trace data, and other types of data. Refer to the
Disc menu in Chapter 15 for a complete list of data types. The menu maps in the keyword
dictionary show all disc functions and HP-IB commands.
Using the Internal Disc
The following example shows how to store les using the built-in disc drive.
Store Instrument State 1 to a le named \IS INST1"
OUTPUT Rec;"STOR; INSS1; DISF ""INST1"";"
Notice that you do not have to include the prex (IS ). The receiver does this automatically.
HP-IB Programming 18-21
Programming Examples
Load the receiver memory from the disc as follows:
OUTPUT Rec;"HOLD;"
OUTPUT Rec;"CHAN1; LOAD; DATAFORM; 2,9 DISF ""CHAN1"";"
OUTPUT Rec;"CHAN2; LOAD; DATAFORM; 3,10 DISF ""CHAN2"";"
The example above loads the Formatted Data les \FD CHAN1" and \FD CHAN2".
If HOLD is not programmed, the formatted data traces are overwritten by new data during the
next sweep.
Note that in order to use DATAFORM, DATARAW, or DATADATA, the channel to which the data
applies must be selected. When loaded, the trace is automatically updated. DATARAW stores
information from the Raw data array for the Active Parameter on the Active Channel.
However, there is an exception to this rule: If four parameter display is turned on, DATARAW
stores all four raw data arrays for the selected channel.
To load a memory trace, the memory display must be o (DISPDATA;). Correction must be o
(CORROFF;) before cal sets can be loaded into receiver memory from disc.
Note that the DISF command is used for all disc operations (store, load, replace, delete). The
le name must be enclosed in quotation marks, and BASIC usually requires that in order to
send the quote symbol that it be doubled.
File Name Prexes
If you examine the directory following this operation, notice that the le name is given as
FD FILE1. The three character lename prex is automatically included in the directory
listing: it is the way in which the receiver operating system keeps track of the data type.
This lename prex is never used in the lename you select for store, load, or delete disc le
operations. However, if the disc is to be read by the external computer directly, the prex is
considered part of the lename and must be used. Table 15-3 shows all le name prexes used
by the receiver.
Printing Your Own Messages on the Receiver Display
Messages of up to 50 characters are displayed using
"TITL" "GOOD MORNING" ";"
This causes the message GOOD MORNING to appear in the Title area of the receiver display. (The
quotation marks are required and BASIC usually requires that in order to send quotation marks,
double marks must be used.)
Text and graphics information can be written to the display using a special area of receiver
memory, using an internal HP-GL subset or the standard plotting language implemented by the
computer.
Example 10: Plots Using Copy
This example requires an XY plotter be connected to the receiver (System Bus or RS-232 port)
and be properly addressed. Refer to Chapter 16 for instructions. The program measures a
single sweep with autoscaling, then plots each parameter.
Measurement results are output to a plotter connected to the receiver System Bus using a
sequence of commands to specify the quadrant on the paper, the pen number, and the data to
be plotted. The following sequence plots the four parameters.
INPUT "Load Paper, then CONTINUE"
OUTPUT Rec;"PARA1; SING; LEFU; PLOTALL"
OUTPUT Rec;"PARA2; SING; LEFL; PLOTALL"
18-22 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
OUTPUT Rec;"PARA3; SING; RIGU; PLOTALL"
OUTPUT Rec:"PARA4; SING: RIGL: PLOTALL"
PLOTALL causes the entire screen, except the Menu, to be plotted. Other commands to specify
the part of the screen to be plotted and the pen color may be used.
Example 11: Trace List to Printer
This example requires a printer to be connected to the receiver (System Bus or RS-232 port)
and be properly addressed. Refer to Chapter 16 for instructions. The program prints a tabular
listing of the displayed trace. The data is printed in the displayed format (linear polar). A skip
factor of 7 is used, so every seventh data point is printed.
The printer connected to the System Bus may be used in the same way as in manual operation.
Example 12: Print/Plot to Receiver System Bus (using
pass-through mode)
This example requires a properly installed printer and plotter connected to the receiver's
System Bus. This example will not work with printers or plotters connected to the receiver's
RS-232 ports. In this program example, the computer sends commands through the receiver
to a printer and plotter connected to the receiver's System Bus (pass through mode). The
computer sends a title to the printer, and a label to the plotter.
General Input/Output
The receiver can pass computer commands through to devices on the System Bus. In addition,
the receiver can allow data to ow back from the device, direct to the computer.
Passing Commands Through the Receiver Devices on the System Bus
The receiver listens to commands sent to either of two addresses:
8530 Address The \8530 Address" (specied under 4LOCAL5 ADDRESS of 8530 ) is the address
of the 8530 receiver itself. Any commands sent to this address will cause the
HP 8530 to perform the function.
System Bus
The \system bus" address (specied under 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM BUS ) is the address
Address
of the System Bus. Commands sent to this address will be passed to a specied
device on the System Bus.
How to send pass through commands. First, you must tell the receiver which device you
want to access directly. To do this, send the command:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
ADDRPASS nn
Where nn is the System Bus address of the desired device.
Note
The default address for the System Bus \Pass Through" is 717. Most positioner
controllers are set to this address. If you have a positioner controller, and it is
set to address 717, either change the address of the positioner controller, or
change the System Bus address:
Press 4LOCAL5 SYSTEM BUS nn 4x15, where nn is the desired address (for
example, entering 21 will place the system bus at HP-IB address 721.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Why are some addresses three-digit numbers, while others are two-digit
numbers?
HP-IB Programming 18-23
Programming Examples
When you tell the computer to control an HP-IB device, you must use a three
digit address. The rst number (usually 7) selects the HP-IB bus, and is called
the \HP-IB bus select code." The last two digits are the address of a specic
instrument on the bus. For example, when you program the computer to send
the \PLOP" command to address 705, the following happens:
1. The \7" tells the computer to select the HP-IB bus I/O card which is set to
bus select code 7. (The HP-IB bus uses a \bus select code" because there can
be more than one HP-IB bus in a computer system. The select code allows
you to access multiple HP-IB busses independently.
2. The computer sends the command \PLOP", along with the two-digit
instrument address number (05).
3. All instruments on the bus see the \PLOP" command. But only the device
set to address 05 with accept the command and perform it.
(In this example, a plotter set to address 05 would perform the PLOP
command, which plots a list of receiver operating parameter values.)
Devices on the receiver's System Bus only use a two-digit address. A \bus
select code" is not needed because the receiver is designed with only one
System Bus. When you enter the addresses of system bus devices (in the HP
8530A address menu), only two digits are required.
How pass through works. Assume for now that the System Bus address (under 4LOCAL5
SYSTEM BUS ) is still set to 17. Also assume that you have selected a printer of the System Bus
with the ADDRPASS 01; command.
Under these conditions, the receiver will accept any command sent to address 717. When such
a command is received, the analyzer passes it to the system bus, to the device at address 01.
Refer to Figure 18-2.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Figure 18-2. Pass Through Flow
Here is an example program:
OUTPUT Rec;"ADDRPASS 01;" ! Select address 01 for pass through commands OUTPUT
Rec_systbus; CHR"12" ! Send a form feed command to the printer
18-24 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Remember, \Rec systbus;" and \Rec systbusdata" represent the address of the system bus. You
must set this up using a statement such as:
"ASSIGN @Rec_systbus TO 717"
If the device is to output ASCII data, use:
ENTER Rec_systbusdata; String$
Where String$ is dimensioned to accept the ASCII string sent from the device. Note that if
the device on the System Bus does not terminate its output with the CR/LF, then it is the
responsibility of the programmer to terminate the ENTER operation.
The specied pass-thru address remains in eect until changed by the programmer. Instructions
and data may be sent to the receiver HP-IB address or to the receiver System Bus address in
any sequence. When the receiver System Bus is addressed, an automatic System Bus `Local' is
issued which halts all System Bus activity and places the receiver in Hold. When the receiver
HP-IB is addressed following a pass thru, an automatic System Bus `Remote' is issued which
returns control of the System Bus to the receiver.
The addressed device cannot handshake to the computer or respond to HP-IB Universal or
Addressed commands via the System Bus.
Pass-Thru of Text to a Printer
You may print directly to the printer using the Pass-Thru mode as follows.
OUTPUT Rec;"ADDRPASS 01;" ! Printer's System Bus address is 01
PRINTER IS 717 ! (Rec_systbus)
PRINT "MEASUREMENT NUMBER 1"
This example begins with the receiver instruction ADDRPASS 01 that sets the state in which
data addressed to 717 (the 8530 System Bus address) is passed-thru to the device at address
01 on the 8530 System Bus. Next, a computer-specic command, HP 9000 Series 200/300
in this example, species the hardcopy device as the printer at address 717. Finally, the
computer-specic hardcopy output statement outputs the message. The string is accepted at
the receiver System Bus address 717 and passed-thru to the printer.
Output to Plotter
It is generally not recommended that HP-GL commands be passed through directly to the
plotter on the receiver System Bus because the typical drivers used for this purpose require
communication with the computer during the operation, a capability not handled by receiver
Pass-Thru. You can, however, plot graphics and text to the receiver User display as described
later in this section, then plot the receiver display to the plotter. Examples of printing or
plotting using pass-thru are given in the paragraphs describing user display graphics later in
this chapter.
User Display Graphics
Example 13: Plot User Graphics HP-GL
User Display functions are demonstrated by using HP-GL commands to draw a series of boxes.
The boxes have labels that correspond to areas of the measurement display, which are used by
various display formats. The User Display is then:
Stored to the internal disc.
Erased
Reloaded from the disc.
HP-IB Programming 18-25
Programming Examples
Example 14: Plot to User Display Using BASIC HP-GL
This example draws a simple graphic on the receiver User display using HP BASIC graphics
instructions. Optionally the graphic may be sent to a plotter on the receiver system bus.
Vector diagrams and Text can be written to a reserved area of the receiver display memory via
the receiver System Bus using either an HP-GL subset internal to the receiver, or the standard
computer language graphics commands. This reserved graphics area is output using PLOTALL;
and may be recorded and subsequently reloaded into user display memory using the Disc
command USED;.
Vector Diagrams
A vector diagram consists of a PA, Plot Absolute, display instruction followed by any number of
x,y integer pairs.
OUTPUT Rec;"ADDRPASS 31"
OUTPUT Rec_systbus;"CS; PU"
OUTPUT Rec_systbus;"PA 128,384; PD; PA 3328,384, 3328,3584,
128,3584 128,384"
ADDRPASS 31 sets up the Pass-Thru mode in which data sent to the 8530 System Bus address,
717, is routed to the User Display area of the receiver display memory. The CS instruction
clears the screen. The PU instruction lifts the pen, causing the following PA instruction to draw
a blank vector. The PD, Pen Down, causes the following PA instruction to draw a visible line.
The PA, Plot Absolute, instruction is followed by the coordinates for the other three corners of
the box.
The plotting area of the receiver display is:
x = 0 to 5377, y = 0 to 4095
Figure 18-3 shows internal scaling for PA vector diagrams.
Figure 18-3. PA Vector Scaling
The PR, Plot Relative, instruction moves the pen from its present position to the new position
x,y units away.
OUTPUT Rec;"ADDRPASS 31"
OUTPUT Rec_systbus;"CS; PU"
OUTPUT Rec_systbus;"PA 128,384; PD; PR 3200,0, 0,3200,
18-26 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
03200,0,
0,03200"
This outlines the Menu labels area.
Text
Position standard ASCII text on the screen by addressing the text location with a PA or PR
vector. Text between the LB mnemonic and the end of text character, CTRL C, is displayed
beginning at the character cell position of the current vector. Figure 18-4 shows the 64 by
128 element character cell which encloses the 48 by 64 element character image area. The LB
command is shown in the \PLOT TO PLOTTER ON 8510 SYSTEM BUS" example in the Program
Examples section (at the end of this chapter).
Select Pen Colors
Figure 18-4. Text Character Cell
The color selected for the current operation is specied using the SPn; command, where n =
1 to 16. The color is assigned to the pen in the same order as the colors appear in the set pen
numbers menu under the dene plot menu of the 4COPY5 hardkey.
Using the Internal Disc to Store the User Display
By storing the User Display on the receiver disc drive, the vector diagrams and text can be
recalled for display even if the computer is disconnected from the receiver. For example:
OUTPUT Rec;"STOR; USED; DISF ""USER1"";"
This stores the vector and text data presently in user display memory in User Display File 1.
The User Display graphics may be loaded from tape using:
OUTPUT Rec;"LOAD; USED; DISF ""USER1"";"
This erases the current User Display, then loads and displays the previously stored graphics and
text.
Summary of User Graphics Statements
The following statements are used to control plotting of vectors and text into the receiver User
Display area of internal memory.
x1,y1 Plot Absolute vector. Move the pen from the current location to the
PA
location specied by the following x,y pair. Any number of x,y pairs may
HP-IB Programming 18-27
Programming Examples
PR
PD
PU
LB
DF
SPn
follow the PA instruction; each number must be separated from the previous
number by a comma. 0 x 5377; 0 y 4095.
x1,y1 Plot Relative vector. Move the pen from the current location to the
relative position specied by the following x,y pair. Any number of x,y pairs
may follow the PR instruction; each number must be separated from the
previous number by a comma. 0 x 5377; 0 y 4095.
Pen Down. When followed by a PA or PR instruction, this instruction will cause
a visible vector to be drawn to the new location.
Pen Up. When followed by a PA or PR instruction, this instruction will cause a
blank vector to be drawn to the new location.
ASCII character Label Text. The ASCII characters following the LB command
are drawn on the display beginning in the character cell at the current vector
position. The string must be terminated with the end-of-text character,
CNTRL C.
Set to Default state (PU, PA).
Select Pen (Color), 1 to 5 in the same sequence as shown in the set pen number
menu (see 4COPY5).
Summary of User Display Instructions
The following instructions control whether the standard measurement display (graticule, labels,
etc.) and the User Display are on or o.
Turn o User Display. Memory contents are not changed.
KP
Turn on User Display. Memory contents are not changed.
RP
Clear (Erase) User Display Memory.
PG
Turn o measurement display (standard graticule, trace, and labels). User
CS
display is not aected.
Turn on measurement display. User display is not changed.
RS
Example 15: Redene Parameter
This example demonstrates the receiver's ability to redene a parameter's numerator and
denominator. The rst part denes all four parameters the same, and then uses a four
parameter display to show the dened parameter in four dierent formats. This set-up is saved
in Instrument State 5 and may be recalled manually by the user. Next, after a User Preset, data
from the sum and dierence outputs of a typical monopulse antenna is loaded into Parameters
1 and 2. These parameters are then re-labeled, the display is titled and presented using a two
parameter overlay display. This set-up is saved in Instrument State 6.
Example 16: Read and Output Caution/Tell Message
This example prints the number and message of any error or warning shown on the receiver
display. The user is rst prompted to \Adjust" the receiver to force an error to be displayed. To
get an error message, perform any of the following:
Press the 4= Marker5 key with no function active.
Perform a disc directory (press 4DISC5 DIRECTORY ) without a disc in the drive.
Turn Calibration ON, but select an empty cal register.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
18-28 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Example 17: Read and Output Status Bytes
This program example displays the decimal value of the primary and extended status bytes.
The user is prompted to \Adjust" the receiver and then the status is read and displayed. Try
pressing a front panel key or taking a single sweep.
The tables below show bit assignments of the receiver Primary and Secondary status bytes.
These bits are set according to the current instrument state of the receiver system.
Important receiver instructions relating to the status word are:
OUTPSTAT;
Prepare the receiver to output the status word as two ASCII numbers, 0 to
255. Completion clears the status word to 0,0.
CLES;
Clear status bytes to 0,0; clear SRQ.
SRQM a,b;
Send two integer ASCII values, 0 to 255 to set the Service Request Mask.
Power On, TEST, and PRESET clear the Service Request Mask to 0,0.
Read Status Bytes
Both status bytes are read using a sequence such as:
OUTPUT Rec;"OUTPSTAT;"
ENTER Rec_data; Primary,Secondary
Where Primary and Secondary are variables to receive the value of each byte. You may read
the status bytes in separate ENTER operations.
After the Power Up sequence is complete, bit 2 of the Extended status byte is set, making the
value of OUTPSTAT 0,4.
BIT #
Decimal
Value
Function
BIT #
Decimal
Value
Function
7
128
Reason in
Extended
byte
7
128
Not used
6
64
RQS
(SRQ
issued)
6
64
Not used
PRIMARY STATUS BYTE (#1)
5
4
32
16
Syntax
error
SING,
NUMB,
CALF,
complete
3
8
Waiting
for GET
after
reverse
device
EXTENDED STATUS BYTE (#2)
5
4
3
32
16
8
Not used
Not used
Not used
2
4
1
2
0
1
TRIG
Data entry CAUTION
waiting for complete message
GET
displayed
FASC;
issued
ready for
external
trigger
2
4
Power ON
sequence
complete
1
2
Key
pressed
0
1
Not used
HP-IB Programming 18-29
Programming Examples
Setting the Service Request Mask
After Power ON, TEST, and Factory Preset, the receiver SRQ mask is set to 0,0 and no changes
in the Primary or Secondary status byte will generate an SRQ. To enable generation of an SRQ
when one or more of the status bits changes from 0 to 1 (changes from cleared to set), specify
the SRQ mask to sense the change in status. Using the receiver SRQM instruction, send two
bytes, each having a value from 0 to 255, as follows:
OUTPUT Rec;"SRQM 16,0;"
This will cause the receiver to generate an SRQ when bit 4 of the Primary Status byte changes
from 0 to 1.
Detect and service the SRQ according to the computer protocol. Normal completion of a service
cycle clears the receiver status bytes to 0,0 and does not change the SRQ mask.
Examples in the Example Program Listings show various interrupt service routines.
Example 18: Output Key Code
The key code (as documented in the Keyword Dictionary) is printed for any receiver front
panel key pressed by the user. The receiver is set to issue a SRQ when a key press occurs.
Example 19: HP-IB Triggered Data Acquisition
In this example, HP-IB triggers are used to measure 51 points of data for four parameters. This
is done twice with dierent trigger denitions. The rst sweep measures one point on all four
parameters with each trigger (51 triggers). The second sweep requires a trigger for each point
on each parameter (204 triggers). When HP-IB trigger mode is rst turned ON, and before
sending each trigger, primary status byte bit 2 (ready for trigger) is polled so triggers are not
sent too fast.
Example 20: Wait Required
This example creates a continuously changing display pattern using an endless loop to update
the values for Electrical Delay and Parameter Color. The main feature of this example is the
\WAIT;" command that is sent to the receiver. This forces the display to update each time the
loop is executed. Without the WAIT command the loop might execute several times before
the display updates and certain changes would be missed. Refer to the HP 8530A Keyword
Dictionary entry for WAIT.
Example 21: Wait Not Required.
This example executes an endless loop which steps a marker to a new frequency and then
reads the marker frequency, magnitude, and phase. The OUTPxxxx; commands used to
read the marker value automatically hold o further program execution and ensure that
the receiver has completed all prior instructions before the marker value is output. It is not
necessary to send the receiver a WAIT; before reading the marker.
18-30 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Example 22: Frequency List
This example shows how to dene, manipulate, and read frequency list data. First, a
three-segment frequency list is dened and activated. Next, the list and the trace data for
Parameter 1 is output to the computer. Then, single segments (selected by the user) are swept,
the receiver leaves, then re-enters, the Frequency List mode.
Example 23: Using the Receiver's Learn String
This example program performs a User Preset, then prompts the user to change the current
instrument state as desired. The learn string is then read out which includes the changes made
by the user. Another User Preset is done and then the Learn String is loaded into the receiver.
The receiver restores the modied instrument state.
The receiver Learn String is a binary coded string which describes the current instrument state.
This string may be read from the receiver to computer memory via the HP-IB, then it may be
loaded back into receiver memory in order to reset the system to the state represented by the
string. This learn string is transferred using internal receiver binary format (FORM 1), and it
is not intended that the user attempt to decode or modify the string. Please note that each
rmware revision may create learn strings of greater or smaller size (compared to learn strings
created by other rmware revisions). Thus, learn strings created by one rmware version may
not be compatible with earlier or later rmware revisions.
The following commands control transfer of the string.
Output Learn String to HP-IB.
OUTPLEAS;
Input Learn String from HP-IB; Set the receiver controls to that state.
INPULEAS;
The contents of the learn string is identical to the information processed by the SAVE and
RECALL features for receiver internal storage, and the DISC Store and Load Instrument State
functions for the receiver disc drive.
The following example shows a sequence to transfer the learn string. The learn string is 4390
bytes in length and can be read into an integer type array of length 2195.
DIM Integer Learn_string (4000)
OUTPUT Rec;"OUTPLEAS;"
ENTER Rec_data;Preamble, Size
REDIM Learn_string (1:Size/2)
ENTER Rec;Learn_string (*)
.
.
OUTPUT Rec;"INPULEAS;"
OUTPUT Rec;Preamble, Size, Learn_string (*)
OUTPLEAS; and INPULEAS; select FORM1 data format transfers. The data is transferred in a
sequence beginning with the Preamble, #A; an integer size, that tells the number of bytes to
follow, followed by the receiver internal binary format data which represents the control state
of the receiver, with EOI asserted on the last byte.
HP-IB Programming 18-31
Programming Examples
Example 24: Input Floating Point or ASCII Trace Data
This example writes trace data to the receiver in either Floating Point (FORM 3) or ASCII
(FORM 4) formats. The data array is continuously re-written to the display with an oset added
each time. Note the dierence in speed between the two data formats.
Example 25: Table Delay Operations
This example demonstrates how to input, output and apply Table Delay. The Delay Table in also
stored and loaded using the receiver internal disc.
Example 26: FAST (CW,AD,D) Data Acquisition
Fast CW setup and operation is demonstrated using an external trigger source. Once the data is
collected, it is converted from FORM 1 to real, imaginary data pairs. See Chapter 8, Automatic
Measurements, in the HP 8530A Microwave Receiver User's Guide for more information on the
fast CW mode.
Example 27: Fast IF Multiplexing Operation
This example has been written as a stand-alone program which sets-up a fast IF multiplexing
mode measurement of two parameters (using FASMUXMODE 2;) and then measures and transfers
the data to the controller. The measurement and transfer will continue until the user exits the
program or until the 100k buer overows. See Chapter 8, Automatic Measurements, in the
HP 8530A Microwave Receiver User's Guide for more information on the fast CW mode.
General HP-IB Programming
After the HP-IB REMOTE command is issued, addressing the receiver using an appropriate
OUTPUT statement causes the receiver to enter the Remote mode in which the front panel
hardkeys and softkeys are locked out. The only key that is no locked out is the 4LOCAL5 key.
After the initial OUTPUT statement, either ENTER or OUTPUT statements are accepted.
Press the 4LOCAL5 key to restore front panel control functions until the next OUTPUT command is
received. Program the Local Lockout command, LLO, to lock out the front panel completely,
even the 4LOCAL5 key. Issue the HP-IB LOCAL command to cancel Local Lockout, then issue a
REN command to return the receiver to remote command.
If the receiver is already addressed as a listener, a GTL 716 (LOCAL 716) sets the receiver
system to the normal manual mode without changing the current instrument state.
All HP-IB Universal and Addressed Commands and the receiver system response to the
commands are listed below. computer-specic and language considerations are discussed in the
\Example Program Listings" later in this chapter.
18-32 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Interface Functions
The following identication codes for the interface functions indicate the receiver HP-IB
interface capability. For more information, refer to the Tutorial Description of the HP-IB. HP
Part No 5952-0156.
SH1
Source Handshake: Full Capability.
AH1
Acceptor Handshake: Full Capability.
T6
Talker: Basic Talker, Serial Poll.
TE0
No Extended Talker.
L4
Listener: Basic Listener.
LE0
No Extended Listener.
SR1
Service Request: Full Capability.
RL1
Remote/Local: Complete Capability.
PP0
No Parallel Poll Capability.
DC1
Device Clear: Full Capability.
No Device Trigger Capability.
DT1
No computer Capability.
C0
Driver Electronic: Tri-State Drive.
E1
Response to HP-IB Universal Commands
The receiver HP-IB responds to the following universal commands from an external computer
at any time, regardless of whether or not it is addressed. Refer to the language reference
manual of the computer being used to nd the corresponding commands allowed by the
computer.
Device Clear: Clears receiver status, no change in instrument state, system is
DCL
ready to accept HP-IB commands and data.
Local Lockout: Disables the HP-IB front panel 4LOCAL5 key. GTL to clear.
LLO
SPD
Serial Poll Disable: Disables the Serial Poll mode over the receiver HP-IB.
SPE
Serial Poll Enable: Enables the Serial Poll mode over the receiver HP-IB.
PPU
Parallel Poll Uncongure: The receiver system does not respond.
Response to HP-IB Addressed Commands
The receiver HP-IB responds to the following addressed commands when it is addressed as
a listener. Refer to the language reference manual of the computer being used to nd the
corresponding commands allowed by the computer.
GET
Group Execute Trigger: The receiver system, already in the triggered data
acquisition mode, initiates the pre-programmed action of continuing the data
acquisition process.
Go To Local: Returns the receiver system to local control. Following GTL, the
GTL
receiver HP-IB will respond only to HP-IB Universal and Addressed Commands,
not to HP-IB data. Issue REN to enable data transfer using computer OUTPUT
and ENTER commands.
HP-IB Programming 18-33
Programming Examples
REN
SDC
Remote Enable. Enable all HP-IB command and data functions.
Selected Device Clear: Clears receiver status, no change to instrument state,
system is ready to accept instructions and data.
The receiver system does not respond to the following Addressed Commands.
PPC
Parallel Poll Congure.
TCT
Take Control.
18-34 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
Example Program Listing
The following pages contain the program listing for the HP BASIC examples program. The
program itself is supplied on the HP 8530A Software Toolkit Disc, supplied with the receiver.
The name of the program is: 8530_PROGX
The program requires BASIC 5.0 or higher with the following binaries: IO, MAT, TRANS, and
COMPLEX.
The program contains many example routines, which show how to perform various
programming tasks. The program requires BASIC 5.0 or higher with the following binaries: IO,
MAT, TRANS, and COMPLEX.
The disc also contains three measurement data les that are accessed by some of the
programming example routines.
ANG360
ANG180_SUM
ANG180_DEL
These are data les containing angle domain measurement data.
The following examples are provided in the program:
1 Input Syntax Familiarization
2 Active Function Output
3 Marker Data Output
4 Marker Operations
5 Display Modes
6 Using = Marker
7 Trace Data Output and Input
8 FORM 1 Data Conversion
9 Using Disc
10 Plots Using Copy
11 Trace List to Printer
12 Print/Plot to Receiver System Bus (using pass-through mode)
13 Plot User Graphics HP-GL
14 Plot to User Display Using BASIC HP-GL
15 Redene Parameter
16 Read and Output Caution/Tell Message
17 Read and Output Status Bytes
18 Output Key Code
19 HP-IB Triggered Data Acquisition
20 Wait Required
21 Wait Not Required.
22 Frequency List
23 Learn String
24 Input Floating Point (FORM3) or ASCII (FORM4) Trace Data
25 Table Delay Operations
26 FAST (CW,AD,D) Data Acquisition
27 Fast IF Multiplexing Operation
HP-IB Programming 18-35
Programming Examples
1!
RE-SAVE "8530_PROGX"
3
!
HP8530A.01.40 June 8, 1992
5
!
Rev. A.01.00
7
!
9
! Copyright @ HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1992
11
!
13
! Requires BASIC 5.0 or higher with:
15
!
IO, MAT, TRANS, COMPLEX
17
!
19
! Used with 201 Point Trace I/O
21
OPTION BASE 0
23
DIM Data(200,1),Formatted_data(200,1)
25
!
27
! Used with 360 & 181 point angle domain antenna data
29
DIM Ant_data(360,1),Ant_sum(180,1),Ant_del(180,1)
31
!
33
INTEGER Form1_data(1:801,2) ! Example 8 & 26
35
!
37
INTEGER Learn_string(1:4000)
! Learn String
39
DIM Input$[200],Input2$[50]
41
INTEGER Length,Error_number,Bytea,Byteb,Points,Segment
43
INTEGER Preamble,Size,Size_list,Mem,Trigs,I,C
45
!
DIM Filename$[30],Current_line$[256],Response$[30]
47
!
49
REAL Freq,Real,Imag,Mag,Phase,Exponent
51
!
53
REAL Freq_list(200),Log_mag,Lin_mag
55
!
57
! Example 24
DIM Data_ascii$(200,1)[24]
59
!
61
! Receiver HP-IB address
ASSIGN @Rec TO 716
63
!
65
! Read ASCII Data to/from HP 8530 HP-IB (OUTPMARK, OUTPACTI, FORM4 I/O)
67
(OUTPERRO, OUTPSTAT)
!
69
ASSIGN @Rec_data1 TO 716;FORMAT ON
71
!
73
75
! Read non-ASCII Data to/from HP 8530 HP-IB (FORM1, FORM2, and FORM3 I/0)
ASSIGN @Rec_data2 TO 716;FORMAT OFF
77
!
79
81
! Write to 8530 System Bus
ASSIGN @Rec_systbus TO 717
83
85
!
87
! Read from HP 8530 System Bus
89
ASSIGN @Rec_systbusdata TO 717;FORMAT ON
91
!
93 Begin: !
95
REMOTE 7
CLEAR 716
97
PRINTER IS 1
99
CONTROL KBD,2;1 ! activate user softkeys
101
103
GOSUB Load_ant_arrays ! loads antenna data arrays for use later
105
PRINT
107
!
109
PRINT "**** NOTE: User Preset (Instrument State 8) must be saved with an operating,"
sweeping, frequency domain state for your system."
111
PRINT "
113
PRINT
Save Instrument State 8 Now If Necessary."
115
PRINT "
117
LOCAL @Rec
119
LINPUT "Press RETURN",Input$
CLEAR SCREEN
121
18-36 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
123 OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
! Make sure that receiver User Presets
125
! to an operating state.
127 !
129 OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUON; ENTO;"
131 OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPERRO;"
133 ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number
! Clear Message
135 !
137 ! ***************
139 ! Edit the following two lines to run a single selected example.
141 ! GOSUB Examplex
143 ! STOP
145 ! ***************
147 !
149 LINPUT "Example 1, Input Syntax Familiarization",Input$
151 GOSUB Example1
153 !
155 LINPUT "Example 2, Active Function Output: Press Return",Input$
157 GOSUB Example2
159 !
161 LINPUT "Example 3, Marker Data Output: Press Return",Input$
163 GOSUB Example3
165 !
167 LINPUT "Example 4, Marker Operations: Press Return",Input$
169 GOSUB Example4
171 !
173 LINPUT "Example 5, Single & Dual Displays: Press Return",Input$
175 GOSUB Example5
177 !
179 LINPUT "Example 6, Using =MARKER: Press Return",Input$
181 GOSUB Example6
183 !
185 LINPUT "Example 7, Trace Data Output / Input: Press Return",Input$
187 GOSUB Example7
189 !
191 LINPUT "Example 8, Form1 Data Conversion: Press Return",Input$
193 GOSUB Example8
195 !
197 !
199 LINPUT "Example 9, Using Disc: Press Return",Input$!
201 GOSUB Example9
203 !
205 LINPUT "Example 10, Plots Using Copy: Press Return",Input$
207 GOSUB Example10
209 !
211 LINPUT "Example 11, List Trace Values: Press Return",Input$
213 GOSUB Example11
215 !
217 LINPUT "Example 12, Print / Plot to 8530 System Bus: Press Return",Input$
219 GOSUB Example12
221 !
223 LINPUT "Example 13, Plot User Graphics: Press Return",Input$
225 GOSUB Example13
227 !
229 LINPUT "Example 14, Plot Using BASIC HPGL: Press Return",Input$
231 GOSUB Example14
233 !
235 LINPUT "Example 15, Redefine Parameter: Press Return",Input$
237 GOSUB Example15
239 !
241 LINPUT "Example 16, Read and Output Caution/Tell Message: Press Return",Input$
243 GOSUB Example16
245 !
HP-IB Programming 18-37
Programming Examples
247
LINPUT "Example 17, Read and Output Status Bytes: Press Return",Input$
249
GOSUB Example17
251
!
253
LINPUT "Example 18, Output Key Code: Press Return",Input$
255
GOSUB Example18
257
!
259
LINPUT "Example 19, HPIB Triggered Data Acquisition: Press Return",Input$
261
GOSUB Example19
263
!
265
LINPUT "Example 20, WAIT Required: Press Return",Input$
267
GOSUB Example20
269
!
271
LINPUT "Example 21, WAIT Not Required: Press Return",Input$
273
GOSUB Example21
275
!
277
LINPUT "Example 22, Frequency List: Press Return",Input$
279
GOSUB Example22
281
!
283
LINPUT "Example 23, Learn String: Press Return",Input$
285
GOSUB Example23
287
!
289
LINPUT "Example 24, Input Floating Point or ASCII Data: Press Return",Input$
291
GOSUB Example24
!
293
LINPUT "Example 25, Delay Table Operations: Press Return",Input$
295
GOSUB Example25
297
!
299
LINPUT "Example 26, FASTCW Data Acquisition: Press Return",Input$
301
GOSUB Example26
303
!
305
LINPUT "Example 27, Fast Mux Operation: Press Return",Input$
307
! Fast_Mux Operation is a stand alone sub-program
CALL Fast_mux
309
!
311
DISP "END OF EXAMPLES"
313
!
315
STOP
317
!
319
321 ! ***********************************************
!
323
325 Example1: ! INPUT SYNTAX FAMILIARIZATION ****************
327
PRINT
PRINT "Example 1, Input Syntax Familiarization"
329
331
!
333
LOCAL @Rec
335
LINPUT "TYPE 8530 INSTRUCTION, THEN RETURN; ENTER 0 TO EXIT",Input$
337
IF Input$[1,1]="0" THEN
339
PRINT
341
GOTO Query
END IF
343
OUTPUT @Rec;Input$;";"
345
PRINT Input$,
347
349
IF BIT(SPOLL(@Rec),5) THEN ! Check for syntax error
! Clear error
351
GOSUB Syntax_error
353
END IF
355
GOTO Example1
357
!
359 Query: !
361
LOCAL @Rec
363
LINPUT "TYPE 8530 QUERY OR OUTPUT INSTRUCTION,THEN RETURN; ENTER 0 TO EXIT",Input$
365
IF Input$[1,1]="0" THEN
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPERRO;"
367
18-38 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
369
ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number
! Clear Message
371
RETURN
373 END IF
375 PRINT Input$,
377 OUTPUT @Rec;Input$;";"
379 IF BIT(SPOLL(@Rec),5) THEN ! Check for syntax error
381
GOSUB Syntax_error
! Clear error
383
PRINT
385 ELSE
387
ENTER @Rec_data1;Input$
389
PRINT Input$
391 END IF
393 GOTO Query
395 !
397 Syntax_error:
!
399 PRINT "<< Syntax Error",
401 CLEAR @Rec
403 OUTPUT @Rec;"CLES; OUTPERRO;"
405 ENTER @Rec;Error_number
! Clear Message
407 RETURN
409 !
411 Example2: ! ACTIVE FUNCTION OUTPUT ****************************
413 PRINT
415 PRINT "Example 2, Active Function Value."
417 !
419 OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; LOGM;"
421 !
423 OUTPUT @Rec;"STAR; OUTPACTI;"
425 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
427 PRINT "Start Frequency =";Value/1.E+6;" Mhz"
429 !
431 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOP; OUTPACTI;"
433 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
435 PRINT " Stop Frequency =";Value/1.E+6;" Mhz"
437 !
439 OUTPUT @Rec;"POWE; OUTPACTI;"
441 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
443 PRINT " Power Source 1 =";PROUND(Value,-2);" dbm"
445 !
447 OUTPUT @Rec;"SCAL; OUTPACTI;"
449 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
Scale =";PROUND(Value,-2);" db/"
451 PRINT "
453 !
455 OUTPUT @Rec;"REFV; OUTPACTI;"
457 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
459 PRINT " Refrence Value =";PROUND(Value,-2);" db"
461 !
463 OUTPUT @Rec;"MAGO; OUTPACTI;"
465 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
467 PRINT "Magnitude Offset=";Value;" db"
469 !
471 OUTPUT @Rec;"MAGS; OUTPACTI;"
473 ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
475 PRINT "Magnitude Slope =";Value;" db/Ghz"
477 !
479 OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO;"
481 !
483 RETURN
485 !
HP-IB Programming 18-39
Programming Examples
487 Example3: ! MARKER DATA OUTPUT **********************************
489
!
491
PRINT
493
PRINT "Example 3, Marker Data Output"
495
PRINT "Averaging On With a Avg Factor of 4."
497
OUTPUT @Rec;"AVERON 4; MENUFORM;"
499
PRINT "Automatic Holdoff For Single or Number of Groups"
501
PRINT
503
!
505 Again_3:
!
507
LOCAL @Rec
509
LINPUT "Set 8530 to desired Format and Domain or E to Exit",Input$
511
IF UPC$(Input$)="E" THEN
513
OUTPUT @Rec;"AVEROFF; FREQ; CONT;"
515
RETURN
517
END IF
519
!
521
OUTPUT @Rec;"HOLD; POIN51;"
! Zero Raw Data
523
!
525
OUTPUT @Rec;"SING;" ! 8530 automatically waits untill SING completes
527
! before executing further instructions
529
!
531
OUTPUT @Rec;"AUTO; MARK1; MARKMAXI; OUTPMARK;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Mag,Phase ! Read Marker Value, Phase data not used
533
!
535
! Query Display Format
OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM?;"
537
ENTER @Rec_data1;Input$
539
!
541
PRINT "Marker ";
543
SELECT Input$[2;3]
545
CASE "LOG","POL"
547
Mag db = ";
PRINT "
549
CASE "PHA"
551
PRINT "Phase Degrees = ";
553
CASE "SWR"
555
SWR = ";
PRINT "
557
CASE ELSE
559
Mag Units = ";
561
PRINT "
END SELECT
563
PRINT Mag;
565
567
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPACTI;"
569
571
ENTER @Rec_data1;Value
573
!
575
OUTPUT @Rec;"DOMA?;"
! Query Domain
577
ENTER @Rec_data1;Input$
579
SELECT Input$[2;4]
581
CASE "FREQ"
PRINT " @";Value/1.E+6;" Mhz"
583
CASE "ANGL"
585
PRINT " @";Value;" Degrees"
587
589
CASE ="TIME"
591
PRINT " @";Value*1.E+9;" nano Seconds"
593
END SELECT
595
GOTO Again_3
597
!
599 Example4: ! MARKER OPERATIONS *******************************
601
!
603
PRINT
605
PRINT "Example 4, Marker Operations"
PRINT "Peak-to-Peak Measurement."
607
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; ENTO; SING; AUTO; MKRLISTON;"
609
OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK2; MARKMAXI; DELR2; MARK1; MARKMINI; OUTPMARK;"
611
ENTER @Rec_data1;Mag,Phase
613
18-40 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
615 !
617 OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPACTI;"
619 ENTER @Rec_data1;Freq
621 !
623 PRINT "P-P Mag = ";Mag;"
P-P Freq = ";Freq
625 !
627 OUTPUT @Rec;"MKRLISTON;"
629 LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
631 !
633 OUTPUT @Rec;"DELO; MARKOFF; CONT;"
635 Example4a: ! FIND -3 dB BEAMWIDTH ************************
637 !
639 PRINT "-3 dB Beamwidth Measurement."
641 !
643 GOSUB Draw_360
645 OUTPUT @Rec;"LOGP; MARK1; MKRLISTON; MARKMAXI;"
647 LINPUT "Press Return To Normalize Pattern To 0 db.",Input$
649 OUTPUT @Rec;"NORMACTT;"
651 OUTPUT @Rec;"TARV -3; MARKTARG; MARK2; SEAR; DELR1; OUTPACTI;"
653 ENTER @Rec_data1;Bwidth
655 PRINT "Main Lobe -3 db Beamwidth = ";Bwidth;" Degrees"
657 OUTPUT @Rec;"MKRLISTON;"
659 !
661 LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
663 OUTPUT @Rec;"DELO; MARKOFF;"
665 !
************************
667 Example4b: ! MARKER SEARCHES
669 !
671 ! Search limits in degrees
673 Low_limit=-90
675 High_limit=90
677 !
679 PRINT "Lobe Peak Search ";Low_limit;" to ";High_limit;" degrees"
681 OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK1; MKRLISTON; MARKMAXI;"
683 GOSUB Read_mark
685 PRINT "Main Lobe Is ";PROUND(Mag,-3);" db @ ";Angle;" Degrees"
687 D$="Left"
689 I=1
691 LOOP
Prior_angle=Angle
693
695
IF D$="Left" THEN
OUTPUT @Rec;"SEAL;"
697
699
ELSE
701
OUTPUT @Rec;"SEAR;"
703
END IF
705
GOSUB Read_mark
707 EXIT IF Angle>=High_limit
709
IF Angle<=Low_limit THEN
OUTPUT @Rec;"MARKMAXI;"
711
D$="Right"
713
I=-1
715
717
ELSE
! Check for adjacent points
719
IF Angle+I<>Prior_angle THEN
721
PRINT D$;" Side Lobe Is ";PROUND(Mag,-3);" db @ ";Angle;" Degrees"
723
END IF
725
END IF
727 END LOOP
729 RETURN
731 !
733 Read_mark:
!
735 OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPMARK;"
737 ENTER @Rec_data1;Mag
739 OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPACTI;"
HP-IB Programming 18-41
Programming Examples
741
743
745
747
749
751
753
755
757
759
761
763
765
767
769
771
773
775
777
779
781
783
785
787
789
791
793
795
797
799
801
803
805
807
809
811
813
815
817
819
821
823
825
827
829
831
833
835
837
839
841
843
845
847
849
851
853
855
857
859
861
863
865
867
ENTER @Rec_data1;Angle
RETURN
!
Example5: ! DISPLAY MODES *******************************************
PRINT
PRINT "Example 5, Display Modes"
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; POIN51; OUTPERRO;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number ! clear message
!
Example5a: ! SINGLE CHANNEL DISPLAYS ********************************
!
PRINT "Single Channel, Four Parameter Split Display"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; FOURP; GRATSPLI; MKRLISTON; NUMG1; PARA1; AUTO;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; AUTO; PARA3; AUTO; PARA4; AUTO; PARA1; CONT;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"MKRLFIVM; MARK1; MARK2; MARK3; MARK4; MARK5; ENTO;"
PRINT "Marker List shows All Markers for Selected Parameter"
!
LINPUT "Press Return.",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"MKRLFOUP; MARK3; ENTO;"
PRINT "Marker List shows Active Marker for all Parameters"
!
LINPUT "Press Return.",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"GRATOVER;"
PRINT "Single Channel, Four Parameter Overlay Display"
!
LINPUT "Press Return for Channel 2 Display",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN2; SING; AUTO; CONT; MARK1; ENTO;"
PRINT "Single Channel, Single Parameter Display"
PRINT "Single or Multi Parameter Display is Not Coupled"
!
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; GRATSPLI; TWOP;"
PRINT "Single Channel, Two Parameter Split Display"
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"THREEP;"
PRINT "Single Channel, Three Parameter Split Display"
!
Example5b: ! DUAL CHANNEL DISPLAYS *********************************
!
LINPUT "Press Return for Dual Channel Split Display",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"DUAC; GRATSPLI;"
PRINT "Dual Channel, Single Parameter/Channel Split Display"
!
LINPUT "Press Return for Dual Channel Overlay Display",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"GRATOVER;"
PRINT "Dual Channel, Single Parameter/Channel Overlay Display"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Continue",Input$
RETURN
!
! USING = MARKER **************************
Example6:
PRINT
PRINT "Example 6, Using = Marker"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; POIN51; SING; AUTO; CONT; CENT; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER @Rec;Freq
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK1; MARKMAXI;"
PRINT "Refrence Value = Marker"
LINPUT "Press Return for REF VALUE = MARKER",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"REFV; EQUA;"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK1";Freq-1.E+9;";"
PRINT "Start Frequency = Marker"
18-42 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
869 LINPUT "Press Return for START FREQ = MARKER",Input$
871 OUTPUT @Rec;"STAR; EQUA;"
873 !
875 OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK2";Freq+1.E+9;";"
877 PRINT "Stop Frequency = Marker"
879 LINPUT "Press Return for STOP FREQ = MARKER",Input$
881 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOP; EQUA;"
883 !
885 OUTPUT @Rec;"PHAS; AUTD; MARK3";Freq;";"
887 PRINT "Phase Offset = Marker"
889 LINPUT "Press Return for PHASE OFFSET = MARKER",Input$
891 OUTPUT @Rec;"PHAO; EQUA;"
893 !
895 RETURN
897 !
899 Example7: ! TRACE DATA OUTPUT / INPUT ***********************
901 !
903 PRINT
905 PRINT "Example 7, Trace Data Output / Input (FORM3)."
907 !
909 ! Output data from receiver
911 OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
913 OUTPUT @Rec;"POIN201; SING; LINP; AUTO; FORM3; OUTPDATA;"
915 ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
917 !
919 PRINT "First and last data points of output corrected data array :"
921 PRINT "Point: 1";TAB(13);"Real:";Data(0,0);TAB(36);" Imag:";Data(0,1)
923 PRINT "Point: 201";TAB(13);"Real:";Data(200,0);TAB(36);" Imag:";Data(200,1)
!
925
927 OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK1;"
929 LOCAL @Rec
931 INPUT "Corrected data array read. Press <<Return>> to Continue",Input$
933 !
935 ! Input data to receiver
! Zero Trace for effect
937 OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO; POIN201;"
939 LINPUT "Data Zeroed, Press Return To Write Data To 8530",Input$
941 !
943 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; INPUDATA;"
945 OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
947 PRINT "Corrected array data Written (input) to 8530."
949 !
951 RETURN
953 !
955 Example8:
! FORM1 DATA CONVERSION
************************
957 !
959 PRINT
961 PRINT "Example 8, Form1 Data Conversion"
963 !
965 ! This example reads FORM1 data (internal binary format) and converts
967 ! it to real & imaginary, linear magnitude, log magnitude and phase.
969 ! The data arrays size will automatically adjust for any number of
971 ! measurement points. Converted values are printed for the first and
973 ! last points.
975 !
977 OUTPUT @Rec;"SING; MARK1;"
979 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM1; OUTPDATA;" ! or OUTPRAWn; OUTPDATA; OUTPFORM;
981
! or OUTPDELA; OUTPMEMO;
983 ! note: if using OUTPFORM, Data_re(I) will be in the current display
985 !
format and Data_im(I) will = 0 for all display formats that
987 !
are not plots of real / imaginary pairs. Calculated linear,
log and phase values are not valid.
989 !
! Size/6 = number of data points
991 ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size
993 !
HP-IB Programming 18-43
Programming Examples
995
REDIM Form1_data(1:Size/6,2) ! dimension 0 = imag mantissa,
997
! 1 = real mantissa and 2 = common exponent
999
!
1001 ENTER @Rec_data2;Form1_data(*)
! read the data
1003 !
1005 ! Calculate Exponent - The exponent is represented by bits 0-7 of
1007 ! the 16 bit integer, Form1_data(n,2). Bit 7 is the sign bit (1="-",
1009 ! 0="+"). The computed value is offset by -15 to give values which
1011 ! are in a useful range for measurements. Thus, for Form1_data(n,2)
1013 ! values of 0 to 127, exponents range from -15 to 112 and for values
1015 ! of 128 to 255, exponents range from -143 to -16 respectivly. This
1017 ! gives a data range of ~ 674 to -860 db using db=20*LGT(2^(exponent)).
1019 ! An alternate, table method is used to decode the exponent in example26.
1021 !
1023 FOR I=1 TO SIZE(Form1_data,1)
1025
Exponent=BINAND(Form1_data(I,2),255) ! bits 0-7 are the exponent
1027
!
1029
IF Exponent<128 THEN
! exponent is positive
1031
Exponent=2^(Exponent-15)
! offset (-15)
1033
!
1035
ELSE
! exponent is negative
1037
Exponent=2^(BINCMP(BINEOR(Exponent,255))-15) ! reverse [EOR],
1039
! change sign [CMP] and offset [-15] for negative going exponents
END IF
1041
!
1043
! Calculate real and imaginary data
1045
Real=Form1_data(I,1)*Exponent
1047
Imag=Form1_data(I,0)*Exponent
1049
!
1051
! Calculate linear magnitude data
1053
Lin_mag=SQRT(Real^2+Imag^2)
1055
!
1057
! Calculate log magnitude data
1059
Log_mag=20*LGT(Lin_mag)
1061
!
1063
! Calculate phase data
1065
DEG
1067
1069
IF Imag=0 AND Real<0 THEN
Phase=-180
1071
ELSE
1073
1075
Phase=2*ATN(Imag/(Real+Lin_mag))
END IF
1077
1079
!
1081
IF I=1 OR I=SIZE(Form1_data,1) THEN
! print first and last points
1083
PRINT "Pt";I;"
Real = ";Real;"
Imag = ";Imag
1085
PRINT "
Lin = ";Lin_mag;" Log = ";Log_mag;" Phase = ";Phase
1087
PRINT
1089
END IF
1091 NEXT I
1093 !
1095 REDIM Form1_data(0:2,1:201)
1097 !
1099 PRINT
1101 LOCAL @Rec
1103 RETURN
1105 !
1107 Example9: ! USING DISC ******************************
1109 !
1111 PRINT
1113 PRINT "Example 9, Using Disc"
1115 OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; POIN51;"
1117 OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; PARA1; SING; DATI;"
1119 OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN2; PARA4; DUAC; SING; CONT;"
18-44 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
1121
1123
1125
1127
1129
1131
1133
1135
1137
1139
1141
1143
1145
1147
1149
1151
1153
1155
1157
1159
1161
1163
1165
1167
1169
1171
1173
1175
1177
1179
1181
1183
1185
1187
1189
1191
1193
1195
1197
1199
1201
1203
1205
1207
1209
1211
1213
1215
1217
1219
1221
1223
1225
1227
1229
1231
1233
1235
1237
1239
1241
1243
1245
!
Disc:
!
LINPUT "Internal or External Disc? (I or E).",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="E" THEN
D=1
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIEXT;"! Use External Disc ******
LINPUT "Insert Disc in External Drive, then Return",Input$
ELSE
D=0
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIINT;"! Use Internal Disc ******
LINPUT "Insert Disc in Internal Drive, then Return",Input$
END IF
!
Initdisc: !
LINPUT "Initialize Disc? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN OUTPUT @Rec;"INID;"
!
Storedisc: !
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOR; INSS1; DISF ""IFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; STOR; DATAFORM; DISF ""DFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN2; STOR; DATARAW; DISF ""DFILE2"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOR; MEMO1; DISF ""MFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOR; CALK1; DISF ""KFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"DIRE;"
PRINT "Files Stored To Disc, Directory Displayed"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Load Data",Input$
!
!
Loaddisc:
PRINT "Load Data"
OUTPUT @Rec;"LOAD; INSS1; DISF ""IFILE1"";"
IF D=1 THEN OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIEXT;" ! If INSS1 STOIINT;
OUTPUT @Rec;"HOLD;"
PRINT "HOLD Avoids Overwritting Data Just Loaded."
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; LOAD; DATAFORM; DISF ""DFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN2; LOAD; DATARAW; DISF ""DFILE2"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN2; DISPDATA; CHAN1; DISPDATA;"
PRINT "Must Turn Both Channel's Memories Off Before Loading any Memory."
OUTPUT @Rec;"LOAD; MEMO1; DISF ""MFILE1"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"CHAN1; PARA1; DISPDATM; CONT;"
!
LINPUT "Repeat This Sequence? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN GOTO Example10
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"DIRE;"
LINPUT "Print Contents of a CITIfile? (ENTER Y or N) External Drive Required
on Controller Bus",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="N" THEN RETURN
LINPUT "Output to Printer or Controller CRT? (ENTER P or C)",Input$
IF Input$="P" THEN
LINPUT "Is Printer on 8530 System Bus? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN
PRINTER IS 717
OUTPUT @Rec;"ADDRPASS 01;"
ELSE
! Connected to Controller HP-IB
PRINTER IS 701
END IF
ELSE
PRINTER IS 1
! Print to Controller CRT
END IF
!
LINPUT "INSTALL DISC IN CONTROLLER DRIVE 0, THEN RETURN.",Input$
Citiread: !
LINPUT "NAME OF CITIfile to Read?",File_name$
HP-IB Programming 18-45
Programming Examples
1247
1249
1251
1253
1255
1257
1259
1261
1263
1265
1267
1269
1271
1273
1275
1277
1279
1281
1283
1285
1287
1289
1291
1293
1295
1297
1299
1301
1303
1305
1307
1309
1311
1313
1315
1317
1319
1321
1323
1325
1327
1329
1331
1333
1335
1337
1339
1341
1343
1345
1347
1349
1351
1353
1355
1357
1359
1361
1363
1365
1367
1369
1371
!
ON ERROR GOSUB File_error
ASSIGN @Discfile TO File_name$
ON END @Discfile GOTO End_of_file
PRINT "DISC FILE NAME=",File_name$
PRINT
LOOP
ENTER @Discfile;Current_line$
PRINT Current_line$
END LOOP
End_of_file: !
PRINT
PRINT "END OF FILE"
PRINTER IS 1
LINPUT "Print Another CITIfile? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN GOTO Citiread
OFF ERROR
RETURN
!
File_error:
!
IF ERRN=56 OR ERRN=53 OR ERRN=58 THEN
! file undefined or wrong type
IF ERRN=56 OR ERRN=53 THEN
PRINT "File ";File_name$;" Not Found. Check Directory On 8530 Display"
ELSE ! ERRN=58
PRINT "File TYPE Must Be ASC. Check Directory On 8530 Display."
END IF
BEEP 300,.1
LINPUT "NAME OF CITIfile to Read?",File_name$
ELSE
OFF ERROR
END IF
RETURN
!
Example10: ! PLOTS USING COPY *********************************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 10, Plots Using Copy"
PRINT "Requires Properly Addresed 8530 Plotter"
LINPUT "Skip This Example ? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN RETURN
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUOFF; DISPDATA;"
DISP "Press HP 8530 ENTRY OFF or ABORT PRINT/PLOT Softkey to abort Plot."
LINPUT "Load Paper, then Return",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA1; SING; AUTO; LEFU; PLOTALL;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; SING; AUTO; LEFL; PLOTALL;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA3; SING; AUTO; RIGU; PLOTALL;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA4; SING; AUTO; RIGL; PLOTALL;"
!
RETURN
!
Example11: ! TRACE LIST TO PRINTER ****************************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 11, List Trace Values."
PRINT "Requires Properly Addressed 8530 Printer"
LINPUT "Skip This Example ? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN RETURN
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"LINP; POIN51; SING; LISSKIP 7; LIST;"
!
RETURN
!
18-46 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
1373
1375
1377
1379
1381
1383
1385
1387
1389
1391
1393
1395
1397
1399
1401
1403
1405
1407
1409
1411
1413
1415
1417
1419
1421
1423
1425
1427
1429
1431
1433
1435
1437
1439
1441
1443
1445
1447
1449
1451
1453
1455
1457
1459
1461
1463
1465
1467
1469
1471
1473
1475
1477
1479
1481
1483
1485
1487
1489
1491
1493
1495
1497
1499
Example12: ! PRINT / PLOT TO 8530 SYSTEM BUS ************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 12, Print / Plot To 8530 System Bus"
PRINT "Requires Printer and Plotter on HPIB System Bus"
LINPUT "Skip This Example ? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN RETURN
!
PRINT "Print Title via Pass-Thru."
OUTPUT @Rec;"ADDRPASS 01;"
PRINTER IS 717
! (Rec_systbus)
PRINT
PRINT "MEASUREMENT NUMBER 1"
PRINT
OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO;"
PRINTER IS 1
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
!
Example12a: ! PLOT TO PLOTTER ON 8530 SYSTEM BUS *************
!
PRINT "Plot Label via Pass-Thru."
OUTPUT @Rec;"ADDRPASS 05;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"CS;PU;PA 2500,2500;PD;LB PASS-THRU3;PU;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO;"
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
RETURN
!
! PLOT USER GRAPHICS USING HP-GL SUBSET (8530A) ***
Example13:
!
Y=0-4095
8530A:
X=0-5733
!
!
Plot_absolute: !
PRINT
PRINT "Example 13, Plot User Graphics."
OUTPUT @Rec;"ADDRPASS 31;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PG; CS; PU;" ! User display on and clear
!
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP1; PA 0,0; PD;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 0,4095, 5733,4095, 5733,0, 0,0;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 2475,3950; PD; LBFULL SCREEN3;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
!
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP2; PA 180,384; PD;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 180,3585, 4660,3585, 4660,384, 180,384;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 2420,1980; PD;" ! Polar Center
GOSUB Draw_cross
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 2000,3300; PD; LBSINGLE CHANNEL3;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
!
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP3; PA 180,1180; PD;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 180,2780, 2420,2780, 2420,1180, 180,1180;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 1300,1980; PD;" ! Polar Center
GOSUB Draw_cross
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 250,1500; PD; LBDUAL, CHANNEL 13;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
!
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP4; PA 2465,1180; PD;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 2465,2780, 4705,2780, 4705,1180, 2465,1180;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 3585,1980; PD;" ! Polar Center
GOSUB Draw_cross
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 2665,1500; PD; LBDUAL, CHANNEL 23;"
HP-IB Programming 18-47
Programming Examples
1501 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
1503 LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
1505 !
1507 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP5; PA 180,210; PD;"
1509 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 180,1760, 2335,1760, 2335,210, 180,210;"
1511 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 1255,980; PD;" ! Polar Center
1513 GOSUB Draw_cross
1515 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP6; PU; PA 180,2260; PD;"
1517 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 180,3805, 2335,3805, 2335,2260, 180,2260;"
1519 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 1255,3030; PD;" ! Polar Center
1521 GOSUB Draw_cross
1523 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP7; PU; PA 2510,2260; PD;"
1525 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 2510,3805, 4665,3805, 4665,2260, 2510,2260;"
1527 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 3590,3030; PD;" ! Polar Center
1529 GOSUB Draw_cross
1531 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP9; PU; PA 2510,210; PD;"
1533 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 2510,1760, 4665,1760, 4665,210, 2510,210;"
1535 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 3590,980; PD;" ! Polar Center
1537 GOSUB Draw_cross
1539 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP5; PU; PA 250,500; PD; LBFOUR PARAMETER3;"
1541 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
1543 LINPUT "Press Return",Input$
1545 !
1547 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"SP10; PA 4870,0; PD;"
1549 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PA 4870,4095, 5733,4095, 5733,0, 4870,0;"
1551 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU; PA 4930,2000; PD; LBMENU AREA3;"
1553 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PU;"
1555 !
1557 LINPUT "Turn On Measurement Display: Press Return",Input$
1559 !
1561 OUTPUT @Rec;"SINC; MENUDOMA; ENTO;"
1563 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"RS;" ! measurement display on
1565 !
1567 LINPUT "Insert Initialized Disc in 8530 Drive: Press Return",Input$
1569 PRINT "Store User Display."
1571 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIINT; STOR; USED; FILE1;"
1573 !
1575 LINPUT "Turn Off Measurement Display: Press Return",Input$
1577 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"CS;" ! measurement display off
1579 !
1581 LINPUT "Erase User Display: Press Return",Input$
1583 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PG;"
1585 !
1587 LINPUT "Turn On Measurement Display: Press Return",Input$
1589 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"RS;"
1591 !
1593 LINPUT "Load User Display from Disc: Press Return",Input$
1595 PRINT "Load User Display."
1597 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIINT; LOAD; USED; FILE1;"
1599 !
1601 LINPUT "Next Example: Press Return",Input$
1603 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PG; RS;"
1605 !
1607 RETURN
1609 !
!
1611 Draw_cross:
1613 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PR -200,0, 400,0, -200,0;"
1615 OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PR 0,-200, 0,400, 0,-200;"
1617 RETURN
1619 !
1621 Example14: ! PLOT TO USER DISPLAY USING BASIC HP-GL **************
1623 !
1625 PRINT
1627 PRINT "Example 14, Plot Using BASIC HP-GL"
18-48 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
1629
1631
1633
1635
1637
1639
1641
1643
1645
1647
1649
1651
1653
1655
1657
1659
1661
1663
1665
1667
1669
1671
1673
1675
1677
1679
1681
1683
1685
1687
1689
1691
1693
1695
1697
1699
1701
1703
1705
1707
1709
1711
1713
1715
1717
1719
1721
1723
1725
1727
1729
1731
1733
1735
1737
1739
1741
1743
1745
1747
1749
OUTPUT @Rec;"SINC; ADDRPASS 31;"
PLOTTER IS 717,"HPGL"
WINDOW 0,4095,0,4095
!
! HP-GL PLOTTING STATEMENTS
!
FRAME
MOVE 100,100
DRAW 3995,3995
MOVE 3995,100
DRAW 100,3995
MOVE 1500,800
LABEL "BASIC HP-GL"
!
LINPUT "Output Display To 8530 Plotter ? (ENTER Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN
OUTPUT @Rec;"FULP; PLOTALL;"
END IF
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"ADDRPASS 31;"
OUTPUT @Rec_systbus;"PG; RS;" ! erase user & turn on measurement display
RETURN
!
! REDEFINE PARAMETER ******************************
Example15:
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 15, Redefine Parameter"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; POIN51; FOUPSPLI; DEBUOFF; OUTPERRO;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number ! clear message
FOR I=1 TO 4
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA"&VAL$(I)&";NUMEB1; DENOA1; REDD;"
NEXT I
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; PHAS; PARA3; LOGP; PARA4; SWR; MARK1; SAVE5;"
LOCAL @Rec
PRINT "All Parameters Defined The Same, Different Formats"
PRINT "Definition and Set-up Saved in Instrument State 5"
LINPUT "Press RETURN",Input$
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
GOSUB Draw_mono
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; PARL""Delta""; PARA1; PARL""Sum"";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"TWOP; GRATOVER; ANNOLABE; MARK1; MARKMAXI;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"TITL""Monopulse Sum and Difference Outputs""; SAVE6;"
PRINT "Two Different Parameters With User Labels and Title"
PRINT "Definition and Set-up Saved in Instrument State 6"
!
! PRESET selects standard User parameter definition.
! RECALL selects previously saved user parameter definitions.
!
RETURN
!
Example16: ! READ AND OUTPUT CAUTION/TELL MESSAGE *************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 16, Read and Output Caution/Tell Message"
LOOP
LOCAL @Rec
LINPUT "Adjust Receiver & Press Return to Read Caution/Tell (E to Exit)",Input$
EXIT IF UPC$(Input$)="E"
!
HP-IB Programming 18-49
Programming Examples
1751
1753
1755
1757
1759
1761
1763
1765
1767
1769
1771
1773
1775
1777
1779
1781
1783
1785
1787
1789
1791
1793
1795
1797
1799
1801
1803
1805
1807
1809
1811
1813
1815
1817
1819
1821
1823
1825
1827
1829
1831
1833
1835
1837
1839
1841
1843
1845
1847
1849
1851
1853
1855
1857
1859
1861
1863
1865
1867
1869
1871
1873
1875
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPERRO;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number,Input$
PRINT Error_number,Input$
!
END LOOP
RETURN
!
Example17: ! READ AND OUTPUT STATUS BYTES *************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 17, Read and Output Status Bytes"
LOOP
OUTPUT @Rec;"cles;"
LOCAL @Rec
LINPUT "Adjust Receiver & Press Return to Read Status (E to Exit)",Input$
EXIT IF UPC$(Input$)="E"
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPSTAT;"
! output and clear status
ENTER @Rec_data1;Bytea,Byteb
PRINT "Primary =";Bytea,"Extended =";Byteb
END LOOP
RETURN
!
Example18: ! OUTPUT KEY CODE **************************************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 18, Output Key Code"
DISP "PRESS HP 8530 Front Panel Key. (f5 to EXIT.)"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUON; CLES; SRQM 128,2;" ! set mask for key press
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Key_code
ENABLE INTR 7;2
GOSUB Blank_keys
ON KEY 5 LABEL " NEXT EXAMPLE" GOTO Exit_example18
GOTO Wait_loop
!
Exit_example18: !
DISABLE INTR 7
GOSUB Keys_off
PRINT ""
RETURN
!
!
Key_code:
Ser_poll=SPOLL(@Rec)
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPKEY;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;A
PRINT A;
ENABLE INTR 7
RETURN
!
Example19: ! HPIB TRIGGERED DATA ACQUISITION ********************
PRINT
PRINT "Example 19, HPIB Triggered Data Acquisition"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; STEP; FOURP; CLES; TRGSHPIB; POIN 51;"
GOSUB Ready_for_trig
OUTPUT @Rec;"STITON; PAR1TOFF; PAR2TOFF; PAR3TOFF; PAR4TOFF;"
Trigs=51 ! number of triggers to be sent
PRINT "One trigger per point measures all parameters."
LINPUT "Press Return to start Triggered sweep.",Input$
GOSUB Send_triggers
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"CLES; TRGSHPIB;"
GOSUB Ready_for_trig
18-50 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
1877
1879
1881
1883
1885
1887
1889
1891
1893
1895
1897
1899
1901
1903
1905
1907
1909
1911
1913
1915
1917
1919
1921
1923
1925
1927
1929
1931
1933
1935
1937
1939
1941
1943
1945
1947
1949
1951
1953
1955
1957
1959
1961
1963
1965
1967
1969
1971
1973
1975
1977
1979
1981
1983
1985
1987
1989
1991
1993
1995
1997
1999
2001
2003
OUTPUT @Rec;"STITON; PAR1TOFF; PAR2TON; PAR3TON; PAR4TON;"
Trigs=204 ! one trigger per parameter (P1 measured by stimulus trig)
PRINT "One trigger per parameter, per point."
LINPUT "Press Return to Start Triggered Sweep.",Input$
GOSUB Send_triggers
!
INPUT "Press Return For Next Example",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"TRGSFRE;"
RETURN
!
Send_triggers: !
FOR I=1 TO Trigs
TRIGGER @Rec
DISP "Trigger";I
GOSUB Ready_for_trig
NEXT I
PRINT "Sweep Complete,";Trigs;" Triggers Sent"
RETURN
!
Ready_for_trig: !
REPEAT
WAIT .01
UNTIL BIT(SPOLL(@Rec),2) ! ready, waiting for trigger
RETURN
!
Example20: ! WAIT Required ************************************
PRINT
PRINT "Example 20, WAIT Required for display updates."
!
GOSUB Blank_keys
ON KEY 5 LABEL " NEXT EXAMPLE" GOTO Exit_example20
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUOFF; FOUPOVER; STEP; POIN101; SING;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA1; LINP; DATI; DISPMATH; PHAO 0;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; LINP; DATI; DISPMATH; PHAO 90;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA3; LINP; DATI; DISPMATH; PHAO 180;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA4; LINP; DATI; DISPMATH; PHAO 270;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPERRO;"
ENTER @Rec;Error_number ! clear message
!
! initial tint increment value
T=0
! electrical delay increment
M=2.5E-11
!
Eled:
!
FOR N=0 TO 1 STEP M
FOR P=1 TO 4
SELECT P
! Choose Parameter
CASE 1
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA1; COLRP1D;"
T1=T+0
CASE 2
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA2; COLRP2D;"
T1=T+25
CASE 3
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA3; COLRP3D;"
T1=T+50
CASE 4
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA4; COLRP4D;"
T1=T+75
END SELECT
IF T1>100 THEN T1=T1-100
! Change Color
OUTPUT @Rec;"TINT";INT(T1);";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"ELED";P*N;"s;" ! Increment Delay
!
HP-IB Programming 18-51
Programming Examples
2005
2007
2009
2011
2013
2015
2017
2019
2021
2023
2025
2027
2029
2031
2033
2035
2037
2039
2041
2043
2045
2047
2049
2051
2053
2055
2057
2059
2061
2063
2065
2067
2069
2071
2073
2075
2077
2079
2081
2083
2085
2087
2089
2091
2093
2095
2097
2099
2101
2103
2105
2107
2109
2111
2113
2115
2117
2119
2121
2123
2125
2127
2129
OUTPUT @Rec;"WAIT; ENTO;" ! This WAIT insures that the 8530 updates
! the display before executing more commands
!
T=T+.25 ! tint value increment
IF T>100 THEN T=0
NEXT P
NEXT N
GOTO Eled
!
Exit_example20: !
OUTPUT @Rec;"DEFC;"
! Default Colors
GOSUB Keys_off
RETURN
!
Example21: ! WAIT Not Required (holdoff included in OUTPxxxx) **********
PRINT
PRINT "Example 21, Wait Not Required (OUTPUxxxx holds off further execution)"
!
GOSUB Blank_keys
ON KEY 5 LABEL " NEXT EXAMPLE" GOTO Exit_example21
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; LOGM; SING; AUTO; STAR; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER @Rec;Freq1
OUTPUT @Rec;"STOP; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER @Rec;Freq2
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"MARK1"
LOOP
FOR N=Freq1 TO Freq2 STEP (Freq2-Freq1)/50
! move marker to new frequency
OUTPUT @Rec;N;";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPACTI;"
! read current marker frequency
ENTER @Rec;Freq
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPMARK;"
ENTER @Rec;Mag,Phase
DISP "Marker is ";Mag,Phase;" @ ";Freq;"Ghz"
NEXT N
END LOOP
!
Exit_example21: !
GOSUB Keys_off
OUTPUT @Rec;"CONT;"
RETURN
!
Example22: ! Enter Frequency List ****************
!
PRINT
PRINT "Example 22, Frequency List"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"PARA1;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"EDITLIST;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"SADD; STAR 2 GHz; STOP 4 GHz; STPSIZE 100 MHz; SDON;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"SADD; STAR 4 GHz; STOP 8 GHz; STPSIZE 200 MHz; SDON;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"SADD; STAR 8 GHz; STOP 16 GHz; STPSIZE 400 MHz; SDON;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"DUPD; EDITDONE;"
OUTPUT @Rec;"LISFREQ; SING;"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Output Frequency List and Data.",Input$
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"POIN; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Points
REDIM Freq_list(Points-1),Data(Points-1,1)
!
PRINT "Read Frequency List and Data from HP 8530."
18-52 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
2131
2133
2135
2137
2139
2141
2143
2145
2147
2149
2151
2153
2155
2157
2159
2161
2163
2165
2167
2169
2171
2173
2175
2177
2179
2181
2183
2185
2187
2189
2191
2193
2195
2197
2199
2201
2203
2205
2207
2209
2211
2213
2215
2217
2219
2221
2223
2225
2227
2229
2231
2233
2235
2237
2239
2241
OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; OUTPFREL;"
ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size_list,Freq_list(*)
OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; OUTPDATA;"
ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
!
PRINT "Selected Unformatted Data from";Points;" Point Frequency List"
FOR I=0 TO Points-1 STEP INT(Points/2)
PRINT "Point";I+1;" is ";Data(I,0);Data(I,1);" @ ";Freq_list(I)
NEXT I
!
Single_seg: !
INPUT "Enter Segment to Sweep (1-3) (0 to Exit).",Segment
IF Segment=0 THEN GOTO 2173
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"CONT; SSEG";Segment;";"
OUTPUT @Rec;"SEG?;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"SEGM; OUTPACTI;"
ENTER @Rec_data1;Segment
PRINT "Segment Being Swept is ";Input$;Segment
GOTO Single_seg
OUTPUT @Rec;"ASEG; MENUSTIM;"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Select STEP Sweep.",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"STEP;"
PRINT "STEP Sweep."
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Select Frequency List.",Input$
PRINT "Turn On Frequency List."
OUTPUT @Rec;"LISFREQ;"
!
LINPUT "Press Return for Next Example",Input$
REDIM Data(200,1)
!
RETURN
!
Example23:
! Learn String **********************
PRINT
PRINT "Example 23, Learn String"
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
LOCAL @Rec
LINPUT "Set State to Save then Press Return.",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPLEAS;"
! Always FORM1
ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size
PRINT "Learn String Length=";Size;"Bytes"
REDIM Learn_string(1:Size/2)
! Size Depends Upon Firmware Version
ENTER @Rec_data2;Learn_string(*)
OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES;"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Recall Previous Instrument State.",Input$
OUTPUT @Rec;"INPULEAS;"
OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Learn_string(*)
!
RETURN
!
HP-IB Programming 18-53
Programming Examples
2243
2245
2247
2249
2251
2253
2255
2257
2259
2261
2263
2265
2267
2269
2271
2273
2275
2277
2279
2281
2283
2285
2287
2289
2291
2293
2295
2297
2299
2301
2303
2305
2307
2309
2311
2313
2315
2317
2319
2321
2323
2325
2327
2329
2331
2333
2335
2337
2339
2341
2343
2345
2347
2349
2351
2353
2355
2357
2359
2361
2363
2365
2367
2369
2371
Example24:
! Input Floating Point or ASCII Data **********************
PRINT
PRINT "Example 24, Input Floating Point or ASCII Data"
!
GOSUB Blank_keys
ON KEY 5 LABEL " NEXT EXAMPLE" GOSUB Finish
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"HOLD; POIN201; PARA1; LINP; ENTO;"
!
OUTPUT 716;"FORM3; OUTPDATA;" ! Get Preamble and Size for Form 3 Input
ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size
OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO;"
!
DEG
Again24: !
Finish=0
Offset=0
!
LINPUT "ASCII OR FLOATING POINT (A or F)?",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="A" THEN
PRINT "Input ASCII (FORM4;) Data"
GOTO Input_ascii
ELSE
PRINT "Input Floating Point (FORM3;) Data"
END IF
!
! Input Floating Point
Input_fp:
IF Finish=1 THEN GOTO Exit_example24
GOSUB Compute_trace
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; INPUDATA;"
OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
GOTO Input_fp
!
! Input ASCII
Input_ascii:
IF Finish=1 THEN GOTO Exit_example24
GOSUB Compute_trace
!
OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM4; INPUDATA;";
OUTPUT @Rec_data1;Data_ascii$(*)
!
!
GOTO Input_ascii
!
Finish: !
Must Finish ASCII Trace Before Exit
Finish=1
RETURN
!
Exit_example24: !
LINPUT "Repeat Example (Y or N)?",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="Y" THEN GOTO Again24
GOSUB Keys_off
RETURN
!
!
Compute_trace:
Offset=Offset-10
FOR I=0 TO 200
Data(I,0)=SIN(2*I+Offset)
Data(I,1)=COS(2*I)
NEXT I
FOR I=0 TO 200
Data_ascii$(I,0)=VAL$(Data(I,0))
Data_ascii$(I,1)=VAL$(Data(I,1))
NEXT I
RETURN
18-54 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
2375 Example25:
! DELAY TABLE OPERATIONS *****************************
2377 PRINT
2379 PRINT "Example 25, Delay Table Operations"
2381
!
2383 OUTPUT @Rec;"USERPRES; LINP; SING; AUTO; DATI; DISPMATH; MARK1;"
2385 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; OUTPDATA;" ! current trace data is used for delay tbl.
2387 ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*) ! Get Data for Example
2389
!
2391 LINPUT "Press Return to Input Delay Table",Input$
2393 PRINT "Input Delay Table Data"
2395 OUTPUT @Rec;"HOLD; FORM3; INPUDELA;"
2397 OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
2399 !
2401 LINPUT "Press Return to Turn On Table Delay",Input$
2403 OUTPUT @Rec;"TABD;"
2405 !
2407 LINPUT "Press Return to Turn Off Table Delay",Input$
2409 OUTPUT @Rec;"COAD;" ! Or "WAVD;"
2411 !
2413 LINPUT "Press Return to Output Table Delay",Input$
2415 PRINT "Output Delay Table Data"
2417 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; OUTPDELA;"
2419 ENTER @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Data(*)
2421 !
2423 LINPUT "Press Return to Store Delay Table to Disc",Input$
2425 PRINT "Store and Load Delay Table to Disc"
2427 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIINT; STOR; DELT; DISF""DELT"";"
2429 !
2431 LINPUT "Press Return to Load Delay Table form Disc",Input$
2433 OUTPUT @Rec;"STOIINT; LOAD; DELT; DISF""DELT"";"
2435 !
2437 RETURN
2439 !
! Fast (CW,AD,D) Data Acquisition ************************
2441 Example26:
2443 !
2445 PRINT
2447 PRINT "Example 26, Fast (CW,AD,D) Data Acquisition"
2449 PRINT "PULSE GENERATOR OR AN EXTERNAL TRIGGER SOURCE NEEDED FOR THIS EXAMPLE"
2451 LINPUT "Proceed With This Example? (Y or N)",Input$
2453 IF UPC$(Input$)="N" THEN GOTO Exit_example26
2455 LINPUT "Connect Pulse Gen or an external trigger source to HP 8530 EXT TRIGGER IN.",Input$
2457 !
2459 OUTPUT @Rec;"ENTO; CONT; SINP;"
2461 OUTPUT @Rec;"CENT 10 GHz;"
! measurement frequency
2463 Again26: !
2465 GOSUB Blank_keys
2467 ON KEY 5 LABEL " NEXT EXAMPLE" GOSUB Exit_example26
2469 OUTPUT @Rec;"FASC;" ! "FASD;" or "FASAD;" can be used
! WAIT UNTIL 8530 IS READY TO TAKE DATA.
2471 REPEAT
WAIT .001
2473
2475 UNTIL BIT(SPOLL(@Rec),2)
! ISSUE A SINGLE HPIB TRIGGER TO BEGIN FAST MODE.
2477 TRIGGER @Rec
2479 !
2481 LINPUT "START PULSE GEN. OR EXTERNAL TRIGGER SOURCE THEN PRESS CONTINUE",Input$
2483 DISP "Collecting data, please wait..."
2485 !
2487 REDIM Form1_data(1:100,2) ! THE SIZE OF THIS ARRAY DETERMINES THE NUMBER
2489
! OF POINTS MEASURED
2491 ENTER @Rec_data2;Form1_data(*)! GET THE DATA, Continues when array is full
2493 !
HP-IB Programming 18-55
Programming Examples
2495
2497
2499
2501
2503
2505
2507
2509
2511
2513
2515
2517
2519
2521
2523
2525
2527
2529
2531
2533
2535
2537
2539
2541
2543
2545
2547
2549
2551
2553
2555
2557
2559
2561
2563
2565
2567
2569
2571
2573
2575
2577
2579
2581
2583
2585
2587
2589
2591
2593
2595
2597
2599
2601
2603
2605
2607
2609
2611
2613
2615
2617
2619
2621
Data_collected:
! COLLECT DATA IN FORM 1 FORMAT.
OUTPUT @Rec;"SINP;"
! EXIT FROM FAST DATA MODE.
OUTPUT @Rec;"OUTPERRO;" ! CHECK ERROR STATUS.
ENTER @Rec_data1;Error_number,Input$
PRINT "HP 8530A ERROR STATUS: ";Error_number,Input$
PRINT SIZE(Form1_data,1);"Points Data Collected"
!
LINPUT "Press Return to Convert Data",Input$
!
! This table is used to convert the exponent value from form1 data
REAL Exp_tbl(0:255)
Exp_tbl(0)=2^(-15)
! BUILD EXPONENT TABLE FOR DATA CONVERSION
FOR I=0 TO 126
Exp_tbl(I+1)=Exp_tbl(I)+Exp_tbl(I)
NEXT I
Exp_tbl(128)=2^(-143)
FOR I=128 TO 254
Exp_tbl(I+1)=Exp_tbl(I)+Exp_tbl(I)
NEXT I
!
FOR N=1 TO SIZE(Form1_data,1) ! CONVERT THE DATA.
Exponent=Exp_tbl(BINAND(Form1_data(N,2),255))
Real=Form1_data(N,1)*Exponent
Imag=Form1_data(N,0)*Exponent
Lin_mag=20*LGT(SQRT(Real^2+Imag^2))
IF N/20=INT(N/20) THEN PRINT "Point";N;") ";Lin_mag
NEXT N
!
Exit_example26: !
GOSUB Keys_off
LINPUT "Repeat Example? (Y or N)",Input$
IF UPC$(Input$)="N" THEN
RETURN
ELSE
GOTO Again26
END IF
!
! ****************
! End of Examples. The following subroutines are used by the examples
! ****************
Wait_loop:WAIT .01
GOTO Wait_loop
! ********
Blank_keys:
! erases all the softkeys
FOR I=1 TO 8
ON KEY I LABEL "" GOSUB Do_nothing
NEXT I
! ********
Do_nothing:
!
WAIT .01
RETURN
! ******
Keys_off: !
FOR I=1 TO 8
OFF KEY I
NEXT I
! *************
Load_ant_arrays: ! Load arrays with antenna data (examples 4 & 15)
ASSIGN @File TO "ANG360"
ENTER @File;Preamble,Size,Ant_data(*)
!
ASSIGN @File TO "ANG180_SUM"
ENTER @File;Preamble,Size,Ant_sum(*)
!
18-56 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
2623 ASSIGN @File TO "ANG180_DEL"
2625 ENTER @File;Preamble,Size,Ant_del(*)
2627 ASSIGN @File TO *
2629 RETURN
2631 ! ******
2633 ! The following two subroutines are used by some examples to draw
2635 ! antenna patterens to the 8530 display.
2637 ! ******
2639 Draw_360:
! Draws 360 degree antenna pattern
2641 Preamble=9025
2643 Size=5776
2645 OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUOFF; ANGL; STAR-180; STOP180; INCA1; HOLD; ENTO;"
2647 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; INPURAW1;"
2649 OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Ant_data(*)
2651 LOCAL @Rec
2653 RETURN
2655 ! *******
2657 Draw_mono:
! Draws monopulse antenna sum and delta to P1 & P2
2659 Preamble=9025
2661 Size=2896
2663 OUTPUT @Rec;"DEBUOFF; ANGL; TWOP; STAR-90; STOP90; INCA1; HOLD; ENTO;"
2665 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; INPURAW1;"
2667 OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Ant_sum(*)
2669 OUTPUT @Rec;"FORM3; INPURAW2;"
2671 OUTPUT @Rec_data2;Preamble,Size,Ant_del(*)
2673 LOCAL @Rec
2675 RETURN
2677 !
2679 !
2681 END
2683 !
2685 !
2687 SUB Fast_mux
PRINT
2689
PRINT "Example 27, Fast Mux Operation"
2691
2693 Fast_mux: ! This is a stand alone sub-program which demonstrates
! 8530 fast mux operation - Example 27
2695
2697
!
INTEGER Data_buffer(1:30000) BUFFER
2699
INTEGER Setup
2701
2703
REAL Set_pointer,Param_pointer,Data_pointer,Reps,I,Old_pointer
REAL Log_mag(1:2),Phase(1:2)
2705
2707
REAL Exp_tbl(0:255),Exp,Data_16bit(0:800,0:1)
2709
DIM Display$[80],Report$[200]
2711
COMPLEX Data_set(1:2)
2713
ASSIGN @A8530_data TO 716;FORMAT OFF
2715
ASSIGN @A8530_control TO 716;FORMAT ON
2717
Setup=0
Dwell_time=250 !FAST PARAMETER PER POINT MEASUREMENT TIME IN MICROSECONDS (NO AVERAGING)
2719
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2721
! DISPLAY INITIALIZATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
2723
2725
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2727
PRINTER IS CRT
2729
DEG
2731
GRAPHICS OFF
2733
PRINT "This example demonstrates the FAST IF MULTIPLEXING feature of "
2735
PRINT "the HP 8530A. It requires firmware rev 1.4 or higher. An external"
2737
PRINT "trigger source should be connected to the 8530A Event Trigger input"
2739
PRINT "on the rear panel. The STOP SWEEP input should be disconnected for"
2741
PRINT "this test. During the test, the 8530A will be in MUX MODE 2 in which"
HP-IB Programming 18-57
Programming Examples
2743
PRINT "both b1/a1 and b2/a1 measurements are taken upon the receipt of each"
2745
PRINT "event trigger. The trigger should be a negative going TTL pulse with"
2747
PRINT "a pulse width between 1uS and 100uS. For this example, the minimum "
2749
PRINT "period between two triggers is 500 us (ASSUMES NO AVERAGING)."
2751
DISP " PREPARE SYSTEM FOR TEST AS DESCRIBED AND CONTINUE (OR EXIT)"
2753
FOR N=0 TO 4
2755
ON KEY N LABEL "CONTINUE" GOTO Setup
2757
ON KEY N+5 LABEL " EXIT " GOTO No_go
2759
NEXT N
2761
LOOP
2763
END LOOP
2765 Setup: !
2767
DISP "SETTING UP 8530 FOR MEASURMENT"
2769
FOR N=0 TO 9
2771
OFF KEY N
2773
NEXT N
2775
GOSUB Setup_fastmux
! INITIALIZATION ROUTINE PUTS 8530A INTO FAST MUX MODE 2
2777 No_go:IF Setup=0 THEN
2779
DISP ""
2781
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"RECA8"
2783
LOCAL @A8530_control
2785
SUBEXIT
2787
END IF
! CREATES ARRAY EXP_TBL(*) USED TO CONVERT COMPRESSED DATA
GOSUB Build_table
2789
! TO BASIC REAL VALUES
2791
2793 Take_data: !
WAIT 1
2795
Reps=0
2797
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2799
! DATA DISPLAY
2801
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2803
PRINT " _______________________________________________________________________"
2805
| MEASUREMENT COUNT |"
||
b2/a1
b1/a1
PRINT "|
2807
|"
|
||
PRINT "|
2809
|"
PHASE |
|| MAGNITUDE
PHASE
PRINT "| MAGNITUDE
2811
|"
(DEG) |
(dB) |
||
| (DEG)
(dB)
PRINT "|
2813
|"
|
|
|
||
PRINT "|
2815
2817
PRINT "|___________|___________||___________|___________|______________________|"
DISP "TRIGGER MEASUREMENTS, PRESS SOFTKEY LABELED 'EXIT' WHEN FINISHED"
2819
!
2821
2823
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! CONTINUOUS TRANSFER DATA LOOP. USING TRANSFER ALLOWS FOR RAPID INPUT OF DATA
2825
2827
! FROM THE 8530A. DATA IS DISPLAYED DURING COMPUTORS "SPARE TIME"
2829
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2831
LOOP
2833
ASSIGN @Buffer TO BUFFER Data_buffer(*)
! INITIALIZE TRANSFER BUFFER
2835
Old_pointer=0
2837
Set_pointer=1
!
2839
!! TRANSFER STATEMENT: EACH MEASUREMENT IS TRANSFERED IN THREE INTEGERS, OR 6 BYTES,
2841
!! SO COUNT 6 ALLOWS TRACKING OF THE BUFFER AS IT COLLECTS DATA FROM THE INSTRUMENT.
2843
2845
TRANSFER @A8530_data TO @Buffer;RECORDS 10000,EOR (COUNT 6)
2847
FOR N=0 TO 10
2849
ON KEY N LABEL " EXIT ",15 GOTO Finished
2851
NEXT N
18-58 HP-IB Programming
Programming Examples
2853
2855
2857
2859
2861
2863
2865
2867
2869
2871
2873
2875
2877
2879
2881
2883
2885
2887
2889
2891
2893
2895
2897
2899
2901
2903
2905
2907
2909
2911
2913
2915
2917
2919
2921
2923
2925
2927
2929
2931
2933
2935
2937
2939
2941
2943
2945
2947
2949
2951
2953
2955
2957
LOOP
STATUS @Buffer,4;Data_pointer
!! SINCE WE ARE MAKING TWO MEASUREMENTS AT A TIME, THE DISPLAY IS ONLY UPDATED WHEN
!! THE DATA POINTER IS POINTING TO THE END OF A NEW PAIR OF MEASUREMENTS. THIS
!! TECHNIQUE SKIPS A LOT OF DATA DURING FAST MEASUREMENTS, BUT ALLOWS THE DISPLAY
!! TO KEEP UP WITH THE DATA FLOW.
IF Data_pointer MOD 12=0 THEN
IF Data_pointer>Old_pointer THEN
Old_pointer=Data_pointer
!!
!!! THE FOLLOWING LOOP CONVERTS TWO MEASUREMENTS FROM THE 8530 COMPRESSED FORMAT
!!! TO BASIC COMPLEX VALUES. IT THEN CALCULATES THE MAGNITUDE AND PHASE OF EACH
!!! MEASUREMENT AND UPDATES THE DISPLAY
!!
FOR Param_pointer=1 TO 2
Data_pointer=Old_pointer-6*(2-Param_pointer)
Exp=Exp_tbl(BINAND(Data_buffer(Data_pointer/2),255))
Data_set(Param_pointer)=CMPLX(Data_buffer(Data_pointer/2-1)*Exp,Data_buffer
(Data_pointer/2-2)*Exp)
Log_mag(Param_pointer)=20*LGT(ABS(Data_set(Param_pointer)))
Phase(Param_pointer)=ARG(Data_set(Param_pointer))
OUTPUT Display$ USING """|"",2(2X,S3D.2D,2X,""|""),#";Log_mag(Param_pointer),
Phase(Param_pointer)
PRINT TABXY(1+25*(Param_pointer-1),17),Display$
NEXT Param_pointer
Data_pointer=Old_pointer
!!
!! NOW PRINT THE CURRENT MEASUREMENT COUNT
!!
PRINT TABXY(5+25*(Param_pointer-1),17);Data_pointer/12+5000*Reps
END IF
END IF
! THE BUFFER IS RE-INITIALIZED TO PREVENT OVERFLOW
EXIT IF Data_pointer/12=5000
END LOOP
Reps=Reps+1
ASSIGN @Buffer TO *
END LOOP
Finished: !
DISP "CLEARING I/O CHANNEL AND RE-SETTING 8530A"
! TURN OFF THE TRANSFER
ABORTIO @A8530_data
ASSIGN @Buffer TO *
! TURN OFF FAST MUX MODE
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"SING"
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"RECA8"
! PUT 8530A IN STANDARD STATE
FOR N=0 TO 9
OFF KEY N
NEXT N
WAIT 1
ABORT 7
CLEAR 7
! PUT 8530A IN LOCAL
LOCAL @A8530_control
DISP ""
SUBEXIT
Build_table: ! USED FOR DATA CONVERSION
!
Exp_tbl(0)=2^(-15)
HP-IB Programming 18-59
Programming Examples
2959
FOR I=0 TO 126
2961
Exp_tbl(I+1)=Exp_tbl(I)+Exp_tbl(I)
2963
NEXT I
2965
Exp_tbl(128)=2^(-143)
2967
FOR I=128 TO 254
2969
Exp_tbl(I+1)=Exp_tbl(I)+Exp_tbl(I)
2971
NEXT I
2973
RETURN
2975 Setup_fastmux:
!
2977
Setup=0
2979
ABORT 7
2981
CLEAR 7
2983
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"RECA8"
! START IN KNOWN WORKING STATE
2985
WAIT 3
2987
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"HOLD;SINP"
! GO TO HOLD MODE, SINGLE POINT
2989
INPUT "ENTER FREQUENCY OF MEASUREMENT (IN GHz)",Freq
2991
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"OUTPERRO"
! CLEAR THE MESSAGE LINE
2993
ENTER @A8530_control;Report$
2994
! SET TO SELECTED FREQUECY, MAKE A CW MEASUREMENT:
2995
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"CENT"&VAL$(Freq)&"GHz;SING"
2996
! SET FAST MUX DELAY TIME (250 uS)
2997
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"FASPARMTIME "&VAL$(Dwell_time)
2998
! SET UP FAST MUX MODE 2 (SEE O&P MANUAL FOR OTHERS)
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"FASMUXMODE 2; FASMD"
2999
! CHECK FOR ERRORS DURING SET UP
OUTPUT @A8530_control;"OUTPERRO"
3001
ENTER @A8530_control;Report$
3003
IF VAL(Report$)<>0 THEN
3005
PRINT TABXY(1,30),"THE FOLLOWING PROBLEM OCCURED DURING 8530A SETUP:"
3007
PRINT ""
3009
PRINT Report$
3011
DISP "RESOLVE PROBLEM AND CONTINUE ( OR EXIT )"
3013
FOR N=0 TO 4
3015
ON KEY N LABEL "CONTINUE" GOTO Setup_fastmux
3017
ON KEY N+5 LABEL "EXIT" GOTO Setup_failed
3019
NEXT N
3021
3023 Wait_for_key:GOTO Wait_for_key
END IF
3025
! WAIT FOR 8530A SRQ MASK BIT
3027
REPEAT
WAIT .01
3029
UNTIL BIT(SPOLL(716),2)
3031
! DROPS 8530A INTO THE SELECTED FAST DATA MODE
3033
TRIGGER @A8530_control
! (FAST MUX MODE 2)
Setup=1
3035
3037 Setup_failed:
!
3039
RETURN
3041 SUBEND
The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus, HP-IB, is the Hewlett-Packard implementation of IEEE
standard 488, dated 1978, and IEC 625-1. For technical information on the HP-IB, refer to the
Tutorial Description of the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus; Part Number 5952-0156. Also see
IEEE standard 728-1982, IEEE Recommended Practice for Code and Format Conventions.
18-60 HP-IB Programming
Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance
19
Operator's Check
The following system operation checks conrm that the system is functional and ready for
performance verication or operation. These simple checks are optional, their intent is to
establish condence in the integrity of the system.
Use a small-diameter object (such as a straightened paper clip) to press the front panel TEST
button (located under the disc drive). Observe the display for the self-test sequence:
TESTING
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
(ashes once briey)
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
RECALLING INST STATE
The instrument state recalled is exactly the same as a Factory Preset with the addition of
resetting the display colors to their default values.
The display should show a trace similar to the gure below.
Figure 19-1. Typical Preset State Display
1. Make sure there is an RF signal path between the transmit source and the frequency
converter. Use one of the following methods:
a. Connect a Transmit antenna to the transmit source, and receive antennas to b2 and a1
frequency converter inputs. For a direct reference signal connection, attach a directional
coupler or splitter to the transmit signal. Run a cable from the coupler or splitter directly
to the a1 input of the frequency converter.
Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance 19-1
b. If you do not wish to use antennas at all: Use a directional coupler (or splitter) and cables
to connect the transmit source directly to the a1 and b2 inputs.
2. Use a small-diameter object (such as a straightened paper clip) to press the front panel TEST
button (located under the disc drive). Observe the display for the self-test sequence:
TESTING
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
(ashes once briey)
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS
RECALLING INST STATE
The instrument state recalled is exactly the same as a Factory Preset with the addition of
resetting the display colors to their default values.
The display should show a trace similar to the gure below.
Figure 19-2. Typical Preset State Display
This concludes the basic system test. To thoroughly check the performance of the system, refer
to the \Performance Verication" procedures (in the service manual). To operate the system,
refer to the operating manual.
19-2 Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance consists of ve tasks that should be performed at least every six months.
If the system is used daily on a production line or in a harsh environment, the tasks should be
performed more often. The tasks are:
Maintain proper air ow.
Inspect and clean connectors.
Clean the glass lter (and display as required).
Degauss the display.
Maintain Proper Air Flow
It is necessary to maintain constant air ow in and around your receiver system. If the
message, CAUTION: FREQUENCY CONVERTER IS TOO HOT! or CAUTION: TEST SET IS TOO HOT!
is displayed, make sure the frequency converter fan is not blocked. Items on top of the
frequency converter or around the system may also impede the air ow. The test set will
not shut down if it becomes too hot! If the HP 8530 overheats, it will shut down until the
temperature drops to the operating range.
Additionally, it is recommended that the source fan lter (if any) be inspected periodically and
be cleaned if necessary.
Connector Care
The condition of system connectors has a serious aect on measurement accuracy. Worn,
out-of-tolerance, or dirty connectors degrade measurement accuracy. For more information
on connector care, please see Application Note 326 Coaxial Systems Principles of Microwave
Connector Care.
Recommended Practices
HP strongly recommends that you use a \connector saver" on the RF input of the mixers.
This is especially important on the test mixer, which is connected and disconnected often. A
\connector saver" is an adapter or short cable. This practice has two important advantages:
The \connector saver" receives daily wear, the mixer input connector does not. This greatly
extends the life of the mixer's input connector.
It is the connector saver that gets dirty with use, not the mixer connector.
When you must clean the connector saver, remove it from the mixer. This protects the mixer
from static discharge.
Caution
The HP 8530A and HP down converters contain static sensitive devices. Do
not touch the center conductor of any connector, or the center conductor of
any cable connected to the HP 8530A or its downconverter. Wear a grounded
anti-static strap when cleaning connectors.
Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance 19-3
How to Inspect Connectors for Wear
Look for metal particles from the connector threads and other signs of wear (such as
discoloration or roughness). Visible wear can aect measurement accuracy. Discard or repair
any device with a damaged connector. A bad connector can ruin a good connector on the rst
mating.
Use caution when mating SMA connectors to the mixer's precision 3.5 mm RF input. SMA
connectors are not precision devices, and are often out of mechanical tolerances, even when
new. An out-of-tolerance SMA connector can ruin the mixer's RF input connector on the rst
mating. If in doubt, gage the SMA connector before connecting it to the mixer. The center
conductor must NEVER extend beyond the mating plane.
How to Clean Connectors
Part numbers for cleaning supplies are provided after the procedure.
1. Blow particulate matter from connectors using an environmentally-safe aerosol
such as Ultrajet. This product is recommended by the United States Environmental
Protection Agency, and contains chlorodiuoromethane. You can order this aerosol from
Hewlett-Packard.
2. Next, use an alcohol wipe to wipe connector surfaces. It is best to wet a small swab with
alcohol (from the alcohol wipe) and clean the connector with the swab.
3. Allow the alcohol to evaporate o the connector before making connections
Caution
DO NOT ALLOW EXCESSIVE ALCOHOL TO RUN INTO THE CONNECTOR!
Excessive alcohol entering the connector collects in pockets in the connector's
internal parts. The liquid will cause random changes in the connector's
electrical performance. If excessive alcohol gets into a connector, lay it aside
to allow the alcohol to evaporate. This takes up to 3 days. If you attach that
connector to another device it can take much longer for trapped alcohol to
evaporate.
Connector Cleaning Supplies
Ultrajet: 9310-6395
Alcohol wipes: 92193N
Lint-Free cloths: 9310-4242
Small foam swabs: 9300-1270
Large foam swabs: 9300-0468
Clean the Glass Filter (and display as Required)
A gasket between the display and glass lter limits air dust inltration between them.
Therefore, cleaning the outer surface of the glass lter is usually sucient. Use a soft cloth
and, if necessary, a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated surfaces: HP part
number 8500-2163 is one such solution.
If, after cleaning the outer surface of the glass lter, the display appears dark or dirty or
unfocused, clean the inner surface of the lter, and the display.
19-4 Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance
Cleaning the display
1. Remove the softkeys cover (a plastic cover through which the front panel softkeys
protrude): carefully insert a thin, at screwdriver blade (or your ngernail) between the
upper left corner of the softkeys cover and the glass lter. See Figure 19-3. Be extremely
careful not to scratch or break the glass. Carefully pull the cover forward and o.
2. Use a #10 TORX driver to remove the two screws that are now visible.
Figure 19-3. Removing the Glass Filter
3. Remove the display bezel assembly by pulling out the end that is now free. Pivot the bezel
around its left edge until it is released.
4. Clean the display surface and the inner glass lter surface gently, as in step 1.
5. Allow the surfaces to dry and then reassemble the instrument.
Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance 19-5
Degauss (Demagnetize) the Display
Caution
A degaussing tool will erase diskettes if they are if they are laying nearby!
If the display becomes magnetized, or if color purity is a problem, cycle the power several
times. Leave the instrument o for at least 15 seconds before turning it on. This activates
the automatic degaussing circuit in the receiver display. If this is insucient to achieve color
purity, a commercially available demagnetizer must be used (either a CRT (cathode ray tube)
demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used). Follow the manufacturer's instructions
keeping in mind the following: it is imperative that at rst it be placed no closer than 4 inches
(10 cm) from the face of the display while demagnetizing the display. If this distance is too far
to completely demagnetize the display, try again at a slightly closer distance until the display
is demagnetized. Generally, degaussing is accomplished with a slow rotary motion of the
degausser, moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away from the
display.
Caution
Applying an excessively strong magnetic eld to the display face can destroy
the CRT.
Like most displays, the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic elds generated from unshielded
motors. In countries that use 50 Hz, some 10 Hz jitter may be observed. If this problem is
observed, remove the device causing the magnetic eld. Figure Figure 19-4 shows the motion
for degaussing the display.
Figure 19-4. Motion for Degaussing the Display
19-6 Operator's Check and Routine Maintenance
20
In Case of Diculty
This chapter explains:
How to solve common operation problems.
What to do when common error messages are displayed on the HP 8530A.
How to solve basic hardware problems.
Chapter Contents
Common Operation Problems
Receiver will not Sweep
IF Signal Level Problems
LO Signal Level Problems (applies to HP 85309A only)
Rotary Joint Problems
Common Error Messages
Hardware Problems
HP 8530A Locks Up (the controls stop working completely)
An Instrument (in the system) will not Respond to Computer Control
A System Bus Instrument will not Respond
HP 85309 LO/IF Unit Problems
In Case of Diculty 20-1
Common Operation Problems
Common Operation Problems
The following problems are listed in this section:
Receiver will not Sweep
IF Signal Level Problems
LO Signal Level Problems
Rotary Joint Problems
Receiver will not Sweep
First, look at the \annotation" area of the display (on the far left-hand side). See if any of the
following annotation letters are displayed:
H
This indicates that Hold mode is On. The instrument will not sweep in hold
mode. Take the receiver out of Hold mode by pressing:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE , then select SINGLE , NUMBER of GROUPS , or
CONTINUAL .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
This indicates that External Trigger or HP-IB Trigger mode is On. If you want
perform measurements that are internally triggered, press:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE TRIG SRC INTERNAL
E
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Check the Selected Sweep Mode
If you are trying to use Ramp mode, make sure the required BNC cables are connected between
the RF source and the receiver. These connections are explained in the Ramp sweep mode
description in Chapter 6 (refer to the index under \ramp sweep mode" for the exact page
number).
Check the System Phase Lock Setting
The phase lock controls are available under:
4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK
There are three settings, which should be used as explained below:
Select this mode if the system uses a distributed frequency converter such as
EXTERNAL
the HP 85309A and an HP 8350B LO source. Make sure the receiver's L.O.
PHASELOCK OUT connector is connected to the HP 8350B FM IN jack.
Select this mode if the system uses an HP 8511 or S-Parameter (network
INTERNAL
analyzer) test set.
Select this mode if the system uses a distributed frequency converter such as
NONE
the HP 85309A and a synthesized LO source.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
20-2 In Case of Diculty
Common Operation Problems
IF Signal Level Problems
To check the HP 8530A's IF signal levels, press PARAMETER 4MENU5 SERVICE PARAMETERS ,
then press one of the following:
SERVICE 1 a1 to check the a1 Reference channel IF signal level.
SERVICE 2 b2 to check the b2 Test channel IF signal level.
SERVICE 3 a2 to check the a2 Test channel IF signal level.
SERVICE 4 b1 to check the b1 Test channel IF signal level.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
On Systems Using the HP 85309A Frequency Converter
a1 Reference Channel Level
If the LO source is synthesized there is no minimum reference channel level, since phase lock is
not used. The maximum signal level is 010 dBm. It is recommended, but not required, that the
reference channel signal level be greater than 045 dBm. This will keep the reference channel
signal above the noise oor, improving measurement accuracy.
If the LO source is not synthesized, the reference channel signal level must be greater than 045
dBm at the HP 8530A reference input.
To calculate the reference channel IF signal level use the calculations in \Conguring the
System for Optimum Dynamic Range," located the Operation chapter of the HP 85301C or
85310A manual. Suspect a problem if the actual measured value is not within 66 dB of the
calculated value.
b2, b1, a2 Test Channel Level
To calculate the test channel IF signal level use the calculations in \Conguring the System for
Optimum Dynamic Range," located the Operation chapter of the HP 85301C or 85310A manual.
Suspect a problem if the actual measured value is not within 66 dB of the calculated value.
On Systems Using the HP 8511A/B Frequency Converter
a1 Reference Channel Level
The reference channel level must be between 045 and 010 dBm. The signal level must remain
at, or above the 045 dBm level (at the receiver's reference input) to maintain phase lock.
To calculate the reference channel IF signal level use the calculations in \Conguring the
System for Optimum Dynamic Range," located the Operation chapter of the HP 85301C or
85310A manual. Suspect a problem if the actual measured value is not within 66 dB of the
calculated value.
b2, b1, a2 Test Channel Level
To calculate the test channel IF signal level use the calculations in \Conguring the System for
Optimum Dynamic Range," located the Operation chapter of the HP 85301C or 85310A manual.
Suspect a problem if the actual measured value is not within 66 dB of the calculated value.
Possible Solutions
No IF Signal
1. Make sure the receiver system is installed correctly, or has not been changed. Refer to the
HP 8530A Installation Guide.
2. Make sure test and reference antennas are connected to the frequency downconverter.
Make sure the transmit antenna are pointing toward them.
In Case of Diculty 20-3
Common Operation Problems
3. Perform one of the following sub steps, depending on the frequency converter in your
system:
a. If your system uses the HP 85309 frequency converter:
Make sure that the IF signal cables from the LO/IF unit's IF OUT to the HP 8530A's J1
TEST SET INTERCONNECT are connected to the correct channels.
Make sure the HP 85309A and LO source are turned ON.
b. If your system uses the HP 8511A/B frequency converter:
Make sure the Test Set Interconnect cable is connected between the receiver and the HP
8511A/B.
Make sure that the HP 8511A/B is turned on.
Incorrect IF Signal Level
1. Double-check the calculation in \Conguring the System for Optimum Dynamic Range,"
located the Operation chapter of the HP 85301C or 85310A manual. Check the receiver
system using a standard gain antenna to double-check the calculations.
2. Check the output power level of the transmitter source (and optional amplier) for the
correct level, especially at high frequencies.
3. Make sure the receiver system is installed correctly, or has not been changed. Refer to the
HP 8530A Installation Guide.
4. If using the HP 85309A frequency converter: Check the detector voltage on the front panel.
The voltage should be approximately the value on the reference mixer module label.
LO Signal Level Problems (applies to the HP 85309A only)
LO Signal Is Too Low
If the LO signal level is too low, check the following items:
1. Adjust the LO signal level as shown in the HP 85301B or HP 85310A Operating and Service
Manual.
2. Check the LO signal cables for damage, or high RF insertion loss.
3. Check the rotary joint for high RF insertion loss.
HP 85309A \LO POWER OUT OF RANGE" light is ON During Measurement
If this light is ashing, make sure the HP 85309A POS Z BLANK is connected to POS Z BLANK on
the LO source.
If the light is still blinking, or is ON continuously, refer to the service chapter in the HP 85310A
Operating and Service Manual.
20-4 In Case of Diculty
Common Operation Problems
Rotary Joint Problems
Rotary joints must operate at microwave frequencies, and they must physically rotate around
a center axis. Because of this, rotary joints are a common source of problems. All of these
problems cause measurement error and should be corrected immediately. Some common
problems are:
Wow is a uctuation in the test signal level as the antenna positioner rotates. This causes
measurement error at certain antenna positions.
High insertion loss can reduce the LO signal level to the mixers modules. This can increase
the mixers conversion loss, making the measurement system unusable. When the rotary joint
is worn out, it will often have this problem.
Drop outs are caused by the rotary joint having a high insertion loss at certain frequencies or
angular positions. This can cause measurement error only at certain frequencies.
Intermittent rotary joints can cause the test signal to fade randomly. This can cause random
measurement errors.
Noise on the signal is caused by an intermittent rotary joint with very fast intermittent
fading. This can look like noise on the test signal.
Most of the above problems can be solved by cleaning the rotary joint. If the rotary joint
cannot be cleaned, or if cleaning does not solve the problem, replace the rotary joint.
In Case of Diculty 20-5
Common Error Messages
Common Error Messages
The following is a list of HP 8530A error messages. This is not a comprehensive list, and shows
messages that are caused by simple procedural errors. If the error message continues to occur
then use check for proper installation and setup. Refer to the \Caution/Tell Messages" chapter
in the HP 8530A Keyword Dictionary for a complete list of error messages.
A
\ABORTED ENCODER TRIGGERED SWEEP"
This message is displayed if you change modes in the middle of a sweep. For example, if you
select frequency domain instead of angle domain, or if you select a dierent sweep mode in the
middle of a sweep.
\ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED"
In Antenna Calibration
The antenna denitions you used during the calibration do not cover the entire frequency
range of the cal. There are either gaps between adjacent antenna denitions, or they do not
provide full coverage at the beginning or end of the frequency range. You must measure one or
more additional standards to cover the entire frequency range.
In Network Analyzer Calibration
The calibration standards you used during the calibration do not cover the entire frequency
range of the cal. The standards you have measured do not provide full coverage over the
selected frequency range. You must measure one or more additional standards to cover the
entire frequency range.
C
\CALIBRATION RESET"
Occurs when you change settings such that the calibration is incompatible with the
measurement. Calibration goes OFF if this message is displayed.
\CORRECTION MAY BE INVALID"
Occurs when you change settings and the receiver is not sure if the calibration is still valid.
Calibration remains ON.
20-6 In Case of Diculty
Common Error Messages
E
\ENCODER NOT FOUND"
The HP 85370A Position Encoder is not connected to the back of the HP 8530A.
\ENCODER OFFSET ANGLE ALREADY SAVED"
The receiver does not allow you to press SAVE OFFSET twice in the same sweep, unless you
clear the rst oset. If you want to change the oset value (without taking another sweep),
press CLEAR OFFSET , then SAVE OFFSET .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
F
\FREQUENCY CONVERTER IS TOO HOT!"
Occurs if the fan on the HP 8511A/B frequency converter is blocked with paper or other
object. Items on top of the frequency converter or around the system may also impede the air
ow. The test set will not shut down if it becomes too hot!
I
\IF OVERLOAD"
This occurs if the power going to any receiver input is greater than -10 dBm. You should lower
the power level going to the inputs.
System cables can have less power loss at lower frequencies. Long cables can cause signicant
losses at high frequencies. If you turn RF power up, you might overdrive the receiver inputs at
lower frequencies. Solve this problem using the Power Slope feature. Power Slope increases RF
power as the sweep progresses. This feature is explained near the end of Chapter 6, Stimulus.
In Case of Diculty 20-7
Common Error Messages
N
\NO IF FOUND"
The usual cause is inadequate power at the reference input of the HP 8530A (a1 is usually used
as the reference input). Verify that the appropriate power levels are available, especially at the
reference phase lock input by pressing:
PARAMETER 4MENU5 SERVICE PARAMETERS
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
SERVICE 1 a1
The signal level should be between 045 and 010 dBm.
If you are using an HP 85309A frequency converter, make sure you are not using Ramp sweep
mode. Use Step sweep mode instead.
O
\OPTION #005 NOT INSTALLED"
The position encoder functions cannot be used unless the HP 8530A is equipped with option
005. This message is displayed if your HP 8530A does not have option 005 installed. Option
005 adds a new PC (printed circuit) board to the HP 8530A, and adds a new rear panel
connected (ENCODER INTERCONNECT). Contact your HP representative for more information.
\OVERSPEED ERROR - BACKUP"
You are moving the positioner so fast that the HP 85370A Position Encoder cannot track the
measurement. Overspeed conditions may occur when the measurement uses high averaging
factors with small increment angles. To correct the error:
1. Stop forward movement.
2. Move the positioner backwards until the receiver beeps.
3. Continue with the measurement either at a slower rate, with a larger increment angle, or
with a smaller averaging factor.
20-8 In Case of Diculty
Common Error Messages
P
\PHASE-LOCK LOST"
This error message occurs when the HP 8530A is not receiving a signal at the reference input
while a measurement is in process. The reference input is usually a1, but this can be changed
to the a2 input by the user. The usual cause of this problem is inadequate power at the
reference input of the HP 8530A. Verify that the reference input receives between 045 dB and
010 dB.
Phase Lock Problems when using Hardware Gating
Do not attempt to phase lock to a signal that is sent through a hardware gate. Use a separate
phase lock signal. For example: Assume you use hardware gating and your test and reference
signals pass through a hardware gate. You are using b1 as the test input and a1 as the
reference input. By default, phase lock is set to a1. However, the gated signal arriving at a1
is essentially a pulsed signal with a low duty cycle. The result is an average power level that
is too low to use for phase locking. To solve the problem, split o the test signal before it gets
to the hardware gate, and connect it to the a2 input. Select the a2 input as the phase lock
reference by pressing:
PARAMETER 4MENU5 REDEFINE PARAMETER PHASE LOCK a2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNN
S
\SOURCE (1 or 2) FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED"
This error often occurs if the RF or (if used) LO source do not have anything connected to their
STOP SWP connectors. You can solve this problem in either of two ways:
You can connect the STOP SWP line to the STOP SWP connector on the back of the receiver.
You can connect a BNC short to the source's STOP SWP connector.
\SWEEP SYNC ERROR"
This error may occur if the HP 8530A is in the RAMP mode, and the appropriate BNC
connections have not been made. Refer to the Ramp sweep mode description in Chapter 6
(refer to the index under \ramp sweep mode" for the exact page number).
\SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR"
NOTE: References to an LO source, below, only applies to systems that use the HP 85309A
frequency converter.
The receiver cannot communicate with the RF or LO source, or the CONVERTER address in the
HP-IB menu is set improperly.
1. Make sure the RF and LO source HP-IB cables are connected to the receiver's System Bus
(directly or through HP-IB extenders).
2. Make sure the SOURCE 1 (RF) and SOURCE 2 (LO) addresses shown in the receiver's HP-IB
menu match the actual addresses of the RF and LO sources.)
In Case of Diculty 20-9
Common Error Messages
3. If using the HP 85309A, make sure CONVERTER in the receiver's HP-IB menu is set to 31.
4. If using the HP 8511A/B, make sure CONVERTER in the receiver's HP-IB menu is set as
explained below:
A. If using an HP 8511A with option 001, make sure it is connected to the receiver's
System Bus. The factory default HP-IB address is 20. Set the CONVERTER address (in
the Receiver's HP-IB menu) to match the address setting on the HP 8511A.
B. If using an HP 8511A that does not have option 001, then you do not need it to the
System Bus.
If the HP 8511A is not connected to the System Bus, enter address 31 for the
CONVERTER address of the receiver's HP-IB menu.
If you decide you want the HP 8511A connected to the System Bus (though this
connection is not required), enter the HP-IB address of the HP 8511 in the receiver's
HP-IB menu.
C. If using an HP 8511B, make sure it is connected to the receiver's System Bus. The
factory default HP-IB address is 20. Set the CONVERTER address (in the Receiver's
HP-IB menu) to match the address setting on the HP 8511.
5. If using the HP 85309A frequency converter, check multiple source settings on the receiver.
Refer to the HP 85310A or 85301B documentation for details.
6. Check HP-IB extenders by performing these steps:
A. Make sure the extenders are set to SLOW mode. NORMAL mode can cause errors.
B. Make sure the extenders are plugged in, and that their switches are set properly.
C. Check the extender cables for breaks or damage.
7. Disconnect the extender from the receiver.
Turn the receiver OFF, then ON.
Reconnect the extender.
8. If all the above is correct:
A. Suspect a failure in one of the extenders (if applicable). Connect the source directly to
the receiver System Bus and check operation.
B. Suspect a bad HP-IB cable, or a bad extender coaxial cable.
C. After checking all other items, suspect a failure in one of the instrument's HP-IB circuits.
Check each unit to see if it can communicate with other devices.
20-10 In Case of Diculty
Hardware Problems
T
\TEST SET IS TOO HOT!"
Occurs if the fan on the HP 8511A/B frequency converter is blocked with paper or other
object. Items on top of the frequency converter or around the system may also impede the air
ow. The test set will not shut down if it becomes too hot!
U
\UNABLE TO RAMP THIS DUAL SOURCE SETUP"
This message only applies if you are using the HP 85309A frequency converter. The caution
message will occur if you try to put the HP 8530A in RAMP mode with two synthesized
sources. The HP 8530A should be in STEP mode.
V
\VTO FAILURE"
If Using the HP 8511A/B
If you are using an HP 8511A/B frequency downconverter:
1. Make sure the HP 8511A/B is turned ON.
2. Make sure the TEST SET-IF INTERCONNECT is connected between the receiver and the HP
8511A/B.
3. Make sure the HP 8530A is set for internal phase lock by pressing:
a. 4SYSTEM5 MORE
b. SYSTEM PHASELOCK LOCK TYPE: INTERNAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
If Using the HP 85309A
The following steps apply if you are using the HP 85309A frequency converter, and then only if
you are using a non-synthesized LO source (such as a HP 8350B).
Make sure a BNC cable is connected between the HP 8530A's LO PHASELOCK OUT and the
LO source's FM INPUT.
Make sure the HP 8530A is set for external phase lock by pressing:
1. 4SYSTEM5 MORE
2. SYSTEM PHASELOCK EXTERNAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
In Case of Diculty 20-11
Hardware Problems
Hardware Problems
This section is not intended to be a comprehensive hardware troubleshooting guide. Instead
this section discusses common problems and how to x them. Refer to the HP 8530A service
manual (or the service documentation for the frequency converter) for detailed information on
troubleshooting and repair of the measurement system. The following problems are discussed:
HP 8530A Locks Up
An Instrument will not Respond
HP 85309 (LO/IF Unit) Problems
HP 8530A Locks Up
\Lock up" is a condition where the HP 8530A refuses to operate and will not respond to front
panel keystrokes, including 4LOCAL5.
If Your System Uses the HP 8511A/B
Use a straightened paper clip or other small diameter object to press the HP 8530A TEST
button (this is a recessed button located under the disc drive, use a straightened paper-clip to
press it). The receiver should re-initialize itself and operate properly.
If Your System Uses the HP 85309A
When you turn on external phase lock mode (4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK EXTERNAL ),
the HP 8530A expects to nd an HP 8350 connected as the LO source. The HP 8530A can lock
up under the following circumstances:
The HP 8350 is not connected to the System Bus.
The HP 8350 is connected, but is turned o.
The HP 8350 is connected, but its HP-IB address does not match the \SOURCE #2" address
set in the HP 8530A Local menu.
A synthesizer (such as an HP 8340/41 or 836xx-series) is connected to the System Bus instead
of an HP 8350. If a synthesizer is used as the LO source, phase lock should be set to NONE.
(press 4SYSTEM5 MORE SYSTEM PHASELOCK NONE .)
If any of the above problems existed, correct it and press the TEST button on the HP 8530A. It
should now operate properly.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
An Instrument will not Respond to Computer Control
This section applies to instruments that will not respond to remote computer control.
1. Make sure each instrument is plugged in and is turned ON. If an instrument's display is
dark, check its line fuse. On a HP 836xx series source with no front panel display, make
sure the green AC power LED is ON.
2. Make sure the computer software is using the correct address for that device.
3. Set the instrument to local mode and try to operate it manually.
If the instrument operates manually
1. Make sure the instrument's HP-IB cable is connected to the computer's HP-IB bus (directly
or through HP-IB extenders).
2. Make sure the instrument is set to the correct HP-IB address.
20-12 In Case of Diculty
Hardware Problems
3. Check HP-IB extenders by performing these steps:
a. Make sure the extenders are set to SLOW mode. NORMAL mode can cause errors.
b. Make sure the extenders are plugged in, and that their switches are set properly.
c. Check the extender cables for breaks or damage.
4. Disconnect the extender from the receiver.
Turn the receiver OFF, then ON.
Wait 20 seconds.
Reconnect the extender.
5. If all of the above is correct:
a. Suspect a failure in one of the extenders. Connect the source directly to the receiver
System Bus and check operation.
b. Suspect a bad HP-IB cable, or a bad extender coaxial cable.
c. After checking all other items, suspect a failure in one of the instrument's HP-IB circuits.
If the instrument does not operate manually
Suspect a failure within the instrument itself.
A System Bus Instrument will not Respond
This section applies to instruments on the System Bus that will not respond to remote HP
8530A or computer control.
1. Make sure each instrument is plugged in and is turned ON. If an instrument's display is
dark, check its line fuse. On a HP 836xx series source with no front panel display, make
sure the green AC power LED is ON.
2. If controlling the system with a computer:
a. Make sure the software is using the right address for that device. If using the
Pass-Through feature, make sure you are using it as explained in Chapter 18, HP-IB
Programming.
b. Press 4LOCAL5 on the HP 8530A. Try to control the System Bus instrument from the HP
8530A front panel.
If the HP 8530A can control the instrument, suspect an improper HP-IB connection
between the HP 8530A and the computer. (If the connection looks good, try replacing the
HP-IB cable.)
c. If the HP 8530A cannot control the instrument, set the instrument to local mode and try
to operate it manually.
If the instrument operates manually
1. Make sure the instrument's HP-IB cable is connected to the receiver's System Bus (directly
or through HP-IB extenders).
2. Make sure the instrument is set to the correct HP-IB address. (Make sure the address
shown in the receiver's HP-IB menu matches the actual address of the instrument.) When
using the HP 85309A, the receiver's CONVERTER address should always be set to 31 . For
instructions on setting the HP-IB menu for an HP 8511A/B frequency converter, refer to the
\SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR" error message description.
In Case of Diculty 20-13
Hardware Problems
3. If you are using the HP 85309A frequency converter, and the problem is with one of
the sources: check multiple source settings on the receiver. Refer to the HP 85310A
documentation for details. Also refer to the description of Multiple Source Mode operation
in Chapter 17, Using System Functions.
4. Check HP-IB extenders by performing these steps:
a. Make sure the extenders are set to SLOW mode. NORMAL mode can cause errors.
b. Make sure the extenders are plugged in, and that their switches are set properly.
c. Check the extender cables for breaks or damage.
5. Disconnect the extender from the receiver.
Turn the receiver OFF, then ON.
Wait 20 seconds.
Reconnect the extender.
6. If all of the above is correct:
a. Suspect a failure in one of the extenders. Connect the source directly to the receiver
System Bus and check operation.
b. Suspect a bad HP-IB cable, or a bad extender coaxial cable.
c. After checking all other items, suspect a failure in one of the instrument's HP-IB circuits.
If the instrument does not operate manually
Suspect a failure within the instrument itself.
HP 85309A (LO/IF Unit) Problems
This section only applies to HP 85309A frequency converters.
LO/IF Unit Does Not Turn ON
If the DETECTOR VOLTAGE display on the front panel does not light up when the unit is
turned on, check the following:
1. Make sure the instrument is plugged into an operating AC power outlet.
2. Check the instrument's line voltage selector. Is it set to your AC power voltage?
3. Check the HP 85309A's fuse.
4. Check the power supply as explained in the service chapter of the HP 85301B or HP 85310A
operating and service manual.
The LO POWER OUT OF RANGE Light is ON
This can be caused by the following:
The LO source is not set to output enough power, increase power output (if possible) to +13
dBm. Make sure your LO source can output enough power at the highest LO frequency.
The LO source's RF OUTPUT is not connected to the HP 85309A, or if the LO source is
turned o. This can also happen if the LO source is on, but its RF output is turned o.
The LO source cannot supply the requested amount of power in the measurement frequency
range. Make sure your LO source is specied to produce +10 dBm in the desired frequency
range. If the LO cannot produce enough power at high frequencies, the LO POWER OUT OF
20-14 In Case of Diculty
Hardware Problems
RANGE light will come on during the high-frequency portion of the measurement. During
this time LO power will not be correct.
The reference mixer is not connected to the REFERENCE LO OUTPUT of the HP 85309.
The reference mixer's Detector Output is not connected to the HP 85309A.
There is a failure of the HP 85309A's ALC circuitry. An ALC failure will usually cause the
light to come on permanently, though all equipment is connected properly.
In Case of Diculty 20-15
Glossary
Active
The term \active" has two special meanings in HP 8530A documentation:
\Active function" refers to the last feature you activated that requires a numeric value.
When you turn the front panel knob, use the step keys, or enter a numeric value, the HP
8530A changes the active function.
For example, pressing 4START5 makes it the active function. Any value changes or entries
will aect that function. Start will remain the active function until you select another
function that requires a numeric value. Pressing 4ENTRY OFF5 causes the analyzer to
remove the function from active status. The knob, step keys, and numeric entry keys will
no longer have any eect. 4ENTRY OFF5 protects the instrument from accidental value
changes. Such changes occur most commonly when someone accidentally moves the
knob.
When the term \active" is used next to multiple-choice functions (\active parameter,"
\active channel," \active marker," and so on), it is referring to the most recently used
choice in that multiple-choice function. Thus, \active parameter" refers to the most
recently used parameter.
Here is an example: Assume you want to use the Redene Parameter feature to modify a
parameter. Redene Parameter aects the \active" parameter. Thus, you should activate
PARAM 1 before using the Redene Parameter feature.
The terms \active" and \currently-selected" mean the same thing in HP 8530A
documentation.
Active Channel
The term \active channel" refers to the channel that was activated last. When you select a
parameter, change measurement settings, and so on, you aect the active channel. In the
same way, only one parameter (PARAM 1, PARAM 2, PARAM 3, or PARAM 4) can be the
active parameter at any given time. The same applies to markers.
AUT
AUT is an acronym which stands for Antenna Under Test.
Antenna Denition
An antenna denition is one of seven individual data sets inside a cal denition. Each
antenna denition has the gain values for a specic standard gain antenna. See \Cal
Denition," below.
Cal
\Cal" is an abbreviation for calibration.
Cal Denition
A \cal denition" is a data set that contains the published gain data for up to seven
standard gain antennas. A cal denition is composed of a four-line header, and up to seven
individual data sets called antenna denition. See \Antenna Denition," above.
Glossary-1
Glossary
Calibration, Antenna
Antenna calibration using a standard gain antenna allows measured data to be expressed in
dBi (dB relative to an isotropic radiator). A standard gain antenna with known or dened
gain values at specic frequencies is used as a transfer standard to calibrate the system.
Calibrating with a standard gain antenna corrects for the transmission response error.
Isolation calibration is also available, which corrects measurement errors caused by receiver
cross-talk.
Calibration Coecients
An internal data array. This is the correction data that was created during calibration (also
called \Cal Sets"). You can retrieve the active Cal Set register over HP-IB.
Cal Denition
A calibration denition is an ASCII le you create using a text editor. It contains frequency
and gain values that were published for the standard gain antenna.
Cal Set
A nished calibration data le. During the calibration, the standard gain antenna is
measured and its response is compared to the cal denition. Any dierences are stored in
an internal \cal set register." These dierences are the measurement osets that are used
to compute the correct gain value, expressed in dBi. Cal sets can be stored to, or loaded
from disc.
When you press 4CAL5 CORRECTION ON , and then choose one of the eight cal sets, the
selected calibration data is placed in the Calibration Coecient Array for that channel.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Channel
The receiver measures the performance of the antenna under test and converts the results
into digital data. This data is then duplicated into two identical copies. Once copy becomes
\Channel 1" data and the other becomes \Channel 2" data.
When you press 4CHANNEL 15 on the front panel, most instrument settings you make
afterward will aect only the Channel 1 data. When you press 4CHANNEL 25 most settings
you make afterward will aect only the Channel 2 data. This feature allows you to view
two versions of the same measurement at the same time. Each version can use dierent
instrument features, but still represents the same basic measurement data. For example:
One version might be calibrated, while the other is uncalibrated. Or, one version might
display frequency data, while the other displays Time Domain data.
Such features as calibration, time domain, display formatting, and trace math can be
performed independently on the two channels. When you press the 4CHANNEL 15 or
4CHANNEL 25 key, you make that channel the \active channel." Any subsequent changes you
make to measurement settings will aect that channel.
Some instrument settings are always the same in both channels. Such features are
\coupled." Other settings can be changed in one channel versus the other. Such features
are \uncoupled."
Continual Sweep Mode
When this mode is selected, the receiver makes measurements continously. This mode is
most often used in Frequency or Time Domain measurements. To select this mode, make
sure the receiver is in Frequency or Time Domain and press:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE CONTINUAL
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Glossary-2
Glossary
Corrected Data
There are two internal data arrays that hold \corrected data," one array for Channel 1,
and one for Channel 2. In addition to ratioing and averaging, corrected data has been
through time domain and calibration processing (if these features are ON at the time). Also,
a user-denable \delay table" can aect corrected data, if used. Refer to the index of the
Operating and Programming manual under \delay table" to nd more information.
Delay Table
The HP 8530A has a delay table for each channel. When four parameter display is ON,
there is a delay table for each parameter in each channel (a total of eight). The delay
table allow users to grab, modify, and return measurement data to the instrument. Uses
are primarily in RCS applications, where users want to modify the time domain response
window. Refer to the index of the Operating and Programming manual under \delay table"
to nd more information.
DOS
Disc Operating System, the disc format used by IBM PCs and compatible computers.
Form 1
An HP-IB data transfer format. Form 1 is the native internal data format of the receiver.
It consists of a header byte, followed by three, 16 bit data words for each stimulus point.
Form 1 oers very fast transfer speeds, and it can be converted to oating point data. (High
Speed Fast CW only oers Form 1 output.)
Form 2
An HP-IB data transfer format. Form 2 is a 32 bit IEEE 728 format. This format is not
commonly used.
Form 3
An HP-IB data transfer format. Form 3 is the recommended format for use with HP 9000
Series 200/300 workstations. It consists of a header, a two-byte number indicating how
many bytes follow, then the real and imaginary data pairs for each stimulus point. Form 3
follows the 64 bit IEEE 728 standard format.
Form 4
An HP-IB data transfer format. Form 4 is ASCII, originally used for PCs before Form 5 was
created.
Form 5
An HP-IB data transfer format. Form 5 is the recommended format for use with IBM PCs
and compatibles. This is a 32 bit DOS-compatible oating point format.
Formatted Data
There are two internal data arrays that hold \formatted data," one array for Channel 1, and
one for Channel 2. This data is scalar (magnitude-only) and reects display format, scaling,
and trace math processing.
Frequency List Mode
This mode is similar to Step Sweep mode, because it phase locks at each measurement
frequency. Frequencly List mode allows you to enter a list of frequencies you want to
measure. You can select any number of frequencies (up to 801) and choose any frequencies
you want. You can enter frequencies in any order, but the receiver will measure the
frequencies in sequential order from the lowest to the highest frequency.
Glossary-3
Glossary
Hardware State
The Hardware State stores multiple source mode settings, HP-IB settings for external
hardware, and frequency converter or test set states. The hardware state can be stored to
disc. This feature allows you to quickly recongure the receiver for dierent test setups.
Hold Mode
Hold Mode stops measurements. You should place the receiver in this mode if you want to
load measurement data from disc. The receiver selects Hold mode after measuring a single
sweep, single angle, or number of groups.
Input
Refers to the four HP 8530A signal inputs (a1, a2, b1, and b2). This word is also used when
referring to the signal inputs of the frequency downconverter.
Instrument State
An \instrument state" is dened as the condition of all current measurement settings,
including all domain, stimulus, parameter, format, and response settings.
LIF
Logical Interchange Format, the disc format used by HP 9000 Series 200/300 computers.
Machine Dump
A Machine Dump stores the following register contents to a single disc le:
Current instrument state
Instrument states 1 - 8
Cal sets 1 - 8
Cal kits
Hardware state
Memories 1 - 8
Machine dump les allow you to change between dierent test congurations quickly.
This feature is useful if you have an HP 8530A with optional HP 8510C operation. Here's
why: When you change between HP 8530A and HP 8510C operation, the receiver reverts
to factory-default settings, and the contents of all registers is lost. A machine dump can
store all these settings to a single disc le, so you can reload the machine dump and restore
your setups immediately. NOTE: Before saving a machine dump le, make sure you save
the current settings to Save Register 8 (the user preset register). When you later load the
machine dump le, the machine will wakes up in the desired state.
Measurement
A \measurement" is a completed data collection activity. What constitutes a measurement
depends on the mode you are in.
Measurement Denition when Using Ramp Sweep Mode
In Ramp sweep mode, a \measurement" is a complete sweep spanning the start and stop
frequencies. One sweep must be measured if averaging is OFF. If averaging is ON, n + 1
sweeps must be measured, where n is the selected averaging factor.
For example, assume you select four parameters, ramp mode, and averaging is set to 4. To
take a fully averaged measurement:
If using Continual mode, allow ve sweeps to complete. After ve sweeps the data is
fully averaged.
If controlling the receiver by computer, set Number of Groups (NUMG) to 5.
Glossary-4
Glossary
When the measurement starts, the receiver starts measuring 5 complete sweeps of
parameter 1. When it nishes, it starts taking 5 complete sweeps of parameter 2. This
continues until all four parameters have been measured.
Ramp mode is most often used with internal (free run) triggering. And is almost always
used in the Frequency or Time Domains.
Measurement Denition when Using Single Point Mode
In Single Point mode, a measurement is nished when the current frequency point has been
measured. If you want to measure more than one parameter, the receiver measures that
frequency point for each parameter. This mode is used in the Frequency or Time Domains.
Continual sweep and Free Run (internal) triggering are usually used with Single Point mode.
Measurement Denition when Using Step or Frequency List Mode
In Step and Frequency List modes, a measurement is nished when all points between the
start and stop frequencies have been measured.
External Triggering:
External Pulse or HP-IB triggering can be modied to suit your needs. By default triggering
works as follows:
If you are displaying a single parameter, each external trigger will measure the AUT at
one frequency point, then advance to the next frequency and wait for another trigger.
If you are displaying four parameters, each trigger will measure all four parameters at
one frequency point, then advance to the next frequency and wait for another trigger.
The Trigger Mode feature of the HP 8530A (under STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE )
provides more exibility. You can make the receiver wait for a trigger before measuring
any specic parameter. You could measure one parameter per trigger, measure two
parameters per trigger, or any combination. The only limitation is that you must measure
the parameters in numeric sequence (1, 2, 3, 4). You can also make the receiver wait for a
trigger before advancing to the next stimulus point. This is helpful if you are using a RF
source that is not compatible with the HP 8530A, if using unusual RF multipliers, and so on.
Internal Triggering:
If a single parameter is displayed, the receiver measures one frequency point, advances to
the next frequency point, and measures it. This continues automatically until the whole
frequency range is measured.
If you are displaying four parameters, each trigger will measure all four parameters at one
frequency point, then advance to the next frequency and measure all four parameters
again. This continues automatically until the whole frequency range is measured.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Measurement Denition when Using Single Angle Mode
In Single Angle mode, a measurement is nished when the current angle has been
measured. Continual measurement mode and Free Run triggering is recommended when
using Single Angle mode.
Measurement Denition when Using Swept Angle Mode
In Swept Angle mode, a measurement is nished when all points between the start and
stop angles have been measured. External or HP-IB triggering are almost always used with
Swept Angle mode.
External Triggering:
External TTL or HP-IB triggering can be modied to suit your needs. By default triggering
works as follows:
Glossary-5
Glossary
If you are displaying a single parameter, each external trigger will measure the AUT at
one angle, then advance to the next angle and wait for another trigger.
If you are displaying four parameters, each trigger will measure all four parameters at
one angle, then advance to the next angle and wait for another trigger.
The Trigger Mode feature of the HP 8530A (under STIMULUS 4MENU5 MORE TRIGGER MODE )
provides more exibility. You can make the receiver wait for a trigger before measuring
any specic parameter. You could measure one parameter per trigger, measure two
parameters per trigger, or any combination. The only limitation is that you must measure
the parameters in numeric sequence (1, 2, 3, 4). You can also make the receiver wait for a
trigger before advancing to the next angle.
Internal Triggering:
If a single parameter is displayed, the receiver measures the AUT at one angle, advances to
the next angle, and measures it. This continues automatically until the whole pattern is
measured.
If you are displaying four parameters, each trigger will measure all four parameters at
one angle, then advance to the next angle and measure all four parameters again. This
continues automatically until the whole pattern is measured.
More information on how the various sweep modes work is provided in the Keyword
Dictionary, under the title of each mode.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Memory Data
An internal data array. Valid data can be read from this array (over HP-IB) if data has been
stored to one of the memory registers. Various trace math functions are possible when using
the memory data feature.
Parameter
The input, or input ratio, that you have selected for the measurement. The front panel
keys 4PARAM 15, 4PARAM 25, 4PARAM 35, and 4PARAM 45 are set at the factory to select dierent
input ratios (b1/a1, b2/a1, and so on). For example, 4PARAM 15 divides (ratios) input b1 by a1.
You can redene the PARAM keys so they ratio any two inputs you desire. You can also
congure any PARAM key to measure a single input.
Ramp Sweep Mode
Ramp Sweep mode is a non phase-locked sweep in which the receiver tracks the continuous
frequency sweep of the RF source. In Ramp Sweep mode, a \measurement" is a complete
frequency sweep spanning the start and stop frequencies. To select this mode, make sure
the receiver is in Frequency or Time Domain and press:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 RAMP
Only one sweep must be measured if averaging is OFF. If averaging is ON, n + 1 sweeps
must be measured, where n is the selected averaging factor.
For example, assume you select four parameters, ramp mode, and averaging is set to 4. To
take a fully averaged measurement:
If using Continual mode, allow ve sweeps to complete. After ve sweeps the data is
fully averaged.
If controlling the receiver by computer, set Number of Groups (NUMG) to 5.
When the measurement starts, the receiver starts measuring 5 complete sweeps of
parameter 1. When it nishes, it starts taking 5 complete sweeps of parameter 2. This
continues until all four parameters have been measured.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Glossary-6
Glossary
Ramp mode is most often used with internal (free run) triggering. And is almost always
used in the Frequency or Time Domains.
Ratio
Most often, users want to divide the test signal input by the reference signal input. This is
called a ratio, or ratioed, measurement. (For example, selecting b1/a1 would divide the test
signal at b1 by the reference signal at a1.) A ratioed measurement provides common-mode
rejection of errors caused by the transmitter or transmit antenna.
Raw Data
A data array that contains the ratioed and averaged measurement data results. There
are four raw data arrays, one for each parameter. If dual channel display is selected, the
receiver creates eight raw data arrays, four for the parameters in Channel 1, and four for
the parameters in Channel 2.
Single Point Mode
Single Point mode phase locks and measures at a single frequency. To select this mode,
make sure the receiver is in Frequency or Time Domain and press:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 SINGLE POINT
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Snapshot
A \snapshot" is an exact copy of the data presented on the HP 8530A display. Screen
snapshots can be printed or plotted. This term is borrowed from American English, it
means \photograph," but implies that the photograph was taken quickly and without any
required preparation.
Step Sweep Mode
Step Sweep mode is a frequency sweep mode where the receiver steps from one
measurement frequency to the next, phase locking at each frequency. To select this mode,
make sure the receiver is in Frequency or Time Domain and press:
STIMULUS 4MENU5 STEP
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Stimulus
Stimulus is the X-axis of the receiver, it is the range of frequency, time, or angle over which
you are making a measurement.
If you are in Frequency Domain, the measurement stimulus is frequency (kHz, MHz, or
GHz).
If in Time Domain, the actual stimulus is frequency, but this is converted to an X-axis
display of time (seconds).
In Angle Domain, stimulus is angular (degrees).
The HP 8530 measures individual points along the selected \stimulus." In other words, if
you have selected Frequency Domain, the receiver measures a specic number of frequency
points. The maximum number of points you can measure is 801, regardless of whether you
are measuring frequency, time, or angle.
Glossary-7
Glossary
Glossary-8
Index
0
0 to 360 degree display mode, selecting, 6-6
1
10 MHz IN, rear panel BNC, 3-15
+/-180 softkey (position encoder function),
6-6
1/PARAM softkey, 7-4
1-port calibration, 5-24
1-port calibration (network analyzer), 5-32
2
20 MHz IF, 2-2
20 MHz OUT, rear panel BNC, 3-15
4
40 dB PATTERN softkey, 9-5
6
60 dB PATTERN softkey, 9-5
7
7550B or 7550 Plus plotters, how to make
them function properly, 16-23
A
a1, a2, b1, and b2 measurement inputs, 1-6
A annotation, 3-3
ABORTED ENCODER TRIGGERED SWEEP,
error message, 20-6
accessories, 1-12
AC power requirements, 1-14
acquisition cycle of data, 6-23
active channel, 4-1
active channel, denition of, Glossary-1
active, denition of, Glossary-1
active entry area, 3-3
active function output, program example,
18-18
active marker, 4-1
active parameter, 4-1
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED, error
message, 20-6
addresses, assignment of, 17-8
ADDRESS OF 8530 softkey, 11-2
ADDRESS of CONVERTER softkey, 11-2,
17-10
ADD softkey, 6-14
adjust colors, 5-59
adjusting the display, 5-58
Adjusting the display, 5-58
air ow, 19-3
alias-free range, how to improve, 13-8
alias-free range, in RCS measurements, 13-8
aliasing, 13-8
ALL OTHERS softkey, 11-2, 17-10
allowable cable lengths, HP-IB Bus Cables,
1-15
allowable cable lengths, System Bus Cables,
1-15
ALL SEGMENTS softkey, 6-17
ALL TO ACT.TRACE softkey, 9-4
altitude, operating and storage, 1-14
analog detection stages of HP 8530A, 2-4
ANALOG 610V, rear panel BNC, 3-15
ANG DISPLY ON/MOVE and OFF softkeys
(position encoder function), 6-6
ANG DISPLY ON/MOVE softkey, 6-6
angle display (HP 85370A), 6-6
angle display mode (position encoder)
functions, 6-6
angle display ON and OFF (position encoder
function), 6-6
angle domain, 1-4, 5-56
angle domain, illustration of, 1-4, 5-56
angle, setting start and stop, 6-3
ANG POL 0-360 softkey (position encoder
function), 6-6
ANNOTATE W/INPUT softkey, 7-5
ANNOTATE W/LABEL softkey, 7-5
* annotation, 3-3
annotation areas, 3-2
annotations
*, 3-3
A, 3-3
C, 3-3
D, 3-3
E, 3-3
G, 3-3
H, 3-3
M, 3-3
Index-1
O, 3-3
S, 3-3
annotations, adding to the screen, 16-3
antenna calibration, 5-9
angle domain versus frequency domain,
5-9
description, 5-4
important rules, 5-17
important terms, 5-9
isolation (procedure), 5-14, 5-16
loading a cal set from disc, 5-36
procedure, 5-11
storing a cal set to disc, 5-35
using a frequency domain cal in angle
domain, 5-9
antenna calibration, denition of, Glossary-2
antenna denition, 5-46, Glossary-1
antenna range multipath Time Domain
measurements, 13-21
antenna sweep mode, 6-4
array, corrected (calibrated), 2-7
array, corrected data, 18-6
array, formatted data, 2-8, 18-7
array, memory data, 2-7
array, raw data, 2-6, 18-6
ASCII calibration denition le, description,
5-50
ASCII data format (CITIle), 15-3
audio annunciator (beeper), 17-5
AUT, denition of, Glossary-1
4AUTO5, 9-2
auto delay, 9-8
AUTO DELAY softkey, 9-8
auto feed on/o, 16-23
AUTO FEED ON/OFF softkey, 16-23
automatic IF calibration (correction), 17-5
automatic recall of instrument settings, 2-9
auto scaling the display, 9-2
AUX1 rear panel BNC, 3-14
AUX2 rear panel BNC, 3-14
AUXILIARY MENUS block, 3-10
averaging, 9-5
in data processing ow, 2-6
averaging, in internal data ow, 2-6
AVERAGING ON/restart softkey, 9-5
averaging, recommended values, 9-6
AXIS A softkey (position encoder function),
6-7
AXIS B softkey (position encoder function),
6-7
AXIS C softkey (position encoder function),
6-7
Index-2
B
background calibration, for RCS
measurements, 5-23
background calibration, for RCS
measurements, updating, 5-23
background intensity, 5-58
background RCS calibration for each RCS
mount, 5-23
4BACKSPACE5, 6-3
4BACKSPACE5 key, 3-8, 10-2
basic measurement functions, 3-7
beam width, determining using markers,
5-83
beeper, 17-5
binary data format, 15-3
block diagram of typical measurement setup,
1-2
blocked air ow, 19-3
BORESIGHT ANGLE, 6-7
C
cabinet, system, 1-12
cable
for external monitor, 5-61
calculating minimum gate span, 13-14
cal denition, 5-46, Glossary-1
cal denition le, for standard gain antennas
creating multiple antenna denitions in
one cal denition le, 5-53
cal, denition of, Glossary-1
cal denition, what this term means,
Glossary-2
calibrated data, 2-7
calibrated data array, 2-7
calibration, 5-3
1-port (network analyzer), 5-32
antenna isolation, procedure, 5-14, 5-16
cal kits, 5-24
exiting and resuming, 5-37
principles and care of calibration standards,
5-38
requirements, 5-4
response and isolation (network analyzer),
5-29
response (network analyzer), 5-27
resuming a cal procedure after leaving it,
5-37
settings that should not be changed, 5-5
turning on an existing calibration, 5-37
types of, 5-4
verifying your calibration, 5-39
what is calibration?, 5-3
calibration, antenna
angle domain versus frequency domain,
5-9
description, 5-4
important rules, 5-17
important terms, 5-9
isolation calibration procedure, 5-14, 5-16
loading a cal set from disc, 5-36
procedure, 5-11
storing a cal set to disc, 5-35
using a frequency domain cal in angle
domain, 5-9
calibration, antenna, denition of, Glossary-2
calibration coecient data arrays, 18-7
calibration coecients, denition of,
Glossary-2
calibration denition le
creating multiple antenna denitions in
one le, 5-53
loading, 5-52
saving, 5-52
calibration denition le, example, 5-50
calibration denition, for standard gain
antennas
creating, 5-46
supplied in HP 8530A, 5-54
calibration, for RCS measurements, 5-18
calibration, IF, 17-5
calibration, in internal data ow, 2-7
calibration kit data, loading from disc, 5-25
calibration kits (cal kits), 5-24
calibration, network analyzer
description, 5-4
calibration, RCS
description, 5-4
CALIBRATION RESET, error message, 20-6
calibration standards, principles and care of,
5-38
4CAL5 key, 3-9
CAL KITS softkey, 15-4
CAL SET 1-8 softkey, 15-4
CAL SET ALL softkey, 15-4
cal set, denition of, Glossary-2
cal sets, loading from disc, 5-36
cal sets, storing to disc, 5-35
C annotation, 3-3
caution message
test set too hot, 19-3
caution/tell messages, reading and outputting,
program example, 18-28
4CENTER5, 6-3, 6-9
CGA monitors, (not supported by HP 8530A),
1-19
change cal set, 5-42
changing display scale, 9-2
changing the sign of an entered number,
3-8, 10-2
channel 1 and 2 data processing, 18-5
Channel 1 and 2, relative position in digital
processing ow, 2-3
channel coupling, stimulus settings, 6-21
channel, denition of, Glossary-2
channels, 3-5, 4-1
channel selection, 3-5
channels, selecting, 4-1
chirp-z time domain transform, 13-2
CITIle data format, 15-3
CITIle format, 5-50
cleaning connectors, 19-4
cleaning supplies, connector, 1-13, 19-4
cleaning the display, 19-5
CLEARgg, in Normalize menu, 9-4
CLEAR OFFSET softkey (position encoder
function), 6-7
clock adjust, 17-6
clock speed of microprocessor, 2-5
clutter, range, 13-9
coarse
and ne synchro (position encoder)
functions, 6-6
(single, 1:1) synchro mode (position encoder
function), 6-6
COAXIAL DELAY softkey, 9-7
codes, HP-IB programming, 18-2
color, 5-59
color of plotter pens, selecting, 16-23
color printing, 16-12
COLOR softkey, 16-12
common error messages, 20-6
common problems
rotary joint, 20-5
weak or missing IF signal, 20-3
weak or missing LO signal (applies to HP
85309A), 20-4
common problems, solving, 20-2
comparison between HP 8530A and HP
8510C, 1-9
compatible external displays, 1-19
compatible external monitors, 5-61
compatible frequency converters, 1-18
compatible instruments, 1-15
compatible LO sources, 1-15
compatible plotters, 1-19
compatible printers, 1-18
compatible RF sources, 1-17
conguring a printer
laser printer, 16-6
connecting the HP 8530 to a computer, 18-4
connector
care of, 19-3
cleaning, 19-4
cleaning supplies, 1-13, 19-4
connector savers, 1-12
Index-3
CONSTANT FREQUENCY softkey, 17-13
CONTINUAL softkey, 6-20
Continual Sweep mode, denition of,
Glossary-2
controlling LO sources, 17-11
controlling multiple sources, 17-11
controls, front panel, 3-5
conversion, 7-4
CONVERSION softkey, 7-4
converter, frequency, selecting the type in
use, 11-2, 17-10
CONVERTER HP 8511B softkey, 11-2, 17-10
CONVERTER softkey, 11-2, 17-10
convert parameter, 2-7
copolar and crosspolar measurements,
problems with (IF overload error),
17-19
corrected data, 2-7
corrected data array, 2-7, 18-6
corrected data, denition of, Glossary-3
corrected measurement data arrays, 18-5
correcting entry errors, 6-9
correcting mistakes when entering numbers,
3-8, 10-2
correction, IF, 17-5
CORRECTION MAY BE INVALID, error
message, 20-6
coupled and uncoupled stimulus functions,
3-6
coupling stimulus settings between channels,
6-21
crosspolar and copolar measurements,
problems with (IF overload error),
17-19
CRT colors, 5-59
CRT intensity, 5-58
CRT OFF softkey, 17-7
current axis, selecting (for synchro encoder
operation), 6-7
cycle of data aquistion, 6-23
D
D1191A cable for external monitors, 5-61
D annotation, 3-3
data acquisition cycle, 6-23
DATA and MEMORY softkey, 5-68
data and memory traces, displaying
simultaneously, 5-68
data array, corrected, 2-7, 18-6
data array, formatted, 18-7
data array, formatted data, 2-8
data array, memory data, 2-7
data array, raw, 2-6, 18-6
data, corrected (calibrated), 2-7
data le formats, 15-3
Index-4
data ow, internal, 2-6
data, formatted, 2-8
DATA from CHANNEL 1 softkey, 5-71
DATA from CHANNEL 2 softkey, 5-71
data, memory, 2-7
data presentation (display) features, 1-7
data processing illustration, 2-3
data processing stages
raw data, 2-6
data processing stages, analog detection, 2-4
data processing stages, digital processing,
2-5
data, raw, 2-6
DATA RAW softkey, 15-5
DATA ! MEMORY 1 softkey, 5-67
DATA ! MEMORYgg operations, maximum
number of, 5-69
DATA softkey, 15-5
data transfer formats
Form 1, 2-6
data transfer formats (Form 1 through 5),
18-8
date/time clock, adjust, 17-6
DATE/TIME FUNCTIONS softkey, 17-6
date/time plot, 16-22
date/time printout, 16-4
dB/GHz, selecting, 10-2
dBm, selecting, 10-2
DEFAULT PEN NUMBERS softkey, 16-24
DEFAULT softkey, 17-13
DEFAULT to MEMORY n softkey, 5-69
DEFINE PLOT softkey, 16-23
DEFINE PRINT softkey, 16-6, 16-10, 16-12,
16-13
DEFINE RECEIVER softkey, 17-14
DEFINE SOURCE 1 softkey, 17-14
DEFINE SOURCE 2 softkey, 17-13
denition, cal (what this term means),
Glossary-2
denition le, for standard gain antenna
saving, 5-52
denition le, for standard gain antennas
creating multiple antenna denitions in
one cal denition le, 5-53
loading, 5-52
denition, for standard gain antennas
creating, 5-46
example le, 5-50
supplied in HP 8530A, 5-54
degauss (demagnetize) the display, 19-6
delay
coaxial mode, 9-7
waveguide mode, 9-8
delay, electrical, 9-7
delay table, 2-7, 9-8
delay table data array, 18-7
delay table, denition of, Glossary-3
delay table, program example, 18-32
DELAY TABLE softkey, 15-5
deleting disc les, 15-8
delta marker modes, program example, 18-20
delta markers, 5-78
delta markers, using to nd beam width,
5-83
demagnetize the display, 19-6
denominator, measurement ratio, 7-4
DENOMINATOR softkey, 7-4
description of HP 8530A, technical, 2-2
description of the HP 8530A, 1-2
design background of the HP 8530A, 1-4
DeskJet family printers, using, 16-10
dierences between HP 8530A and HP 8510C,
1-9
digital processing stages of HP 8530A, 2-5
directory, viewing disc les, 15-7
disc drive, description, 1-8
disc drive (external) unit and volume number,
15-9
disc drive operation, 15-1
disc drive, using an external drive, 15-8
disc les
deleting, 15-8
directory function, 15-7
loading, 15-6
storing, 15-4
un-deleting, 15-8
discs, compatible types, 15-2
DISCgg (setting the System Bus address for
an external disc drive), 11-3
discs, formatting, 15-3
discs, initializing, 15-3
disc storage capacity, 15-2
disc storage, program example, 18-21
disc utilities
initializing a hard disc, 15-9
display
change colors, 5-59
marker lists, 5-76
DISPLAY
DATA, 5-67
display annotation areas, 3-2
display annotation, changing, 7-5
display annotations, special one-character,
3-3
display auto scaling, 9-2
display background intensity, 5-58
display, cleaning of, 19-5
DISPLAY DATA and MEMORY softkey, 5-68
display, demagnetizing, 19-6
display, external, installing, 5-62
display features, 1-7
display features (the front panel display),
3-2
display formatting in the internal data ow,
2-8
display functions, 5-57{72
displaying a single parameter, 5-58, 12-1
displaying a trace stored in display memory,
5-67
displaying data and memory traces at the
same time, 5-68
displaying data relative to the peak of the
main lobe, 9-4
displaying four parameters, 5-58, 12-1
displaying two channels, 5-58, 12-1
display intensity, 5-58
4DISPLAY5 key, 3-9
DISPLAY MEMORY softkey, 5-67
display messages, 3-3
display modes, program example, 18-20
display scale, changing, 9-2
displays, external (critical specications),
1-19
displays, external (supported), 1-19
display titles, 3-3
distributed frequency converter, 1-18
DIVIDE (/) softkey, 5-70
domain, angle, 1-4, 5-56
domain angle, illustration of, 1-4, 5-56
domain, frequency, 1-5, 5-55
domain, frequency, illustration of, 1-5, 5-55
4DOMAIN5 key, 3-9
domain, time, 1-5, 5-56
domain, time, illustration of, 1-5, 5-56
DOS and LIF disc formats, 15-3
DOS, denition of, Glossary-3
DOS disc format, changing to, 15-3
DOS (Disc Operating System) disc format,
1-8
down-range resolution, 13-5
drive port, 7-4
DRIVE softkey, 7-4
dual
(dual, 36:1) synchro mode (position encoder
function), 6-6
synchro mode (position encoder function),
6-6
DUAL CHANNEL softkey, 5-58, 12-1
DUAL (synchro) softkey (position encoder
function), 6-6
duplicate frequency list points, eliminating,
6-17
DUPLICATE POINTS softkey, 6-17
DUPLICATES DELETED softkey, 6-17
dwell time, 6-18
Index-5
DWELL TIME softkey, 6-18
E
E annotation, 3-3
editing a frequency list, 6-16
EDIT LIST softkey, 6-14
EDIT MULT. SRC. softkey, 17-11
EGA monitors, (not supported by HP 8530A),
1-19
electrical delay, 9-7
auto, 9-8
automatically balancing test and reference
inputs, 9-8
coaxial mode, 9-7
entering delay values over HP-IB, 9-8
purpose of, 9-8
setting velocity factor, 9-8
waveguide mode, 9-8
ELECTRICAL DELAY softkey, 9-7
electrical requirements, 1-14
electrostatic discharge (ESD), 1-1
encoder
position (HP 85370A) operation, 6-5
ENCODER INTERCONNECT, rear panel
connector, 3-14
ENCODER NOT FOUND error message, 20-7
ENCODER OFFSET ANGLE ALREADY SAVED
error message, 20-7
enhancement labels (symbols and
annotations), 3-3
entering time domain stimulus values, 13-1
ENTRY block, 3-8, 10-1
4ENTRY OFF5, 6-22
4ENTRY OFF5 key, 3-9, 10-2
environmental characteristics
for HP 8530A, 1-14
equipment supplied, 1-11
error coecient, 2-7
error messages
ABORTED ENCODER TRIGGERED SWEEP,
20-6
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED, 20-6
CALIBRATION RESET, 20-6
CORRECTION MAY BE INVALID, 20-6
ENCODER NOT FOUND, 20-7
ENCODER OFFSET ANGLE ALREADY
SAVED, 20-7
FREQUENCY CONVERTER IS TOO HOT!,
20-7
IF OVERLOAD, 17-19, 20-7
NO IF FOUND, 20-8
OPTION #005 NOT INSTALLED, 20-8
OVERSPEED ERROR - BACKUP, 20-8
PHASE-LOCK LOST, 20-9
Index-6
SOURCE 1 FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED,
20-9
SOURCE 2 FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED,
20-9
SWEEP SYNC ERROR, 20-9
SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR, 20-9
TEST SET IS TOO HOT!, 20-11
UNABLE TO RAMP THIS DUAL SOURCE
SETUP, 20-11
VTO FAILURE, 20-11
errors, correcting entry errors, 6-9
EVENT TRIGGER input, 6-23
EVENT TRIGGER input on rear panel, 3-7
EVENT TRIGGER, rear panel BNC, 3-14
Extenders, HP-IB, 1-12
extenders (HP-IB) troubleshooting, 20-10
external disc drive, using, 15-8
EXTERNAL DISPLAY connector, 5-62
EXTERNAL DISPLAY pin out diagram, 3-13
EXTERNAL DISPLAY, rear panel connector
description, 3-13
external displays, critical specications, 1-19
external displays, supported, 1-19
external monitor, installing, 5-62
external trigger, 6-23, Glossary-5
external trigger (HP-IB triggering), Glossary-5
external triggering, 1-6, 6-23, Glossary-5
external triggering (HP-IB triggering),
Glossary-5
external video, 5-61
external video monitors, compatible, 5-61
F
factory preset, eect on display settings,
9-2
4FACTORY PRESET5 key, 14-1
fast CW mode buer, position in data
processing ow, 2-6
fast CW, program examples, 18-32
faster Frequency Domain measurements,
making, 1-16, 1-17
fast IF multiplexing, program example, 18-32
fast measurement speeds, sources compatible
with, 1-16, 1-17
features
display (data presentation), 1-7
features, angle, time, and frequency domain,
1-4
features, description, 1-2
les
deleting, 15-8
directory function, 15-7
un-deleting, 15-8
ow of air, 19-3
Form 1, 2-6
FORM 1 data conversion, program example,
18-21
Form 1 data transfer format, 18-8
form 1, denition of, Glossary-3
Form 2 data transfer format, 18-8
form 2, denition of, Glossary-3
FORM 3 and FORM 4, program example,
18-32
Form 3 data transfer format, 18-8
form 3, denition of, Glossary-3
Form 4 data transfer format, 18-8
form 4, denition of, Glossary-3
Form 5 data transfer format, 18-8
form 5, denition of, Glossary-3
format, 8-2
imaginary, 8-2
linear on polar (linear magnitude in polar
format), 3-7, 8-2
lin mag (linear magnitude in Cartesian
format), 3-7, 8-1
log mag (logarithmic magnitude in Cartesian
format), 3-7, 8-1
phase (in Cartesian format), 3-7, 8-1
polar mag (logarithmic magnitude in polar
format), 3-7, 8-1
real, 8-2
SWR, 8-2
format control block (on front panel), 8-1
format functions, 8-1{7
format (of display), 3-7, 8-1
formatted data, 2-8
formatted data array, 18-7
formatted data arrays, 2-8
formatted data, denition of, Glossary-3
formatted measurement data arrays, 18-5
FORMATTED softkey, 15-5
formatting discs, 15-3
formatting (display) in the internal data ow,
2-8
formatting (initializing) a hard disc., 15-9
FORM FEED softkey, 16-23
FOUR PARAMETER softkey, 5-58, 12-1
four parameters, viewing, 5-58, 12-1
free run trigger, Glossary-5, Glossary-6
free run triggering, 1-6, 6-23, Glossary-5,
Glossary-6
frequency converter, HP 8511A/B, 1-18, 2-2
frequency converter, HP 85310A, 1-18, 2-2
FREQUENCY CONVERTER IS TOO HOT!
error message, 20-7
frequency converters, compatible, 1-18
frequency converter, selecting the type in
use, 11-2, 17-10
frequency converters, purpose of, 2-2
frequency domain, 1-5, 5-55
frequency domain, illustration of, 1-5, 5-55
Frequency Domain RCS measurement
description, 13-4
frequency down converters, purpose of, 1-2
frequency list
deleting duplicate measurements, 6-17
frequency list, editing, 6-16
frequency list mode, 6-14
Frequency List mode, denition of, Glossary-3
frequency list mode, what comprises a
complete measurement, Glossary-5
frequency list, program example, 18-31
frequency list, save and recall, 6-17
frequency lists, creating and editing, 6-14
FREQUENCY LIST softkey, 6-12, 6-14
frequency list sweep mode, 6-12
FREQUENCY OFF softkey, 17-7
FREQUENCY of MEASUREMENT softkey,
6-3
frequency parameters, setting of, 6-2
frequency response error term, of RCS
calibrations, 13-9
frequency, setting for angle domain
measurement, 6-3
frequency, setting for frequency or time
domain measurement, 6-9
frequency zoom, 5-42
front panel controls, 3-5
front panel display features, 3-2
fuse, main power, part number (for the
bottom box), 3-15
fuse, main power, part number (for the top
box), 3-14
G
G annotation, 3-3
gate span, minimum, calculating, 13-14
gating, 13-12
gating, during antenna Time Domain
Impedance measurements, 13-20
gating during calibration, 13-15
gating during RCS calibration, 13-15
gating example, 13-12
GET command, 6-23
GET HP-IB command, 1-6
GigaHertz, selecting, 10-2
G/n, 10-2
4G/n5 (Giga/nano) key, 3-8, 10-2
graphics (user) plotting, program example,
18-25
H
H annotation, 3-3
hard disc, initializing, 15-9
Index-7
Hard Reset (front panel recessed TEST
button), 3-11
hardware problems, 20-12
an instrument will not respond to computer
control, 20-12
a System Bus instrument will not respond,
20-13
HP 85309A LO/IF unit does not turn on,
20-14
HP 85309A LO power out of range., 20-14
HP 8530A locks up, 20-12
hardware state dened, 2-12
hardware state, denition of, Glossary-4
HARDWARE STATE softkey, 15-5
harsh environments and maintenance, 19-3
height, target, RCS, 5-21
hierarchical memory of instrument settings,
2-9
Hold mode, denition of, Glossary-4
HOLD softkey, 6-20
HP 3488A remote switch state recall, 17-9
HP 7550B or 7550 Plus plotters, how to make
them function properly, 16-23
HP 8340/41 RF source, rmware revision
considerations, 1-17
HP 8340/41 RF source, rmware revision
upgrade kit (HP 11875A), 1-17
HP 8340/41, used as an RF Source, 1-17
HP 8350 sources, used as an LO source),
1-15
HP 836xx (family) sources, used as an LO
source), 1-16
HP 836xx (family) sources, used as an RF
Source, 1-17
HP 85043A system cabinet, 1-12
HP 8511A/B frequency converter, 1-18, 2-2
HP 8511B, selecting for use, 11-2, 17-10
HP 85309A LO/IF unit problems, 20-14
HP 8530A and HP 8510C, comparison of,
1-9
HP 8530A description, 1-2
HP 8530A locks up, 20-12
HP 85310A distributed frequency converter,
1-18
HP 85310A frequency converter, 2-2
HP 85325A millimeter wave subsystem, 1-18
HP 85370A position encoder operation, 6-5
HP 9000 Series 300 workstations, use of LIF
disc format, 1-8
HP DeskJet 500C Printer, trouble when
attempting to print, 1-18, 16-10
HP DeskJet family printers, using, 16-10
HP-GL graphics, plotting, program example,
18-25
HP-IB address
Index-8
setting the HP-IB address of the HP 8530A,
11-2
setting the HP-IB address of the System
Bus (for use with Pass Through mode),
11-2
setting the System Bus address for a
frequency converter, 11-2
setting the System Bus address for an
external disc drive, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for an RF
switch, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for a plotter,
11-3
setting the System Bus address for a printer,
11-3
setting the System Bus address for a remote
switch, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for passthrough, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for source
#1, 11-2
setting the System Bus address for source
#2, 11-2
HP-IB addresses, 17-8
HP-IB address settings, 18-4
HP-IB cables, maximum length, 1-15
HP-IB Connector (HP-IB Bus), 3-14
HP-IB Extenders, 1-12
HP-IB extenders, troubleshooting, 20-10
HP-IB interface (system bus), selecting for
printer or plotter, 16-2
HP-IB interface, use with printers and
plotters, 16-2
HP-IB programming, 18-1
active function output, 18-18
caution/tell messages, reading and
outputting, 18-28
codes, 18-2
debugging, 18-16
delta marker modes, 18-20
disc storage, 18-21
display modes, 18-20
dynamic array allocation, 18-10
example programs, 18-17
fast CW modes, 18-32
fast IF multiplexing, 18-32
FORM 1 data conversion, 18-21
FORM 3 and FORM 4, 18-32
format of data output to the computer,
18-15
frequency list, 18-31
HP-GL graphics, 18-25
HP-IB triggered data acquisition, 18-30
key code output, 18-30
learn string, 18-31
listener-only commands, 18-33
list of executable examples, 18-35
marker data output, 18-18
mnemonics, 18-2
numeric entries and units terminators,
18-2
order of commands, 18-2
outputting the current active function
value, 18-15
outputting the current system state, 18-15
pass-through mode, 18-23
pass-thru to System Bus
instruments/peripherals, 18-23
plotting, 18-22
printing, 18-23
printing tabular data, 18-23
printing your own messages on the display,
18-22
reading marker values in dual channel
modes, 18-20
redene parameters, 18-28
status bytes, 18-29
syntax information, 18-17
table delay, 18-32
timing considerations, 18-3
trace data output and input, 18-21
transferring trace data to receiver memory,
18-13
universal commands, 18-33
user display graphics, 18-25
user graphics, 18-25
using =MARKER, 18-21
wait not required, 18-30
wait required, 18-30
HP-IB R, L, T, S, annunciators, 3-11
HP-IB trigger, 6-23, Glossary-5
HP-IB triggered data acquisition, program
example, 18-30
HP-IB triggering, 1-6, 6-23, Glossary-5
HP-IB USES FACTORY PRESET softkey, 17-9
HP-IB USES USR PRESET softkey, 17-9
HP PaintJet, and PaintJet XL printers, using,
16-11
HP PaintJet, and PaintJet XL printer switch
settings, 16-11
HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus printer switch
settings, 16-11
HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus, using, 16-11
humidity, operating and storage, 1-14
Hz, selecting, 10-2
I
IF calibration, 17-5
IF calibration (correction) controls, 17-5
IF CORRECT AUTO softkey, 17-5
IF correction, 17-5
IF CORRECTION softkey, 17-5
IF CORRECT MANUAL softkey, 17-5
IF/DISPLAY INTERCONNECT, rear panel
connector, 3-13
IF Gain, 17-18
IF Gain controls, automatic and manual,
17-19
IF GAIN softkey, 17-18
IF OVERLOAD, 6-22
IF OVERLOAD, error message, 17-19
IF OVERLOAD error message, 20-7
IF signal level problems, 20-3
IF signal problems, 20-3
imaginary and real data, 2-3
imaginary display format, 8-2
IMAGINARY softkey, 8-2
impulse envelope, 13-3
impulse waveforms, dierent, 13-6
impulse waveforms, user-dened, 13-6
increment angle, setting, 6-4
INCREMENT ANGLE softkey, 6-4
initializing a hard disc, 15-9
initializing discs, 15-3
input, denition of, Glossary-4
input output features, description of, 1-8
input ratios, 1-6
installation, printer, 16-4
instrument factory preset conditions, 2-11,
14-1
instruments, compatible, 1-15
instruments do not respond to computer
control, 20-12
instruments do not respond to HP 8530A
control, 20-13
instrument settings, automatic recall of, 2-9
INSTRUMENT STATE block, 3-10, 11-1
INST STATE 1-8 softkey, 15-4
INST STATE ALL softkey, 15-4
intensity, CRT, 5-58
intensity, display background, 5-58
internal data ow, 2-6
internal data processing illustration, 2-3
internal trigger, 6-23
internal trigger (free run), Glossary-5,
Glossary-6
internal triggering (free run), Glossary-5,
Glossary-6
isolation calibration procedure, antenna,
5-14, 5-16
Index-9
K
key code output, program example, 18-30
kiloHertz, selecting, 10-2
k/m, 10-2
4k/m5 (kilo/milli) key, 3-8, 10-2
L
landscape printer mode, 16-16
landscape printing orientation, 16-15, 16-16
L annunciator (listener HP-IB mode), 3-11
laser printer conguration, 16-6
laser printers, using, 16-6
learn string (using), program example, 18-31
learn sweep, dened, 6-12
LEFT LOWER softkey, 16-26
LEFT UPPER softkey, 16-26
leveling power, 17-9
LIF and DOS disc formats, 15-3
LIF disc format, changing to, 15-3
LIF (logical interchange format), denition
of, Glossary-4
LIF (Logical Interchange Format) disc format,
1-8
limited instrument state memory, 2-9
linear magnitude display format, 8-1
linear on polar display format, 8-2
linear on polar (linear magnitude in polar
format), 3-7, 8-2
LINEAR on POLAR softkey, 8-2
line voltage fuse part number(for the bottom
box), 3-15
line voltage fuse, part number (for the top
box), 3-14
line voltage selector (for the bottom box),
3-15
line voltage selector (for the top box), 3-14
4LIN MAG5, 8-1
lin mag (linear magnitude in Cartesian
format), 3-7, 8-1
LIN on POLAR format, angle domain versus
frequency domain, 8-2
LIST ALL PARAMETERS softkey, 16-17
listener annunciator (L), 3-11
listing, programming examples, 18-35
LIST ONE PARAMETER softkey, 16-17
LIST PARAMETERS softkey, 16-19
list skip factor, 16-18
LIST SKIP FACTOR softkey, 16-18
lists, markers display of, 5-76
LIST TRACE VALUES softkey, 16-17
loading calibration kit data from disc, 5-25
loading disc les, 15-6
loading instrument data from disc, 15-1
loading the receiver operating system from
disc, 17-18
Index-10
4LOCAL5 key, 3-10, 11-2
LOCAL menu, 17-8
lock speed, 17-4
LOCK SPEED FAST softkey, 17-4
LOCK SPEED NORMAL softkey, 17-4
lock type, 17-3
LOCK TYPE EXTERNAL softkey, 17-3
LOCK TYPE INTERNAL softkey, 17-3
LOCK TYPE NONE softkey, 17-3
logical interchange format (LIF), denition
of, Glossary-4
4LOG MAG5, 8-1
log mag (logarithmic magnitude in Cartesian
format), 3-7, 8-1
log magnitude display format, 8-1
L.O. PHASELOCK OUT, rear panel BNC,
3-14
LO POWER OUT OF RANGE light is ON (HP
85309A), 20-4
LO power out of range troubleshooting,
20-14
LO signal level problems, 20-4
LO source conguration, 17-11
LO sources, compatible, 1-15
M
machine dump, denition of, Glossary-4
MACHINE DUMP softkey, 15-5
magnitude oset, 9-4
magnitude slope, 9-4
maintenance of the receiver system, 19-3
maintenance, periodic, 19-3
making faster Frequency Domain
measurements, 1-16, 1-17
M annotation, 3-3
manual IF calibration (correction), 17-5
marker data output, program example, 18-18
marker functions, 5-73{82
4=MARKER5 key, 3-9, 6-10, 10-2
4MARKER5 key, 3-9
marker list plots, 16-22
marker list prints, 16-4
marker lists, 5-76
markers
continuous, 5-75
delta markers, 5-78, 5-81
description, 1-8
discrete, 5-75
making a marker the active marker, 5-74
marker to maximum, 5-79
marker to minimum, 5-79
marker to target, 5-79
moving the marker continuously or by
discrete measurement points, 5-75
search modes, 5-79
search right and left, 5-80
setting the sweep with markers, 6-10
units, 5-75
using, 5-73
markers, nding beamwidth, 5-83
markers, removing all markers from the
display, 5-74
marker target search, 5-83
masking, 13-11
MATH OPERATIONS softkey, 5-70
MATH (/) softkey, 5-70
math, trace, 1-7, 5-70
MAXIMUM windowing mode, 13-6
measurement display custom titles, 3-3
measurement, exhaustive denition of,
Glossary-4
measurement features, 1-4
measurement inputs
a1, a2, b1, and b2, 1-6
4PARAM 15 4PARAM 25 4PARAM 35 and 4PARAM 45,
1-6
ratios of, 1-6
MEASUREMENT 4RESTART5, 9-5
4MEASUREMENT RESTART5 key, 3-11
measurement setup, typical block diagram
of, 1-2
measurements, speeding them up, 1-16, 1-17
MegaHertz, selecting, 10-2
MEMORY 1-8 softkey, 15-4
MEMORY ALL softkey, 15-4
memory and data traces, displaying
simultaneously, 5-68
memory data, 2-7
memory data array, 18-7
memory data arrays, 2-7
memory data, denition of, Glossary-6
memory of instrument settings, automatic,
2-9
memory registers, default registers for each
parameter on each channel, 5-67
MEMORY softkey, 5-67
memory, trace, 1-7, 5-67
memory trace, displaying, 5-67
MENUS block, 3-9
menus, plotting of, 16-22
menus, printing of, 16-4
message areas, 3-2
meters, selecting, 10-2
meters, selecting, 10-2
microprocessor
clock speed, 2-5
description, 2-5
type, 2-5
microseconds, entering time domain values
in, 13-1
seconds,
selecting, 10-2
Microwave Design System, 15-3
millimeters, selecting, 10-2
millimeter wave subsystem, HP x85325A,
1-18
milliseconds, entering time domain values
in, 13-1
milliseconds, selecting, 10-2
minimum gate span, calculating, 13-14
MINIMUM windowing mode, 13-6
MINUS (0) softkey, 5-70
M/, 10-2
4M/5 (Mega/micro) key, 3-8, 10-2
mnemonics, HP-IB programming, 18-2
modify cal sets, 5-42
modify CRT colors, 5-60
monitor, external, installing, 5-62
monitors, compatible, 5-61
monitors, external (critical specications),
1-19
monitors, external (supported), 1-19
monitors, external video, 5-61
R compatible computers, use of DOS
MS-DOS
disc format, 1-8
multipath antenna measurements in the Time
Domain, 13-21
multiple source menu, 17-11
multiple source mode, 17-11
multiple sources, controlling, 17-11
MULTIPLIER DENOM. softkey, 17-13
MULTIPLIER NUMER. softkey, 17-13
MULTIPLY (*) softkey, 5-70
MULT. SRC ON / SAVE softkey, 17-13
N
nanometers, selecting, 10-2
nanoseconds, entering time domain values
in, 13-1
nanoseconds, selecting, 10-2
negative numbers, entering, 3-8
net weight, 1-14
network analysis, option 011, 1-8
network analyzer 1-port calibration, 5-24
network analyzer calibration
description, 5-4
new features of HP 8530A, compared to HP
8510C, 1-9
NO IF FOUND, 6-22
NO IF FOUND, error message, 20-8
noise reduction techniques, 9-5
non-HP printers, using, 16-14
non-volatile memory, 5-69
normalization, 9-4
NORMALIZE ACT. TRACE softkey, 9-4
Index-11
NORMALIZE ALL TO ACT.TRACE softkey,
9-4
NORMALIZE MENU softkey, 9-4
normalizing data to the peak of the main
lobe, 9-4
normal step mode, 17-3
NORMAL windowing mode, 13-6
number of groups, purpose of, 6-21
NUMBER of GROUPS softkey, 6-20
number of points and frequency resolution,
6-11
number of points, selecting, 6-10
NUMBER of POINTS softkey, 6-10
numbers, entering, 3-8, 10-2
numerator, measurement ratio, 7-4
NUMERATOR softkey, 7-4
numeric values, entering, 3-8, 10-2
O
O annotation, 3-3
oset
clear (position encoder function), 6-7
save (position encoder function), 6-7
OFFSET FREQUENCY softkey, 17-13
OPERATING PARAMETERS softkey, 16-19
operating precautions, 1-1
operating system, loading from disc, 17-18
operating system, storing to disc, 17-18
operator's Check, 19-1
OPTION #005 NOT INSTALLED, error
message, 20-8
option 011, HP 8510C network analyzer
operation, 1-8
options, 1-10
908, rack mount kit (for instruments
without handles, 1-10
913, rack mount kit (for instruments with
handles), 1-10
option 005, positioner encoder operation,
1-10
option 010, time domain operation, 1-10
option 011, add HP 8510C rmware
operating system, 1-10
W31, extended warranty for HP 8530A,
1-10
overheating, 19-3
OVERSPEED ERROR - BACKUP, error
message, 20-8
P
PaintJet, and PaintJet XL printers, using,
16-11
PaintJet, and PaintJet XL printer switch
settings, 16-11
paint, touch up, 1-13
Index-12
PARAM 15, 1-6
PARAM 1 key, 7-2
4PARAM 25, 1-6
PARAM 2 key, 7-2
4PARAM 35, 1-6
PARAM 3 key, 7-2
4PARAM 45, 1-6
PARAM 4 key, 7-2
parameter control block (on front panel),
3-7
parameter conversion, 7-4
parameter, convert parameter, 2-7
parameter, denition of, Glossary-6
parameter denitions, factory preset, 7-3
parameter functions, 7-1
parameter, redening, 7-3
parameters, 1-6
parameters, redining, program example,
18-28
parameters, service, 7-2
pass-through mode, program example, 18-23
PASS THROUGH softkey, 11-3
Peek/Poke, 17-22
pen color, selecting, 16-23
periodic maintenance, 19-3
4PHASE5, 8-1
phase display format, 8-1
phase (in Cartesian format), 3-7, 8-1
phaselock controls, 17-3
phase lock input diagram, 2-5
PHASE LOCK LOST, 6-22
PHASE-LOCK LOST, error message, 20-9
phase lock, phase locking on one reference
input, measuring the reference signal
on the other, 7-4
phase lock, selecting the phase lock input,
7-4
PHASE LOCK softkey, 7-4
phase oset, 9-4
PHASE OFFSET softkey, 9-4
picoseconds, entering time domain values
in, 13-1
pin out diagram, EXTERNAL DISPLAY, 3-13
pin out diagram, RS-232 PORT #1 and #2,
3-12
PLOT ALL FOUR PARAMETERS softkey,
16-25
PLOT ALL softkey, 16-25
plot buer, 3-12, 16-2
PLOT DATA softkey, 16-25
PLOT GRATICULE softkey, 16-25
PLOT MARKERS(S) softkey, 16-25
PLOT MEMORY softkey, 16-25
plot menus, 16-22
PLOT PARAMETERS softkey, 16-19
4
PLOTTER
HP-IB softkey, 11-3
RS-232 PORT #1 softkey, 11-3
RS-232 PORT #2 softkey, 11-3
plotter interfaces, supported, 16-2
plotter pen color, selecting, 16-23
plotters, supported, 1-19
plotters, using the HP 7550B or 7550 Plus
properly, 16-23
PLOT TEXT softkey, 16-25
plotting, 16-25
plotting a 1/4 size snapshot in a selected
page quadrant, 16-26
plotting four snapshots per page, 16-26
plotting individual display components, 16-25
plotting options, 16-23
plotting, program example, 18-22
plotting the entire display, 16-25
plotting user graphics, program example,
18-25
PLOT TITLE softkey, 16-25
PLOT TO PLOTTER softkey, 16-25
PLOT TYPE COLOR softkey, 16-23
PLOT TYPE MONOCHROME softkey, 16-23
plus/minus 180 degree display mode, selecting,
6-6
PLUS (+) softkey, 5-70
Poke, 17-22
polar display format, angle domain versus
frequency domain, 8-2
4POLAR MAG5, 8-1
POLAR MAG format, angle domain versus
frequency domain, 8-2
polar mag (logarithmic magnitude in polar
format), 3-7, 8-1
polar magnitude display format (linear), 8-1
portrait printer mode, 16-16
portrait printing orientation, 16-15, 16-16
position encoder
operation, 6-5
position encoder angle display, moving, 6-6
position encoder angle display, turning OFF,
6-6
position encoder angle display, turning ON,
6-6
power, compensating for power loss at high
frequencies with power slope, 6-22
power consumption, 1-14
power leveling, 17-9
power, setting, 6-21
POWER SLOPE softkey, 6-22
power slope, using, 6-22
POWER SOURCE 1 softkey, 6-22
precautions when changing addresses of
System Bus Instruments, 17-8
precautions when changing RF or LO sources
on the System Bus, 17-8
PRES command, 17-9
presetting the HP 8530A, 2-11, 14-1
preset, user, 1-7
principles of operation, 2-2
print buer, 3-12, 16-2
PRINTER
HP-IB softkey, 11-3
RS-232 PORT #1 softkey, 11-3
RS-232 PORT #2 softkey, 11-3
printer conguration
HP DeskJet, DeskJet Plus, or DeskJet 500
printers, 16-10
HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL printers,
16-11
HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus printers,
16-11
HP ThinkJet printer, 16-13
laser printer, 16-6
laser printers, 16-6
non-HP printers, 16-14
printer installation, 16-4
printer interfaces, supported, 16-2
PRINTER RESOLUTION softkey, 16-6, 16-10,
16-12, 16-13
printers, supported, 1-18
printing
landscape, 16-15, 16-16
portrait, 16-15, 16-16
printing in color, 16-12
printing instrument settings and system
conguration, 16-19
printing one snapshot per page, 16-16
printing tabular measurement data, 16-17
printing two snapshots per page, 16-16
PRINT LANDSCAPE softkey, 16-15, 16-16
PRINT PORTRAIT softkey, 16-15, 16-16
print resolution setting
for HP DeskJet family printers, 16-10
for HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL Printers,
16-12
for HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus Printers,
16-12
for HP ThinkJet printer, 16-13
for laser printers, 16-6
4PRIOR MENU5 key, 3-9, 10-2
product description, 1-2
programing example listing, 18-35
programming codes, 18-2
programming examples
active function output, 18-18
caution/tell messages, reading and
outputting, 18-28
delta marker modes, 18-20
Index-13
disc storage, 18-21
display modes, 18-20
fast CW modes, 18-32
fast IF multiplexing, 18-32
FORM 1 data conversion, 18-21
FORM 3 and FORM 4, 18-32
frequency list, 18-31
HP-GL graphics, 18-25
HP-IB triggered data acquisition, 18-30
key code output, 18-30
marker data output, 18-18
pass-through mode, 18-23
plotting, 18-22
printing tabular data, 18-23
redene parameters, 18-28
status bytes, 18-29
syntax information, 18-17
table delay, 18-32
trace data output and input, 18-21
user graphics, 18-25
using =MARKER, 18-21
using the learn string, 18-31
wait not required, 18-30
wait required, 18-30
programming mnemonics, 18-2
programming over HP-IB, 18-1
PULSE OUT (OPT 008), rear panel BNC, 3-15
Q
query system state, 18-15
quick step mode, 17-4
QuietJet and QuietJet Plus printer switch
settings, 16-11
QuietJet and QuietJet Plus, using, 16-11
R
rack mount kits, 1-10
radar cross section calibration, 5-18
Radar Cross Section Measurements, in the
time domain, 13-3
radius, target, RCS, 5-21
RAMP softkey, 6-12
ramp sweep mode, 6-12
Ramp Sweep mode, denition of, Glossary-6
ramp sweep mode, what comprises a complete
measurement, Glossary-4
range clutter, 13-9
range gating, 13-12
range gating during calibration, 13-15
range gating example, 13-12
R annunciator (remote HP-IB mode), 3-11
ratio, denition of, Glossary-7
raw data, 2-6, 18-6
raw data array, 18-6
raw data arrays, 2-6
Index-14
raw data, denition of, Glossary-7
raw data stages, 2-6
raw measurement data arrays, 18-5
RCS background calibration, 5-23
RCS background calibration, updating, 5-23
RCS calibration, 5-18
description, 5-4
RCS calibration, eect on Time Domain
responses, 13-9
RCS calibration, for each RCS mount, 5-23
RCS calibration overview, 5-19
RCS calibration, using gating with, 13-15
RCS down-range resolution, 13-5
RCS gating, 13-12
RCS gating during calibration, 13-15
RCS gating example, 13-12
RCS measurements, converting time to
distance, 13-5
RCS measurement setup, typical, 13-3
RCS targets, dening dimensions of, 5-21
RCS target, selecting, 5-21
RCS target types of, 5-21
RCS waveforms, 13-6
RCS waveforms, user-dened, 13-6
real and imaginary data, 2-3
real display format, 8-2
REAL softkey, 8-2
real-time annotations and plots, 16-22
real-time annotations and printouts, 16-4
RECALL COLORS softkey, 5-61
recalling an instrument state, 11-4, 14-1
recalling instrument measurement settings,
11-4, 14-1
4RECALL5 key, 3-10, 11-4, 14-1
receiver description, 1-2
receiver locks up, 20-12
RECEIVER READY rear panel BNC, 3-14
record increment pulse, 3-7
redene parameter, 7-3
REDEFINE PARAMETER softkey, 7-4
redene parameters, program example, 18-28
reference line position, changing, 9-2
reference value, changing, 9-2
4REF POSN5, 9-2
4REF VALUE5, 9-2
reloading the receiver operating system from
disc, 17-18
remote annunciator (R), 3-11
REMOTE SWITCH softkey, 11-3
remote switch state recall, 17-9
RESET IF CORRECTION softkey, 17-5
resolution, down-range, 13-5
resolution setting
for HP DeskJet family printers, 16-10
for HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL Printers,
16-12
for HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus Printers,
16-12
for HP ThinkJet printer, 16-13
for laser printers, 16-6
response and isolation calibration (network
analyzer), 5-29
response calibration, for RCS measurements,
5-18
response calibration (network analyzer),
5-27
response functions, 9-1
response menu, 9-3
RESPONSE 4MENU5, 9-3
4RESTART5 key, 3-11
RESTORE DISPLAY softkey, 16-19
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey, 5-37
resuming a calibration sequence after leaving
it, 5-37
reverberations in an RCS target, 13-11
RF burst, 13-3
RFI, allowable, 1-14
RF sources, compatible, 1-17
RF source, setting power, 6-21
RF SWITCH softkey, 11-3
RIGHT LOWER softkey, 16-26
RIGHT UPPER softkey, 16-26
rotary joints, problems with, 20-5
RS-232 #1 and RS-232 #2, rear panel
connectors, 3-12
RS-232 interface, use with printers and
plotters, 16-2
RS-232 PORT #1 and #2 pin out diagram,
3-12
RS-232 PORT #1 softkey, 16-4, 16-22
RS-232 PORT #2 softkey, 16-4, 16-22
RS-232 Port, selecting port #1 for a plotter,
11-3
RS-232 Port, selecting port #1 for a printer,
11-3
RS-232 Port, selecting port #2 for a plotter,
11-3
RS-232 Port, selecting port #2 for a printer,
11-3
S
safety precautions, 1-1
S annotation, 3-3
S annunciator (SRQ request), 3-11
save and recall feature, added benet over
the automatic settings memory (limited
instrument state), 2-10
save and recall registers
description, 1-7
SAVE COLORS softkey, 5-61
4SAVE5 key, 3-10, 11-4, 14-1
SAVE OFFSET softkey (position encoder
function), 6-7
saving an instrument state, 11-4, 14-1
saving an instrument state as the user preset
state, 11-4, 14-1
Saving instrument data to disc, 15-1
saving instrument measurement settings,
11-4, 14-1
saving trace data to display memory, 5-67
4SCALE5, 9-2
scaling and display, in the internal data ow,
2-8
scattering, target, 13-11
screen annotations, adding to the screen,
16-3
screen background intensity, 5-58
screen intensity, 5-58
search modes, markers, 5-79
seconds, entering time domain values in,
13-1
seconds, selecting, 10-2
security features, 17-7
SEGMENT DONE softkey, 6-14
SEGMENT START softkey, 6-14
SEGMENT STEP SIZE softkey, 6-14
SEGMENT STOP softkey, 6-14
SELECT DEFAULTSgg (in the Display menu),
5-70
SELECT DEFAULTSgg (in the Display Menu),
5-69
selecting the type of frequency converter in
use, 11-2, 17-10
select quadrant, 16-23
SELECT QUADRANT softkey, 16-26
selftest, 19-1, 19-2
serial interface, 16-2
serial interface, selecting for printer or
plotter, 16-2
serial ports (RS-232), 3-12
SERVICE 1 a1 softkey, 7-2
SERVICE 2 b2 softkey, 7-2
SERVICE 3 a2 softkey, 7-2
SERVICE 4 b1 softkey, 7-2
service functions, 17-17
SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey, 17-17
service parameters, 7-2
service test menu, 17-17
SET DAY softkey, 17-6
SET MONTH softkey, 17-6
SET PEN NUMBERS softkey, 16-23, 16-23
settings, automatic recall of, 2-9
setting the time and date, 17-6
SET YEAR softkey, 17-6
Index-15
shadowing, target, 13-11
shipping weight, 1-14
sign of a number, changing, 3-8, 10-2
single and dual synchro (position encoder)
functions, 6-6
single angle mode, what comprises a complete
measurement, Glossary-5
SINGLE ANGLE softkey, 6-4
SINGLE PARAMETER softkey, 5-58, 12-1
single parameter, viewing, 5-58, 12-1
Single Point mode, denition of, Glossary-7
single point mode, what comprises a complete
measurement, Glossary-5
SINGLE POINT softkey, 6-12
single point sweep mode, 6-12
SINGLE SEGMENT softkey, 6-17
SINGLEgg single sweep softkey in Stimulus
More menu, 6-20
size and weight information, 1-14
skip factor, 16-18
SLOPE SRC1 ON softkey, 6-22
smoothing, 9-5, 9-6
smoothing, in the internal data ow, 2-8
SMOOTHING softkey, 9-5
snapshot, denition of, Glossary-7
snapshot, plotting, 16-25
snapshot, printing, 16-16
softkey menu general description, 3-4
softkey menus, general description and
explanation of special markings, 3-4
SOFTWARE REVISION softkey, 17-22
SOURCE 1 EXT. LEVEL softkey, 17-9
SOURCE 1 FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED, 20-9
SOURCE 1 INTERNAL softkey, 17-9
SOURCE 1 MM MODULE softkey, 17-9
SOURCE #1 softkey, 11-2
SOURCE 2 FAILURE - RF UNLOCKED, 20-9
SOURCE #2 softkey, 11-2
source, setting power, 6-21
sources that provide fastest Frequency
Domain measurement speeds, 1-16,
1-17
4SPAN5, 6-3, 6-9
S-parameter measurements, 1-8
special display annotations, 3-3
specications, 1-14
speed comparison, step versus ramp mode
in HP 8511-based systems, 6-13
speed of microprocessor, 2-5
SRQ, 18-15
SRQ annunciator (S), 3-11
standard gain antenna denition le, example,
5-50
standard gain antennas
Index-16
antenna denitions supplied in HP 8530A,
5-54
creating a denition le, 5-46
creating multiple denitions in one cal
denition le., 5-53
loading a cal denition le, 5-52
saving a cal denition le, 5-52
4START5, 6-3, 6-9
state, denition of, Glossary-4
static electricity (electrostatic discharge),
1-1
status bytes, program example, 18-29
STEP softkey, 6-12
step sweep mode, 6-12
Step Sweep mode, denition of, Glossary-7
step sweep mode, what comprises a complete
measurement, Glossary-5
step type, 17-3
STEP TYPE NORMAL softkey, 17-3
STEP TYPE QUICK softkey, 17-3
stimulus
coupling settings between channel 1 and
2, 6-21
uncoupling settings between channel 1
and 2, 6-21
stimulus control block (on front panel), 3-7
stimulus, denition of, Glossary-7
stimulus functions, 6-2{22
stimulus functions, coupled and uncoupled,
2-8
stimulus functions, coupling and uncoupling,
3-6
stimulus power, setting, 6-21
stimulus values area, 3-2
4STOP5, 6-3, 6-9
STOP SWEEP BNC, recommendation to
connect a BNC short to 8340/41, 1-17
STOP SWP, rear panel BNC, 3-15
storing disc les, 15-4
storing the receiver operating system to disc,
17-18
storing to disc
cal kit denitions, 15-4
cal sets (calibration data), 15-4
hardware state (conguration settings),
15-4
instrument state registers (measurement
settings), 15-4
machine dump (all registers and states),
15-4
measurement data (raw, corrected or
formatted), 15-4
memory registers, 15-4
storing trace data to display memory, 5-67
supplied equipment, 1-11
supported external displays, 1-19
supported frequency converters, 1-18
supported instruments, 1-15
supported LO sources, 1-15
supported plotters, 1-19
supported printers, 1-18
supported RF sources, 1-17
SVGA monitors, (not supported by HP 8530A),
1-19
sweep frequency, 6-9
SWEEP IN 0-10V, rear panel BNC, 3-14
sweep modes
frequency list, 6-12
ramp, 6-12
single point, 6-12
step, 6-12
sweep modes (frequency domain), frequency
list mode, 6-14
sweep modes (frequency domain), ramp
sweep mode, 6-12
sweep modes (frequency domain), step sweep
mode, 6-12
SWEEP SYNC ERROR, error message, 20-9
sweep time
changing, 6-18
determining optimum, 6-18
sweep time, default settings with dierent
number of points, 6-18
sweep time, measurement distortion caused
by, 6-18
SWEEP TIME softkey, 6-18
swept angle mode, what comprises a complete
measurement, Glossary-5
SWEPT ANGLE softkey, 6-4
switch settings
HP PaintJet and PaintJet XL, 16-11
HP QuietJet and QuietJet Plus, 16-11
HP ThinkJet Printer, 16-13
SWR display format, 8-2
SWR softkey, 8-2
symbols and annotations (enhancement
labels), 3-3
synchro
encoder operation, 6-5
SYNCHRO
SINGLE mode (position encoder function),
6-6
SINGLE softkey (position encoder function),
6-6
synchronization with external monitors, 5-62
syntax information, program example, 18-17
SYS/OPER PARAMETERS softkey, 16-19
system bus, 2-2
System Bus address
setting the HP-IB address of the System
Bus (for use with Pass Through mode),
11-2
setting the System Bus address for a
frequency converter, 11-2
setting the System Bus address for an
external disc drive, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for an RF
switch, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for a plotter,
11-3
setting the System Bus address for a printer,
11-3
setting the System Bus address for a remote
switch, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for passthrough, 11-3
setting the System Bus address for source
#1, 11-2
setting the System Bus address for source
#2, 11-2
SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR, error
message, 20-9
System Bus cables, maximum length, 1-15
SYSTEM BUS `LOCAL' softkey, 17-18
SYSTEM BUS `REMOTE' softkey, 17-18
system bus, selecting for printer or plotter,
16-2
SYSTEM BUS softkey, 11-2
system cabinet, 1-12
system functions, 17-2
SYSTEM INTERCONNECT (System Bus
connector), rear panel, 3-13
4SYSTEM5 key, 17-2
system menu, 17-2
system messages, 3-3
SYSTEM PARAMETERS softkey, 16-19
system state query, 18-15
system status information, getting over HPIB, 18-15
T
table delay data array, 18-7
table delay, program example, 18-32
TABLE DELAY softkey, 9-8
tabular data, printing, program example,
18-23
talker annunciator (T), 3-11
T annunciator (talker HP-IB mode), 3-11
target height, RCS, 5-21
target masking, 13-11
target position shift (in time), 13-10
target radius, RCS, 5-21
target, RCS, dening dimensions of, 5-21
target, RCS, selecting, 5-21
Index-17
target, RCS, types of, 5-21
target reverberations, RCS, 13-11
target scattering, 13-11
target search with markers, 5-83
target shadowing, 13-11
target width, RCS, 5-21
technical description of HP 8530A, 2-2
temperature, operating and storage, 1-14
terminators, units, 3-8, 10-1
terminator (units) keys and what they
represent in dierent modes, 3-8, 10-2
TEST button (recessed), 3-11
test menu, 17-17
TEST MENU softkey, 17-17
TEST, recessed button, 19-1, 19-2
TEST SET INTERCONNECT, rear panel, 3-14
TEST SET IS TOO HOT!, 20-11
test set too hot message, 19-3
theory (principles) of operation, 2-2
ThinkJet printer conguration, 16-13
ThinkJet printer switch settings, 16-13
ThinkJet printer, using, 16-13
time/date, setting, 17-6
time domain, 1-5, 5-56
Time Domain
basic principles of operation, 13-1
time domain gating, 13-12
time domain gating during calibration, 13-15
time domain gating example, 13-12
time domain general theory, 13-2
time domain, illustration of, 1-5, 5-56
Time Domain Radar Cross Section
Measurements, 13-3
Time Domain RCS response, interpreting,
13-4
time domain stimulus values, entering, 13-1
time domain transform, 13-2
Time Domain transmission measurements,
13-21
time to distance conversion in time domain
RCS measurements, 13-5
title
creating, 17-6
deleting, 17-6
title area, denition of, 3-3
touch up paint, 1-13
trace data output and input, program
example, 18-21
trace math and trace memory, 1-7
trace math, changing default math operation,
5-70
trace math, comparing Channel 1 data with
Channel 2 data, 5-71
trace math, default operation (vector
division), 5-70
Index-18
trace math operations, 5-70
trace memory and trace math, 1-7
trace memory operation, 5-67
trace, storing to display memory, 5-67
transfer formats for data
Form 1, 2-6
transmission measurements, in Time Domain,
13-21
TRG SRC EXTERNAL softkey, 6-23
TRG SRC FREE RUN softkey, 6-23
TRG SRC HPIB softkey, 6-23
trigger, external, 6-23, Glossary-5
trigger, HP-IB, Glossary-5
triggering
description, 1-6
external, 1-6
free run, 1-6
HP-IB, 1-6
triggering, advanced features, 6-24
triggering, external, 6-23, Glossary-5
triggering, free run, 6-23
triggering, HP-IB, 6-23, Glossary-5
triggering modes, 6-23
triggering, waiting for a trigger before
changing stimulus value, 6-24
triggering, waiting for a trigger before
measuring a specic parameter, 6-24
TRIGGER IN, rear panel BNC, 3-15
trigger, internal, 6-23
trigger modes, 6-23
TRIGGER MODE softkey, 6-23
TRIGGER PARAM 1 softkey, 6-24
TRIGGER PARAM 2 softkey, 6-24
TRIGGER PARAM 3 softkey, 6-24
TRIGGER PARAM 4 softkey, 6-24
TRIGGER STIMULUS softkey, 6-24
TRIG SRC EXTERNAL , 6-23
TRIG SRC HPIB , 6-23
TRIG SRC INTERNAL , 6-23
trim sweep, adjusting, 5-45
two channels, viewing, 5-58, 12-1
typical measurement setup, 1-2
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
U
UNABLE TO RAMP THIS DUAL SOURCE
SETUP, error message, 20-11
uncoupled and coupled stimulus functions,
2-8, 3-6
uncoupling stimulus settings between
channels, 6-21
un-deleting disc les, 15-8
unit number, for external disc drive, 15-9
units (terminator) keys and what they
represent in dierent modes, 3-8, 10-2
units terminators, 3-8, 10-1
USER DISPLAY softkey, 15-5
user graphics, plotting, program example,
18-25
user preset, dening, 11-4, 14-1
user preset description, 1-7
4USER PRESET5 key, 3-10, 11-4, 14-1
using a plotter, 16-22
using =MARKER, program example, 18-21
V
values, entering, 3-8, 10-2
VA rating, 1-14
VELOCITY FACTOR softkey, 9-8
verifying your calibration, 5-39
VGA monitors, (not supported by HP 8530A),
1-19
video monitors, 5-61
video monitors, compatible, 5-61
viewing a 40 dB pattern, 9-5
viewing a 60 dB pattern, 9-5
viewing a single parameter, 5-58, 12-1
viewing data from disc, 12-2
viewing four parameters, 5-58, 12-1
viewing two channels, 5-58, 12-1
volatile memory, 5-69
volume number, for external disc drive, 15-9
VTO FAILURE, 6-22
VTO FAILURE, error message, 20-11
W
wait not required, program example, 18-30
wait required, program example, 18-30
warranty, vii
WAVEGUIDE DELAY softkey, 9-8
weight and size information, 1-14
weight, net, 1-14
weight, shipping, 1-14
width, target, RCS, 5-21
windowing, description of maximum window
mode, 13-6
windowing, description of minimum window
mode, 13-6
windowing, description of normal window
mode, 13-6
windowing mode, recommended, 13-6
windowing, simplied description, 13-6
windowing, user-dened, 13-6
X
x1, 10-2
4x15 (basic units
dB, dBm, degrees, seconds, Hz key, 10-2
4x15 (basic units terminator key), 3-8
Z
zoom, frequency subset, 5-42
Index-19